INSTRUMENTATION
ENGINEERING
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
LIST OF NEW COURSES
S.No. Course
Code
Name of the Course L:T:P Credits
1. 19EI3001 Embedded System for Smart Appliances and Energy
Management
3:0:0 3
2. 19EI3002 Embedded Systems and IoT in Health Care 3:0:0 3
3. 19EI3003 Metaheuristic Techniques for Optimization 3:0:0 3
Course Objectives:
1. To study the fundamentals of smart energy management system
2. To know the power requirements for home appliances
3. To study the basics of energy auditing
Course Outcomes:
The Student will be able to
1. Understand the fundamental concepts of Demand –Response management
2. Outline the concepts of Intelligent small scale decentralized energy system
3. Summarize the concept of Smart Energy management systems
4. Understand the power supply consideration for home appliances
5. Develop program for embedded based smart energy meter.
6. Categorize various energy auditing services
Module 1: Demand –Response management for dependable power grids: ( 8 hrs)
Energy market considerations- principles, challenge, new roles for customers, consumer classification,
demand response management activities, grid economy versus grid stability, functional assets of demand
response systems,
Module 2: Intelligent small scale decentralized energy system: ( 8 hrs)
Decentralized energy system -working, strength in using a decentralized system, challenges to using a
decentralized energy system, implementing strategies.
Module 3: Smart Energy management systems: ( 8 hrs)
home automation and energy management, environmental emissions reduction, smart home energy
management systems – goal, challenges and possible solutions, models for Energy management system
scheduling, different approaches related to appliance scheduling
Module 4: Power supplies for low power smart appliances: ( 8 hrs)
Power supply consideration for home appliances, safety and reliability, direct current power feeding
technology and its interfaces.
Module 5: Energy measurement techniques for smart metering: ( 8 hrs)
Smart grid and smart energy infrastructure- power generating subsection, transmission and distribution
utilities, customer section utilities. Smart measurement and metering- Embedded based smart metering and
smart measurement, smart distribution and utilization systems.
Module 6:Energy Auditing: ( 8 hrs)
Energy Auditing Services, Basic Components of an Energy Audit, Specialized Audit Tools, Industrial Audits,
Commercial Audits, Residential Audits, Indoor Air Quality
Reference Books::
1. Christoph, Grimm, Peter Neumann, Stefan Mahlknecht, Embedded System for Smart Appliances
and Energy Management, springer 2013
2. Wayne C. Turner, Steve Doty, Energy Management Handbook, CRC press 2007
3. Barney L. Cape hart, Wayne C. Turner, William J. Kennedy, Guide to Energy Management, By
CRC Press 2008.
4. AmlanChakrabarthy, Energy Engineering and Management, PHI. 2018.
5. Daniel Thalmann, N Subhashini, K. Mohanaprasad, “Ïntelligent Embedded Systems”, Springer,
2018.
19EI3001 EMBEDDED SYSTEM FOR SMART APPLIANCES
AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT
L T P C
3 0 0 3
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
Course Objectives: 1. To teach the internet concepts and design methodology
2. To teach fundamentals of embedded system
3. To teach importance of embedded and IOT in health care.
Course Outcomes::
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Acquire the knowledge & concepts of IOT.
2. Understand the basic concepts of IOT Protocols.
3. Applies the concepts of embedded system for health care applications.
4. Analyze the importance of digital health
5. Understand the ethical issues in health care
6. Develop an application based on IOT in health care
Module 1: Internet Concepts and Infrastructure: ( 8 hrs) Broad Band Transmission facilities –Open
Interconnection standards –Local Area Networks – Wide Area Networks –Network management – Network
Security – Cluster computers. Internet concepts - Capabilities and limitations of the internet -– Interfacing
Internet server applications to corporate databases HTML and XML Web page design through
programming and the use of active components.
Module 2: Design Methodology and Protocols: ( 8 hrs) Introduction-Characteristics-Physical design - Protocols – Logical design – Enabling technologies – IoT
Levels – Domain Specific IoTs – IoT vs M2M. IOT design methodology -IoT systems management – IoT
Design Methodology – Specifications Integration and Application Development.
Module 3: Embedded Systems in Health Care: ( 8 hrs) Generic Embedded Systems Structure-
Components of Embedded Systems- Sensors and Actuators-importance of Analog/Digital Conversion-
Embedded system based physiological monitoring system- Health care innovations using embedded system.
Module 4: Digital Health : ( 8 hrs) Evolution of digital health- challenges and opportunities of digital health- importance of digital health.
Module 5: Ethical Issues in Health Care: ( 8 hrs) ethical implications of digital health technologies- privacy, confidentiality and security of
personal health data-ethical framework and guidelines in digital health – principles of biomedical ethics.
Module 6: IoT in Health Care Applications: ( 8 hrs) IOT based health care- physiological parameter monitoring system- future challenges
in health care- health care echo system with IOT- IOT for personalized healthcare- wearable device
characteristics-analysis of power aware protocols and standards for critical e-health applications social
network analysis in health care, embedded health care system for senior resident using IOT
Reference Books:: 1. Eugene C. Nelson, Paul B. Batalden, Marjorie M. Godfrey, “Quality By Design: A Clinical
Microsystems Approach”, John Wiley& sons 2007
2. Samuel A. Fricker, Christoph Thuemmler, Anastasius Gavras, “Requirements Engineering for
Digital Health”, Springer 2015.
3. Klaus Pohl, Harald Hönninger, Reinhold Achatz, Manfred Broy, “Model-Based Engineering of
Embedded Systems: The SPES 2020 Methodology”, Springer 2012
4. Adrian Mc Ewen, Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiely, 2013.
5. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 4th Edition.
6. Stallings, William, “Data and computer communications”, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2007.
19EI3002 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS AND IoT IN HEALTH CARE L T P C
3 0 0 3
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
Course Objectives:
1. To provide an overview of the metaheuristic techniques and its structure.
2. Introduce the different classes of metaheuristic techniques
3. Provide an Overview of the optimization techniques with case studies.
Course Outcomes::
The Student will be able to
1. Discuss about the structure of metaheuristic algorithms and their efficiency.
2. Comment on the different types of Trajectory Based Metaheuristic Techniques.
3. Analyze the structure of population based metaheuristic techniques.
4. Describe the concepts of difference based algorithms.
5. Compare the multi-objective optimization algorithms.
6. Comment on the applications of metaheuristic techniques with the help of case studies.
Module 1: Introduction: ( 8 hrs)
Classes of Metaheuristics- Overall Structure of Metaheuristic Algorithms – Efficiency of Metaheuristics
Module 2: Trajectory Based Metaheuristics: ( 8 hrs)
Deterministic Local Search - Random Local search – Global Search: Simulated Annealing, Variable
Neighborhood search, Tabu Search.
Module 3: Population Based Metaheuristics: ( 8 hrs)
Structure – Genetic Algorithm – Particle Swarm Optimization – Ant Colony Optimization.
Module 4: Difference Based Algorithms: ( 8 hrs)
Differential Evolution - Bayesian Optimization Algorithms - Scalability of Metaheuristic Algorithms.
Module 5:Multi-objective Optimization: ( 8 hrs)
Multi-objective optimization problem, non-dominance, weighted sum methods, evolutionary multi-objective
optimization - Techniques for dynamic optimization.
Module 6: Applications and Case Studies: ( 8 hrs)
Neural networks design, data mining, scheduling.
Reference Books::
1. El-Ghazali Talbi, ‘Metaheuristics - From Design to Implementation’, Wiley, 2009.
2. Sean Luke, ‘Essentials of Metaheuristics’, Lulu, Second Edition, 2013
3. Gendreau, Michel and Jean-Yves Potvin (eds), ‘Handbook of Metaheuristics’. Springer, 2012
4. K. Deb: ‘Multiobjective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms’, Wiley, 2001
5. Bastien Chopard, Marco Tomassini , “An Introduction to Metaheuristics for Optimization”, Springer,
2018.
19EI3003 METAHEURISTIC TECHNIQUES FOR
OPTIMIZATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
INSTRUMENTATION
ENGINEERING
Instrumentation Engineering
LIST OF COURSES
S.No. Course
Code Name of the Course L:T:P Credits
1. 18EI2001 Basic Course in Embedded C 2:0:2 3
2. 18EI2002 Control Systems 3:0:0 3
3. 18EI2003 Control System Laboratory 0:0:2 1
4. 18EI2004 Electronic Measurement Laboratory 0:0:2 1
5. 18EI2005 Measurement and Instrumentation 2:0:2 3
6. 18EI2006 Microcontroller and PLC 3:0:0 3
7. 18EI2007 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0 3
8. 18EI2008 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 3:0:0 3
9. 18EI2009 Instrumentation and Control 0:0:3 1.5
10. 18EI2010 Instrumentation and Control Laboratory 3:0:0 3
11. 18EI2011 Virtual Instrumentation: Theory and Applications 3:0:0 3
12. 18EI2012 Virtual Instrumentation and Data Acquisition Laboratory 0:0:2 1
13. 18EI2013 Microcontroller and PLC Laboratory 0:0:2 1
14. 18EI2014 Modelling and Simulation 3:0:0 3
15. 18EI3001 Advanced Embedded Signal Processors 3:0:0 3
16. 18EI3002 Embedded system and software design 3:0:0 3
17. 18EI3003 Programmable Devices for Industrial Automation 3:0:0 3
18. 18EI3004 Advanced Embedded Processors 3:0:0 3
19. 18EI3005 Embedded Linux 3:0:0 3
20. 18EI3006 Advanced Embedded System Lab 0:0:4 2
21. 18EI3007 Embedded Based Virtual Instrumentation Lab 0:0:4 2
22. 18EI3008 IoT Lab 0:0:4 2
23. 18EI3009 Field programmable Lab 0:0:4 2
24. 18EI3010 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0 3
25. 18EI3011 Distributed Embedded Computing 3:0:0 3
26. 18EI3012 Wireless and Mobile Communication 3:0:0 3
27. 18EI3013 Smart system Design 3:0:0 3
28. 18EI3014 MEMS Technology for Embedded Design 3:0:0 3
29. 18EI3015 Embedded Product Development 3:0:0 3
30. 18EI3016 Embedded based Image Processing Techniques 3:0:0 3
31. 18EI3017 Optimization techniques for Embedded Systems 3:0:0 3
32. 18EI3018 Embedded Android Programming 3:0:0 3
33. 18EI3019 Python programming and Interfacing Techniques 3:0:0 3
34. 18EI3020 Advanced course in Embedded C 3:0:0 3
35. 18EI3021 Real Time Operating System 3:0:0 3
36. 18EI3022 Embedded networking and automation of Electrical
Systems
3:0:0 3
37. 18EI3023 Internet of things and protocols 3:0:0 3
38. 18EI3024 Robotics and Factory Automation 3:0:0 3
39. 18EI3025 Entrepreneurship development for embedded system 3:0:0 3
Course Objectives:
1. To develop skills in C and Embedded C programming
2. To understand the concepts of C program to develop an embedded application code
3. To know the important of library functions in C programming
Course Outcome:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Develop program in Embedded C using operators, data types and flow control loops
2. Elaborate the concepts of arrays and functions.
3. Explain the basic concepts of structures and unions in C programming
4. Develop programming using pointers.
5. Discuss file handling concepts in embedded C programming
18EI2001 BASIC COURSE IN EMBEDDED C L T P C
2 0 2 3
Instrumentation Engineering
6. Create simple examples with embedded C structure.
Module 1: Programming Fundamentals:
Program – Number system – Binary Information – Memory addressing – Machine language –
Assembly language – Instruction sets – Development of programming languages – Compilers – Cross
development
Module 2: C Program Structure :
Preprocessors directives – Identifier declaration – Statements – Basic data types – Variable data types
– Character data types – Integer data types – Data type modifiers – Real numbers
Module 3: Operators and Expressions :
Arithmetic operators – Comparison operators – Bit level operators – Control structures – Decision
structures – Looping structures – Existing loop.
Module 4: Functions
Executing a function – Function prototype declaration – Function definitions – Function parameters –
Complex data types – Pointers – Arrays – User defined data types – Enumerated data types –
Structures - Unions
Module 5: Storage and Data Type Modifiers
Storage class modifiers – Data type modifiers – C Preprocessors – Conditional source code –
Producing error messages – Defining target hardware – In-line assembly language
Module 6: Libraries
Portable device driver libraries – An example development scenario: SPI Master Slave library –
Asynchronous – SCI – RS232 – Electrical specifications – PIC Implementation: Anatomy of a PC
serial port – On-Chip sets – IRQ – Programming interrupts
Textbooks:
1. First steps with Embedded Systems | Byte craft limited | Waterloo | Ontario | Canada N2L
6H7.
2. Mark Siegesmund | Embedded C Programming: Techniques and Applications of C and PIC
MCUs | 2014.
Reference Books:
1. Warwick A.Smith | C Programming for Embedded Microcontrollers | elector publishers |
2. Kai Qian, David den Haring, Li cao | Embedded Software Development with C | Springer
publishers.
3. Richard H. Barnett, Sarah Cox, Larry O'Cull, “Embedded C Programming and the Atmel
AVR, ”, Cengage Learning, 2009
4. M.Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Learning, 2007
Course Objectives:
To impart knowledge on
1. Mathematical representations of systems.
2. Linear models mainly state variable model and Transfer function model from Non Linear
systems.
3. Linear systems in time domain and frequency domain.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Develop mathematical model of physical systems
2. Analyze the various linear models in time domain and frequency domain.
3. Outline the basics of state space representation of systems
4. Examine the stability of systems
5. Design appropriate controller for the given specifications.
6. Acquire knowledge on Optimal and Non-linear control.
Module 1: Introduction To Control Problem: (8 Hours)
Industrial Control examples. Mathematical models of physical systems. Control hardware and their
models. Transfer function models of linear time-invariant systems. Feedback Control: Open-Loop and
Closed-loop systems. Benefits of Feedback. Block diagram algebra.
Module 2: Time Response Analysis: (8 Hours) Standard test signals. Time response of first and
second order systems for standard test inputs. Application of initial and final value theorem. Design
specifications for second-order systems based on the time-response. Concept of Stability. Routh-
Hurwitz Criteria. Relative Stability analysis. Root-Locus technique. Construction of Root-loci.
18EI2002 CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 3: Frequency-Response Analysis: (8 Hours)
Relationship between time and frequency response, Polar plots, Bode plots. Nyquist stability criterion.
Relative stability using Nyquist criterion – gain and phase margin. Closed-loop frequency response.
Module 4: Introduction To Controller Design: (8 Hours)
Stability, steady-state accuracy, transient accuracy, disturbance rejection, insensitivity and robustness
of control systems. Root-loci method of feedback controller design. Design specifications in
frequency-domain. Frequency-domain methods of design. Application of Proportional, Integral and
Derivative Controllers, Lead and Lag compensation in designs. Analog and Digital implementation of
controllers.
Module 5:State Variable Analysis: (8 Hours)
Concepts of state variables. State space model. Diagonalization of State Matrix. Solution ofstate
equations. Eigen values and Stability Analysis. Concept of controllability and observability.
Module 6: Introduction To Optimal Control And Nonlinear Control: (5 Hours)
Performance Indices. Regulator problem, Tracking Problem. Nonlinear system–Basic concepts and
analysis.
Textbooks:
1. Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Education Pearson, 3rd
Impression, 2009.
2. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and HoupisSttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System
Analysis and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.
3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Ltd, 5th Edition,
2010.
Reference Books:
1. M. Gopal, “Control Systems: Principles and Design”, McGraw Hill Education, 1997.
2. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic Control System”, Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, 1991.
4. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International,2009
Course Objectives: 1. To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control
2. To inculcate the controller design concepts
3. To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modeling
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Determine the mathematical model of physical systems.
2. Design a suitable controller for a process.
3. Analyze the time domain and frequency domain characteristics of systems.
4. Apply the control system concepts to servomotor, synchro.
5. Design suitable controller parameters for a given system
6. Evaluate the merits and demerits of feedback control systems.
List of Experiments
1. Modeling and Analysis of First order System in Matlab
2. Modeling and Analysis of First Order System using NI Elvis
3. Simulation of P, PI, PD and PID Controllers in Matlab
4. Study of P and I Controllers
5. Closed Loop Control of First order system
6. On-Off Temperature Control System
7. Position Control System
8. Speed Control of DC Motor
9. Stepper Motor Control
10. LabVIEW based Control of Industrial Processes
18EI2003 CONTROL SYSTEM LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives:
To impart knowledge on
1. Construction of AC and DC Bridge Circuits
2. Signal Conditioning Circuits for measurement systems
3. The fundamental concepts of data acquisition systems
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Analyze and validate DC and AC bridges
2. Perform Signal acquisition in LabVIEW
3. Design Signal Conditioning Circuits for Sensor Data Acquisition
4. Determine the characteristics of ADC and DAC
5. Perform Regression analysis to study error compensation
6. Interpret the concepts of computerized data acquisition
List of Experiments
1. Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter
2. Measurement of Strain using Wheatstone Bridge
3. Measurement of Capacitance
4. Measurement of Temperature using LabVIEW
5. Basic Measurements using DSO.
6. Measurement of Signal parameter using LabVIEW
7. Speed Measurement of DC Motor using LabVIEW
8. Effect of ADC Resolution, Range and Sampling rate on signal acquisition
9. Angular position measurement
10. Error compensation study using Regression analysis in MATLAB
Course Objectives:
To impart knowledge on
1. Construction and application of DC and AC Bridges
2. Analyze the characteristics of measurement systems
3. Basics of data acquisition systems
Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Analyze the dynamic response and the calibration of few instruments.
2. Perform statistical data analysis.
3. Discuss about various measurement devices, their characteristics, their operation and their
limitations.
4. Describe the concept of current and voltage measurement
5. Apply knowledge of digital devices for measurement
6. Describe the fundamental of omputerized data acquisition.
Lectures/Demonstrations:
1. Concepts relating to Measurements: True value, Accuracy, Precision, Resolution, Drift,
Hysteresis, Dead-band, Sensitivity.
2. Errors in Measurements. Basic statistical analysis applied to measurements: Mean, Standard
Deviation, Six-sigma estimation
3. Sensors and Transducers for physical parameters: temperature, pressure, torque, flow. Speed
and Position Sensors.
4. Current and Voltage Measurements. Shunts, Potential Dividers. Instrument Transformers,
Hall Sensors. Measurements of R, L and C.
5. Digital Multi-meter, True RMS meters, Clamp-on meters, Meggers.
6. Digital Storage Oscilloscope.
Experiments
1. Calibration of measuring Instruments
2. Measurement of a batch of resistors and estimating statistical parameters.
3. Measurement of Inductance
18EI2004 ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENT LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
18EI2005 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENATION L T P C
2 0 2 3
Instrumentation Engineering
4. Measurement of Capacitance
5. Measurement of Strain
6. Basic Measurements using DSO.
7. Measurement of Signal parameter using LabVIEW
8. Speed Measurement of DC Motor using LabVIEW
9. Current Measurement using Shunt, CT, and Hall Sensor.
10. Measurement of process variables (Temperature and Pressure)
Course Objectives: To impart knowledge on
1. The architecture and functions of 8051 Microcontroller
2. Interfacing concepts using 8051 Microcontroller
3. Fundamentals of PLC and its applications
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. .Compare the different microcontrollers
2. Describe the architecture of 8051
3. Implement timer and counter applications
4. Perform Peripheral Interface with 8051
5. Apply PLC architecture knowledge for specific problems.
6. Develop PLC Ladder diagram for simple applications
Module 1: Fundamentals Of Microprocessor Architecture: (8 Hours) Comparison of 8-bit
microcontrollers, 16-bit and 32-bit microcontrollers. Definition of embedded system and its
characteristics, Role of microcontrollers in embedded Systems. Overview of the 8051 family.
Module 2: The 8051 Architecture: (8 Hours)
Internal Block Diagram, CPU, ALU, address, data and control bus, Working registers, SFRs, Clock
and RESET circuits, Stack and Stack Pointer, Program Counter, I/O ports, Memory Structures, Data
and Program Memory, Instruction Set and Programming
Module 3: Memory And I/O Interfacing: (8 Hours)
Memory and I/O expansion buses, control signals, memory wait states. Interfacing of peripheral
devices such as General Purpose I/O, ADC, DAC, timers, counters, memory devices.
Module 4: External Communication Interface: (8 Hours)
Synchronous and Asynchronous Communication. RS232, SPI, I2C- Stepper motor interfacing, DC
Motor interfacing, sensor interfacing.
Module 5: PLC Introduction:(8 Hours)
Basics of PLC, Advantages, Capabilities of PLC, Architecture of PLC, Scan cycle, Types of PLC,
Types of I/O modules, Power supplies and isolators
Module 6: General PLC Programming Procedures: (5 Hours)
Types of Programming -Programming on-off inputs/outputs- Simple process control programs using
Relay Ladder Logic- PLC Basic Functions - Register basics - Timer functions – Counter- PLC
intermediate functions, Integrated displays, interfacing PLC to HMI.
Textbooks:
1. M. A.Mazidi, J. G. Mazidi and R. D. McKinlay, “The8051Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems: Using Assembly and C”,Pearson Education, 2007.
2. K. J. Ayala, “8051 Microcontroller”, Delmar Cengage Learning,2004.
Reference Books: 1. John W Webb & Ronald A Reis, “Programmable logic controllers: Principles and
Applications”, Prentice Hall India, 2003.
2. Frank D Petruzella “Programmable Logic Controllers ", McGraw Hill Inc, 2005
3. R. Kamal, “Embedded System”, McGraw Hill Education, 2009.
4. R. S. Gaonkar, “, Microprocessor Architecture: Programming and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing, 1996
18EI2006 MICROCONTROLLER AND PLC L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives:
To impart knowledge on
1. The fundamentals of sensors and control concepts
2. The concepts of system analysis and control
3. The working of various sensors
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Represent the mathematical model of a process.
2. Determine the response of different order systems for various test inputs.
3. Analyze the stability of the system.
4. Apply the knowledge of various Measuring Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation
system.
5. Comprehend the concept of sensors in food industry.
6. Analyze and decide suitable instrument for a particular system.
Module 1: Introduction To Process Control:(8 Hours) System – Mathematical Modeling - steady state design – process control block diagram – Control
valve-Construction and working of pneumatically operated valve and spring – diaphragm Actuator
damped and cyclic response- feedback control – transient responses –
Module 2: Control Systems:(8 Hours) Open and closed loop systems, laplace transform –– step function, exponential function, ramp
function and sine function. Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula, Block diagram algebra-servo-
mechanisms, hydraulic and pneumatic control systems, two-way control, proportional control,
differential control and integral control.
Module 3: Stability Analysis:(8 Hours) Stability – concept of stability, definition of stability in a linear system, stability criterion,
characteristic equation, Routh test for stability
Module 4: Pressure And Temperature Sensors For Food Industry:(8 Hours) Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive pressure sensor, Inductive pressure
sensor, strain gauge, pressure sensor, diaphragm, bourdon tube, differential pressure cell Temperature
sensors –Construction and working of RTD, Thermistors, Thermocouples, bimetallic strips
Module 5: Level And Density Sensor: (8 Hours) Simple float systems, capacitive sensing element, radioactive methods (nucleonic level sensing) –
ultrasonic level sensor. Measurement of density – U-type densitometer, Buoyancy meter
Module 6: Analyzing Instruments Used In Food Industry: (5 Hours)
Gas chromatograph, Mass spectrometer Measurement of composition – Electrical conductivity cell,
non-dispersive photometers, pH meter.
Text Books
1. J.F Richardson A D.G.Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “ Chemical Engineering”, Volume3,
(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann, an
imprint of Elsevier, 2006.
2. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” Mc- Graw Hill International
Edition , Second Edition,singapore, S2008.
Reference Books
1. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, ninteenth reprint 2012
2. S.Baskar,”Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”Anuradha Agencies
Publishers, 2004.
3. Nagrath, M and Gopal, I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third
Edition Reprint 2003.
4. Renganathan, “Transducer engineering, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.
5. Patranabis, “Principles of industrial instrumentation”, Printice Hall India, 2004. Patranabis,
D., Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.. New Delhi. 1997, ISBN
0074623346.
6. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology ”, Prentice Hall , New
Jersey2006.
18EI2007 PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives:
To impart knowledge on
1. The basics of sensors and control
2. The signal conditioning circuits for data acquisition and control
3. The characteristics of the control elements in a closed loop control loop.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Analyze the characteristics of sensors and transducers.
2. Determine the characteristics of instruments.
3. Design controllers for a given system.
4. Perform stability analysis of a system
5. Comprehend the process system design
6. Analyze various control valve characteristics
List of Experiments
1. Displacement Measurement Using LVDT
2. Displacement Measurement Using Capacitive Transducer
3. Weight Measurement using Strain Gage
4. Temperature Measurement using Temperature Detector
5. Measurement of Pressure
6. Characteristics of Resistive Potentiometer
7. Study of ON-OFF Temperature Control System
8. Study of P& I Controller Responses
9. Stability Analysis Using Root Locus
10. Open Loop And Closed Loop Response of Dc Motor
11. Speed Measurement Using a Tachogenerator
12. Study of Pneumatic Valve Characteristics
Course Objectives:
To impart knowledge on
1. The general Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, the sensors for various physical
variables
2. The fundamentals of Feedback Control systems.
3. The concepts of time response of the system.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Describe the concept of Mechanical Measurement.
2. Summarize the principle of operation of different types of sensors used in the measurement of
various physical variables.
3. Describe the concept of Viscosity And Force measurement .
4. Recognize the type of the control system and to express the transfer function of the system.
5. Analyse the time response of various order of the system.
6. Analyse the Concept of stability.
Module 1: Introduction to Measurement (6 Hours)
General Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, generalized measurement system. Classification of
instruments as indicators, recorders and integrators – their working principles, Precision and accuracy.
Measurement of error .
Module 2: Measurement OF Physical Variables: (8 Hours)
Pressure measurement: bourdon, elastic transducers, strain gauge, pressure cells, measurement of high
and low pressure. Temperature measurement: Bimetallic, resistance thermometer, thermocouples,
pyrometer and thermistors, Hot-wire anemometer, magnetic flow meter, ultrasonic flow meter.
Module 3: Instruments For Viscosity AndForce measurement: (8 Hours)
Viscosity: capillary tube viscometer, efflux viscometer, humidity: absorption hydrometer, dew point
meter. Force measurement: scales and torque measurement: mechanical torsion meter, electrical
torsion meter.
18EI2008 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD
ENGINEERS
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
18EI2009 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 4: Introduction to control problem : (8 Hours)
Open and closed systems, servomechanisms, transfer functions, signal flow graphs, block diagram
algebra, and hydraulic and pneumatic control systems, proportional control, differential and integral
control.
Module 5: Time Response Analysis: (8 Hours)
Standard test signals. Time response of first and second order systems for standard test inputs.
Application of initial and final value theorem. Design specifications for second-order systems based
on the time-response.
Module 6: Stability Analysis: (7 Hours)
Concept of stability, necessary condition for stability, routh stability criterion, Relationship between
time and frequency response, Nyquist stability
Text books:
1. Sawhney, A.K., ‘Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai
& Co., 2005
2. Instrumentation and control systems by W. Bolton, 2nd edition, Newnes, 2000
Reference books:
1. Thomas G. Beckwith, Roy D. Marangoni, John H. LienhardV , Mechanical Measurements
(6th Edition) 6th Edition, Pearson Education India, 2000
2. M. Gopal, “Control Systems: Principles and Design”, McGraw Hill Education, 2002.
3. Thomas G Beckwith, Lewis Buck, N. Roy D. Maragoni, ‘Mechanical Measurements’, Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 1989.
4. Collet, C.V. and Hope, A.D., ‘Engineering Measurements’, 2nd Ed., ELBS.
Course Objective:
To impart knowledge on
1. The practical aspects of various transducers and their characteristics.
2. In measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance using bridges.
3. Improve the skills in calibrating analog meters.
Course Outcome:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Obtain the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the
behavior.
2. Analyse the characteristics of sensors and transducers.
3. Summarize the measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods.
4. Perform experiment to Calibrate the instruments.
5. Apply the transducers for various applications.
6. Apply controller principles to typical applications.
List of Experiments:
1. Measurement of Strain using Strain Gauge
2. Characteristics of Load cell
3. Measurement of Displacement using LVDT
4. Characteristics of RTD
5. Characteristics of Thermocouple
6. Characteristics of Resistive Potentiometer
7. Characteristics of Torque Measurement System
8. Measurement using Capacitive Sensors
9. Characteristics of Microphone and Loud Speaker
10. Characteristics of Pressure Measurement System
11. Study of ON-OFF Temperature Controller
12. Characteristics of Speed Measurement System
Course Objectives:
1. Familiarize with the VI software and learn programming in VI.
2. Acquire knowledge on Data Acquisition Systems and network interface concepts.
18EI2010 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 2 1
18EI2011 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION: THEORY AND
APPLICATIONS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
3. Understand various analysis tools and develop programs for Industrial Applications
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Understand Virtual Instrument concepts.
2. Create a Virtual Instrument using graphical programming
3. Develop systems for real-time signal acquisition and analysis.
4. Apply concepts of network interface for data communication.
5. Implement and design data acquisition systems for practical applications.
6. Suggest solutions for automation and control applications using virtual instrumentation.
Module 1: Review Of Virtual Instrumentation:
Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture of a Virtual Instrument, Data
Flow Techniques, Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional programming.
Module 2 : Introduction To LabVIEW:
Advantages of LabVIEW Software Environment-Creating and Saving VI-Controls and Indicators-
Data types. Sub VI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing a Sub VI in a block- Creating a Stand Alone
Application
Module 3: Programming Techniques: Loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, local and
global variables, string and file I/O
Module 4: Data Acquisition Basics: Signals Handling and Classification – Signal Conditioning - Analog Interfacing (I/O) - Counters &
Timers – Digital (I/O) - DAQ Hardware – DAQ Software Architecture - DAQ Assist
Module 5: Common Instrument Interfaces: GPIB-RS232-Handshaking- RS232/RS485 interfacing, VISA – IVI - PCMCIA – SCXI – VXI -
Networking basics for office & Industrial applications
Module 6: Applications:
Motion Control - Virtual Instrumentation and CAD Tool, Remote Front Panel LabVIEW
Applications, Timed Loop Applications Client–Server Applications – Case Studies
.
Text Books
1. Dr. Sumathi. S and Prof. Surekha. P, “LabVIEW Based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”,
2nd edition, 2007.
2. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, 2010.
3. Gary Johnson, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw Hill, 2006.
Reference Books:
1. Lisa .K, Wells and Jeffrey Travis, “LABVIEW for Everyone”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
2. Skolkoff, “Basic concepts of LABVIEW 4”, PHI, 1998.
3. Gupta. S, Gupta. J.P, “PC Interfacing for Data Acquisition and Process Control”, ISA, 1994.
4. Amy. L.T, “Automation System for Control and Data Acquisition”, ISA, 1992.
Course Objective:
To impart knowledge on
The basics concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.
Programming in LabVIEW using structures, graphs and charts for system monitoring,
processing and controlling
The data acquisition and interfacing concepts using a state-of-the-art software platform such
as National Instrument's LabVIEW.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
Create, Edit and Debug Virtual Instruments
Develop Virtual instrumetation systems for practical applications
Apply PC interfacing principles for data acquisition
Understand the usage of Instrument Driver for Computer measurement and control.
Formulate instrumentation and control applications using LabVIEW
Appraise the usefulness of LabVIEW for real time data acquisition and analysis
18EI2012 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND DATA
ACQUISITION LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 2 1
Instrumentation Engineering
List of Experiments
1. Introduction to LabVIEW
2. Use of SubVI
3. Waveform Generation
4. Frequency Measurement
5. Analog Input and Output Interface
6. Network Interface
7. Thermocouple Interface
8. Stepper Motor
9. Use of NI Elvis
10. Simulation of Tank Process
Course objectives:
To impart knowledge on 1. Fundamentals of Microcontroller Programming
2. Interfacing I/O devices with Microcontroller
3. PLC programming and interfacing.
Course outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to 1. Perform experiment to verify arithmetic operations.
2. Apply the interfacing concept for various applications.
3. Discuss the LCD interfacing issues in microcontroller applications.
4. Analyze the characteristics of PLC.
5. Develop PLC Ladder diagram for simple applications
6. Design a real time system using PLC
List of experiments:
Microcontroller 1. Basic Arithmetic Operations
2. Interfacing DAC
3. Interfacing ADC
4. Interfacing Stepper Motor
5. Interfacing DC Motor
6. Interfacing LCD
PLC 1. Basic programs using Omron PLC
2. Bottle filling System
3. Pneumatic Stamping System
4. Lift control System
5. Simulation using Keyence and Picosoft software
6. Experiments using GEFanuc and STEP7
Course Objective:
To impart knowledge on 1. Fundamentals of System Modeling and Simulation Study
2. Optimization and decision making
3. Statistical analysis for system identification
Course Outcome:
At the end of the course, the student will demonstrate the ability to 1. Describe the components of a system
2. Explain the concepts of random number generation
3. Perform Statistical analysis of data
4. Analyse and validate the system models
5. Identify the characteristics of a system
6. Apply the modelling concepts to simulate mechatronic systems.
18EI2013 MICROCONTROLLER AND PLC LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
18EI2014 MODELLING AND SIMULATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 1: System and System Environment:
Component of a System – Continuous and discrete systems – Types of model; Steps in
Simulation study; Simulation of an event occurrence using random number table – Single
server queue –two server queues – inventory system.
Module 2: Random number generation:
Properties of random numbers – Generation of Pseudo – random numbers – techniques of
generating pseudo random numbers; Test for random numbers: the Chisquare test-the
kolmogrov Smirnov test – Runs test – Gap test – poker test.
Module 3: Random – Variate Generation:
Inverse transform technique for Exponential, Uniform, triangular, weibull, empirical, uniform
and discrete distribution, Acceptance rejection method for Poisson and gamma distribution;
Direct Transformation for normal distribution.
Module 4: Analysis of simulated Data:
Data collection, identifying the distribution, Parameter estimation, goodness of fit tests,
verification and validation of simulation models.
Module 5: Concepts of System Identification
Identification using normal operating records (Integration method) – Identifiability conditions
– System order determination
Module 6: Modeling of mechatronic systems: Modeling of mechatronic systems and their
application in engineering practice Modeling and simulation and their practical significance
Computer modeling and simulation Simulation of mechatronic systems using simulation
software Creating animations of mechatronic systems
Text Book: 1. Banks J., Carson J.S. and Nelson B.L., “Discrete – Event System Simulation”, 3rd Edition,
Pearson Education, Inc 2004 (ISBN 81-7808-505-4).
Reference Books : 1. Geoffrey Gorden, “System Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
2. Narsingh Deo., “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
3. www.arenasimulation.com
4. www.gpss.co.uk
5. www.caciasl.com
Course objectives:
To impart knowledge on
1. Basic structural and functional elements of human body.
2. Organs and structures involving in system formation and functions.
3. Understand all systems in the human body.
Course outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Recall the basic elements of human body.
2. Compare the major bones and their processes as they relate to each region of the body.
3. Interpret the major organs and components of the respiratory system and understand their
functions.
4. Recognize the major organs and vessels of the cardiovascular system and understand their
functions.
5. Describe briefly the basic components and functions of urinary and special sensing systems.
6. Demonstrate the structure and functions of nervous systems.
Module 1: Basic Elements of Human Body (9 Hours)
Cell: Structure and organelles - Functions of each component in the cell. Cell membrane – transport
across membrane – origin of cell membrane potential – Action potential Tissue: Types – Specialized
tissues – functions, Types of glands.
Module 2: Skeletal and Respiratory System (7 Hours)
Skeletal system: Bone types and functions – Joint - Types of Joint - Cartilage and functions
Module 3: Respiratory System (7 Hours)
18BM2001 HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Respiratory System: Components of respiratory system – Respiratory Mechanism. Types of
respiration - Oxygen and carbon dioxide transport and acid base regulation.
Module 4: Circulatory System (8 Hours)
Blood composition - functions of blood – functions of RBC.WBC types and their functions Blood
groups – importance of blood groups – identification of blood groups. Blood vessels - Structure of
heart – Properties of Cardiac muscle – Conducting system of heart -Cardiac cycle – ECG - Heart
sound - Volume and pressure changes and regulation of heart rate –Coronary Circulation. Factors
regulating Blood flow.
Module 5: Urinary and Special Sensory System (7 Hours)
Urinary system: Structure of Kidney and Nephron. Mechanism of Urine formation and acid base
regulation – Urinary reflex – Homeostasis and blood pressure regulation by urinary system. Special
senses: Eye and Ear.
Module 6: Nervous System (7 Hours)
Structure of a Neuron – Types of Neuron. Synapses and types. Conduction of action potential in
neuron Brain – Divisions of brain lobes - Cortical localizations and functions - EEG. Spinal cord –
Tracts of spinal cord - Reflex mechanism – Types of reflex, Autonomic nervous system and its
functions.
Text Books:
1. Elaine.N. Marieb,“Essential of Human Anatomy and Physiology”, Eight edition, Pearson
Education NewDelhi, 2007.
2. Gillian Pocock, Christopher D. Richards, "The Human Body- An introduction for Biomedical
and Health Sciences", Oxford University Press, USA, 2009.
Reference Books:
1. William F. Ganong,"Review of Medical Physiology, 22nd edition, McGraw Hill New Delhi,
2005
2. Eldra Pearl Solomon."Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology", W.B.Saunders
Company, 2003.
3. Arthur C. Guyton, "Text book of Medical Physiology", 11 th Edition, Elsevier Saunders, 2006
4. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2003.
Course Objective:
1. To develop skills for understanding the requirements of the Real Time Digital Signal
Processing Algorithms.
2. To develop skills to comprehend the Digital Signal Processor and FPGA Architectures.
3. To develop skills to implement the signal processing algorithms using the Digital Signal
Processors and FPGA.
Course Outcome:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Recall the basic concepts of digital signal processing techniques.
2. Examine the Architectural features of Digital Signal Processors.
3. Understand the Architecture of TMS320C5x and the assembly language for Digital Signal
Processing Algorithms.
4. Understand the Architecture of TMS320C54x and the VLIW Architecture of TMS320C6x.
5. Recall the basic concepts of FPGA.
6. Understand the implementation of Signal Processing Algorithms in FPGA.
Module 1: Overview Of Digital Signal Processing And Applications: (6 Hours)
Signals and their origin– Sampling theorem and discrete time system – Convolution – DSP in the
sample and transform domain– Fast Fourier Transform – Digital Filters – Multi–rate Signal
Processing.
Module 2: Introduction to Programmable DSP: (8 Hours) Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator – Modified Bus structures and Memory Access schemes in P –
DSPs – Multiple Access Memory – Multi – ported Memory – VLIW Architecture–Pipelining –
Special Addressing Modes in P – DSPs – On – Chip Peripherals
Module 3: Architecture of TMS320C5x :( 8 Hours) Introduction – Bus Structure – Central
Arithmetic Logic Unit – Auxiliary Register ALU – Parallel Logic Unit – Program controller – On
18EI3001 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SIGNAL PROCESSORS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Chip Peripherals – Assembly Language Syntax – Addressing Modes – Normal pipeline operation,
Convolution using MAC, MACD instructions – FIR filter implementation
Module 4: Architecture of TMS320C54x And TMS320C6x :(8 Hours)
Architecture of TMS320C54X- Bus Structure – Data Path - Normal Pipe line operation – FIR filter
implementation – VLIW Architecture of TMS320C6X- Bus Structure – Data path – Normal Pipe line
operation – Serial/Partially Parallel/ Fully Parallel FIR filter implementation.
Module 5: Overview of FPGA: (8 Hours)
FPGA Technology pros and cons behind FPGA and programmable signal processors, FPGA
structure, Implementation of basic MAC Unit.
Module 6: DSP with FPGA :(7 Hours)
FPGA for Digital Signal Processing Applications-Distributed Arithmetic- Digital filter
Implementation in FPGA.
Reference Books
1. Venkataramani B &M.Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processor”, TMH, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Meyer U – Baese “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable GateArrays”, Spinger,
New York, 2003.
3. Michael John Sabastian Smith, “ Application Specific Integrated Circuits”,Pearson
Education,USA,2005.
4. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDLDesign”,
McGraw – Hill Higher Education, New Delhi – 2005.
Course Objectives
1. To provide a clear understanding on the basic concepts, building blocks of embedded system
2. To teach the fundamentals of Embedded networking and RTOS
3. To study the basic concepts of Embedded OS
Course outcome:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Recall the basic concepts of embedded systems
2. Summarize the concepts of embedded networking and interrupt service mechanisms.
3. Identification of various RTOS features for real time applications
4. Analyze the scope of UML for creating visual models of software-intensive systems.\
5. Explain the basic concepts of embedded OS
6. Design real time embedded systems using the concepts of RTOS.
Module 1: Introduction to Embedded Systems :(6 Hours) Introduction to Embedded Systems – The build process for embedded systems- Structural units in
Embedded processor , selection of processor & memory devices- DMA – Memory
management methods- Timer and Counting devices, Watchdog Timer, Real Time Clock .
Module 2: Embedded Networking and interrupt service mechanism: (8 Hours)
Embedded networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses– Serial Bus communication protocols
- RS232 standard – RS485 –USB – Inter Integrated Circuits (I2C) – interrupt sources , Programmed-
I/O busy-wait approach without interrupt service mechanism- ISR concept-– multiple interrupts –
context and periods for context switching, interrupt latency and deadline -Introduction to Basic
Concept Device Drivers.
Module 3:RTOS based Embedded System Design: (8 Hours)
Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS- Task, process & threads, interrupt routines in RTOS,
Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Pre-emptive and non-pre-emptive scheduling, Task
communication- shared memory, message passing-, Inter-process Communication – synchronization
between processes-semaphores, Mailbox, pipes, priority inversion, priority inheritance-comparison of
commercial RTOS features - RTOS Lite, Full RTOS, VxWorks, μC/OS-II, RT Linux
Module 4: Software Development Tools :(8 Hours)
Software Development environment-IDE, assembler, compiler, linker, simulator, debugger, In-circuit
emulator, Target Hardware Debugging, need for Hardware-Software Partitioning and Co-Design.
Overview of UML, Scope of UML modelling, Conceptual model of UML, Architectural, UML basic
elements-Diagram- Modelling techniques - structural, Behavioural, Activity Diagrams.
Module 5: Embedded Operating System: (8 Hours)
Creating embedded operating system: Basis of a simple embedded OS, Introduction to sEOS, Using
Timer 0 and Timer 1, Portability issue, Alternative system architecture, Important design
18EI3002 EMBEDDED SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
considerations when using sEOS- Memory requirements - embedding serial communication &
scheduling data transmission - Case study: Intruder alarm system.
Module 6: Embedded System Application Development: (7 Hours)
Objectives, different Phases & Modelling of the embedded product Development Life Cycle (EDLC),
Case studies on Smart card- Adaptive Cruise control in a Car -Mobile Phone software for key inputs.
References:
1. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded system-Architecute, programming, Design’, TataMcgraw Hill, 2011
2. Peckol, “Embedded System Design”, John wiley & Sons, 2010
3. Shibu,K.V. “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, TataMcgraw Hill, 2009
4. Lyla B Das “Embedded Systems- An Integrated Approach” , pearson 2013
5. Michael J Point, “Embedded C” Pearson Education 2007
6. Steve Oualline, “Practical C Programming” 3rd Edition O’Reilly Media Inc., 2006
Course Objectives
1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of sequential system design, Asynchronous
circuits,
2. To teach Programmable Device architecture and programming
3. To introduce hardware descriptive languages for industrial automation
Course outcome:
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Analyze and design Sequential digital circuit.
2. Analyze the Asynchronous Sequential Circuit
3. Analyze the FPGA Architectures for process automation.
4. Develop program for real time applications using VHDL descriptive languages.
5. Develop simple programs using concepts in VERILOG descriptive languages
6. Create FPGA programming for industrial automation.
Module 1: Sequential Circuit Design: (6 Hours)
Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modelling of CSSN – State Stable
Assignment and Reduction – Design of CSSN – ASM Chart – ASM Realization.
Module 2: Asynchronous Sequential Circuit: (8 Hours)
Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) – Flow Table Reduction – Races in ASC – State
Assignment Problem and the Transition Table – Design of ASC – Static and Dynamic Hazards –
Essential Hazards – Designing Vending Machine Controller.
Module 3: Architecture & Design using Programmable Devices: (8 Hours)
Programming Techniques - Re-Programmable Devices Architecture- Function blocks, I/O blocks,
Interconnects, Realize combinational, Arithmetic, Sequential Circuit with Programmable Logic
Devices. PLDs – Xilinx FPGA – Xilinx 2000, Xilinx 3000, Xilinx 4000- Altera Max – ACT-
implementation of combinational and sequential circuits with FPGA and PLDs. Process automation –
flow, pressure and level control using FPGA
Module 4: High Level Descriptive Languages - VHDL programming: (8 Hours) Design flow
process – Software tools – Data objects – Data types – Data operators – Entities and Architectures –
Component declaration and instantiation. Concurrent signal assignment – conditional signal
assignment – selected signal assignment – concurrent and sequential statements – Data flow,
Behavioural and Structural Modelling - Test bench –simple programming.
Module 5: VERILOG Programming: (8 Hours)
Verilog: Design methodology – Modules – Ports – Basic concepts – Operators – Nos. specification –
Data types – Arrays – Parameters – Gate delays – Operator types – Conditional statements –
Multiway branches - Loops - Switch – Modelling elements- simple examples
Module 6: FPGA for Industrial Automation: (7 Hours)
Motor control- Industrial networking with Xilinx devices- machine vision camera solutions-
Monitoring processes and equipment- Automated system shut-down - Detecting dangerous situations.
References:
1. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Digital Systems design using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2010.
2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL”, Pearson Publication”, II Edition. 2003.
18EI3003 PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES FOR INDUSTRIAL
AUTOMATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
3. By Muhammed Abdelati Modern Automation Systems university science press 2009
4. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Deisgn”,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2002
5. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with verilog Deisgn”,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
6. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2002.
Course Objective:
1. To Understand architectural overview of 8 and 32 bit Microcontrollers.
2. To acquire the programming skills.
3. To understand the interfacing concepts with embedded processors.
Course Outcome: (CO)
At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to
1. Recall the architectural overview of 8 bit processor
2. Discuss interfacing concepts in AVR microcontroller
3. Apply instruction set of ARM processors to create simple embedded programs.
4. Explain interrupts and memory concepts of ARM processor.
5. Create simple C/ASM program with ARM microcontroller
6. Elaborate the integrated Development Environment and programming with Rasbian.
Module 1: 8051 and PIC Microcontroller (6 Hours)
Overview of 8 bit Microcontroller – General Architecture, Selection, On Chip resources, – Memory
Organization–Addressing Modes – Instruction Set – I/O Ports-–Counters and Timers – Interrupt –
UART – Analog to Digital Converter – Relay Interfacing – Temperature Sensor Interfacing.
Module 2:AVR Microcontroller Architecture: (8 Hours)
Architecture – memory organization – addressing modes – I/O Memory – EEPROM – I/O Ports –
SRAM –Timer –UART – Interrupt Structure- Serial Communication with PC – ADC/DAC
Interfacing
Module 3:ARM Architecture AND Programming: (8 Hours) Arcon RISC Machine – Architectural
Inheritance – Core & Architectures -- The ARM Programmer’s model -Registers – Pipeline -
Interrupts – ARM organization - ARM processor family – Co-processors. Instruction set – Thumb
instruction set – Instruction cycle timings
Module 4:ARM Application Development (8 Hours) Introduction to RT implementation with ARM – –Exception Handling – Interrupts – Interrupt
handling schemes- Firmware and bootloader – Free RTOS Embedded Operating Systems concepts –
example on ARM core like ARM9 processor. Memory Protection and Management:Protected
Regions-Initializing MPU, Cache and Write Buffer-MPU to MMU-Virtual Memory-Page Tables-
TLB-Domain and Memory Access Permission-Fast Context Switch Extension.
Module 5:Design with ARM Microcontrollers: (8 Hours)
Assembler Rules and Directives- Simple ASM/C programs- Hamming Code- Division-Negation-
Simple Loops –Look up table- Block copy- subroutines-application.
Module 6:Raspberry PI : (7 Hours)
Onboard Processor – Linux OS - Integrated Development Environment- Programming with Raspbian-
Interfacing: I/O Devices – I2C Device – Sensors – Serial Communication-Case Study: Onboard
Diagnostic System. Simple Interfacing concepts.
References
1. Rajkamal, “Microcontroller Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and Systems Design”,
Pearson. Education India, 2009.
2. Kenneth Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller”, Thomson Delmar Learning , New Jersey, 2004.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly
and C”, Perason Education 2006.
4. Steve Furber, “ARM System On-Chip Architecture”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Limited,
2000.
5. Eben Upton, “Raspberry Pi User Guide”, 3rd Edition, 2016
18EI3004 ADVANCED EMBEDDED PROCESSORS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives
1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of Linux Operating system, its basic commands
and shell programming
2. To teach the history of embedded Linux, various distributions and basics of GNU Cross
Platform Tool Chain.
3. To study on different Host-Target setup, debug and various memory device, file systems and
performance tuning and to introduce the concept of configuring kernel using the cross-
platform tool chain.
Course Outcomes : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Outline the fundamentals of LINUX
2. Analyse various distributions and cross platform tool chain
3. Summarize the Host-Target Development setup and overall architecture
4. Create simple application using Eclipse IDE
5. Outline the features of LINUX drivers
6. Build device application using LINUX
Module 1:Fundamentals of LINUX: (6 Hours)
Basic Linux System Concepts: Working with Files and Directories - Introduction to Linux File system
Working with Partitions and File systems - Understanding Linux Permissions; Using Command Line
Tools: Executing Commands from the Command Line - Getting to a Shell - Popular Command-Line
Commands -Working with the Bash Shell
Module 2: Various Distributions and Cross platform Tool Chain: (8 Hours)
Introduction - History of Embedded Linux - Embedded Linux versus Desktop Linux - Commercial
Embedded Linux Distribution - Choosing a distribution - Embedded Linux Distributions -
Architecture of Embedded Linux - Linux Kernel Architecture -Porting Roadmap - GNU Cross
Platform Toolchain
Module 3: HOST-TARGET Setup and overall architecture (8 Hours) Real Life Embedded Linux Systems - Design and Implementation Methodology - Types of
Host/Target Development Setups - Types of Host/Target Debug Setups - Generic Architecture of an
Embedded Linux System - System Startup - Types of Boot Configurations - System Memory Layout -
Processor Architectures - Buses and Interfaces - I/O – Storage
Module 4: KERNEL Configuration :(8 Hours) A Practical Project Workspace - GNU Cross-
Platform Development Toolchain - C Library Alternatives - Other Programming Languages - Eclipse:
An Integrated Development Environment - Terminal Emulators - Selecting a Kernel - Configuring the
Kernel - Compiling the Kernel - Installing the Kernel Basic Root Filesystem Structure - Libraries -
Kernel Modules and Kernel Images - Device Files - Main System Applications - System Initialization
Module 5: LINUX Drivers (8 Hours) Introduction in to basics on Linux drivers, introduction to GNU cross platform Toolchain- Case study
on programming one serial driver for developing application using Linux Driver.
Module 6: DEVICE Applications: (7 Hours)
Asynchronous serial communication interface - parallel port interfacing - USB interfacing - memory
I/O interfacing - using interrupts for timing
References:
1. Karim Yaghmour, Jon Masters, Gilad Ben-Yossef, and Philippe Gerum, ‘Building Embedded
Linux Systems 2nd Edition’, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2008
3. P.Raghavan,Amol Lad,Sriram Neelakandan,”EmbeddedLinux System Design &
Development,Auerbach Publications, 2012
4. William von Hagen, ‘Ubuntu Linux Bible 3rd Edition’, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010
5. Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini & Greg Kroah-Hartman, ‘Linux Device Drivers 3rd
Edition’, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2011
6. Robert Love,”Linux System Programming, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2010
18EI3005 EMBEDDED LINUX L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objective:
1. To impart the basic knowledge about ATMega Microcntroller and its functions.
2. To understand the concepts of embedded programming.
3. Acquire knowledge in interfacing techniques.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Identify the IDE for programming
2. Review the architectural overview of AVR microcontroller
3. Recall the embedded C programming structure
4. Create programs using I/O Modules
5. Demonstrate waveform generation using I2C
6. Interpret the concept of RTOS programming
List of Experiments
1. Bit and byte access
2. Timer and counter concepts
3. Concepts on interrupt
4. Interfacing peripherals
5. Interfacing peripherals - 7-segment display
6. ADC Interface
7. Embedded based filter design
8. Waveform generation with I2C
9. Interfacing stepper motor
10. Concepts on RTOS – task creation
11. RTOS – priority based scheduling
12. Miniproject
Course Objective:
1. To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.
2. To understand the concept of signal processing
3. To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Identify virtual instrumentation representation for simple circuits
2. Choose VI to develop real time applications
3. Apply block diagram concept for developing simple digital circuits
4. Design embedded applications using VI
5. Analyze various embedded algorithms and implement the same using VI
6. Specify and develop control system methods using VI
List of experiments:
1. LabVIEW Programming I (LOOP | STRUCTURES | FORMULA NODE)
2. LabVIEW Programming II (ARRAY | CLUSTER | GRAPH | CHART )
3. Waveform Generators
4. Frequency Measurements Using Transition Duration Method
5. Analog Input and Output Interface Using NImyDAQ
6. Network Interface Using TCP/IP Functional Blocks
7. Real-Time Temperature Measurements by Interfacing Thermocouple | LM35
8. Speed and Direction Control for a Stepper Motor
9. Design and Analysis Analog of Filters Using NI-ELVIS Module
10. Embedded Implementation of Digital Filters Using SPEEDY33
11. Speed Control of DC Motor by Interfacing ARDUINO with LabVIEW
12. Development of Digital Voltmeter Using MCB2300 Embedded Board
18EI3006 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
18EI3007 EMBEDDED BASED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 4 2
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives:
1. To learn about the python programming.
2. To introduce the architectural concepts of Raspberry pi module
3. To introduce the concept of embedded applications in Raspberry pi
Course outcome:
The students will be able to
1. Recall the syntax used in python programming
2. Create simple programs using python programming
3. Summarize the architectural overview and downloading procedure of Raspberry pi
4. Develop I/O interfacing with Raspberry pi
5. Create protocols with Raspberry pi
6. Home automation with Thing Speak, GSM Module
List of Experiments:
1. Introduction to python programming using variables, strings and data operators
2. Examples for python programming using for loop, while loop and if statement
3. Interfacing input output module
4. Monitoring patient body temperature
5. Detection of motion artifact using accelerometer sensor
6. Interfacing motion sensor camera
7. Home automation using MQTT protocol
8. Temperature sensor interfacing with Thing-Speak
9. Brightness control using PWM generation
10. GSM module interfacing
11. Controlling sensor with twitter
12. Mini project
Course Objective:
1. To impart the basic knowledge about FPGA and its functions.
2. To develop digital circuits using XILINX software.
3. Acquire knowledge in interfacing techniques.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Identify the IDE for programming
2. Review the architectural overview of FPGA
3. Recall the VHDL/VERILOG programming structure
4. Create programs using I/O Modules
5. Demonstrate ADC and DAC conversion with FPGA kit
6. Create program with ARM microcontroller
List of Experiments:
1a. Realisation of Half adder, Half subtractor, Full adder and Full subtractor
1b. Realisation of encoder and decoder
2. Realisation of Flip-flop and counters
3. Implementation of IO Module using FPGA kit
4. Implementation of Logic gates using FPGA kit
5. Implementation of multiplexer and de multiplexer using FPGA kit
6. Implementation of ADC
7. Waveform Generation of DAC
8. Interfacing LCD using FPGA kit
9. Interfacing DC Motor using FPGA kit
10. Implementation of communication protocols
11. Interfacing stepper motor
12. Mini project
18EI3008 IoT LAB L T P C
0 0 4 2
18EI3009 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE LAB L T P C
0 0 4 2
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives
1. To expose the students to the fundamentals and building of Electronic Engine Control
systems.
2. To teach on functional components and circuits for vehicles
3. To discuss on programmable controllers for vehicles and to teach logics of automation &
commercial techniques for vehicle communication
Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Summarize the concepts of electronics in automobile field.
2. Compile the challenges and opportunities of Drive by wire.
3. Categorize various hardware modules of automotive system. Outline the structure of
Electronic ignition systems
4. Create the concepts of automotive embedded systems using recent advancements
5. Discuss the basics of Electronic diagnostics for vehicles
Module 1: Basics of Electronic Engine Control Systems (7 Hours) Motivation ,concept for electronic engine controls and management-Standards; introduction to fuel
economy- automobile sensors-volumetric, thermal, air-fuel ratio, solenoid ,hall effect- exhaust gas
oxygen sensors, Oxidizing catalytic efficiency, emission limits and vehicle performance; advantages
of using Electronic engine controls – open and closed loop fuel control; Block diagram of Electronic
ignition system and Architecture of a EMS with multi point fuel injection system, Direct injection;
programmed ignition- actuators interface to the ECU; starter motors and circuits - sensors interface to
the ECU; Actuators and their characteristics – exhaust gas recirculation.
Module 2: Hardware modules (8 Hours) Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors such as- oxygen sensors, crank angle position sensors-
Fuel metering vehicle speed sensors and destination sensors, Attitude sensor, Flow sensor, exhaust
temperature, air mass flow sensors. Throttle position sensor, solenoids, stepper motors, relays
Module 3: Fuel cell for automotive power (8 Hours) Fuel cell-Introduction-Proton exchange membrane FC (PEM), Solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC)-
properties of fuel cells for vehicles-power system of an automobile with fuel cell based drive, and
their characteristics
Module 4: Vehicle Management Systems (8 Hours) Electronic Engine Control-engine mapping,air/fuel ratio spark timing control strategy, fuel control,
electronic ignition-Vehicle cruise control- speed control-anti-locking braking system-electronic
suspension - electronic steering , wiper control ; Vehicle system schematic for interfacing with EMS,
ECU. Energy Management system for electric vehicles- for sensors, accelerators, brake-Battery
management, Electric Vehicles-Electrical loads, power management system-electrically assisted
power steering system
Module 5: Automotive Telematics (8 Hours) Role of Bluetooth, CAN, LIN and flex ray communication protocols in automotive applications;
Multiplexed vehicle system architecture for signal and data / parameter exchange between EMS,
ECUs with other vehicle system components and other control systems; Realizing bus interfaces for
diagnostics, dashboard display ,multimedia electronics- Introduction to Society of Automotive
Engineers(SAE). J1850 message with (IFR) in frame response in protocol-Local Interconnect n/w
[LIN], Bluetooth.
Module 6: Electronic Diagnostics for Vehicles (6 Hours) System diagnostic standards and regulation requirements –On board diagnosis of vehicles electronic
units &electric units-Speedometer, oil and temperature gauges, and audio system.
References
1. William B. Ribbens ,”Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Elseiver,2012
2. Ali Emedi, Mehrded ehsani, John M Miller , “Vehicular Electric power system- land, Sea, Air
and Space Vehicles” Marcel Decker, 2004.
3. L.Vlacic,M.Parent,F.Harahima,”Intelligent Vehicl Technologies”,SAE International,2001.
4. Jack Erjavec,Jeff Arias,”Alternate Fuel Technology-Electric ,Hybrid& Fuel Cell
Vehicles”,Cengage ,2012
18EI3010 EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives
1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of Network, communication technologies and
distributed computing.
2. To teach the fundamentals of Internet
3. To study on Java based Networking and distributed computing
Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Understand the fundamentals of distributed system
2. Comprehend the concepts of software architecture and internet concepts
3. Recall the concepts of embedded JAVA
4. Examine the concepts of distributed computing
5. Analyze security concepts in embedded systems.
6. Apply JAVA programming for home based automation
Module 1: Distributed System (7 Hours) Introduction- Communication in distribution system-Client/Server Model-Synchronization in
distributed system
Module 2: Software Architecture & Internet concepts (8 Hours) Internet protocol- Hardware & software of internet- Internet security- IP addressing- Interfacing
internet server applications to corporate database HTML and XML.
Module 3: Embedded JAVA (8 Hours)
Overview of JAVA – Programs- Multithreaded programming- APPLET programming- I/O streaming
RMI- Introduction to Embedded JAVA
Module 4: Distributed Computing (8 Hours) Definition- Model of distributed computation- Distributed shared memory- Authentication in
distributed system
Module 5: Security in computing (8 Hours) Security meaning- Threads in networks- Network security control- Firewall- Authentication- E-mail
security- Security in web services- Case studies
Module 6: Web based home automation (6 Hours) Components of Distributed Embedded - Protocols & Standards - Hardware/Software selection for
Distributed Embedded –case study: Web based Home Automation
References:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Distributed operating systems”, Pearson 2013
2. E Balagurusamy,” Programming with JAVA”, Mc Graw Hill 2013
3. Ajay D Kshemkalyani,Mukesh Singhal, “Distributed Computing” – Principles, Algorithm and
systems, Cambridge university press 2008 4. Charles P. Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”,
Pearson 2009.
Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the fundamentals of wireless and mobile communication technologies.
2. To study the different protocols used in wireless and mobile communication
3. To address the challenges in data transmission security
Outcomes:
1. Student will be able to classify the different medium access methods and illustrate the need
of different medium access methods
2. Student will be able to explain the architecture of different wireless and mobile platforms
3. Student will be able to Investigate the use of different wireless protocols in different
applications
4. Student will be able to describe the concept of routing and discuss the issues in routing
5. Student will be able to express the layered structure and model of different protocols of
transport layer and application layer
6. Student will be able to comprehend the challenges and issues in information security and
suggest different protocols for secure data transmission
18EI3011 DISTRIBUTED EMBEDDED COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
18EI3012 WIRELESS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 1: Introduction (7 Hours) Wireless Transmission – signal propagation – Free space and two ray models – spread spectrum –
Satellite Networks – Capacity Allocation – FDMA –TDMA- SDMA – CDMA
Module 2: Mobile Networks (8 Hours) Cellular Wireless Networks – GSM – Architecture – Protocols – Connection Establishment –
Frequency Allocation – Handover – Security – GPRA.
Module 3: Wireless Networks (8 Hours) Wireless LAN – IEEE 802.11 Standard-Architecture – Services – Hiper LAN, Bluetooth, WiMax,
ZigBee, Software Defined Radio
Module 4: Routing (8 Hours) Mobile IP- SIP – DHCP – AdHoc Networks – Proactive and Reactive Routing Protocols – Multicast
Routing -WSN routing –LEACH- SPIN- PEGASIS
Module 5: Transport and Application Layers (8 Hours) TCP over Adhoc Networks – WAP – Architecture – WWW Programming Model – WDP – WTLS –
WTP–WSP –WAE –WTA Architecture –WML–WML scripts.
Module 6: Mobile and Wireless Security (6 Hours) Security Primer - Creating A Secure Environment - Security Threats - Other Security Measures -
WAP Security Measures - Smart Client Security - Overview of Smart Client Architecture - Mobile
Operating Systems
Reference Books 1. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications — W.C.Y. Lee, Mc Graw Hill, 2nd Edn., 1989.
2. Wireless Communications – Theodore. S. Rapport, Pearson Education, 2nd Edn.2002.
3. Mobile Cellular Communication – Gottapu sashibhushana Rao, Pearson, 2012.
4. Modern Wireless Communications-Simon Haykin, Michael Moher,Pearson Education, 2005.
5. Wireless Communications Theory and Techniques, Asrar U. H .Sheikh, Springer, 2004.
6. Wireless Communications and Networking, Vijay Garg, Elsevier Publications, 2007.
7. Wireless Communications —Andrea Goldsmith, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
Course Objectives
1. To understand about the smart system technologies and its role in real time applications
2. To expose students to different open source platforms and Attributes.
3. To familiarize the design and development of embedded system based system design.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Recall the concepts of smart system design and its present developments.
2. Examine the application of mobile based embedded system.
3. Apply the concept of embedded system in home automation.
4. Analyze the application of smart design in energy management system
5. Summarize the concepts of Smart sensors
6. Understand different Robots and developments
Module 1: Introduction (7 Hours)
Overview of smart system design and requirements- Hardware and software selection & co-design
Communications-smart sensors and actuators-Open-source resources for embedded system- android
for embedded system - Embedded system for Ecommerce- Embedded system for Smart card design
and development –Recent trends.
Module 2: SMART Sensors: (8 Hours)
Introduction to Smart Sensors, Integrated Smart sensors and smart systems, MEMS and NEMS
devices, Elastic structures in MEMS and NEMS
Module 3: Mobile Embedded System (8 Hours) Design requirements-Hardware platform- OS and
Software development platform- Mobile Apps development- Applications: heart beat monitoring,
blood pressure monitoring, mobile banking and appliances control.
Module 4: Home Automation: (8 Hours)
Home Automation System Architecture-Essential Components- Linux and Raspberry Pi – design and
real time implementation.
Module 5: Smart Appliances and energy management (8 Hours)
Overview- functional requirements-Embedded and Integrated Platforms for Energy Management
Energy Measurement Techniques for Smart Metering-Smart Embedded Appliances Networks –
Security Considerations.
18EI3013 SMART SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 6: Embedded systems and Robotics (6 Hours) Robots and Controllers-components - Aerial Robotics -Mobile Robot Design- Three-Servo Ant
Robot Autonomous Hex copter System.
References:
1. Thomas Bräunl, Embedded Robotics ,Springer, 2003.
2. Grimm, Christoph, Neumann, Peter, Mahlknech and Stefan, Embedded Systems for Smart
Appliances and Energy Management , Springer 2013.
3. Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems - Architecture, Programming and Design" , McGraw- Hill,
2008
4. Nilanjan Dey, Amartya Mukherjee, Embedded Systems and Robotics with Open Source
Tools, CRC press, 2016.
5. Karim Yaghmour, Embedded Android , O'Reilly, 2013.
6. Steven Goodwin ,Smart Home Automation with Linux and Raspberry Pi, Apress, 2013
7. Robert Faludi,”Wireless Sensor Networks”,O’Reilly,2011.
Course Objectives: 1. To teach the students properties of materials, microstructure and fabrication methods.
2. To teach the design and modeling of Electrostatic sensors and actuators.
3. To teach the characterizing thermal sensors and actuators through design and modeling
4. To teach the fundamentals of piezoelectric sensors and actuators through exposure to different
MEMS and NEMS devices
Course outcomes: 1. Familiar with micro fabrication and materials
2. Compare various sensors and actuators
3. Develop embedded application based on MEMS
4. Explain the features of NEMS device in real time applications
5. Describe various medical application based on MEMS
6. Distinguish various sensors and actuators depending on the application
Module 1: Micro-Fabrication, Materials And Electro-Mechanical Concepts :(7 Hours)
Overview of micro fabrication – Silicon and other material based fabrication processes – Concepts:
Conductivity of semiconductors-Crystal planes and orientation-stress and strain-flexural beam
bending analysis-torsional deflections-Intrinsic stress- resonant frequency and quality factor.
Module 2: Electrostatic Sensors And Actuation :(8 Hours)
Principle, material, design and fabrication of parallel plate capacitors as electrostatic sensors and
actuators-Applications
Module 3: Thermal Sensing And Actuation :(8 Hours)
Principle, material, design and fabrication of thermal couples, thermal bimorph sensors, thermal
resistor sensors-Applications.
Module 4: Piezoelectric Sensing And Actuation : (8 Hours)
Piezoelectric effect-cantilever piezo electric actuator model-properties of piezoelectric materials-
Applications. Piezoresistive sensors, Magnetic actuation
Module 5: Microsystems Design, assembly and packaging : (6 Hours)
Micro system Design - Design consideration, process design, Mechanical design, Mechanical design
using MEMS. Mechanical packaging of Microsystems, Microsystems packaging, interfacings in
Microsystems packaging, packaging technology, selection of packaging materials, signal mapping and
transduction.
Module 6: Case Studies :Micro fluidics applications, Medical applications, Optical MEMS.-NEMS
Devices- multisensor module for embedded design with IOT- web based system
Reference Books 1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006.
2. Marc Madou , “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”,CRC Press, 1997.
3. Boston , “Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook”,WCB McGraw Hill, 1998.
4. M.H.Bao “Micromechanical transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers and gyroscopes”,
Elsevier, Newyork, 2000.
18EI3014 MEMS TECHNOLOGY FOR EMBEDDED DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives: 1. To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.
2. To understand the concept of signal processing
3. To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.
Course Outcomes: 1. Recall the need and process phase in product development
2. Identify structural approach to concept generation, creativity, selection and testing.
3. Categorize the various approaches in product development
4. Summarize industrial design in product development
5. Analyze the concept of development based on reverse engineering
6. Develop a concept for embedded based product for multi real time applications.
Module 1: Introduction to Product Development: (7 Hours) Need for Product Development-
Generic product Development Process Phases- Product Development Process Flows, Product
Development organization structures-Strategic importance of Product Planning process –Product
Specifications-Target Specifications-Plan and establish product specifications –
Module 2: Concepts on product Development: (8 Hours) Integration of customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer -
Understanding customer and behaviour analysis. Concept Generation, Five Step Method-Basics of
Concept selection- Creative thinking –creativity and problem solving- creative thinking methods
generating design concepts-systematic methods for designing –functional decomposition – physical
decomposition –Product Architecture--changes - variety – component Standardization –example case
study on Conceptual Design of DeskJet Printer as a product.
Module 3: Introduction To Approaches In Product Development: (8 Hours) Product development management - establishing the architecture - creation - clustering –geometric
layout development - Fundamental and incidental interactions - related system level design issues -
secondary systems -architecture of the chunks - creating detailed interface specifications-Portfolio
Architecture- competitive benchmarking- Approach – Support tools for the benchmarking process,
trend analysis- Setting product specifications- product performance analysis -Industrial Design,
Robust Design – Testing Methodologies.
Module 4: Industrial Design: (8 Hours)
Integrate process design - Managing costs - Robust design –need for Involving CAE, CAD, CAM,
IDE tools –Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically – Estimation
of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and assembly costs – Minimize system
complexity - Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping - Planning for prototypes- Economic & Cost
Analysis - Understanding and representing tasks-baseline project planning -accelerating the project,
project execution.
Module 5: Development Based On Reverse Engineering: (8 Hours) Basics on Data reverse engineering – Three data Reverse engineering strategies – Finding reusable
software components – Recycling real-time embedded software based approach and its logical basics-
Cognitive approach to program understated – Integrating formal and structured methods in reverse
engineering – Incorporating reverse engineering for consumer product development-ethical aspects in
reverse engineering.
Module 6: Developing Embedded Product Design: (6 Hours) Discussions on Creating Embedded System Architecture(with at least one Case study example:
Mobile Phone /Adaptive Cruise Controller/ Robonoid about ) -Architectural Structures- Criteria in
selection of Hardware & Software Components, product design by Performance Testing, Costing,
Benchmarking ,Documentation
Reference Books 1. "Product Design and Development", Karl T.Ulrich and Steven D.Eppinger, McGraw –Hill
International Edns.1999
2. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill International
Edition,4th Edition, 2009, ISBN 978-007-127189-9
3. "Effective Product Design and Development", Stephen Rosenthal, Business One Orwin,
4. Homewood, 1992,ISBN, 1-55623-603-4
5. Product Design Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development, KEVIN
OTTO & KRISTIN WOOD, Pearson Education (LPE),2001.
18EI3015 EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
6. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Indian Reprint 2004, Pearson Education, ISBN
9788177588217
7. Yousef Haik, T. M. M. Shahin, “Engineering Design Process”, 2nd Edition Reprint, Cengage
Learning, 2010, ISBN 0495668141
8. Clive L.Dym, Patrick Little, “Engineering Design: A Project-based Introduction”, 3rd
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the image fundamentals of image processing
2. To understand how image are analysed to extract features of interest.
3. To comprehend the concepts of image registration and image fusion
Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course, student will be able to
1. Describe various concepts of digital image processing
2. understand the concepts of image enhancement
3. Illustrate the steps involved in processing digital images
4. Recall thee concepts of Wavelets and image compression
5. Summarize the concept of Image representation and recognition
6. Build embedded based image processing applications.
Module 1: Introduction to Image Processing: (6 Hours)
Basic definitions-image formation- Image processing operations- real time image processing-
embedded image processing- serial processing- parallelism- hardware image processing system.
Module 2: Image enhancement: (8 Hours) Image enhancement in spatial domain, Spatial filtering, 2D image transforms :DFT and its property,
Cosine and sine transform, Hadamard and Haar transform, Image enhancement in frequency domain.
Module 3: Morphological Processing: (8 Hours)
Morphological image processing, Erosion and Dilation, Opening and Closing , Edge detection and
model, Active contour, Texture
Module 4: Wavelet: (8 Hours) Wavelet based Segmentation, Localized feature extraction shape, boundary, Moments and Texture
descriptors, Registration –basics, Transformation functions , Resampling, Image fusion – pixel,
Multiresolution and region based fusion
Module 5: Embedded Audio processing (8 Hours) What is sound- audio signals- speech
processing-audio sources and sinks- Background on Audio converters- audio ADCs and Audio
DACs- connecting to audio converters- I2C, SPI,DACs and CODECs- interconnections- dynamic
range and precisions- fixed point and floating point arithmetic.
Module 6: Embedded Applications: (7 Hours)
3D image visualization , 3D Data sets, Volumetric display, Stereo Viewing , Ray tracing , Image
processing in 3D, Measurements on 3D images, embedded based face detection system, child
monitoring system.
Reference Books 1. Rafael C. Gonzales, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Third Edition, Pearson
Education, 2010.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing Using
Matlab”, Third Edition Tata McGraw Hill Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
3. Anil Jain K. “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
4. William K. Pratt, “Introduction to Digital Image Processing”, CRC Press, 2013.
5. Chris Solomon, Toby Breckon, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing – A practical
approach with examples in Matlab”, Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.
6. Jayaraman, “Digital Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
7. Malay K. Pakhira, “Digital Image Processing and Pattern Recognition”, First Edition, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
18EI3016 EMBEDDED BASED IMAGE PROCESSING
TECHNIQUES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives:
The main objectives of this course is to make the students
1. Understand the fundamental concepts of soft computing, artificial neural networks and
optimization techniques
2. Familiarize with recent advancements in artificial neural networks and optimization
techniques.
3. Understand the optimization techniques.
Outcomes:
At the end of the course students will
1. Recall the concepts of neural networks.
2. Apply neural network tool box for embedded applications.
3. Analyze the concept of fuzzy logic and neuro fuzzy systems.
4. Examine various optimization techniques
5. Choose appropriate optimization techniques for engineering applications.
6. Apply genetic algorithm concepts and tool box for embedded applications
Module 1: Introduction to soft computing and neural networks (7 Hours) Introduction to soft
computing: soft computing vs. hard computing – various types of soft computing techniques, from
conventional AI to computational intelligence, applications of soft computing. Fundamentals of neural
network: biological neuron, artificial neuron, activation function, single layer perceptron – limitations.
Multi-layer perceptron –back propagation algorithm.
Module 2: Artificial Neural Networks (8 Hours) Radial basis function networks – reinforcement learning. Hopfield / recurrent network – configuration
– stability constraints, associative memory and characteristics, limitations and applications. Hopfield
vs. Boltzmann machine. Advances in neural networks – convolution neural networks. Familiarization
of Neural network toolbox for embedded applications.
Module 3: Fuzzy Logic and Neuro -Fuzzy Systems (8 Hours)
Fundamentals of fuzzy set theory: fuzzy sets, operations on fuzzy sets, scalar cardinality, union and
intersection, complement, equilibrium points, aggregation, projection, composition. Fuzzy
membership functions. Fundamentals of neuro-fuzzy systems – ANFIS. Familiarization of ANFIS
Toolbox for process industry.
Module 4: Introduction to Optimization Techniques (8 Hours) Classification of optimization problems – classical optimization techniques. Linear programming –
simplex algorithm. Non-linear programming – steepest descent method, augmented Lagrange
multiplier method – equality constrained problems.
Module 5: Advanced optimization techniques (8 Hours) Simple hill climbing algorithm, Steepest ascent hill climbing – algorithm and features. Simulated
annealing – algorithm and features.
Module 6: Genetic algorithm: (6 Hours)
Working principle, fitness function. Familiarization with Optimization Toolbox, genetic algorithm for
embedded applications
Reference Books:
1. Laurene V. Fausett, “Fundamentals of neural networks, architecture, algorithms and
applications, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and soft computing”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
3. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks – A comprehensive foundation”, Pearson Education, 2005.
4. David E. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithms in search, optimization and machine learning”,
Pearson Education, 2009.
5. Singiresu S. Rao, “Engineering Optimization – Theory and Practice”, 4th edition, John Wiley
& Sons, 2009.
6. Thomas Weise, “Global Optimization algorithms – Theory and applications”, self-published,
2009.
18EI3017 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES FOR EMBEDDED
SYSTEMS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Objectives
1. To teach the fundamental concepts and features of ANDROID
2. To study ANDROID- UI and event handling
3. To study various applications using android
Course outcome:
1. Outline the fundamental features of ANDROID
2. Analyze the resource management in ANDROID.
3. Examine the features of ANDROID- UI and event handling
4. Develop android programming with sensor
5. Analyze features of adapters and widgtes.
6. Create an application using ANDROID programming.
Module 1: ANDROID Overview and Architecture (6 Hours) Introduction to ANDROID, features, applications, environment setup, architecture: LINUX kernel,
libraries, Android runtime, applications component.
Module 2: ANDROID – organizing & accessing the resources (8 Hours) Creating Android application, running the application, organize, alternative resources, accessing
resources, activities, services, broadcast receivers.
Module 3: ANDROID- UI and event handling (8 Hours) Android-intents & Filters, layout types, UI Controls, event handling, styles and themes, Drag and
Drop, notification
Module 4: Developer tools: (8 Hours)
MySQL database, Embedded Android development tools, Graphical Android programming, Sensor
data interfacing, control mechanisms
Module 5:Adapters and widgtes (8 Hours) Adapters:- Array Adapters – Base Adapters – List View and List Activity - Custom list view – Grid
View using adapters - Gallery using adapters
Module 6: Applications (7 Hours)
Audio capture and manager, Bluetooth, camera, GPS module, custom fonts, data backup, sending
EMAIL, sending SMS, making phone calls, exporting Android applications, wifi.
Reference Books:
1. Ronan Schwarz,Phil Dutson, James Steele, Nelson To The Android Developer's Cookbook:
Building Applications with the Android SDK (2nd Edition) (Developer's Library) 2nd Edition
, Addition wesley 2013
2. Camillus Raynaldo Android Programming Painless (Tutorial Book Book), Kindle Edition,
2013
3. Reto Meier Professional Android 4 Application Development 3rd Edition, John wiley and
sons Inc, 2012
4. Bill Phillips,Brian Hardy , Android Programming: The Big Nerd Ranch Guide (Big Nerd
Ranch Guides) 1st Edition Big Nerd Ranch Inc 2013
Course Objectives:
1. To understand and be able to use the basic programming in python
2. To learn how to effectively use Python’s very powerful processing primitives, modelling etc.
3. To implement application programming using python.
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the basic programming s such as data types, variable, loops
2. Create programming with strings, tuples and dictionaries.
3. Build simple programs using Functions in python
4. Analyze file handling mechanism in Python
5. Recall the features and programming with Raspberry Pi
6. Develop an application with python and Raspberry Pi
18EI3018 EMBEDDED ANDROID PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
18EI3019 PYTHON PROGRAMMING AND INTERFACING
TECHNIQUES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 1: Introduction to PYTHON (7 Hours) Python overview- setting up python – IDE- basic syntax – variable types- working with numbers,
strings, branching- if statement, else clause, elif clause, creating while loops, avoiding infinite loops –
for loops- simple programs
Module 2: Working with strings, tuples lists and dictionaries (8 Hours)
sequence operators and functions with strings, indexing strings- building a new strings- slicing
strings- creating and using tuples- creating a Lists- indexing lists- slicing Lists- concatenating Lists –
using Dictionaries- creating and accessing dictionary values
Module 3: Functions (8 Hours)
creating functions- using parameters and Return values- using keyword arguments and default
parameters- using global variables and constants-
Module 4: Files and Exceptions (8 Hours) reading the text files- writing to a text files- storing complex data in files - handling exceptions-
Network programming
Module 5: PYTHON AND MCU: (8 Hours)
Introduction to Raspberry Pi - setup-configurations- GPIOs- serial port – SPI interface- interfacing
I/O modules with Rapberry Pi
Module 6: Applications: (6 Hours)
Image processing- sensor interfacing – wifi controlled led- working with ThingSpeak, twitter, home
automation – camera interface
Reference Books:
1. Mark Lutz,”Learning Python,Powerful OOPs,O’reilly,2011
2. Robert Sedgewick,Kevin Wayne ,Robert Dondero,Intr Programming in Python,
Pearson,2016.
3. Mark J.Guzdial,Barbara Ericson,”Introduction to Computing & Programming in Python,4th
Edition Pearson,2015.
4. Budd, Timothy. Exploring Python. McGraw-Hill science,2009.
5. Guttag, John. Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python. MIT Press, 2013.
6. Zelle, John M. Python Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science. 1st ed. Franklin
Beedle& Associates, 2003
Course Objectives:
1. To develop programming skills in Embedded C
2. To understand array, pointer and sturctures in Embedded C programming
3. To acquire the concepts of file handling in C programming .
Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Develop program in Embedded C using operators, data types and flow control loops
2. Elaborate the concepts of arrays and functions.
3. Explain the basic concepts of structures and unions in C programming
4. Develop programming using pointers.
5. Discuss file handling concepts in embedded C programming
6. Create simple examples with embedded C structure.
Module 1:C Overview and program structure (6 Hours)
Fundamentals of C - Datatypes and Constants -Simple & Formatted I/O - Memory Usage - Operators
& Expressions -Flow Control- Loops.
Module 2: Functions, Arrays: (8 Hours)
Functions: Role of Functions - Pass by value / reference - Returning values from Functions -
Recursive Functions - Call Back Functions -Implications on Stack -Library Vs User defined function -
Passing variable number of arguments Arrays: Defining, initializing and using arrays -Multi
Dimensional Arrays -Arrays of Characters and Strings -Arrays and Pointers -Passing arrays to
functions -String handling with and without library functions. Storage Classes: Scope and Life -
Automatic, Static, External, Register-Memory(CPU / RAM).
Module 3: Structures and Unions: (8 Hours) Structures & Unions: Declaration, initialization-
Accessing like objects -Nested Structures -Array of Structures-Passing structures through functions -
Allocation of memory and holes -Structure Comparison -Structure bit operation -Typedef for
portability –Unions -Overlapping members
18EI3020 ADVANCED COURSE IN EMBEDDED C L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 4: Pointers and Memory (8 Hours)
Pointers : The purpose of pointers -Defining pointers -The & and * operators -Pointer Assignment -
Pointer Arithmetic -Multiple indirections-Advanced pointer types -Generic and Null Pointer-
Function Pointers- Pointers to Arrays and Strings -Array of Pointers -Pointers to Structure and Union
-Pointers to Dynamic memory -Far, Near and Huge Pointers -Pointer Type Casting: Dynamic
Memory Allocation: Malloc(), Calloc(), Realloc(), Free(), Farmalloc(), Farcalloc()
Module 5: File Handling Concepts :(8 Hours)
Concept of a FILE data type, Inode, FILE structure- File pointer -Character handling routines -
Formatted Data Routines-Raw data Routines -Random Access to FILE preprocessors: #define •
Macros • Precedence • Conditional Compilation • Warnings • #pragma • Predefined Macros
Module 6: Embedded C programming structure: (7 Hours)
Distinguish C and Embedded C, Embedded C programming structure- Embedded software
development process: build process- compiling -linking- locating- downloading- debugging- remote
debuggers- emulators and simulators-declaration of ports and registers- simple examples using
embedded C
Reference Books:
1. Mark Siegesmund Embedded C Programming: Techniques and Applications of C and PIC
MCUS, Elsevier Inc., 2014
2. Michael Barr Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++, O’reilly, 1999
3. Richard H. Barnett, Sarah Cox, Larry O'Cull , Embedded C Programming and the Atmel
AVR, Delmar Cengage learning 2007.
Course Objectives
1. To teach the fundamental concepts of how process are created and controlled with OS.
2. To study on programming logic of modeling Process based on range of OS features
3. To compare types and Functionalities in commercial OS, application development using
RTOS
Course outcome:
1. Contrast the fundamental concepts of real-time operating systems
2. Outline the concepts of RTOS Task and scheduler
3. Categorize real time Semaphores
4. Summarize the concepts of Mailbox, Message Queue
5. Develop program for real time applications
6. Understand the structure of Memory Management
Module 1:Real time system concepts (7 Hours) Foreground/Background systems- resources-shared resources-multitasking- tasks-context switches-
kernels –schedulers-task priorities-dead locks inter task communication- interrupts - μCOS I, II and
III comparison
Module 2 :Kernel structure in μCOS (8 Hours) Tasks-Task states- control blocks-ready list – scheduling –Idle task-statistics Task- Interrupts under
μCOS-II, task management in μCOS- time management in μCOS
Module 3: Semaphores (8 Hours) Event control blocks- semaphore management- creating , deleting a semaphore, waiting on a
semaphore, creating and deleting Mutex, waiting on a mutex, event flag management.
Module 4: Message Mailbox management: (8 Hours) Creating and deleting a mailbox μCOS – waiting for a message at a Mailbox, sending a message to a
Mailbox, getting message without waiting- obtaining the status of a Mailbox, using a Maibox as a
binary semaphore
Module 5: Message Queue Management: (8 Hours)
Creating and deleting a Message Queue- waiting for a Message Queue- sending a message to a queue
FIFO, LIFO- getting a Message without waiting- flushing a Queue- obtaining status of Queue- using a
Message Queue when reading analogue inputs and counting semaphores.
Module 6: Memory Management (6 Hours)
Memory control blocks- creating a partition, obtaining a memory block, returning a memory block-
obtaining status of a memory partition- using memory partitions- waiting for memory blocks from a
partition-porting μCOS
18EI3021 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books:
1. Jean J. Labrosse, MicroC/OS-II: The Real Time Kernel, Taylor & Francis, 05-Feb-2002
2. K.C. Wang Embedded and Real-Time Operating Systems, Springer 2017
3. Qing Li, Caroline Yao , Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems, CMP books, 2003
Course Objectives
1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of wireless embedded networking
2. To study on design of automation in instrumentation
3. To introduce design of Programmable measurement & control of electrical Devices & grid
Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Understand the fundamentals of wired embedded networking techniques
2. Understand the concept of embedded networking
3. Summarize the concept of sensor network implementation
4. Develop system automation with user interface programming
5. Apply the concept of embedded system in electrical apparatus
6. Analyze input-output configurations of computational processors with improved
communication strategies
Module 1: Embedded process communication with instrument bus (6 Hours) Embedded
Networking: Introduction – Cluster of Instruments in System: introduction to bus protocols,
connectors, Bus Architecture & Interfacing of external instruments to – RS 232C,RS – 422, RS 485
and USB standards – embedded Ethernet – MOD bus and CAN bus.
Module 2: Wireless Embedded networking (8 Hours) Wireless sensor networks – Introduction – Sensor node architecture – Commercially available sensor
nodes -Network Topology –Localization –Time Synchronization - Energy efficient MAC protocols –
SMAC –Energy efficient and robust routing – Data Centric routing Applications of sensor networks;
Applications - Home Control - Building Automation - Industrial Automation
Module 3: Sensor network implementation (8 Hours)
Sensor Programming- Introduction to TinyOS Programming and fundamentals of Programming
sensors using nesC- Algorithms for WSN – Techniques for Protocol Programming.
Module 4: Building system automation (8 Hours) Concept of microcontroller Based & PC based data acquisition – Concept of Virtual Instrumentation
Programming Environment to build a Virtual Instrumentation, Building system automation with
graphical user interface programming-Programmable Logic Controllers-introduction-Ladder&
Functional Block programming-Case study on Temperature control, Valve sequencing control.
Module 5: Measurement and embedded control of electrical apparatus (8 Hours) Sensor Types & Characteristics: Sensing Voltage, Current, flux, Torque, Position, Proximity, Force,
Data acquisition & Display system- Signal conditioning circuit design- computers/ embedded
processor interfacing circuit -design automation and protection of electrical appliances –processor
based digital controllers for switching Actuators: Servo motors, Stepper motors, Relays
Module 6: Communication for large electrical system automation (7 Hours)
Data Acquisition, Monitoring, Communication, Event Processing, and Polling Principles, SCADA
system principles – outage management– Decision support application for substation automation,
extended control feeder automation, Performance measure and response time, SCADA Data Models-
need- sources- interface.
Reference Books:
1. Control and automation of electrical power distribution systems, James Northcote-Green,
Robert Wilson, CRC, Taylor and Francis, 2006
2. Krzysztof Iniewski,”Smart Grid, Infrastructure & Networking”, TMcGH, 2012
3. Robert Faludi, Building Wireless Sensor Networks, O’Reilly, 2011
4. W. Bolton, Programmable Logic Controllers, 5th Ed, Elsevier, 2010.
5. Shih-Lin Wu, Yu-Chee Tseng,{“Wireless Ad Hoc Networking, PAN, LAN, SAN, Aurebach
Pub,2012
Course Objectives
1. To Study about Internet of Things technologies and its role in real time applications
18EI3022 EMBEDDED NETWORKING AND AUTOMATION OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
L T P C
3 0 0 3
18EI3023 INTERNET OF THINGS AND PROTOCOLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
2. To familiarize the accessories and communication techniques for IOT
3. To familiarize the different platforms and Attributes for IOT OUTCOMES
Course Outcomes:
1. Outline the basic concepts of IOT and its present developments.
2. Analyze the architectural overview of IOT
3. Summarize various protocols in data link and network layer
4. Summarize various protocols in transport, session and service layer
5. Analyse data analytics for IOT
6. Create an application using IOT
Module 1: Introduction to internet of things (7 Hours) IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and needed
capabilities, An IoT architecture outline, standards considerations. M2M and IoT Technology
Fundamentals- Devices and gateways, Local and wide area networking, Data management, Business
processes in IoT, Everything as a Service (XaaS), M2M and IoT Analytics, Knowledge Management
Module 2:IOT Architecture: (8 Hours)
Node Structure - Sensing, Processing, Communication, Powering, Networking - Topologies,
Layer/Stack architecture, IoT standards, Cloud computing for IoT, Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy,
beacons.
Module 3:IOT Data link layer & Network layer protocols(8 Hours) PHY/MAC Layer(3GPP
MTC, IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15), Wireless HART,Z-Wave, Bluetooth Low Energy, Zigbee Smart
Energy, DASH7 - Network Layer-IPv4, IPv6, 6LoWPAN, 6TiSCH,ND, DHCP, ICMP, RPL,
CORPL, CARP
Module 4:Transport, Session and Service layer protocols (8 Hours) Transport Layer (TCP, MPTCP, UDP, DCCP, SCTP)-(TLS, DTLS) – Session Layer-HTTP, CoAP,
XMPP, AMQP, MQTT , Service Layer Protocols & Security : Service Layer -oneM2M, ETSI M2M,
OMA, BBF – Security in IoT Protocols – MAC 802.15.4 , 6LoWPAN, RPL, Application Layer
Module 5:Data Analystics for IOT (8 Hours) Services/Attributes: Big-Data Analytics and Visualization, Dependability, Security, Maintainability.
Data analytics for IoT: A framework for data-driven decision making , Descriptive, Predictive and
Prescriptive Analytics , Business Intelligence and Artificial Intelligence Importance of impact and
open innovation in data-driven decision making.
Module 6: Case Studies (6 Hours) Smart cities, Smart Grid, Electric vehicle charging, Environment, Agriculture, Productivity
Applications
Reference Books:
1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijai Madisetti : A Hands-on Approach “Internet of Things”,
Universities Press 2015.
2. Oliver Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi “The Internet of Things”, Wiley,2016.
3. Samuel Greengard, “ The Internet of Things”, The MIT press, 2015
4. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally “Designing the Internet of Things “Wiley,2014.
5. Jean- Philippe Vasseur, Adam Dunkels, “Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next
Internet” Morgan Kuffmann Publishers, 2010.
6. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and
sons, 2014
7. Lingyang Song/Dusit Niyato/ Zhu Han/ Ekram Hossain,” Wireless Device-to-Device
Communications and Networks, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS,2015
8. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, StamatisKarnouskos, David
Boyle, “From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence”, 1 st Edition, Academic Press, 2014
Course Objectives 1. To educate the fundamental concepts or robotics
2. To educate on the robot drives and power transmission systems
3. To educate vision system for robotics
Course Outcomes 1. Recall the concept of robotics
2. Summarize building blocks of automation
18EI3024 ROBOTICS AND FACTORY AUTOMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
3. Describe different sensors for robotic applications.
4. Analyze vision system for robotics.
5. Identify any intelligent automation system
6. Design ladder diagram for automation system
Module 1: Fundamental concepts of robotics: (6 Hours)
History, Present status and future trends in Robotics and automation - Laws of Robotics - Robot
definitions - Robotics systems and robot anatomy - Specification of Robots - resolution, repeatability
and accuracy of a manipulator. Robotic applications.
Module 2: Robot drives and power transmission systems: (8 Hours)
Robot drive mechanisms, hydraulic – electric – servomotor stepper motor - pneumatic drives,
Mechanical transmission method - Gear transmission, Belt drives, cables, Roller chains, Link - Rod
systems - Rotary-to-Rotary motion conversion, Rotary-to-Linear motion conversion, Rack and Pinion
drives, Lead screws, Ball Bearing screws, End effectors – Types.
Module 3: Sensors: (8 Hours)
Principle of operation, types and selection of Position& velocity sensors, Potentiometers, Encoders,
Resolvers, LVDT, Tacho generators, Proximity sensors. Limit switches – Tactile sensors - Touch
sensors - Force and torque sensors.
Module 4: Vision systems for robotics: (8 Hours)
Robot vision systems, Illumination techniques, Image capture- solid state cameras – Image
representation - Gray scale and color images, image sampling and quantization - Image processing
and analysis –, Image data reduction – Segmentation - Feature extraction - Object Recognition- Image
capturing and communication - JPEG,
MPEGs and H.26x standards, packet video, error concealment- Image texture analysis.
Module 5: Transformations and kinematics: (8 Hours)
Matrix representation- Homogeneous transformation matrices - The forward and inverse kinematics
of robots - D-H representation of forward kinematic equations of robots.
Module 6: Factory automation: (7 Hours)
Flexible Manufacturing Systems concept - Automatic feeding lines, ASRS, transfer lines, automatic
inspection - Computer Integrated Manufacture - CNC, intelligent automation. Industrial networking,
bus standards, HMI Systems, DCS and SCADA, Wireless controls.
Reference Books 1. Richard D Klafter, Thomas A Chmielewski, Michael Negin, "Robotics Engineering – An
Integrated Approach", Eastern
2. Economy, Prentice Hall of India P Ltd., 2006.
3. Mikell P Groover et. al., "Industrial Robots - Technology, Programming and Applications",
McGraw Hill, New York, 2008.
4. Saeed B Niku ,”Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications ”’PHI Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi,2003.
Course Objectives
1. To develop an understanding on business promotion process.
2. To expose students on the skills required for success in business.
3. To impart embedded system technology based entrepreneurship.
Course Outcomes : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
1. Recall the basics for entrepreneurship
2. Analyze the challenges in entrepreneurship
3. Examine the responsibilities for entrepreneurship
4. Understand the ethics in entrepreneurship
5. Analyze the scope of entrepreneurship in embedded field
6. Analyze the scope of entrepreneurship in embedded product development
Module 1: Basics for Entrepreneurship (7 Hours) The entrepreneurial culture and structure -theories of entrepreneurship -entrepreneurial traits - types -
behavioural patterns of entrepreneurs -entrepreneurial motivation -establishing entrepreneurial
systems -idea processing, personnel, financial information and intelligence, rewards and motivation
concept bank -Role of industrial Fairs.
18EI3025 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT FOR
EMBEDDED SYSTEM
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
Module 2: Challenges for Entrepreneurship (8 Hours) Setting quality standards- recruitment strategies- time schedules- Financial analysis - credit facilities
Marketing channel – advertisement- institutions providing technical, financial and marketing
assistance-factory design -design requirements -applicability of the Factories Act.
Module 3: Responsibilities in Entrepreneurship (8 Hours) Steps for starting a small industry -selection of type of organization -Incentives and subsidies -
Central Govt. schemes and State Govt. Schemes -incentives to SSI -registration, Registration and
Licensing requirements for sales tax, CST, Excise Duty -Power -Exploring export possibilities-
incentives for exports -import of capital goods and raw materials- Entrepreneurship development
programmes in India- Role and Improvement in Indian Economy.
Module 4: Ethics in Entrepreneurship: (8 Hours)
Effective Costumer Care -Mechanism for Handling Complaints - Business Etiquettes and Body
Language - Ethics, Values and Morale at Workplace - Managing Ethical Behaviour at Workplace.
Module 5: Scope in Embedded system field (8 Hours) Entrepreneurship opportunities in Embedded system technologies - embedded systems design,
modeling, Feasibility study on embedded system products- Entrepreneurial skills for embedded
system hardware and software architecture, software and hardware co-design and challenges;
problems of entrepreneurship in Embedded system field.
Module 6: Scope through Embedded products (6 Hours) Embedded system Product development- feature driven development- release management-market
pull product search, Entrepreneurial case studies: Mobile phone development- automation
components-Washing machine- Food Processing system and devices- High Performance embedded
computers-Industrial Controllers.
Reference Books:
1. Kuratko, Enmterpreneurship : A Contemporary Approach, Thomson Learning, 2001.
2. Thomas Zimmerer et.al., Essentials of Entrepreneurship and small business Management 3rd
Ed. Pearson Education, 2002.
3. Greene, Entrepreneurship: Ideas in Action, Thomson Learning, Mumbai, 2000
4. Jeffry Timmons, New Ventrure creation, McGraw Hill, 1999.
5. Gupta and Smivasan, Entrepreneurial Development, New Delhi, Sultan Chand, 1992
6. LyLa B. Das "Embedded Systems: An Integrated Approach" Pearson, 2013
7. James K.peckol ,” Embedded Systems: A contemporary Design Tool”, Wiley,2014
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
LIST OF COURSES
S.No Course Code Name of the Course
Credits
1. 16EI3001 Advanced Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0
2. 17EI2001 Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0
3. 17EI2002 Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2
4. 17EI2003 Virtual Instrumentation and Data Acquisition Laboratory 0:0:1
5. 17EI2004 Electrical and Electronic Measurements 3:0:0
6. 17EI2005 Electrical Measurements and Machines Laboratory 0:0:2
7. 17EI2006 Control System 3:1:0
8. 17EI2007 Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:1
9. 17EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0
10. 17EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control 3:0:0
11. 17EI2010 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
12. 17EI2011 Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2
13. 17EI2012 Industrial Data Communication Networks 3:0:0
14. 17EI2013 Digital Control Systems 3:0:0
15. 17EI2014 Logic and Distributed Control Systems 3:0:0
16. 17EI2015 Logic and Distributed Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
17. 17EI2016 Sensors and Data Acquisition 3:0:0
18. 17EI2017 Biomedical Instrumentation 3:0:0
19. 17EI2018 Automotive Instrumentation 3:0:0
20. 17EI2019 Analytical Instrumentation 3:0:0
21. 17EI2020 Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries 3:0:0
22. 17EI2021 Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries 3:0:0
23. 17EI2022 Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries 3:0:0
24. 17EI2023 Optoelectronics and Laser Based Instrumentation 3:0:0
25. 17EI2024 Power Plant Instrumentation 3:0:0
26. 17EI2025 Aircraft Instrumentation 3:0:0
27. 17EI2026 Telemetry and Remote Control 3:0:0
28. 17EI2027 Robotics and Automation 3:0:0
29. 17EI2028 SCADA Systems Design 3:0:0
30. 17EI2029 Power Electronics and Drives for Industrial Control 3:0:0
31. 17EI2030 Smart Sensor Technology 3:0:0
32. 17EI2031 Pervasive devices and technology 3:0:0
33. 17EI2032 Theory and Design of Neuro Fuzzy Controllers 3:0:0
34. 17EI2033 Microcontroller based system design 3:0:0
35. 17EI2034 Instrumentation and Control Systems 3:0:0
36. 17EI2035 Instrumentation for Agriculture 3:0:0
37. 17EI2036 Environmental Instrumentation 3:0:0
38. 17EI2037 Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0
39. 17EI2038 Ultrasonic Instrumentation 3:0:0
40. 17EI2039 Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation 3:0:0
41. 17EI2040 Building Automation 3:0:0
42. 17EI2041 Measurement and Instrumentation 3:0:0
43. 17EI2042 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 3:0:0
44. 17EI2043 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0
45. 17EI2044 Nano Scale Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0
46. 17EI3001 Instrumentation 3:0:0
47. 17EI3002 Advanced Process Control 3:0:0
48. 17EI3003 Advanced Control Systems 3:0:0
49. 17EI3004 Discrete Control System 3:0:0
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
50. 17EI3005 Intelligent Controllers 3:0:0
51. 17EI3006 Optimal Control Theory 3:0:0
52. 17EI3007 Advanced Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0
53. 17EI3008 System Identification and Adaptive Control 3:0:0
54. 17EI3009 Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2
55. 17EI3010 Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
56. 17EI3011 Embedded Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
57. 17EI3012 Real Time and Embedded Control Automation 3:0:0
58. 17EI3013 Industrial Automation Systems 3:0:0
59. 17EI3014 Control System Design 3:0:0
60. 17EI3015 SCADA systems and Applications 3:0:0
61. 17EI3016 Design of Linear Multivariable control systems 3:0:0
62. 17EI3017 Embedded Instrumentation 3:0:0
63. 17EI3018 Networks and protocols for instrumentation and control 3:0:0
64. 17EI3019 Multi Sensor Data Fusion 3:0:0
65. 17EI3020 Non Linear Control Systems 3:0:0
66. 17EI3021 Robust Control 3:0:0
67. 17EI3022 Process Modelling and Control 3:0:0
68. 17EI3023 Advanced processor for control and automation 3:0:0
69. 17EI3024 Advanced Embedded Signal Processing 3:0:0
70. 17EI3025 Programmable Devices for industrial automation 3:0:0
71. 17EI3026 FPGA control design laboratory 0:0:2
72. 17EI3027 Embedded Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
73. 17EI3028 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0
74. 17EI3029 Embedded based Biomedical sensors and signal conditioning 3:0:0
75. 17EI3030 MEMS Technology for Embedded design 3:0:0
76. 17EI3031 Embedded Product Development 3:0:0
77. 17EI3032 Robotics and Factory Automation 3:0:0
78. 17EI3033 Linear Systems 3:0:0
16EI3001 ADVANCED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Learn the basics concepts of graphical programming.
Acquire knowledge on Data Acquisition Systems and network interface concepts.
To enable design and programming of Virtual Instruments for real time applications
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Create a Virtual Instrument using graphical programming.
Develop systems for real-time signal acquisition and analysis.
Apply concepts of network interface for data communication.
Implement and design data acquisition systems for practical applications.
Suggest solutions for automation and control applications using virtual instrumentation.
Description:
Introduction – Virtual Instrumentation and its evolution, graphical programming, comparison with conventional
programming, Development of virtual instrument, programming techniques,Instrument drivers.Data acquisition:
Introduction to data acquisition on PC, Sampling fundamentals, Sensor and its characteristics, Signal Processing
and manipulation, Calibration, Resolution, Data Acquisition Interface Requirements,Interface standards and PC
buses, Advances in Sensing Technology, Applications: Instrument control, System Simulation, Development of data
acquisition and control system, Image Acquisition and processing, motion control, remote data management
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References:
1. Gray Johnson, LabVIEW Graphical Programming, Second edition, McGraw Hill, Newyork, 1997
2. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., 2005
4. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition: Techniques for Measurement, Instrumentation and
Control, Newnes, 2000.
5. Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, John Park, and Deon Reynders, “Industrial Data Networks”, Elsevier, 2004.
6. P.Surekha, S.Sumathi, “LabVIEW based Advance Instrumentation”, Springer, 2007.
7. D Patranabis, ‘Sensors and Transducers’, PHI 2nd Edition, 2003.
8. Lisa K Wells and Geffrey Travis, “LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical Programming Even Made Easier”,
Prentice Hall Inc., 1996.
9. Clyde F Coombs, “Electronic Instruments Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc., 1999.
17EI2001 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To gain knowledge on methods of measurement, classification of transducers and measurement errors.
Understand static and dynamic characteristics of transducers
Get exposed to different types of resistive, inductive and capacitive transducers and their application.
Course Outcomes:
Describe the mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals involved in measurement applications.
Examine the measuring problems related to sensors and transducers
Select the suitable sensor/transducer for a given application.
Determine the static and dynamic characteristics of transducers
Formulate sensors using MEMS and Nano technology
Design magnetic sensor and digital sensor based measuring circuits
Unit I - Fundamental of Measurements and Classification of Transducers: Units and standards – generalized
instrumentation system-Calibration techniques – Static calibration – errors in instrumentation system: Limiting error
and probable error – Error analysis – Statistical methods – Odds and uncertainty – Classification of transducers –
Selection of transducers.
Unit II - Characteristics of Measuring Instruments: Static: Accuracy, precision, resolution, sensitivity, linearity,
span and range - Dynamic characteristics: Mathematical model of transducer – Zero, I and II order transducers -
Response to impulse, step, ramp and sinusoidal inputs
Unit III - Resistive Principle based Transducers: Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and
applications of potentiometer, strain gauge, resistance thermometer, Thermistor, hot-wire anemometer,
piezoresistive sensor and humidity sensor.
Unit IV - Inductive and Capacitive Principle based Transducers: Induction potentiometer – Variable reluctance
transducers – EI pick up – Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and applications of LVDT –
Capacitive transducer and types – Capacitor microphone – Frequency response.
Unit V - Other Sensors and Transducers: Force and torque transducers: proving ring-hydraulic and pneumatic
load cell-dynamometer and gyroscope -Piezoelectric transducer - Hall Effect transducer – Magneto elastic sensor-
Digital transducers – Smart sensors – proximity devices, biosensors, Film sensors, MEMS – Nano sensors.
Text Books
1. Doebelin E.O. and Manik D.N., “Measurement Systems”, 6 th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd., 2011.
2. Renganathan, S.,” Transducer Engineering”, Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.
Reference Books
1. Neubert, H.K.P., “Instrument Transducers – An Introduction to their Performance and Design”, Oxford
University Press, Cambridge, 2003.
2. Albert, D. Helfrick and Cooper, W. D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
3. Measurement Techniques”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. Murthy, D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2010.
5. John P. Bentley, “Principles of Measurement Systems”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2004. Patranabis,
D., “Sensors and Transducers”, 2 nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2010
17EI2002 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objectives:
To gain knowledge on classification of transducers and measurement errors.
Understand static and dynamic characteristics of transducers
Get exposed to different types of resistive, inductive and capacitive transducers and their application.
Course Outcomes:
Demonstrate the performance characteristics of various transducers
Design a measurement system for an application
Acquire Knowledge on testing the instruments
Obtain idea about Calibration techniques
Understanding of loading effect
Trouble shooting of various sensors and transducers
Description:
This laboratory course enables the students to gain practical knowledge on sensors, their characteristics, design and
applications
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2003 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND DATA ACQUISITION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:1
Course Objective:
To introduce the basics concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.
To develop ability for programming in LabVIEW using structures, graphs and charts for system
monitoring, processing and controlling
To learn about the data acquisition and interfacing concepts using a state-of-the-art software platform such
as National Instrument's LabVIEW.
Course Outcomes:
Create, Edit and Debug Virtual Instruments
Develop Virtual instrumentation systems for practical applications
Apply PC interfacing principles for data acquisition
Understand the usage of Instrument Driver for Computer measurement and control.
Formulate instrumentation and control applications using Lab VIEW
Appraise the usefulness of LabVIEW for real time data acquisition and analysis
Description:
This course enables the students to gain practical knowledge in programming techniques, data acquisition and
interfacing techniques of virtual instrumentation and apply it to real time environment.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2004 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To provide information on the basics of Electronic Measurements.
To include specialized information needed for Analog and Digital Instrumentation.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
To exploit an instrument’s potential, to be aware of its limitations.
Course Outcomes:
Investigate the Electromechanical and Electronic Equipment.
Select the proper instrument for measurement.
Develop instruments to measure Resistance, Impedance, Voltage and Current.
Demonstrate different types of waveform generators and analyzers and their applications.
Examine on virtual instrumentation, its applications, programming and DAQ cards and modules.
Create measurement method for the real time application using VI.
Unit I - Measurement of Voltage and Current: Electrical Measurement: D’Arsonval galvanometer – Theory,
calibration, application – Principle, construction, operation and comparison of moving coil, moving iron meters,
Extension of range and calibration of voltmeter and ammeter – Errors and compensation. Electronic Voltmeter and
their advantages – Types, Differential amplifier, source follower.
Unit II - Measurement of Power, Energy, Resistance and Impedance: Electrodynamometer type wattmeter –
Theory & its operation– Induction type energy meter – Calibration of wattmeter and Energy meter, D.C Bridges
Wheatstone bridge– Kelvin double bridge A.C bridges – Measurement of inductance, capacitance – Q of coil –
Maxwell Bridge – Wein’s bridge – Schering bridge ––Hay’s bridge- Q meter, ohmmeter
Unit III - Signal Generator and Signal Analyzers: Wien Bridge, RC Phase Shift Oscillator, Pulse Generator &
Function Generator– Harmonic distortion analyzer – Spectrum analyzer
Unit IV - Digital Instrument and Displays: Electronic Counters, Digital Frequency Meter, Digital Voltmeter,
Digital Multi-meter, LED & LCD.
Unit V - CRO and Virtual Instrumentation: General purpose cathode ray oscilloscope – Dual trace, dual beam
and sampling oscilloscopes– Analog and digital storage oscilloscope, Virtual instrumentation (VI) – Definition,
flexibility – Block diagram and architecture of virtual instruments – Virtual instruments versus traditional
instruments – Software in virtual instrumentation
Text Books
1. David A Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements”, Third Edition, Ox for University Press,
2013.
Reference Books
1. A.D. Helfrick and W.D. Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques,
Prentice Hall India Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
2. H.S. Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
3. J.J. Carr, Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement, Pearson Education India, New Delhi,
2011.
4. M.M.S. Anand, Electronics Instruments and Instrumentation Technology, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi,
2009.
5. Sanjay Gupta, Virtual Instrumentation using Lab view, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2010.
6. Sumathi S and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.
7. Bouwens A.J., Digital Instrumentation, McGraw Hill Ltd., USA, 2002.
17EI2005 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MACHINES LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objectives:
Understand characteristics of D.C machines and transformer.
Apply the measurements techniques to bridge circuits.
Develop platform independent applications in instrumentation system.
Course Outcomes:
Infer the basic concepts to obtain the no load and load characteristics of D.C machines and transformer.
Show proficiency in testing and control.
Identifying the type of special machines used for that particular application.
Develop the measurement techniques for a given application while carrying out projects.
Design the experiments using calibration for a measurement system.
Create prototype for latest instrumentation for real time application.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2006 CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:1:0
Course Objectives:
Understand about various representations of systems.
To develop linear models mainly state variable model and Transfer function model from Non Linear
systems.
To make the students apply linear systems in time domain and frequency domain.
Course Outcomes:
Develop mathematical model of physical systems
Analyze the various linear models in time domain and frequency domain.
Outline the basics of state space representation of systems
Examine the stability of systems
Design appropriate controller for the given specifications.
Acquire knowledge on compensator design.
Unit I - Modeling of Linear Time Invariant System: Control system: Open loop and Closed loop – Feedback
control system characteristics – First principle modelling: Mechanical, Electrical and Hydraulic systems – Transfer
function representations: Block diagram and Signal flow graph.
Unit II - State Space Model of LTI and LTV Systems: State variable formulation – Non uniqueness of state space
model – State transition matrix –Free and forced responses for Time Invariant and Time Varying Systems –
Controllability – Observability.
Unit III - Time Domain and Stability Analysis :Standard test inputs – Time responses – Time domain
specifications – Stability analysis: Concept of stability – Routh Hurwitz stability criterion – Root locus:
Construction and Interpretation.
Unit IV - Frequency Domain Analysis : Frequency response plots: Bode plot, Polar plot and Nyquist plot –
Frequency domain specifications: Resonance peak, Resonant frequency and Bandwidth – Stability Analysis: Gain
margin and Phase margin.
Unit V - Compensator Design: Design specifications – Lead, Lag and Lag-lead compensators using Root
locus and Bode plot techniques.
Text Books
1. Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, 7th
Edition PHI Learning Private Ltd., 2010.
2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers, 2010.
Reference Books
1. Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Education Pearson, 3rd
Impression, 2009.
2. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and Houpis Sttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System Analysis
and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.
3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Ltd, 5th
Edition, 2010.
17EI2007 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:1
Course Objectives:
To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control
To inculcate the controller design concepts
To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modeling
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Outcomes:
Determine the mathematical model of physical systems.
Design a suitable controller for a process.
Analyze the time domain and frequency domain characteristics of systems.
Apply the control system concepts to servomotor, synchro.
Design and appraise the use of compensators in a control loop
Evaluate the merits and demerits of feedback control systems.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2008 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credit: 3: 0: 0
Course Objectives:
To learn the principle of Pressure, Temperature, flow, level, density and viscosity measurements.
To know about the selection, calibration and installation of different instruments
To explore the application of measuring instruments in various industries
Course Outcomes:
Apply the knowledge of various Measuring Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation system.
Calibrate the industrial instruments and use them in various fields.
Select suitable instrument for a given application
Analyzing the instrument in Industry
Perform Calibration of Instruments
Design Instrumentation Circuits for measurement systems.
Unit I - Level Measurement :Float operated devices - Displacer devices - Pressure gauge method - Diaphragm box-
Air purge system-Differential pressure method – Hydro-step for boiler drum level measurement - Electrical methods
- Conductive sensors - capacitive sensors -Ultrasonic method -Solid level measurement
Unit II - Flow Measurement: Positive displacement flowmeters - Inferential flowmeter-Turbine flowmeter-
Variable head flowmeters -Rotameter - Electromagnetic flowmeter - Ultrasonic flowmeter-Coriolis mass flowmeter-
Calibration of flowmeters application.
Unit III - Temperature Measurement: Temperature standards - fixed points -filled-system thermometers -
Bimetallic thermometer Thermocouple - Laws of thermocouple - Cold junction compensation- Measuring circuits -
Speed of response -linearization - Resistance thermometer- 3 lead and 4 lead connections - thermistors - IC
temperature sensors - Radiation pyrometer- Optical Pyrometer
Unit IV - Pressure Measurement: Pressure standards - Dead weight tester - Different types of manometers -
Elastic elements, Electrical methods using strain gauge-High pressure measurement-Vacuum gauges - Mcleod gauge
- Thermal conductivity gauges -Ionization gauge- Differential pressure transmitters
Unit V - Density, Viscosity and Composition: Measurement of density – U-type densitometer, Buoyancy meter
Measurement of composition – Viscosity measurement methods, Electrical conductivity cell, non-dispersive
photometers, pH meter, Zirconia oxygen analyzer, dumbbell O2 analyzer, Gas chromatograph, Mass spectrometer
Text Book
1. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney , “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation &
Control” Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Limited, 2017.
Reference Books
1. Doebelin, E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, fourth edition McGraw Hill
International, 1978.
2. Noltingk, B.E., “Instrumentation Reference Book”, II edition Butterworth Heinemann, 1996.
3. Flow measurement, “Practical Guides for Measurement and Control”, ISA publication, 1991.
4. Anderew, W.G., “Applied Instrumentation in Process Industries” - a survey Vol-I Gulf Publishing
Company.
5. Liptak, B.G., “Process Measurement & Analysis”, IV Edition, Chilton Book Company 1995.
6. Considine, D.M., “Process Instruments and Control & Handbook", McGraw Hill 1985.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
17EI2009 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process.
To understand the design of various control schemes.
To apply the control system in various processes.
Course Outcomes:
Identify the fundamentals of system identification by deriving the models of physical systems.
Describe the characteristics, selection and sizing of control valves.
Apply various tuning techniques to attain the optimum gain in the composite controllers.
Analyze and decide suitable control schemes for various industrial applications.
Design the conventional controllers for regulating different parameters like pressure, temperature, level
and flow in the process control industries.
Interpret various processes with their P&ID diagrams and understand nomenclature associated with
Process control domain.
Unit I - Process dynamics: Process Control System: Terms and objectives - piping and Instrumentation diagram -
instrument terms and symbols- Process characteristics: Process equation- degrees of freedom- modeling of simple
systems – thermal – gas – liquid systems- Self- regulating processes- interacting and non interacting processes
Unit II - Basic control actions: Controller modes: Basic control action- two position- multi position- floating
control modes Continuous controller modes: proportional, integral, derivative. PI – PD – PID – Integral wind-up and
prevention- Auto/Manual transfer- Response of controllers for different test inputs- Selection of control modes for
processes like level-pressure-temperature and flow
Unit III - Optimum controller settings: Controller tuning Methods: Evaluation criteria - IAE, ISE, ITAE. Process
reaction curve method,- Ziegler –Nichol’s tuning- damped oscillation method- Closed loop response of I & II order
systems with and without valve -measuring element dynamics
Unit IV - Final control elements: Pneumatic Actuators – Electric Actuators - Control valves- construction details-
types- plug characteristics- Valve sizing- Selection of control valves- Inherent and installed valve characteristics-
Cavitation and flashing in control valves- Valve actuators and positioners
Unit V - Advanced control system: Cascade control- ratio control- feed forward control- Split range and selective
control- Multivariable process control- interaction of control loops - Case Studies: Distillation column- boiler drum
level control- Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor control
Text Books
1. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.
3. Curtis D .Johnson,”Process control instrumentation technology,” Prentice Hall , New Jersey 2006.
Reference Books
1. Smith C.L and Corripio. A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 2006.
2. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control,” John Willey
and Sons, Singapore, 2010.
3. B.Wayne Bequette, “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation” Prentice Hall, New Jersey-2003
4. Peter Harriott, “Process Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
17EI2010 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objectives:
To gain the knowledge of the working of Industrial Instruments
To learn the methods of Calibration for Instruments.
To understand the operation of Instrumentation Circuits.
Course Outcomes:
Identify various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Design control algorithms for different control loops.
Apply ladder logic in Programmable Logic Controller for Control purpose
Select the type of transducer for the Industrial application.
Develop Instrumentation Circuits for measurement systems.
Suggest the instrument suitable for a specific application
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2011 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objectives:
To introduce the practical concepts of digital controllers.
To demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI
To provide knowledge about controller design, simulation and implementation using
Course Outcomes:
Recall the concepts of process dynamics and control.
Identify the fundamental methods to transmit the industrial parameters such as Pressure, Temperature,
Level and Flow to the computer.
Apply the control algorithms for the real time plants.
Analyze the characteristics of the Actuating signal.
Design conventional controllers to regulate the process stations present in the lab.
Select suitable controller to the appropriate process stations.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2012 INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Understand the basics of networking
Comprehend the significance of different Industrial Interface Standards
Apply the appropriate interface for different applications
Course Outcomes:
Identify the conventional point to point and multipoint interface standards
Classify the different channel access methods
Choose the appropriate Industrial communication network
Explain the various Industrial Communication Standards
Justify the need of wireless network
Describe the advanced wireless communication standards
Unit I - Introduction And Basic Principles: Protocols – Physical standards – ISO/OSI reference –UART - Serial
data communications interface standards –RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard – The 4 to 20mA current
loop –Parallel Interface - IEEE 488 – USB.
Unit II - Modbus And HART: Modbus protocol structure, Function codes. Evolution of signal standard: HART
communication protocol – Communication modes – HART Networks – HART commands – HART applications –
Troubleshooting
Unit III - Profibus And Fieldbus: Fieldbus: Introduction – General Fieldbus architecture – Basic requirements of
Fieldbus standard – Fieldbus topology – Interoperability and Interchangeability. Profibus: Introduction – Profibus
protocol stack – Profibus communication model – Communication objects – Foundation field bus versus Profibus
Unit IV - Actuator Sensor Interface (As-I), Devicenet And Industrial Ethernet: AS-i: Introduction –
Physical layer – Data link layer – Operating characteristics. Device net: Introduction – Physical layer – Data link
layer and Application layer. Industrial Ethernet: Introduction – 10Mbps Ethernet – 100Mbps Ethernet.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit V - Wireless Communication: Wireless sensor networks: Architecture – Sensor network scenario. Wireless
HART – Existing Wireless Options: IEEE 802.15.4 - ISA 100 – Zigbee – Bluetooth – their relevance to industrial
applications
Text Books
1. Mackay, S., Wright,E., Reynders,D., and Park,J., “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation
and Troubleshooting”, Newnes Publication, Elsevier, 2004.
2. Buchanan,W., “Computer Busses: Design and Application”, CRC Press, 2000.
Reference Books
1. Bowden,R., “HART Application Guide”, HART Communication Foundation, 1999.
2. Bela G.Liptak, “Instrument Engineers’ Handbook, Volume 3 : Process Software and Digital Networks”, 4th
Edition, CRC Press, 2011.
3. Berge,J., “Field Buses for Process Control: Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance”, ISA Press, 2004.
4. Lawrence (Larry) M. Thompson and Tim Shaw, “Industrial Data Communications”, 5th Edition, ISA
Press, 2015.
5. NPTEL Lecture notes on, ”Computer Networks” by Department of Electrical Engg., IIT
Kharagpur.
17EI2013 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To equip the students with the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion.
To study the stability analysis of digital control system.
To equip the basic knowledge of digital process control design.
Course Outcomes:
Describe the operating principles of discrete-time systems and control capabilities.
Determine the stability of discrete-time control systems.
Estimate the steady state response of a discrete time system for any given input.
Appreciate the issues associated with the implementation of digital controllers.
Evaluate and solve system equations in state-variable form.
Compose the digital control algorithm for real time applications.
Unit I - Introduction to digital control: Need for digital control – Configuration of the basic digital control scheme
- Principles of signal conversion - Basic discrete time signals – Time domain models for discrete time systems - Z
transform - Transfer function models
Unit II - Analysis of digital control: Frequency Response - Stability on the z-Plane and the Jury stability criterion -
Sample and hold systems - Sampled spectra and aliasing - Reconstruction of analog signals - Practical aspects of the
choice of sampling rate - Principles of discretization
Unit III - Models of digital control devices and systems: Introduction - Z domain description of sampled
continuous time plants - Z domain description of systems with dead time - Implementation of digital controllers -
Tunable PID controllers - Digital temperature control systems - Digital position control system
Unit IV - Design of digital control algorithms: Introduction - Z plane specifications of control system design -
Digital compensator design using frequency response plots – Digital compensator design using root locus plots - Z
plane synthesis
Unit V - State variable analysis of digital control systems: Introduction – State descriptions of digital processor -
State description of sampled continuous time plants – State description of systems with dead time - Solution of state
difference equations – Controllability and observability - Multivariable systems
Text Books
1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi,
2012.
2. Ogata, “Discrete Time Control Systems”, Prentice– hall Of India, New Delhi 2008.
Reference Books
1. Gene F. Franklin, J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Education Limited, New Delhi,2002.
2. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern control systems,” Pearson Educatio inc,
New Delhi, 2008.
17EI2014 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To provide the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system.
To introduce the concept of PLC and its Programming using Ladder Diagram.
To cover the basics of Distributed Control Systems
Course Outcomes:
Identify and understand the real time inputs and outputs for the problem given.
Select the appropriate PLC for the given problem.
Develop real time application using PLC.
Design distributed applications using computer controls.
Create prototype for the real time application Using PLC,SCADA and DCS.
Discriminates between user interface for DCS applications
Unit I - Computer Controlled Systems: Data loggers – Data Acquisition Systems (DAS) – Direct Digital Control
(DDC) – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA) – sampling considerations – Functional
block diagram of computer control systems
Unit II - Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) Basics: Definition – Overview of PLC systems - Input/output
modules - Power supplies and isolators - General PLC programming procedures - Programming on-off inputs/
outputs - Auxiliary commands and functions – PLC Basic Functions - Register basics - Timer functions - Counter
functions.
Unit III - PLC Intermediate Functions : PLC intermediate functions: Arithmetic functions, Comparison functions,
Skip and MCR functions, Data move systems - PLC Advanced intermediate functions: Utilizing digital bits,
Sequencer functions, Matrix functions – PLC Advanced functions: Alternate programming languages, Analog PLC
operation, Networking of PLC - PID functions - PLC installation - Troubleshooting and maintenance - Design of
interlocks and alarms using PLC.
Unit IV - Distributed Control Systems (DCS): Introduction : DCS Evolution, DCS Architecture, Comparison –
Local Control unit – Process Interfacing Issues – Redundancy concept - Communication facilities.
Unit V - Interfaces in DCS: Operator interfaces: low level, high level – Operator Displays – Engineering
Interfaces: Low level, high level – General purpose computers in DCS
Text Books
1. John.W. Webb, Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers - Principles and Applications”, Prentice
Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2015.
2. Michael P Lukas, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada, 1986.
Reference Books
1. B.G. Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Hand, Process control and Optimization”, CRC press- Radnor,
Pennsylvania, 2011.
2. M.Chidambaram, “Computer Control of Process,” Narosa Publishing, New Delhi, 2003
17EI2015 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objectives:
To introduce the practical concepts of Industrial Automation using PLC and DCS
To demonstrate Data Acquisition and control using PLC
To provide knowledge on distributed control system
Course Outcomes:
Recall the concepts of PLC and Distributed control systems
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Identify the fundamental methods to transmit the industrial parameters such as Pressure, Temperature,
Level and Flow to the computer.
Apply the control algorithms for the real time plants.
Analyze the characteristics of the Actuating signal.
Design conventional controllers to regulate the process stations present in the lab.
Select suitable controller to the appropriate process stations.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2016 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To deal with basics concepts for selection of sensors and the signal conditioning necessary to include these
in a data acquisition system.
To investigate the analogue to digital and digital to analogue conversion principles and their practical
applications for data acquisition and control.
To learn about the selection of output drivers and devices
Course Outcomes:
Understand the basics of measurement system and its characteristics
Represent the equivalent circuit of sensors and describe their significant properties
Choose the type of signal conditioning circuits to be used for a specific sensor
Discuss the data conversion circuits and the constraints involved in their design
Examine the requirements for interfacing circuit design
Develop simple working model of a complete data acquisition system
Unit I - Introduction: General Measurement System, Static and Dynamic characteristics of instruments –
qualitative study, Loading effects, Signals and noise in Measurement Systems, Reliability, Choice and economics of
Measurement systems.
Unit II - Sensing Elements: Equivalent circuit of Resistive, capacitive, inductive, electromagnetic, thermoelectric,
elastic, piezoelectric, piezoresistive, electrochemical sensing elements, Hall effect sensors, characteristics
Unit III - Signal conditioning: Amplification, Impedance Matching, Instrumentation Amplifiers, Charge
Amplifiers, Filtering, attenuation, Noise Reduction and Isolation – Grounding Conflict, Ground Loops, Cross Talk,
Shielded Wiring, Isolation, Linearization, Circuit protection.
Unit IV - Interfacing circuits: Digital I/O interfacing, Microprocessor interfacing, serial interfaces, multi-channel
ADCs, internal microcontroller ADCs, ADC specifications, resolution, accuracy, linearity, offset and quantization
errors, sample rate and aliasing, Codecs, line drivers and receivers, high power output drivers and devices,
Unit V - Data Acquisition Systems: Parameters of Data Acquisition Systems such as dynamic range, calibration,
bandwidth, processor throughput, time-based measurements and jitter-Transducer Electronic data sheet, Smart
Sensors, System Architecture, Case Studies
Text Book
1. Bentley, John P. Principles of Measurement Systems, 4:th edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005.
References
1. Jacob Fraden, Handbook of Modern Sensors – Physics, Design and Applications, Fourth Edition, Springer,
2010.
2. Data Acquistion Handbook, A Reference for DAQ and analog and digital signal conditioning, 3rd
Edition,
2012.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
17EI2017 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To study the fundamentals of anatomy and human physiology system and its functions.
To study the fundamental concepts of physiological parameters measurement.
To study the concepts of various medical instruments for biomedical applications.
Course Outcomes:
Identify the need of understanding human anatomy and physiology system
Select the suitable acquisition method for analysing biomedical signal and vital parameters measurement.
Apply the knowledge of biomedical instruments to practical applications
Categorize the parameter monitoring techniques based on the application and relevance.
Design the various structure for patient safety
Develop systems for real time bio signal acquisition and processing.
Unit I - Anatomy and Physiology of Human Body - The cell and its electrical activity– Principle physiological
system: Cardiovascular System, Nervous system, Respiratory system, Muscular system – Origin of bioelectric signal
– Bioelectric signals: ECG, EMG, EEG, EOG and their characteristics
Unit II - Measurement of Physiological Parameters - Physiological transducers – Measurement of Blood
pressure – Blood flow – Cardiac output measurement – Heart rate – Respiration rate – Measurement of lung volume
– Oximeters – Audiometer
Unit III - Therapeutic Equipments and Patient Safety - Electro Surgical unit: Short wave and microwave
diathermy – Laser surgical unit – Defibrillators – Pacemaker – Heart Lung machine – Dialyser – Anesthesia
machine – Ventilators – Nerve stimulators – Total artificial heart (TAH) – Patient Safety: Electric Shock Hazards,
Leakage Current
Unit IV - Clinical Laboratory Instruments Clinical Flame photometer – Spectrophotometer – Colorimeter –
Chromatography–Blood Gas Analyzer – Blood pH Measurement– Measurement of Blood pCO2– Blood pO2
Measurement– Blood Cell Counters: Types and Methods of cell counting
Unit V - Imaging Technique and Telemetry X– ray – C.T. scan – MRI instrumentation – Ultrasound scanner –
Vector cardiograph – Echo cardiograph – Angiography – Telemetry: Wireless telemetry, Single channel and
multichannel telemetry system– Multi patient Telemetry – Implantable Telemetry systems
Text Books
1. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
17EI2018 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To learn the fundamental principles of electronics and to introduce the application of electronics in the
modern automobile.
To develop ability to understand various latest Communication protocols used in automobile industries.
To provide a thorough understanding of automotive systems and various electronic accessories used in
automobile.
Course Outcomes:
Understand the basic electronics system of an automobile.
Indicate the function of each system in automobile
Analyze the characteristics of the sensors.
Select suitable transducer for a specific system.
Apply instrumentation techniques for security and safety of automobile.
Develop automation for automobiles.
Unit I - Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics: Open loop and closed loop systems components for electronic
engine management, vehicle motion control, Current trends in modern Automobiles
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit II - Electronic Fuel Injection and Ignition systems: Introduction, Carburettor control system, throttle body
ignition and multi port or point fuel injection, Advantages of electronic ignition system, Types of solid state ignition
systems and their principle of operation, electronic spark timing control system.
Unit III - Engine Control System: Engine cranking and warm up control, Acceleration enrichment –
Deacceleration leaning and idle speed control, integrated engine control system, exhaust emission control system,
Engine performance testing.
Unit IV - Automobile Chassis Electronic Control System: Principle of electronic braking, automatic transmission
electronic control circuit, cruise control circuit, the electronic steering control theory, ABS, ASR, ESP, and other
electronic control method.
Unit V - Auto Body Electronic Control Technology: Automotive central locking and anti-theft system control
technology, electronically controlled windows and doors and airbag technology, principle of control circuit
components and characteristics.
Text Books 1. Robert Bosch Gmbh ,“BOSCH– Automotive Handbook”, 7thEdition,John Wiley & Sons, ISBN:
0470519363, 2008.
2. Denton.T, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic System”, Elsevier Butterworth–
HeinemannPublications,3rd Edition,2004.
Reference Books
1. Knowles.D, “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”, Prentice Hall,1988.
2. William.T.M, “Automotive Electronic System”,Elsevier Science,6th Edition,2003.
3. Kiencke,, Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems” 2nd Edition.2005.
17EI2019 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To equip the students with an adequate knowledge of analytical tools which are useful for clinical
analysis, pharmaceutical laboratories, environmental pollution monitoring and control.
To provide various techniques and methods of analysis which occur in the various regions of the
spectrum.
To give unique methods of separation of closely similar materials, using gas chromatography
Course Outcomes:
Develop instruments for clinical analysis.
Apply the concepts of Analytical Instruments for Environmental Monitoring
Analysis of industrial gases.
Analyze and control pollution in the environment.
Apply the latest ideas on ion-selective electrodes as well as biosensors which have
potential applications in medical field, food and beverage industries.
Analysis the important electromagnetic resonance and microscopic methods.
Unit I - Colorimetry And Spectrophotometry: Special methods of analysis – Beer– Lambert law – Colorimeters –
UV– Vis spectrophotometers – Single and double beam instruments – Sources and detectors – IR
spectrophotometers – Types – Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers – Atomic absorption
spectrophotometers – Sources and detectors – FTIR spectrophotometers – Flame emission photometers
Unit II - Chromatography: Different techniques – Gas chromatography – Detectors – Liquid chromatographs –
Applications – High– pressure liquid chromatographs – Applications
Unit III - Industrial gas analyzers and pollution monitoring instruments: Types of gas analyzers: Oxygen, NO2
and H2S types, IR analyzers, Thermal conductivity analyzers, Analysis based on ionization of gases – Air pollution
due to carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides, sulphur dioxide estimation – Dust and smoke
measurements
Unit IV - Ph Meters And Dissolved Component Analyzers: Principle of pH measurement – Glass electrodes –
Hydrogen electrodes – Reference electrodes – Selective ion electrodes – Ammonia electrodes – Biosensor –
Dissolved oxygen analyzer – Sodium analyzer – Silicon analyzer
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit V - Radio Chemical And Magnetic Resonance Techniques: Nuclear radiations – Detectors – GM counter –
Proportional counter – Solid state detectors – Gamma cameras – X– ray spectroscopy – Detectors –
Diffractometers– Absorption meters – Detectors – NMR – Basic principles – NMR spectrometer – Applications –
Mass spectrometers – Different types – Applications
Text Books
1. Khandpur. R. S., ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2006.
2. Willard. H., Merritt, Dean. J. A., Settle. F. A., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’, CBS publishing &
distribution, 1995.
Reference Books
1. Robert D. Braun, ‘Introduction to Instrumental Analysis’, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1987.
2. Ewing. G. W., ‘Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis’, McGraw Hill, 1992.
3. Skoog. D. A. and West. D. M., ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’, Holt, Saunders Publishing, 1992.
17EI2020 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL
INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To expose the students to the Instrumentation field and control applied in petrochemical
industries.
Course Outcomes:
Illustrate the controls applied in various elements of Petrochemical industry
Provide adequate knowledge about the measurement of various parameters in petrochemical industry.
Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a petrochemical industry
Choose a suitable control schemes for a specific operation
Explain the various measurement techniques in petrochemical industries
Categorize the different types of evaporators and dryers involved in petrochemical industries.
Unit I - Instrumentation and control in distillation columns: Distillation equipment, variables and degrees of
freedom, measurement and control of column pressure, liquid distillate, vapour distillate and inserts, control of feed
in reboiler and reflux, cascade and feed forward controls.
Unit II - Instrumentation and control in chemical reactors & Dryers: Temperature and pressure control in batch
reactors-Batch dryers and continuous dryers.
Unit III - Instrumentation and control in heat exchangers: Variables and degrees of freedom, liquid to liquid
heat exchangers, steam heaters, condensers, reboilers and vaporisers, use of cascade and feed forward control
Unit IV - Instrumentation and control in evaporators: Types of evaporators, measurement and control of
absolute pressure, density,conductivity, differential pressure and flow.
Unit V - Instrumentation and control in effluent and water treatment: Chemical oxidation, chemical reduction,
neutralization, precipitation and biological control.
Text book
1. Liptak B. G, Process Control , Third edition , Chilton Book Company, Pennsylvania,1995.
Reference Books
1. Liptak B. G, Process Measurement and Analysis, Third edition, Chilton Book Company, Pennsylvania,
1995.
2. Considine D.M., ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’, Fourth edition, McGraw Hill,
Singapore, 1993.
17EI2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Know the raw materials and the process in paper making
Comprehend the significance of different sensors used in Paper Industries
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Apply the appropriate computer interface for different applications
Course Outcomes:
Describe the basic processing in paper industry.
Discuss the measurement of various parameters in paper industry
Choose the appropriate sensor for different applications
Explain the various control loops in Paper Industry.
Analyze the computer applications in Paper Industry
Unit I - Process Description: Raw materials -pulping process – chemical recovery process – paper making
process –converting.
Unit II - Instrumentation: Measurements of basic weight – density – specific gravity – flow – level of liquids
and solids– pressure – temperature – consistency – moisture – pH – oxidation – reduction potential – graphic
displays and alarms
Unit III - Controls: Blow tank controls – digester liquor feedpump controls – brown stock wacher level control –
stock chest level control – basic weight control – dry temperature control
Unit IV - Dissolving tank density control – white liquor classifier density control – white liquor flow control –
condensate conductivity control
Unit V - Computer applications in pulping process control, liquid level control and input stock control
Text Book
1. B.G Liptak, ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’, Chilton Book Company, 1994.
17EI2022 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
To learn about the process of making steel from the raw materials.
To know the role of instrumentation in a steel industry
To deal with the control operations carries out at various stages
Course Outcomes:
Describe various process in Iron and Steel industry
Indicate the use of instruments in steel making
Suggest suitable sensor for a typical measurement
Develop control systems for the various operations in Steel Industries
Computers, Alarm and Graphical displays
Evaluate the usefulness of Instrumentation in monitoring and control in the Steel industry
Unit I - Introduction- Description of Process and Flow Diagram- Raw Material Preparation- Iron Making- Blast
Furnace- Stoves- Raw Steel making- Oxygen Furnace- Electric Furnace.
Unit II - Introduction to Steel Casting- Casting Process- Primary Rolling- Cold Rolling- Finishing- Molding
Process- Melting-Pouring- Heat Treating- Cast Steels Compared to Other Processes- Application of Steel Casting in
Industries.
Unit III - Measurement of Level- Sensor Selection- Calibration- Electrical Methods- Measurement of Pressure-
Electrical Methods- Dead Weight Tester- Measurement of Flow- Classification of Flow Meters- Flow Meter
Selection- Calibration- Measurement of Density- Graphic Display- Alarm.
Unit IV - Blast Furnace-Stove Combustion Control System- Gas and Water- Controls in BOF Furnace- Stand
Casting Mould Level Control- Waste Water Treatment- Conventional Waste Water Treatment Process.
Unit V - Model Calculation and Logging- Rolling Mill Control- Annealing Process Control- Center Utilities
Dispatch Computer.
Text Book
1. Bela G.Liptak. “Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossile Power, Glass, Iron
and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical, Pharmaceuticals” Chilton Book Co.,
Reprint 2003
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books
1. Liptak B.G Instrument Engineers Handbook, Vol 2, Process Control, 1977
2. SK Singh, Industrial Instrumentation and Control, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
17EI2023 OPTOELECTRONICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Acquire Knowledge about the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and LASERS
Analyze the various applications of optical fibers in Industrial Measurements
Understand the various applications of LASER
Course Outcomes:
Describe the principle of fiber optic communication
Explain the various sources and detectors used for fiber optic communication
Apply the principle of fiber optics in sensing various industrial applications
Understand the principle of LASER
Categorize the types of LASERS
Describe the Medical application of LASER
Unit I - Introduction: Principles of light propagation through a fiber-Different types of fibers and their properties -
Transmission characteristics of optical fiber-absorption losses-Scattering losses-Dispersion - Optical sources -
Optical detectors - LED -LD - PIN and APD
Unit II - Optical Fibre Fundamentals: Modes– Types of Optical Fibres – Fibre coupling – Fibre optic sensors for
Temperature, Pressure, Flow and Level measurement
Unit III - Characteristics Of Lasers: Laser principle– Properties – Two, Three and Four level system – Resonator
configuration – Q switching and Mode locking – Cavity dumping – Types of Lasers
Unit IV - Industrial Applications Of Lasers: Lasers for measurement of distance and length, Velocity, Material
processing: Laser heating, Melting, Scribing, Splicing, Welding and trimming of materials, Removal and
Vapourization.
Unit V - Hologram And Medical Application: Holography – Basic principle – Methods– Holographic
Interferometry and applications – Holography for non – destructive testing – Medical applications of lasers :Laser
interaction with biomolecules – Photothermal applications – Photochemical applications – Endoscopes
Text Books
1. Arumugam.M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers,
Kumbakonam, 2006.
2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson
Education, 2006.
Reference Books
1. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 1995.
2. Ghatak A.K. and Thiagarajan K, Optical Electronics Foundation book , TMH, Cambridge
University Press, 1989.
3. Wilson and Hawkes, “Opto Electronics –An Introduction”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1998.
17EI2024 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular
stress on thermal power generation.
To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants.
To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters like
speed, vibration of turbines and their control.
Course Outcomes:
Identify the methods of power generation
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a power plant
Choose a suitable control schemes for a specific operation
Explain the various measurement techniques in power plant
Categorize the different types of analyzers for safety purpose
Illustrate the control of a variety of parameters in power plant
Unit I - Overview Of Power Generation : Brief survey of methods of power generation – Hydro, Thermal,
Nuclear, Solar and Wind power– Importance of instrumentation in power generation – Thermal power plants –
Building blocks – Details of boiler process – Piping and Instrumentation diagram of boiler – Cogeneration
Unit II - Measurements In Power Plants: Electrical measurements: Current, Voltage, Power, Frequency, Power
factor – Non– electrical parameters: Flow of feed water, Fuel, Air and steam with correction factor for temperature –
Steam pressure and Steam temperature – Drum level measurement – Radiation detector – Smoke density
measurement – Dust monitor
Unit III - Analyzers In Power Plants: Flue gas oxygen analyzer – Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam –
Dissolved oxygen analyzer – Chromatography – PH meter – Fuel analyzer – Pollution monitoring instruments
Unit IV - Control Loops In Boiler: Steam pressure control – Combustion control – Air/Fuel ratio control –
Furnace draft control – Drum level control – Main steam and reheat steam temperature control – Superheater control
– Attemperator –Deaerator control – Distributed control system in power plants – Interlocks in boiler operation
Unit V - Turbine Monitoring And Control: Speed, Vibration, Shell temperature monitoring and control –
Lubricant oil temperature control
Text Book
1. K. Krishnaswamy, M. Ponnibala, “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.,2013.
Reference Book
1. P.K Nag, “Power plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
17EI2025 AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Understand the basics of Aircraft and the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems.
To learn the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems
Understand the performance of Aircraft and the Instrumentation
Course Outcomes:
Understand Aircraft and the Display Equipments.
Apply the sensors to be used in the Flight.
Analyze Power Plant Instruments.
Appreciate the need for measurement in aircraft
Design instrumentation systems for aircraft.
Analyze gyroscopic instruments for attitude measurement
Unit I - Introduction: Classification of Aircraft – Instrumentation – Instrument displays – Panels and Layouts
Unit II - Flight Instrumentation: Static and Pitot Pressure Source – Altimeter – Airspeed indicator – Machmeter –
Maximum Safespeed indicator – Accelerometer
Unit III - Gyroscopic Instruments: Gyroscopic theory – Directional gyro indicator artificial horizon – Turn and
slip indicator
Unit IV - Aircraft Computer Systems: Terrestrial magnetism, Aircraft magnetism, Direct reading magnetic
components – Compasses - gyro magnetic compass
Unit V - Power Plant Instruments: Fuel flow – Fuel quantity measurement, Exhaust gas Temperature
Measurement and Pressure Measurement
Text Books
1. Pallett, E.B.J ., : " Aircraft Instruments ", Pitman and sons, 2009.
Reference Books
1. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instrument Integrated Systems”, ISBN-10: 0582086272, Edition: 3rd
1992.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
2. Nagabhushanam S. et.al, S. Nagabhushana, L. K. Sudha, “Aircraft Instrumentation and Systems”,
International Pvt Ltd,2010.
3. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) “Instrument Flying Handbook”, 2013.
4. Doeblin.E.O, “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
17EI2026 TELEMETRY AND REMOTE CONTROL
Credits : 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the basics of telemetry and remote control
To learn the principles of devices used for remote monitoring and control
To explore the concepts of communication systems
Course Outcomes:
Understand the fundamentals of signal transmission
Classify the types of modulation techniques.
Analyze the errors in transmission
Apply the concepts of telemetry and remote control to real life applications
Illustrate the use of fiber optics for telemetry and control
Develop simple models of remote telemetering systems
Unit I - Introduction: Purpose of telemetry, basic scheme, voltage, current and frequency telemetry, line length
limitations Concepts of Information transfer, bits, symbols, codes -source, line, channel, BCD, ASCII, BAUDOT,
AMI, CMI, Manchester, HDBM, Block, Differential, Hamming, Conduction
Unit II - Modulation codes: PAM, PFM, PTM, PCM 2 Bit error rate, Inter symbol, noise, parity checking 3
Review of modulation and multiplexing: FM-AM, FM-FM, PAM-AM, PAM-FM, PCM-AM, etc. Quantization and
conversion methods, error in quantization, bandwidth consideration
Unit III - FDM systems: IRIG standards in FDM systems in FDM telemetry, SCO’s, Mux and Demux circuits,
Detectors and Demodulators, Pulse averaging, Quadrature FM and PLL, Mixers TDM systems (architecture)- TDM-
PAM, PAM- PM, TDM- PCM systems, synchronization, PCM generation, differential PCM, PCM reception and
detection
Unit IV - Modems: Digital modulation and Shift-keying, FSK, PSK, DPSK, QPSK, QAM, Modem Protocols
Satellite telemetry, TT and C services, subsystems, The earth station
Unit V - Fiber optic Telemetry: The Fibre as transmission medium, Interconnections, Repeaters, Sources,
Detectors, WDM Remote control: concept and example from a typical industrial siteration
Text Books:
1. D. Patranabis, Telemetry principles, TMH, 2007.
2. E. L. Gruenberg, Handbook of Telemetry and Remote control, Mc Graw Hill, 1967
Reference Book:
1. A.S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, Pearson, 2011.
17EI2027 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the basics of robotics
To study the various kinematics and inverse kinematics of robots
To understand the principle of end effectors in robots applications.
Course Outcomes:
Explain the basic principle of working of a robot
Understand the kinematics and dynamics in a robot
Analyze the applications of sensors in robotics
Suggest the suitable hardware requirements for a robot
Develop a simple robot from basic understanding
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Select the type of robot to be used for a specific application
Unit I - Introduction- Definition and origin of robotics – different types of robotics – various generations of robots
– degrees of freedom – Asimov’s laws of robotics.
Unit II - Power Sources And Sensors - Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives – determination of HP of motor
and gearing ratio – variable speed arrangements – path determination – micro machines in robotics – machine vision
– ranging – laser – acoustic – magnetic, fiber optic and tactile sensors.
Unit III - Manipulators, Actuators And Grippers - Construction of manipulators – manipulator dynamics and
force control – electronic and pneumatic manipulator control circuits – end effectors –various types of grippers –
design considerations.
Unit IV - Kinematics And Path Planning -Solution of inverse kinematics problem – multiple solution jacobian
work envelop – hill climbing techniques – robot programming languages
Unit V - Case Studies - Mutiple robots – machine interface – robots in manufacturing and non- manufacturing
applications – robot cell design – selection of robot.
Text Book 1. Industrial Robotics – SIE, Nicholas Odray, Mitchell Weiss, McGraw-Hill, 2012
Reference Books
1. Industrial Robotics: Technology and applications, Mikell P. Groover, Nicholas Odray, Mitchell Weiss,
Roger, 1987
2. Robotics for Engineers, Yoram Koren, Mc GrawHill, 2014
3. Robotics, Gonzalez, Fu, Lee, McGrawHill, 2008.
4. Issac Asimov I Robot, Ballantine Books, New York, 1986.
17EI2028 SCADA SYSTEMS DESIGN
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.
To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.
To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.
Course Outcomes
Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.
Apply the concept of Supervisory Control
Perform simulation for various processes.
Describe the programming logic involved in automation
Analyze SCADA protocol for effective communication
Apply the concept of optical and wireless techniques
Unit I - Introduction to SCADA: Data acquisition systems, Evolution of SCADA, Communication technologies,
Monitoring and supervisory functions, SCADA applications in Utility Automation, Industries
Unit II - SCADA System Components: Schemes- Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IED), Communication Network, SCADA Server, SCADA/HMI Systems
Unit III - SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA architectures, advantages and disadvantages of each system -
single unified standard architecture -IEC 61850
Unit IV - SCADA Communication: various industrial communication technologies -wired and wireless methods
and fiber optics.
Unit V - SCADA Applications: Utility applications- Transmission and Distribution sector -operations,
monitoring, analysis and improvement. Simulation Exercises
Text Book:
1. Stuart A. Boyer: SCADA- Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, Instrument Society of America
Publications, USA, 1999
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books:
1. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders: Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5 and Related
Systems, Newness Publications, Oxford, UK, 2004
17EI2029 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES FOR INDUSTRIAL CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Understand the PWM converters and their analysis
Understand the modeling on dc motor, drives and control techniques
To educate on dynamic modeling of Induction motor drive
Course Outcomes:
Evaluate on the V/f and vector control of Induction motor
Analize on generation of firing pulses and control algorithms in embedded platforms
Identify the need and choice of various drives.
Acquire knowledge on different speed control methods in D.C and A.C motors using thyristor based control
schemes
Acquire knowledge on different types of drives and applications in various industries.
Analyze the characteristics of various motors and loads.
Unit I - Power Electronic Converters For Drives: Power electronic switches-state space representation of
switching converters-Fixed frequency PWM-variable frequency PWM- space vector PWM- Hysteresis
current control-dynamic analysis of switching converters-PWM modulator model
Unit II - Control of Dc Drives: Modelling of DC machines-block diagram/transfer function-phase control-
1phase/3phase converter fed DC drives- Chopper fed DC drives-four quadrant chopper circuit-closed
loop control-speed control-current control-cascade control –constant torque/power operation-comparison
of chopper/converter fed drives- techniques-merits/demits
Unit III - Analysis And Modelling Of Induction Motor Drive: Basics of induction motor drive-
classification – equivalent circuit- torque Vs slip characteristics-steady state performance- Dynamic
modeling of induction motor, Three phase to two phase transformation-stator, rotor, synchronously
rotating reference frame model
Unit IV - Control Of Induction Motor Drive: VSI fed induction motor drives- waveforms for 1-phase,
3-phase Non-PWM and PWM VSI fed induction motor drives -principles of V/F control- principle of
vector control-direct vector control- space vector modulation- indirect vector control .
Unit V - Embedded Control of Drives:Generation of firing pulses- generation of PWM pulses using
embedded processors-IC control of DC drives- fixed frequency/variable frequency/current control- V/F
control using PIC microcontroller- vector control using embedded processors.
Text Books 1. R.Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives, Modeling, Analysis and Control” Prentice Hall of India,
2002.
2. Ion Boldea, S.A.Nasar “Electric Drives”, CRC Press, 2006
Reference Books 1. Simon Ang, Alejandro Oliva “Power Switching Converters”, CRC Press, 2005
2. Thyristor control of Electric drives, Vedam Subrahmanyam, Tata McGraw Hill, 1988
3. Buxbaum, A. Schierau, and K.Staughen, “A design of control systems for DC drives”,
Springer- Verlag, Berlin,1990.
17EI2030 SMART SENSOR TECHNOLOGY
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To teach basics of smart sensors and communication
To inculcate the usage of smart sensors in real time applications
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Outcomes:
Acquire the knowledge & concepts of smart sensors.
Comprehend interfacing of sensor with processor .
Applies the concepts of sensor communication protocol for real time applications.
Analyze the importance of MEMs technology in smart sensor.
Compare various standards of smart sensor
Evaluate the implications of smart sensor in recent trends.
Unit I - Basics of smart sensors and micromachining: Introduction, Mechanical-Electronic transitions in sensing,
nature of sensors, overview of smart sensing and control systems, integration of micromachining
and microelectronics, introduction to micromachining, bulk micromachining, wafer bonding, surface
micromachining, other micromachining techniques.
Unit II - MCUs and DSPs for sensor: Introduction, MCU control, MCUs for sensor interface, DSP control,
Software, tools and support, sensor integration.
Unit III - Sensor Communication and MEMS: Wireless zone sensing, surface acoustical wave devices, intelligent
transportation system, RF-ID, Microoptics, microgrippers, microprobes, micromirrors, FEDs, communications for
smart sensors - sources and standards, automotive protocols, industrial networks, office and building automation,
home automation, protocols in silicon, other aspects of networkcommunications.
Unit IV - Packaging, Testing And Reliability of Smart Sensors: Introduction, Semiconductor packaging applied
to sensors, hybrid packaging, packaging for monolithic sensors, reliability implications, testing smart sensors. Unit
Standards for Smart Sensors: Introduction, setting the standards for smart sensors and systems, IEEE 1451.1, IEEE
1451.2, IEEE P1451.3, IEEE 1451.4, extending the systems to network.
Unit V - Implications of Smart Sensor Standards And Recent Trends: Introduction, sensor plug-and-play,
communicating sensor data via existing wiring, automated/remote sensing and web, process control over the
internet, alternative standards, HVAC sensor chip, MCU with integrated pressure sensors, alternative views of smart
sensing, smart loop.
Text Book 1. Understanding Smart Sensors- Randy Frank, 2nd Edition. Artech House Publications, 2013.
Reference Book 1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, Micro and Smart
Systems: Technology and Modeling Wiley, 2012
17EI2031 PERVASIVE DEVICES AND TECHNOLOGY
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To expose the students to the fundamentals of wireless sensor technology
To teach the infrastructure of WSN processor and its functions
To study on challenges in Network communication
Course Outcomes:
Acquire the knowledge and concepts of wireless sensor technology.
Comprehends the challenges in network communication.
Applies the concepts of wireless technology for real time applications.
Analyze the functions of WSN processor.
Compare classification of commercial family of wireless technology
Evaluate and discuss on interconnectivity of networks
Unit I - Overview Of Wireless Sensor Networks: Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks- Characteristic
requirements for WSN - Challenges for WSNs – WSN vs Adhoc Networks - Sensor node architecture –
Commercially available sensor nodes –Imote, IRIS, Mica Mote, TelosB,-Physical layer and transceiver design
considerations in WSNs, introduction to fundamentals of MAC protocols - Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup
concepts - Contention-based protocols - Schedule-based protocols -the IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol- Energy usage
profile, Choice of modulation scheme, Dynamic modulation scaling, Antenna considerations-Applications of sensor
networks
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit II - Issues In Pervasive Sensor Network: Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components, constraints &
challenges in resourcesEnergy Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks –
Introduction - Operating System Design Issues - Examples of Operating Systems – TinyOS, Network Architecture -
Sensor Network Scenarios, Optimization Goals and Figures of Merit, Gateway Concepts. Data Dissemination-
Flooding and Gossiping-Data gathering Sensor Network Scenarios –Optimization, Goals and Figures of Merit –
Design Principles for WSNs- Gateway Concepts – Need for gateway
Unit III - Pervasive Networking and Computing - Introduction, Networking Infrastructure and Architecture of
PERV NET, Mobility management, service discovery, disconnected operation, Dynamic configuration, auto
registration, content based routing, Backbone Technology: Electrical Backbone Networks – Optical Backbone
Networks – Wireless Backbone Networks – Wireless Access Technology - Pervasive Web Application architecture-
Access from PCs and PDAs - Access via WAP
Unit IV - Pervasive Devices: Introduction with Case study of - PDA - Mobile Phone: Elements – Mobile
Information Architecture - Mobile Phone Design - Android Overview – The Stack – Android User Interface –
Preferences, the File System, the Options Menu and Intents.
Unit V - Emerging Wireless Technologies: Evolution and Deployment of Cellular Telephone Systems – 1G, 2G,
2.5G, 3G, 4G. Introduction to wireless LAN, Wireless PAN, Wireless MAN, Broadband Satellite and Microware
Systems – Emerging Wireless Technologies – IEEE 802.20 Mobile Broadband Wireless Access
Text Book
1. Frank Adelstein, Sandeep K S Gupta, Golden G Richard III, Loren Schwiebert, “Fundamentals of mobile
and pervasive computing, TMH, 2007.
Reference Books
1. Debashis saha, Amitava mukherjee ,”Networking Infrastructure for Pervasive Computing, Springer
International edition, 2011
2. Mullet,”Introduction to wireless telecommunications systems and networks", cengage learning, 2010
3. Brian Fling,”Mobile Design & Development,O’Reilly,2011
4. Marko Gargenta,”Learning Android”, O’Reilly,2011
17EI2032 THEORY AND DESIGN OF NEURO FUZZY CONTROLLERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To expose the students to the concepts of biological and artificial neural networks
To teach the basics of fuzzy set theory and operations.
To provide adequate knowledge applications of neural networks, fuzzy logic and genetic algorithm.
Course Outcomes:
Describe the evolution of soft computing techniques.
Apply mathematical fundamentals to develop learning algorithms.
Analyze problems to formulate models and develop control schemes using soft
computing techniques for non-linear systems.
Apply engineering fundamentals to use hybrid schemes and optimization
Solve complex engineering problems using neurofuzzy controllers.
Use modern tool boxes to simulate case studies.
Unit I - Introduction – Biological neuron – Artificial neuron – Neuron modeling – Learning rules – Single layer –
Multi layer feed forward network – Back propagation – Learning factors.
Unit II - Neural Networks For Control - Feed back networks – Discrete time hop field networks – Transient
response of continuous time networks – Applications of artificial neural network - Process identification – Neuro
controller for inverted pendulum.
Unit III - Fuzzy Systems - Classical sets – Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzification – Defuzzification – Fuzzy
rules.
Unit IV - Fuzzy Logic Control - Membership function – Knowledge base – Decision-making logic – Optimisation
of membership function using neural networks – Adaptive fuzzy system – Introduction to genetic algorithm,
Inverted pendulum – Image processing – Home heating system – Blood pressure during anesthesia
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit V - Hybrid Control Schemes -Need for Hybrid control – Neuro-Fuzzy Control scheme – ANFIS – Case study
– Familiarization with ANFIS toolbox – Introduction to Genetic Algorithm and Particle swarm optimization –
Optimization of membership function and rule base using Genetic Algorithm – Introduction to Support vector
machine.
Text Books
1. Jacek M. Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing home, 2002.
2. Timothy J. Ross, ‘Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications’, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.
Reference Books
1. Laurene Fausett, Englewood cliffs, N.J., ‘Fundamentals of Neural Networks’, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Simon Haykin, ‘Neural Networks’, Pearson Education, 2003.
17EI2033 MICRO CONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To impart knowledge on PIC microcontroller and ARM processor.
To introduce the architecture, instruction set and peripheral devices of PIC
To introduce the architecture and assembly language programming of ARM.
Course Outcomes:
Describe the architectural features of PIC and ARM processors
Choose the processor relevant to a particular application.
Apply the knowledge of PIC microcontroller and ARM processor to solve simple
operations.
Use the microcontroller programming skills to design and carry out projects
Identify and formulate engineering problems and use the microcontrollers appropriately.
Develop simple working models using the advanced processors.
Unit I - Introduction to PIC Microcontroller – PIC 16F87x Architecture –Instruction Set – Simple Operations.
Unit II - Ports, Counters, Timer, Ccp Module And Interrupts - PIC16F87I2C I/O Ports, Counters, Timers CCP
Modules –Interrupts.
Unit III - Peripherals And Interfacing
16F87xI2C Bus Peripherals Chip Access – Analog to Digital Converter – UART.
Unit IV - Arm LPC2148 Introduction -ARM LPC2148 Architecture – ARM LPC2148 Development tools – ARM
Assembly Languages Programming – Simple Examples.
Unit V - Arm LPC2148 Organization -3-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization – 5-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization
– ARM Implementation – ARM Instruction Set.
Text Books
1. Peatman, J.B., “Design with PIC Micro Controllers”, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2004.
2. Furber, S., “ARM System on Chip Architecture”, Addison Wesley trade Computer Publication,2000.
Reference Books
1. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer’s Guide:
Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Elsevier Inc., 2013.
2. Trevor Martin, “The insider’s guide to the Philips ARM 7 – based Microcontrollers: An
Engineers Introduction to the LPC 2100 Series” Hitex (UK) Ltd., 2005.
3. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, RolinMckinlay and Danny Causey, “PIC Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems using Assembly and C for PIC18”, Prentice Hall Publications, 2007.
4. Martin Bates, “Interfacing PIC Microcontrollers-Embedded Design by interactive simulation”,Newnes
Publication, 2006.
5. Tim Wilmshurst, “Designing Embedded Systems with PIC Microcontrollers – Principles and
Applications”, Newnes Publication, 2007.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
17EI2034 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
• Understand the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System
• To understand the importance of Instrumentation
To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of control theory
Course Outcomes:
Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system
Analyze the characteristics of transducers
Apply controller principles to typical applications.
Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems.
Test the stability of a given system.
Analyze instrumentation for real time applications
Unit I - Generalized Measurement System: General concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation generalized
measurement system - Classification of instruments as indicators, Recorders and integrators their working principles
- Precision and accuracy: Measurement error and calibration
Unit II - Pressure And Temperature Measurement: Pressure measurement: Gravitational, Bourdon, Elastic
transducers, Strain gauge, Pressure cells – Temperature measurement: Bimetallic, Resistance thermometer,
Thermocouples, Pyrometer.
Unit III - Strain And Flow Measurement: Strain gauges types, Gauge rosettes.Force measurement: Scales and
torque measurement: Mechanical torsion meter, Electrical torsion meter, Piezo Electric Transducer - Hot– Wire
anemometer - Magnetic flowmeter- Ultrasonic flow meter
Unit IV - Control Systems: Open and closed systems - Servo– mechanisms - Transfer functions, Signal flow
graphs - Block diagram algebra - hydraulic and pneumatic control systems - Two –way control - Proportional
control - Differential and Integral control
Unit V - Stability analysis: Time response of First Order and Second Order Systems, Concept of Stability,
Necessary condition for Stability, Routh stability criterion, Polar and Bode plots.
Text Books
1. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements” Khanna Publishers, 2002.
2. Nagrath. M. and Gopal.I.J.Control systems Engineering, Wiley eastern Ltd.,.2001.
Reference Books
1. Sawhny, A.K. “Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation”,
DhanpatRai& Co., 2000.
2. Collet. C. V. and Hope. A.D. ‘Engineering Measurements’ 2nd Edition ELBS.
3. Baskar S,’Instrumentation control system measurements and controls ‘anuradha agencies publishers,2004.
17EI2035 INSTRUMENTATION FOR AGRICULTURE
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the applications of instrumentation in agriculture
To teach the principle of sensors used in agriculture, irrigation
To gain knowledge on the automation in agriculture related applications
Course Outcomes:
Describe the need for sensors used in agricultural applications
Select suitable sensors for various applications pertaining to agriculture
Apply the concepts of automation to packing and storage systems
Illustrate the application of sensors in metrological measurements
Develop simple automation systems for agriculture
Relate the sensor technology to real time applications in agriculture.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit I - Introduction: Engineering properties of soil, fundamental definitions and relationships, Need for
measurement of soil parameters, Introduction to Sonic Anemometers, Hygrometers, Fine wire thermocouples, Open
and Close Path Gas Analyzers, Brief introduction to various Bio-sensors, Soil moisture measurement methods:
Resistance based method, Voltage based method, Thermal based method, Time-domain reflectometry(TDR)
Unit II - Irrigation systems: Necessity for instrumentation, Irrigation methods: overhead, center pivot, lateral
move, micro irrigation systems, Irrigation control management up- stream and down - stream control systems.
Unit III - Green houses and instrumentation: ventilation, cooling and heating, wind speed, temperature and
humidity, rain gauge carbon dioxide enrichment measurement and control. Ground water occurrence, confined and
unconfined aquifers, Aquifer properties, Ground water recharge measurement.
Unit IV - Automation in earth moving equipment & farm equipment, application of SCADA & PLC in packing
industry and cold storage systems, implementation of hydraulic, pneumatic & electronics control circuits in
harvesters cotton pickers, tractor etc.
Unit V - Leaf area length evapotranspiration, temperature, wetness & respiration measurement & data logging,
electromagnetic radiations photosynthesis, agro metrological instrumentation weather stations, surface flux
measurement.
Text Book
1. Instrumentation handbook-process control, “B.G.Liptak”, Chilton 40 , 2013
Reference Books
1. Industrial instrumentation, “Patranabis”, Tata Mc GrawHill, 2010
2. Process control and instrumentation technology, “C.D. Johnson”, PHI, 2015
17EI2036 ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Learn the terminology, nomenclature and classification systems used in environmental science
Understand the methods of acquiring, interpreting and analysing environmental science information with a
critical understanding of the appropriate contexts for their use
Appreciate the contribution of environmental science to the development of knowledge of the world we
live in
Course Outcomes:
Describe the methodology of measurement used for environment montoring
Apply the knowledge of instruments to measure water and air quality
Choose the type of measurement technique suitable for a particular application
Evaluate the impact of measurement on environmental parameter monitoring
Identify cases where monitoring is required and provide solutions
Summarize the significance of instrumentation for environmental quality measurement and control
Unit I - Instrumentation Methodologies -Influence of regulatory requirements on instrumentation design, In situ
Vs extractive measurement, Online analysis of environmental samples, Ultra violet analysis of water and waste
water
Unit II - Water Quality parameters - Thermal conductivity detectors, Temperature Monitors, Ph analyzers,
Turbidity monitoring, Watershed Scale, Water Quality Monitoring.
Unit III - Groundwater monitoring – Level Measurements in ground water monitoring wells, techniques of
ground water sampling, Soil permeability and dispersion analysis, instrumentation for assessment of soil and
groundwater pollution.
Unit IV - Waste water monitoring and air monitoring– Automatic waste water sampling systems, Waste water
level measurement techniques, data acquisition systems for ambient air monitoring, air pollution control systems,
measurement of ambient air quality.
Unit V - Flow monitoring – Air flow measurement, Gas flow measurement, Non-open channel flow measurement,
Open channel waste water flow measurement
Text Book
1. Environmental Instrumentation and Analysis Handbook, Randy D Down and Jay H Lehr, Wiley, 2004
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books
1. Measuring the Natural Environment, Ian Strangeways, Cambridge Press, 2003
2. Food and agricultural waste water utilization and treatment, Sean X Liu, Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Environmental Instrumentation, Fritschen, Leo, Gay, Lloyd, Springer advanced text in life sciences,
1979.
17EI2037 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Study about the virtual instrumentation system and LabVIEW based Virtual Instrumentation.
Study about the hardware and software involved programming techniques in VI.
Study about the basic of Programming Techniques and its applications.
Course Outcomes:
Understand the architecture of Virtual Instrumentation.
Appreciate the advantages of Data flow programming
Apply basic programming techniques of Virtual Instrumentation.
Use Virtual Instrumentation for instrumentation and control
Design a LabVIEW based instrumentation system.
Identify a suitable interface for data acquisition
Unit I - Review Of Virtual Instrumentation: Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture
of a Virtual Instrument, Data Flow Techniques, Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional
programming.
Unit II - Introduction To LabVIEW: Advantages of LabVIEW Software Environment-Creating and Saving VI-
Controls and Indicators- Data types. Sub VI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing a Sub VI in a block- Creating a
Stand Alone Application
Unit III - Programming Techniques: Loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and
sequence structures, formula nodes, local and global variables, string and file I/O
Unit IV - Data Acquisition Basics: Signals Handling and Classification – Signal Conditioning -
Analog Interfacing (I/O) - Counters & Timers – Digital (I/O) - DAQ Hardware – DAQ Software
Architecture - DAQ Assist
Unit V - Common Instrument Interfaces: GPIB-RS232-Handshaking- RS232/RS485 interfacing, VISA – IVI -
PCMCIA – SCXI – VXI - Networking basics for office & Industrial applications
Text Books 1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW” Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2010.
2. JohnEssick, “Hands-On Introduction to LabVIEW for Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford University
Press,New York, 2nd Edition, 2010.
Reference Books
1. NesimiErtugrul, “LabVIEW for Electric Circuits, Machines, Drives, and Laboratories”, Pearson Education,
2nd Edition, 2002.
2. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, 2005.
3. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw – Hill Education
India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2010.
4. Gary W. Johnson, Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw-Hill Education, New
York, 3rd Edition, 2001.
17EI2038 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the fundamentals of ultrasonics
To provide knowledge on the basics of Ultrasonic Instrumentation
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
To teach the applications of Ultrasonic Instruments
Course Outcomes:
Recall the principles of ultrasonic Instrumentation
Discuss the various methods for the generation of ultrasonic waves
Choose a suitable measurement technique for different parameters
Analyze the different ultrasonic test methods
Apply the concepts of ultrasonic instrumentation for practical applications
Illustrate the ultrasonic applications in the field of Medicine
Unit I - Ultrasonic Waves: Principles and propagation of various waves – characterization of ultrasonic
transmission, reflection and transmission coefficients – intensity and attenuation of sound beam. Power level –
medium parameters
Unit II - Generation/ Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects – construction
and characteristics – Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical method- Optical Method-Electrical Method-
Precise Measurement: Pulse-echo Overlap- Cross correlation-Computer Based Automated methods: Pulse-echo
Overlap- Cross correlation-search unit types
Unit III - Classification of Ultrasonic Test Methods: Pulse echo- transit time-resonance- direct contact and
immersion type and ultrasonic methods of flaw detection – Flow meters – Density measurement- Viscosity
measurement, Level measurement – Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements
Unit IV - Ultrasonic Application: Measuring thickness-depth-Rail Inspection using Ultrasonic- SONAR-
Inspection of Welds and defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials
Unit V - Ultrasonic Applications in Medical Field: Medical Imaging- diagnosis and therapy- acoustical
holography
Text Books
1. Baldev Raj, V.Rajendran, P.Palanichamy, “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”, Alpha
Science International, UK, 2004.
2. J.David N.Cheeke,”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves,” CRC Press,
Florida, 2012.
Reference Books
1. C.R. Hill,J.C. Bamber, G.R. ter Harr, “Physical Principles of Medical Ultrasonics,” John
Wiley & sons, England, 2004.
2. Dale Ensminger, Foster B.Stulen, ”Ultrasonics Data,Equations and Their Practical Uses,”
CRC Press, 2009.
3. Lawrence E.Kinsler, Austin R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V. Sanders, “Fundamentals of Acoustics,”
John Wiley and Sons Inc,USA,2000.
4. L.A. Bulavin, YU.F.Zabashta, “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine,” VSP, Koninklijke
Brill,Boston, 2007.
17EI2039 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Understand the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and Lasers and their applications in the field of
Instrumentation.
Understand the knowledge of Fiber optics and Laser Instrumentation and its Industrial Application.
To introduce the techniques used by Fiber optics and Laser in the field of Medical Application.
Course Outcomes:
Understand measurement techniques in Optical fibers
Apply LASER in Instrumentation and Biomedical applications.
Understand the basic concepts of optical fibers and their properties.
To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications of optical fibers.
Ability to understand Laser fundamentals.
Aadequate knowledgpe about Industrial application of lasers.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit I - Optical Fibers And Their Properties: Principles of light propagation through a fiber – Different types of
fibers and their properties – Optical sources: LED, Laser Diode – Optical detectors :PiN photodiode and Avalanche
Photodetectors (APD)
Unit II - Industrial Application Of Optical Fibers: Fiber optic sensors – Fiber optic Instrumentation system –
Application in Instrumentation: Measurement of Pressure, Temperature, Liquid Level and strain.
Unit III - Laser Fundamentals: Fundamental characteristics of Lasers – Three level and four level lasers –
Properties of laser– Laser modes – Resonator configuration – Q switching and mode locking – Cavity dumping –
Types of lasers: Gas lasers, Solid lasers, Liquid lasers, Semi conductor lasers
Unit IV - Industrial Application Of Lasers: Laser for measurement of distance, Length, Velocity, Acceleration,
and atmospheric effect – Material processing: Laser heating, Welding, Melting and Trimming of materials –
Removal and vaporization
Unit V - Hologram And Medical Application: Holography – Basic principle – Methods– Holographic
Interferometry and applications – Holography for non– destructive testing –Medical applications of lasers :Laser
interaction with biomolecules – Photothermal applications – Photochemical applications – Endoscopes
Text Books
1. Arumugam.M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam,
2006.
2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson Education, 2006
Reference Books
1. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 1995.
2. Ghatak A.K. and Thiagarajan K, Optical Electronics Foundation book , TMH, Cambridge
University Press, 1989.
17EI2040 BUILDING AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives
To gain knowledge on methods of automation techniques in building
Understand Concept of CCTV
Get exposed to different types of fire alarm systems standard
Course Outcomes
Describe the mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals involved in automation applications.
Examine the measuring problems related building automation
Select the suitable sensor/transducer for fire alarm system
Determine the suitable networking and cable technology
Formulate automation for safety purpose
Design a CCTV based security system
Unit I - Introduction to intelligent buildings and Building automation systems: -Intelligent architecture and
structure-Facilities management vs. intelligent buildings- Lifecycle of building- Evolution of intelligent buildings-
Different systems in BAS which includes HVAC, security, fire, lighting systems. Importance of each system in
BAS- Process of BAS design, Role of different stakeholders (Architect, contractor, consultant, application
engineer and engineer) in BAS system design- Comfort parameters for human being -temperature, humidity,
flow, pressure, clean air, Co2%.
Unit II - Introduction to Fire Alarm System: Fire alarm System-The History, Need for Fire alarm System,
Basic Fire Alarm System, Classification of Fire Alarm System, Conventional Fire Alarm System, Addressable
Fire Alarm System, Principles of Operations, Panel Components, Its Applications, FAS architecture: Types of
Architecture and Examples
Unit III - Fire Alarm Detection System Requirement: Stages of Fire Alarm System, Component within Fire
Alarm System, Specific Function within Component -Within Fire alarm System, Important Codes NFPA72 IS
2189 BS 5839,Critical Parameters in Facility Environment, FAS Loops-Classification of Loops and Examples,
Power Supply requirement and its designing parameters, Battery Calculations and Its Requirement and design
Unit IV - Fire Alarm System Details Standards: Network terminology, Classification of Cables, Class of
Cables-Types and distance Supported - Fire terminology -Types of Relay and its Working principle -Working
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Principles of Fire Alarm devices and its working -Application in building safety - Components of fire alarm
detection system - SLC wiring and its classification - Cause and effect Matrix-Fire alarm system - Concepts of
Water leak detection system - Concepts of VESDA (Very early smoke detection system)
Unit V - Introduction to CCTV, Intrusion and Guard Tour System: Basic of CCTV system, System
Architecture of CCTV System - Types of Camera –Fixed, PTZ, Analog, Digital - Terminology for Cameras CIF,
Mpeg, MP4, POE and Concepts- Camera Connectivity- Video Management System: DVR, DVM, NVR- Video
Analytics- Camera Calculations Parameters Resolution, Compression, Image Connectivity, Recording, Motion%,
FPS, Bandwidth-Concepts, Storage Tape, PPF (Pixel per foot), Levels of Resolutions, Distance and Width
Approximate Compression techniques-Intrusion and Guard Tour System- Basics and Technology used in the
Intrusion system.- Application of Intrusion System
Text Book
1. Roger W. Haines “ HVAC Systems Design Handbook”, Fifth Edition 2010.
2. Building Control Systems, Applications Guide (CIBSE Guide) by The CIBSE (2000).
Reference Books
1. Vlado Damjanovski, CCTV, Newnes, 1999.
2. Joel Konicek and Karen Little, “The Book on Electronic Access Control”, Newnes, 1997.
3. D. Helfrick and Cooper, W. D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
4. Kruegle, Herman, “CCTV Surveillance: Analog and Digital Video Practices and Technology”,
ButterworthHeinemann, 2006
14EI2041 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the fundamentals of measurement systems and errors.
To provide adequate knowledge on the measurement of electrical and non-electrical quantities.
To have an understanding of the concepts of signal generators, analyzers and recording instruments.
Course Outcomes:
Describe the principle of working of instruments and their characteristics
Analyze the instrument characteristics and the errors in measurement.
Choose the types of sensor to be used for a specific application.
Apply the concepts of data acquisition for real time data processing
Develop measurement systems for measuring electrical and non-electrical quantities.
Suggest the types of analyzers, display devices and recording instruments for a specific application.
Unit I - Measurement Standards: Measurements. Significance of measurements-methods of measurements –
Standards and their classification. calibration- functional elements of a measurement system - errors in
measurements and statistical analysis.
Unit II - Indicating Instruments: D’Arsonval Galvanometer- PMMC Mechanism- DC Ammeters and voltmeters-
AC current and voltage measurements-RLC measurements-using ac and dc bridges-measurement of incremental
inductance and low capacitances-AC voltmeters using rectifiers- digital voltmeters- Q meters-RF power and voltage
measurement-high frequency measurement of inductances and capacitances.
Unit III - Instruments For Signal Generation And Analysis: Introduction- Sine wave generator- frequency
synthesized signal generator-pulse and square wave generator-Wave analyzers-harmonic distortion analyzer-
spectrum analyzer- heterodyne wave analyzer-frequency counter and time interval measurement- Block diagram of
General Purpose Oscilloscope Measurement of voltage, current , phase and frequency using CRO.
Unit IV - Analog And Digital Data Acquisition Systems: Components of analog and digital data acquisition
systems Instrumentation Systems-Interfacing transducers to Electronic control and measuring instruments-
Multiplexing-Types of multiplexing systems-Uses of data acquisition systems-Use of recorders in digital systems-
Digital recording systems-Input conditioning systems-digital data acquisition systems digital display units-
segmental display-liquid crystal displays.
717
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit V - Transducers: Classification of transducers-Selecting a transducer- strain gauges - Temperature
Transducers – Linear Variable Differential Transformer(LVDT), Advantages and Disadvantages –Capacitive
Transducers, – Piezo-electric Transducers and Optoelectronic Transducers.
Text books
1. Albert D Helfrich, Cooper. W.D.,” Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques” Prentice Hall
of India, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Sawhney A K,” A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai and
Sons, New Delhi, 2000
References
1. Joseph J Carr,” Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement, Pearson Eduation, New Delhi,
2008.
2. Nakra B C and Choudhury K.k.,” Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2004.
17EI2042 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the basics of sensors and control
To teach the signal conditioning circuits for data acquisition and control
To study the characteristics of the control elements in a closed loop control loop.
Course Outcomes:
Analyze the characteristics of sensors and transducers.
Determine the characteristics of instruments.
Design controllers for a given system.
Perform stability analysis of a system
Understand the process system design
Analyze various control valve characteristics
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI2043 PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the fundamentals of sensors and control concepts
To teach the concepts of system analysis and control
To gain knowledge about the working of various sensors
Course Outcomes:
• Represent the mathematical model of a system.
• Determine the response of different order systems for various test inputs.
• Analyze the stability of the system.
Apply the knowledge of various Measuring Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation system.
Derive the Mathematical Model of a physical system.
• Analyse and decide suitable control schemes for a particular system.
Unit I - Introduction to Process control: System – steady state design – process control – process control
block diagram –definition of a process, measurement, controller, and control element, loop – damped and cyclic
response- feedback control – transient responses – laplace transform – transforms of simple functions – step
function, exponential function, ramp function and sine function.
Unit II - Control systems: Open and closed loop systems, servo- mechanisms, hydraulic and pneumatic control
systems, two-way control, proportional control, differential control and integral control.
Control valve – Construction and working of pneumatically operated valve and spring – diaphragm
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Actuator
Unit III - Stability Analysis: Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula, Block diagram algebra. Stability –
concept of stability, definition of stability in a linear system, stability criterion, characteristic equation, Routh test for
stability
Unit IV - Pressure and Temperature sensors: Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive
pressure sensor, Inductive pressure sensor, strain gauge, pressure sensor, diaphragm, bourdon tube, differential
pressure cell Temperature sensors –Construction and working of RTD, Thermistors, Thermocouples, bimetallic
strips
Unit V - Level sensor: Simple float systems, capacitive sensing element, radioactive methods (nucleonic level
sensing) – ultrasonic level sensor. Measurement of density – U-type densitometer, Buoyancy meter Measurement of
composition – Electrical conductivity cell, non-dispersive photometers,
pH meter, Gas chromatograph, Mass spectrometer.
Text Books
1. J.F Richardson A D.G.Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “Chemical Engineering”, Volume3, Butherworth
– Heinemann, an imprint of Elsevier, 2006.
Reference Books
1. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” Mc- Graw Hill International Edition ,
Second Edition,singapore, S2008.
2. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, ninteenth reprint 2012
3. S.Baskar,”Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”Anuradha Agencies Publishers,
2004.
4. Nagrath, M and Gopal, I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third Edition Reprint
2003.
5. Renganathan, “Transducer engineering, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.
6. Patranabis, “Principles of industrial instrumentation”, Printice Hall India, 2004. Patranabis, D., Second
Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.. New Delhi. 1997, ISBN 0074623346.
7. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology ”, Prentice Hall , New
Jersey2006.
17EI2044 NANO SCALE SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the basics of Nano technology
To teach the principles of nano sensors
To explore the applications of nanosensor and transducers
Course Outcomes:
Describe the basics of development of Nano devices
Indicate the use of nano technology in sensor development
Identify the sensors that can be developed using nanotechnology
Apply nano sensors to practical applications
Evaluate the performance of nano sensors compared with conventional sensors
Develop simple application models using nano sensors and transducers
Unit I - Quantum Devices: Quantum Electronic devices – Electrons in mesocopic structures – Short channel, MOS
Transistor – split Gate Transistor – Electron wave transistor – Electron spin transistor – Quantum Dot array –
Quantum computer- Bit and Qubit. Carbon Nanotube based logic gates, optical devices. . Connection with quantum
dots, quantum wires, and quantum wells
Unit II - Tunneling Devices: Tunnelling element – Tunnel Effect and Tunneling Elements-Tunnelling Diode –
Resonant Tunnelling Diode – Three -Terminal Resonate Tunnelling Devices-Technology of RTD-Digital circuits
design based on RTDs - Basics Logic Circuits – Single Electron Transistor(SET) – Principle – Coulomb Blockade
Performance – Technology- Circuit Design- Logic and Memory Circuits – SET adder as an Example of a
Distributed Circuit.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit III - Nanosensors : Micro and nano-sensors, Fundamentals of sensors, biosensor, micro fluids, Packaging and
characterization of sensors, Method of packaging at zero level, dye level and first level. Sensors for aerospace and
defense: Accelerometer, Pressure Sensor, Night Vision System, Nano tweezers, nano-cutting tools, Integration of
sensor with actuators and electronic circuitry,
Unit IV - Applications: Sensor for bio-medical applications: Cardiology, Neurology and as diagnostic tool, For
other civil applications: metrology, bridges etc. Biosensors. Clinical Diagnostics, generation of biosensors,
immobilization, characteristics, applications, conducting Polymer based sensor, DNA Biosensors, optical sensors.
Biochips. Metal Insulator Semiconductor devices, molecular electronics, information storage, molecular switching,
Schottky devices,
Unit V - NEMS: Inertial sensors – accelerometer – gyroscope - micromechanical pressure sensors – pizoresistive –
capacitive - microrobotics – micro channel heat sinks – optical MEMS – visual display – precision optical platform
– optical data switching – RF MEMS – MEMS variable capacitors – MEMS switches – Resonators.
Text Books 1. Sensors: Micro &Nanosensors, Sensor Market trends (Part 1&2) by H. Meixner., 2005
2. “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems-From Transistors to Molecular Quantum Devices” , K. Goser, P.
Glosekotter and J. Dienstuhl, Springer, 2004.
3. HerveRigneault, Jean-Michel Lourtioz, Claude Delalande, Ariel Levenson,
“Nanophotonics”, ISTE.
Reference Books
1. Nanoscience& Technology: Novel structure and phenomena by Ping Sheng (Editor)
2. Nano Engineering in Science &Technology : An introduction to the world of nano design
3. by Michael Rieth.
4. Tai –Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, Tata McGraw-Hill publication, 2001.
5. Rai-Choudhury, “MEMS and MOEMS technology and applications”, PHI learning private Ltd, 2009.
6. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, “The MEMS Handbook”, CRC Press, 2002.
17EI3001 INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System
To understand the importance of Instrumentation
To learn about computer based instrumentation
Course Outcomes:
Identify the system with respect to the given inputs.
Analyze the characteristics of transducers.
Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system.
Develop digital measurement systems.
Understand the use of virtual instrumentation.
Apply computer based instrumentation for real time applications.
Unit I - Instrumentation System: Introduction – Philosophy of Measurement – The general
instrumentation system – Static and Dynamic Characteristics – The overall transfer function –
Dynamic response of the sensor – The measurement system as a series of networks
Unit II - Resistance and Inductance Transducer: Basic principle – Potentiometer –resistance strain gauge–
Measurement of torque– Stress measurement on rotating members –
Semi- conductor strain gauges – Contact pressure humidity measurement – Basic principle – Linear variable
differential transformer – LVDT equations – RVDT – application of LVDT –
LVDT pressure transducer – Synchros – Synchros as position transducer – Induction
potentiometer – Variable reluctance accelerometer – Microsyn
Unit III - Capacitance and Piezoelectric Transducers: Basic principle – Capacitance
displacement transducer – Differential pressure transducer feedback type capacitance proximity
pickup – Condenser microphone – Pulse width modulating circuit – Introduction – Material for
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
piezoelectric transducer – Equivalent circuit of a piezoelectric crystal – Piezoelectric coefficients – Mode of
deformation – General form of piezoelectric transducers – Environmental effects
Unit IV - Digital methods of Measurements: Digital voltmeters and multimeters – Digital
frequency, period and time measurements – Digital tachometers – Digital phase meters – Automation in digital
instruments – Digital data recording – Digital Transducers
Unit V - Computer based Instrumentation: Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation – Architecture of Virtual
Instrumentation – Virtual Instruments Versus Traditional Instruments – Advantages of VI – PC based Data
acquisition system – Interfacing techniques to the IBM PC –Plug– In data acquisition boards – Interface Buses: PCI,
PXI, VXI
Reference Books
1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and
Philadelphia, 2004.
2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill,New
York, 2008.
3. Kalsi H S, “Electronics Instrumentation, ”Second Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010
4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control
Systems” Elsevier 2003.
5. Mathivanan “PC– based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2009
6. Dr.S.Renganathan, “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers, New Delhi, 2003.
7. D.Patranabis, “Principles of Electronic Instrumentation,” PHI, 2008
8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”
Springer, 2007.
17EI3002 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modeling.
To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling.
To analyze complex control schemes
Course Outcomes:
Develop mathematical model of a physical process.
Analyze the various modes of controllers
Categorize the different types of valves.
Understand the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling.
Formulate the design of Model based and adaptive controllers
Demonstrate various control algorithms in the real time complex process.
Unit I - Process Control System: Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Instrument terms
and symbols – Regulator and servo control – Classification of variables – Process characteristics: Process equation,
Degrees of freedom, Modeling of simple systems – Thermal, Gas, Liquid systems, Process lag, Load disturbance
and their effect on processes – Self – Regulating processes – Interacting and non –Interacting processes
Unit II - Controller modes: Basic control action, Two position, Multi – Position, Floating control modes –
Continuous controller modes: Proportional, Integral, Derivative – Composite controller modes: PI, PD, PID,
Integral wind – Up and prevention. Auto/Manual transfer, Response of Controllers for different types of test inputs
– Selection of control mode for different process with control scheme – Control Valve sizing – Control valve types:
Linear, Equal percentage and quick opening valve
Unit III - Optimum controller settings – Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method – Damped
oscillation method – Ziegler Nichol’s tuning – Pole placement method – Feed forward control –Ratio control –
Cascade control – Split range control – Averaging control – Inferential control
Unit IV - Introduction to multivariable system – Evolution of loop interaction – Evolution of relative gains –
Single loop and overall stability – Model equations for a binary distillation column – Transfer function matrix –
Method of inequalities – Decoupling control – Centralized controller
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit V - Adaptive Controllers: Internal model control – Adaptive control – Model predictive control: dynamic
matrix control – model – Generalized predictive control
Reference Books
1. Stephanopoulos G., “Chemical Process Control, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw – Hill Higher
Education, Singapore,2008.
3. Wayne BequetteB,’ Process control: modeling, design, and simulation’ Prentice Hall ,
New Jersey – 2003.
4. Smith C.L and Corripio.A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”,
John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2006.
5. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and
Control” ,Willey India, 2006.
6. Marlin. T.E., Process Control, Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork, 2000.
17EI3003 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives
To understand the basics of mathematical modeling.
To study the stability analysis of linear and non linear systems.
To learn the characteristics of non linear systems
Course Outcomes
Describe the concept of Non-linear control systems.
Identify the various techniques to design the controllers for the higher order systems
Apply suitable mathematical method to solve the difference equation.
Examine stability analysis of linear and non linear systems.
Design the State Space model of various dynamic systems
Interpret the concepts of subspace identification and design of advanced controllers for various real time
dynamic systems in a better way by referring the examples.
Unit I - Modeling of Dynamic Systems: Definition of System– Mathematical modeling – State space
representation of system – Centrifugal Governor – Ground vehicle – Permanent Magnet stepper motor – Inverted
Pendulum
Unit II - Analysis of Mathematical Models: State space method– Phase plane – Isoclines – Numerical methods –
Taylor Series – Euler’s method – Predictor Corrector method – RungeKutta method – Principle of Linearization of
Differential Equation
Unit III - State Space Analysis: Reachability and controllability – Observability and constructability –
Companion forms – Controller / Observer form – State feed – back control – State estimator – Full order and
reduced order Estimator – Combined controller estimator compensator
Unit IV - Nonlinear Systems: Introduction to Non linear systems- Saturation–Relay–Dead zone – Backlash non
linearities
Unit V - Stability of Nonlinear System: Stability of Nonlinear system – Lyapunov stability theorems – Lyapunov
function for nonlinear system – Krasovskii’s method – Variable gradient method – Phase plane analysis, Singular
points, Constructing phase portraits – Limit cycle – Describing function analysis.
Reference Books
1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.
2. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey 2009.
4. Vidyasagar .M, “Nonlinear system analysis”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey 2002.
5. Singiresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods”, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, 2001.
6. Jean – Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, “Applied nonlinear control”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2004
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
17EI3004 DISCRETE CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
To learn the concepts of discrete time Control systems.
To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design.
To deal with the different types of digital control algorithm.
Course Outcome
Recognize the need for discrete time control systems
Design control system using polynomial equations approach.
Demonstrate the concept of pole placement and state observer techniques.
Analyze the state space representation of discrete time system and infer whether all the variables are
measurable or controllable.
Identify different types of digital controllers for the real time systems.
Evaluate the stability analysis of the discrete time system.
Unit I - Introduction: Review of Z Transform – Impulse Sampling and data Hold – Reconstructing original signal
from sampled signal – Pulse Transfer function – Mapping between the S plane and Z plane – Stability Analysis in
Z domain – Transient and steady state response analysis – modified Z transform
Unit II - State Space Analysis: State Space representation of discrete time Signals – Solving discrete time State
Space Equations – Pulse Transfer Function Matrix – Discretization of continuous time State Space Equations
Unit III - Pole Placement and Observer Design: Controllability – Observability – Useful Transformations in
State Space Analysis and Design – Design Via Pole placement – State observer – Servo Systems
Unit IV - Polynomial Equations approach to Control System Design: Diophantine Equations – Polynomial
Equations Approach to Regulator system– Polynomial Equations Approach to Control system Design – Design of
Model Matching Control Systems
Unit V - Digital Control Algorithm: Implementation of different digital control algorithms: Digital PID,
Deadbeat, Dahlin, Smith predictor and Internal Model Control algorithm with examples
Reference Books:
1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, 4th
Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Ogata, “Discrete- Time Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Singapore,2002
3. Pradeep B Deshpande, “Computer Process Control with Advanced Control Applications”, Instrument
Society of America,2000.
4. Gene F. Franklin,J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education Limited-2002.
17EI3005 INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in Control.
To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in Control.
To introduce genetic algorithm
Course Outcomes:
Identify and describe soft computing techniques
Select suitable optimization algorithm for Industrial applications
Apply Neural Network control techniques in real time systems
Analyze Fuzzy Logic reasoning to handle uncertainity and solve engineering problems
Develop soft computing algorithms to solve real world problems pertaining to control and embedded
applications
Predict the feasibility of applying a soft computing methodology for a particular problem
Unit I - Introduction to Neural Networks : Introduction - biological neurons and their artificial models - learning,
adaptation and neural network's learning rules - types of neural networks- single layer, multiple layer- feed forward,
feedback networks; back propagation - learning and training - Hopfield network.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit II - Neural Network for Control Applications: Neural network for non-linear systems –schemes of neuro
control- system identification forward model and inverse model- indirect learning neural network control
applications – case studies- Inverted pendulum, cerebellar Model Articulation Control.
Unit III - Introduction to Fuzzy Logic :Fuzzy sets- fuzzy operation -fuzzy arithmetic –fuzzy relations- fuzzy
relational equations -approximate reasoning -fuzzy propositions - fuzzy quantifiers - if-then rules fuzzy for process
automation- level, pressure, temperature process.
Unit IV - Fuzzy Logic Control : Structure of fuzzy logic controller - fuzzification models- data base - rule base -
inference engine defuzzification module - Non-linear fuzzy control - PID like FLC- sliding mode FLC - Sugeno
FLC - adaptive fuzzy control -fuzzy control applications- case studies.
Unit V - Genetic Algorithm and its Applications : Fundamentals of genetic algorithm: Evolutionary computation -
search space –encoding - reproduction-elements of genetic algorithm-genetic modeling-comparison of GA and
traditional search methods - Applications of Genetic based machine learning-Genetic Algorithm and parallel
processors - composite laminates - constraint optimization - multilevel optimization – case studies
Reference Books 1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House, 1999
2. Rajasekaran.S and G.A Vijayalakshmi Pai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms,
Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.
3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory –and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic Publishers,1994.
5. Melanie Mitchell, ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’, Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi, Edition:
2004.
6. Kosko, B. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.
17EI3006 OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To provide an introductory account of the theory of optimal control and its applications
To give students background in dynamic optimization
To learn Calculus of Variations, Pontryagin's Minimum Principle, and Bellman's Dynamic Programming.
Course Outcomes:
Identify a linear or non -linear system
Evaluate the performance of a given system
Apply the concept of Dynamic Programming
Solve the optimization problems using Calculus of variations
Measure the performance of the system using Pontryagin’s Minimum Principle
Devise Iterative Numerical Techniques for finding optimal controls and trajectories
Unit I - Introduction: Problem formulation – Mathematical model – Physical constraints – Performance measure –
Optimal control problem – Form of optimal control – Performance measures for optimal control problem –
Selection of performance measure
Unit II - Dynamic Programming: Optimal control law – Principle of optimality – An optimal control system – A
recurrence relation of dynamic programming – Computational procedure –Characteristics of dynamic programming
solution – Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation –Continuous linear regulator problems
Unit III - Calculus of Variations: Functions and Functional – Maxima and minima of function– Variation of
functional – Extremal of functional – Euler Lagrange equation
Unit IV - Variational Approach to Optimal Control Problems: Necessary conditions for optimal control –
Linear regulator problems – Linear tracking problems –Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality
constraints
Unit V - Iterative Numerical Techniques: Minimum control effort problems – Singular intervals in optimal
control problems – Numerical determination of optimal trajectories – Two point boundary value problems –
Methods of steepest descent – Variation of extremals – Quasilinearization – Gradient projection algorithm
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books
1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction, Prentice – Hall networks
series, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Singiresu S. Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age
International (P) Ltd., Publishers New Delhi – 2004.
3. Gopal. M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw – Hill Companies New Delhi,
2009.
4. Dimitri P. Bertsekas.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol –1 Athena
Scientific, Bell mount MA, 2000.
17EI3007 ADVANCED INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To understand the basic concepts of various process measurement.
To provide sound knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement of industrial process
parameters.
To design measurement system for process variables.
Course Outcomes:
Recognize the Basic construction, principle and working of various type of transducers/sensor to measure
physical quantities like pressure, flow, level.
Analyze, formulate and select suitable sensor and how to calibrate also knows to apply for the given
applications.
Identify technical terms and nomenclature used in industrial measurement, industrial processes, process
measurement and industrial process control
Acquire knowledge of safety practices used in the measurement and control of industrial processes
Demonstrate skills in trouble shooting problems with the measurement and control of industrial processes.
Design an instrument for a specific application
Unit I - Pressure: Manometers – Different types – Mechanical pressure measurements – Bourdon tube, bellows
and Diaphragms – Electrical pressure elements – Piezo resistive sensor –Differential capacitance sensor- Resonator
sensor – Force balance transmitter - Differential pressure transmitter and its applications – other methods – Dead
weight tester. Design a pressure sensor to measure stream pressure measurement in a boiler.
Unit II - Level:Level gauges – float gauges – Hydrostatic pressure – displacement –Echo –Ultrasonic level, radar
level, laser, magnetostrictive level – Weight – Capacitive – Radiation – Measurement of level of solids – Other
methods. Develop a procedure to measure liquid level in a boiler drum level measurement.
Unit III - Flow: Pressure based flow meters – Venturi tubes and basic principles – Volumetric flow calculations –
Mass flow calculations – Orifice plates – Pitot tube – proper installation – laminar flow meter – Other methods.
Demonstrate the working of DPT for pressure based flow meters - Variable area flow meters – Rotameters, weirs
and flumes – Velocity based flow meters – Positive displacement flow meters – True mass flow meters – coriolis
mass flow meter-Principle and constructional details of electromagnetic flow meter – different types of excitation
schemes used – different types of ultrasonic flow meters – laser doppler anemometer – vortex shedding flow meter
– target flow meter
Unit IV - Temperature: Bimetallic temperature sensors – filled bulb temperature sensor—Thermistor and RTD –
Signal conditioning of industrial RTDs and their characteristics –Three lead and four lead RTD -Temperature sensor
accessories - Thermometer - calibration of thermometer and their compensation - Thermocouples - Thermocouple
types -Connections -Laws of thermocouple - Reference compensation - software compensation - Signal conditioning
of thermocouple – Non contact temperature sensors. Design a signal conditioning circuit for thermocouple output
range of 0v-10v.
Unit V - Humidity, density and Viscosity: Humidity measurements – Density measurements – Viscosity terms –
Definition of absolute and kinematic viscosity –continuous measurement of viscosity– Industrial viscosity meter.
Construct a Humidity sensor for agriculture applications.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books
1. Doebelin, E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, fourth edition McGraw Hill
International, 1978.
2. Noltingk, B.E., “Instrumentation Reference Book”, II edition Butterworth Heinemann, 1996.
3. Flow measurement, “Practical Guides for Measurement and Control”, ISA publication, 1991.
4. Anderew, W.G., “Applied Instrumentation in Process Industries” - a survey Vol-I Gulf Publishing
Company.
5. Liptak, B.G., “Process Measurement & Analysis”, IV Edition, Chilton Book Company 1995.
6. Considine, D.M., “Process Instruments and Control & Handbook", McGraw Hill 1985.
17EI3008 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
• To impart the concepts of process modeling
• To recall the various system identification techniques
• Apply adaptive control schemes in various processes
Course Outcomes:
• Classify the various models for identification
• Identify the given process model
• Validate the given model
• Design adaptive control.
• Apply the design of adaptive controllers for various industrial and real life applications
Unit I - Models of LTI systems: Linear Models - State space Models - OE model - Model sets, Structures and
Identifiability - Models for Time - varying and Non - linear systems: Models with Nonlinearities – Nonlinear state -
Space models - Black box models - Fuzzy models
Unit II - Transient response and Correlation Analysis – Frequency response analysis – Spectral Analysis – Least
Square – Recursive Least Square –Forgetting factor - Maximum Likelihood – Instrumental Variable methods
Unit III - Open and closed loop identification: Approaches – Direct and indirect identification – Joint input-
output identification – Non - linear system identification – Wiener models – Power series expansions – State
estimation techniques – Non linear identification using Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic
Unit IV - Adaptive Control: Introduction – Uses – Auto tuning – Self Tuning Regulators (STR) – Model
Reference Adaptive Control (MRAC) – Types of STR and MRAC – Different approaches to self tuning regulators
– Stochastic Adaptive control – Gain Scheduling
Unit V - Case Studies: Inverted Pendulum - Robot arm - Process control application: heat exchanger, Distillation
column - Application to power system - Ship steering control
Reference Books
1. Lennart Ljung, “System Identification Theory for the User”, Prentice Hall, Inc., NJ, 1999.
2. Torsten Soderstrom, Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, prentice Hall ` International (UK) Ltd,2000.
3. Astrom and Wittenmark,” Adaptive Control Second Edition”, Addison - Wesley Publishing Company
2001.
4. William S. Levine, “ Control Hand Book” CRC Press, Jaico Publishing House, 2000
5. Narendra and Annasamy,” Stable Adaptive Control Systems, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2005
17EI3009 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL
LABORATORY
Credits:0:0:2
Course Objectives:
To demonstrate the various process Measurements.
To inculcate the various controller design.
To give an exposure about Programmable Logic Controller.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Outcomes:
Measure various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.
Design control algorithms for different control loops.
Write ladder logic program in Programmable Logic Controller for Control purpose.
Perform simulation for complex control schemes
Calibrate the process instruments
Assess the performance of the system in real time applications
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI3010 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits:0:0 :2
Course Objectives:
To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.
To understand the concept of signal processing using virtual instruments
To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition using virtual instrumentation
Course Outcomes:
Understand the programming methodology.
Will be able to use the appropriate function for the given problem.
Develop simulations for real time process.
Analyze real world signals.
Interface real process with a virtual instrument.
Perform signal processing operations using virtual instrumentation.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI3011 EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To impart the basic knowledge about Embedded hardware and its functions.
To learn about the interfacing of embedded hardware with embedded software for Real World
applications.
To understand the concepts of embedded programming.
Course Outcomes:
List different software tools used for system design
Review the structure of embedded software and download it to the embedded hardware.
Demonstrate the necessary of embedded hardware and the interface issues related to it.
Summarize the programming issues related to instrumentation system
Identify the various procedures for designing real time control system
Design a real time system for control applications
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI3012 REAL TIME AND EMBEDDED CONTROL AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To study the fundamentals of embedded system and its architecture.
To study the fundamental concepts of how process are created and controlled with OS
To study the development activities of real time system for control and automation
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course outcomes:
Identify the basic need of embedded systems and their usage in Instrumentation systems
Set up an interfacing circuit for real time processing and control.
Select the suitable languages and techniques for embedded system application development
Construct the real time models for control applications
Schedule the structure of RTOS for multitasking execution for real time embedded applications
Design real time system for control and automation applications using embedded processor
Unit I - Instrumentation System Design: Definitions-Characteristics -Architecture of an embedded system-
Overview of micro-controllers and microprocessors- Classifications of an embedded system - Embedded processor
architectural definitions-Typical application scenario of embedded systems- Design Process.
Unit II - Methods for Interfacing and Control: Overview of analog and digital Interfacing- LED, Seven
Segment Display, Switch Interface, Keypad Interface, Analog to Digital and Digital to analog converters, Timer
operations. Pressure sensing, Temperature sensor interfacing and serial communications
Unit III - Techniques for Embedded Instrumentation System Design: State Machine and state Tables in
embedded design. High level language descriptions of S/W for embedded system, Getting embedded software into
a target system, Simulation and Emulation of an embedded system, Software development tools.
Unit IV - Real Time Models and Operating Systems: Real time languages , OS tasks, Task states, Real time
kernel, Preemptive Kernel, Non preemptive kernel, Priority Inversion Problem, Task scheduling, Round robin
scheduling, Cooperative scheduling, Preemptive Scheduling, Petrinet Model, Interrupt Service Routine in RTOS
environment, Study of Micro C/OS-II RTOS
Unit V - Control and Automation Applications: Fundamentals of real-time processing in automation and
control, Liquid level control, Stepper Motor Control, Modern speed control- Hardware and software approach for
PWM Signal Generation, Servo Motor Control, Square Wave generator, PID Controller, Control of Electro
Pneumatic Mechanism, Elevator Control, Water Tank Control system, Embedded Implementation of temperature
control system, Remote Control applications.
Reference Books
1. RajKamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design”, Tata McGrawHill , Second
Edition, 2008
2. Tim Wilhurst, “An Introduction to the Design of Small Scale Embedded Systems, Palgrave, 2004.
3. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier, 2005.
4. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded Systems Design”, Wiley India, 2006
17EI3013 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the process control philosophies
To learn the Programmable Logic controller design
To deal with computers based systems for control applications
Course Outcomes:
Explain architecture of industrial automation system
Understand various automation components and systems
Measure industrial parameters like temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level,
humidity and pH.
Apply fundamentals of process control for automation.
Develop Programs using programmable logic controllers for industrial automation
Use computers for industrial automation.
Unit I - Introduction to Industrial Automation: Defining Industrial Automation, Objectives and Requirements,
Role of Automation in Industry, Types of Automation System, Architecture of Industrial Automation System
Nature of Industrial Process: continuous & discrete state, sequential process, process variables and their
classification.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit II - Process Control: Introduction to process control, Problems on Continuous, Discontinuous & Composite
Controller, PID Control Tuning, Implementation of PID Controller, Control Structures of Feed Forward Feed,
Backward & Inertial Controller, Process Variables & Classification
Unit III - Automation components: Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level,
humidity and pH measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC, power
MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.
Unit IV - Programmable logic controllers: Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog
digital input and output modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication
and networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial automation, Application of
PLC to process control industries.
Unit V - Computer aided measurement and control systems: Role of computers in measurement and control,
Elements of computer aided measurement and control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control
hardware, process related interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data
transfer techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data acquisition system, Internet of
things (IoT) for plant automation
Reference Books: 1. John webb, “Programmable logic controllers-Principles & applications”, Prentice Hall of India,2003.
2. C. D. Johnson, “Process control instrumentation Technology, 8th
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
3. S.K. Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control” , 3rd
Edition,The McGraw Hill,2009.
5. Andrew Parr, “Industrial control handbook” , 3rd
Edition, Newnes,1998.
17EI3014 CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives
Understand the performance specification, limitations and structure of controllers
Design of controllers using root-locus and frequency domain techniques
To introduce the techniques of extending the theory on continuous systems to discrete time systems
Course Outcomes
Ability to understand the specification, limitation and structure of controllers.
Design controllers for process applications
Design a controller using Root-locus and Frequency Domain technique.
Design discrete state space systems
Acquire knowledge on state space and ability to design a controller and observer.
Design LQR and LQG for a system.
Unit I - Basics And Root-Locus Design: Design specifications-sensitivity and stability- Limitations- Controller
structure- one and two degrees of freedom- PID controllers and Lag-lead compensators- Root locus design-
Design examples
Unit II - Frequency Response Based Design: PID controllers and Lag-lead compensators – Design using Bode
plots- use of Nyquist plots and Routh-Hurwitz Criterion-Design examples
Unit III - Design In Discrete Domain: Sample and Hold devices -Discretisation - Effect of sampling on
transfer function – Discrete root locus, Nyquist plots –Jury’s stability test- Direct discrete design -Design
examples
Unit IV - Discrete State Variable Design: Effect of sampling on Controlability, observability- state and output
feedback- observers - estimated state feedback –Design examples
Unit V - LQR and LQG Design: Formulation of LQR problem- Pontryagin’s minimum principle and
Hamiltonian solutions- Ricatti’s equation – Optimal estimation- Kalman filter –solution to continuous and
discrete systems - Design examples.
Reference Books
1. M. Gopal “Modern control system Theory” New Age International, 2005.
2. Arthur G. O. Mutambara, “Design and Analysis of Control Systems”, CRC Press,
3. Indian reprint 2009.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and A. E. Naeini “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI
(Pearson), 2002.
5. Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe and Mario E. Salgado “Control system Design”, PHI
(Pearson), 2003.
6. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M Workman, “Digital Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI (Pearson),
2002.
7. Loan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito,” Digital Control Systems, Design, Identification and Implementation”,
Springer, 2006.
8. Benjamin C. Kuo “Digital control systems”, Oxford University Press, 2004.
17EI3015 SCADA SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.
To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.
To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.
Course Outcomes:
Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.
Apply the concept of Supervisory Control
Perform simulation for various processes.
Describe the programming logic involved in automation
Analyze SCADA protocol for effective communication
Apply the concept of optical and wireless techniques
Unit I - Introduction to SCADA: Data acquisition systems, Evolution of SCADA, Communication technologies,
Monitoring and supervisory functions, SCADA applications in Utility Automation, Industries
Unit II - SCADA System Components: Schemes- Remote Terminal Unit (RTU),Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IED),Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Communication Network, SCADA Server, SCADA/HMI Systems
Unit III - SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA architectures, advantages and disadvantages of each system -
single unified standard architecture -IEC 61850
Unit IV - SCADA Communication: various industrial communication technologies -wired and wireless methods
and fiber optics. Open standard communication protocols
Unit V - SCADA Applications: Utility applications- Transmission and Distribution sector -operations, monitoring,
analysis and improvement. Industries - oil, gas and water. Case studies, Implementation, Simulation Exercises
Reference Books:
1. Stuart A. Boyer: SCADA- Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, Instrument Society of America
Publications, USA, 1999
2. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders: Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5 and Related
Systems, Newness Publications, Oxford, UK, 2004
17EI3016 DESIGN OF LINEAR MULTIVARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To inculcate the knowledge of Multivariable control systems.
To design controller for multivariable control systems.
To apply the design for various applications.
Course Outcomes:
Apply the concept of Multivariable control systems.
Design controller for multivariable control systems.
Use the corresponding controller synthesis techniques.
To inculcate the knowledge of P&ID for multivariable processes.
Testing the stability of multivariable control system
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Derive the mathematical model of a system
Unit I - Analysis: System representations, return difference matrix, stability theory, multivariable poles and
zeros.
Unit II - Design Methods: Design criteria, LQG design methods (including the optimal linear quadratic regulator
and the Kalman filter), norm based methods, robust stability and performance.
Unit III - Advanced Design Methods: H-infinity design techniques, including the generalized regulator
problem.
Unit IV - Reduction Techniques: Model reduction, including modal and balanced truncation.
Unit V - Design examples: Use of software for the design of controllers for industrial processes such as
distillation column, reactors.
Reference Books:
1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.
2. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Charles R. Slivinsky, Donald G. Schultz, Lynn E. Weaver, “The design of linear multivariable control
systems using modern control theory”, 1969.
4. Ying-Jyi Paul Wei, “Frequency-domain approaches to linear multivariable control system designs, 1979.
5. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey, 2009.
17EI3017 EMBEDDED INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System
To understand the importance of Instrumentation
To deal with the concepts of embedded instrumentation systems
Course Outcomes:
Infer the principle and characteristics of instrumentation system
Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system
Analyze the characteristics of transducers
Develop the Virtual Instrumentation in the Engineering Process
Design the computer based instrumentation for real time applications
Create a prototype using data acquisition board
Unit I – Instrumentation: Introduction - Functional elements of an Instrumentation system. Classification of an
instruments - Transducers- Static Characteristics - Dynamic Characteristics, Errors and error analysis
UnitI I - Sensors And Transducers: Introduction Displacement, position and proximity sensors - Potentiometer-
Capacitive element -Differential transformers - Eddy current proximity sensors - Inductive proximity switch -
Optical encoders - Hall effect sensors Velocity and motion - Pyro electric sensors - Liquid flow - Liquid level -
Floats - Differential pressure - Temperature - Bimetallic strips - Light sensors
Unit III - Virtual Instrumentation: Introduction - Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation - Architecture of Virtual
Instrumentation - Virtual Instruments Vs traditional Instruments Creating Virtual Instruments Using LabVIEW
Virtual Instrumentation in the Engineering Process
Unit IV - Programming Techniques: LabVIEW Environment- Dataflow Programming - Programming Concepts
of VI - Control Structures - Selection Structures – Arrays - Clusters - Inputs and Outputs
Unit V - PC based data acquisition system - Interfacing techniques to IBM PC plug – In data acquisition boards
Interface buses: PCI, PXI, VXI
Reference Books
1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia,
2004.
2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill,New York, 2011.
3. Kalsi H S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Second Edition, Tata Mcgrawhill, New Delhi, 2010
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems” Elsevier
2003.
5. Mathivanan “PC– based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2008
6. Dr.S.Renganathan, “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.
7. D.Patranabis, “Principles of Electronic Instrumentation,” PHI, 2008
8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.
9. H K P Neubert, “Instrument Transducers”, Oxford University Press, Cambridge,2000.
17EI3018 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION
AND CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
Understand the basics of networking
Comprehend the significance of different Industrial Interface Standards
Apply the appropriate interface for different applications
Course Outcomes:
Identify the conventional point to point and multipoint interface standards
Classify the different channel access methods
Choose the appropriate Industrial communication network
Explain the concept of Distributed Control System
Justify the need of wireless network
Describe the advanced wireless communication standards
Unit I - Introduction and basic principles: Protocols – Physical standards – ISO/OSI reference –UART - Serial
data communications interface standards –RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard – The 4 to 20mA current loop
–Parallel Interface - IEEE 488 – USB.
Unit II - HART and Field Bus: Evolution of signal standards – HART communication protocol – Communication
modes – HART networks – Control system interface – HART and OSI model – Filed bus introduction – General
field bus architecture – Basic requirements of field bus standard – Field bus topology – Inter operability
Unit III - Distributed Control System: Evolution – Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process
interfacing issues – Communication facilities.
Unit IV - Interfaces in DCS: Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces – Operator
displays - Engineering interfaces – Low level and high level engineering interfaces – General purpose computers
in DCS.
Unit V - Wireless Communication: Wireless sensor networks: Architecture – Sensor network scenario. Wireless
HART – Existing Wireless Options: IEEE 802.15.4 - ISA 100 – Zigbee – Bluetooth – their relevance to industrial
applications
Reference Books:
1. Mackay, S., Wright,E., Reynders,D., and Park,J., “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation
and Troubleshooting”, Newnes Publication, Elsevier, 2004.
2. Buchanan,W., “Computer Busses: Design and Application”, CRC Press, 2000.
3. Bowden,R., “HART Application Guide”, HART Communication Foundation, 1999.
4. Bela G.Liptak, “Instrument Engineers’ Handbook, Volume 3 : Process Software and Digital Networks”, 4th
Edition, CRC Press, 2011.
5. Berge, J., “Field Buses for Process Control: Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance”, ISA Press, 2004.
6. Lawrence (Larry) M. Thompson and Tim Shaw, “Industrial Data Communications”, 5th Edition, ISA
Press, 2015.
7. NPTEL Lecture notes on, ”Computer Networks” by Department of Electrical Engg., IIT Kharagpur.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
17EI3019 MULTI SENSOR DATA FUSION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To impart the concepts multi sensor data fusion technique.
To give an exposure about the data fusion algorithm
To introduce the concepts of filter design
Course Outcomes:
Understand the concept of Multi sensor data fusion
Develop algorithms for data fusion
Analyse the practical issues in estimation
Classify the different types of advanced filtering concepts
Use multi sensor data fusion technique for practical applications
Design a Kalman filter
Unit I - Sensors and sensor data - Use of multiple sensors - Fusion applications - The inference hierarchy -Output
data - Data fusion model - Architectural concepts and issues - Benefits of data fusion - Mathematical tools used –
Algorithms - Co-ordinate transformations - Rigid body motion – Dependability and Markov chains - Meta-
heuristics
Unit II - Taxonomy of algorithms for multisensor data fusion - Data association - Identity declaration
Unit III - Kalman filtering - Practical aspects of Kalman filtering - Extended Kalman filters - Decision level
identify fusion - Knowledge based approaches
Unit IV - Data information filter - Extended information filter - Decentralized and scalable decentralized
estimation - Sensor fusion and approximate agreement - Optimal sensor fusion using range trees recursively-
Distributed dynamic sensor fusion
Unit V - Tessellated – Trees - Graphs and function - Representing ranges and uncertainty in data structures -
Designing optimal sensor systems with in dependability bounds - Implementing data fusion system
Reference Books
1. David L. Hall and Sonya AH McMullen, Mathematical techniques in Multisensor data fusion 2nd
Edition,
Artech House, Inc., Norwood, MA, March,2004.
2. R.R. Brooks and S.S. Iyengar, Multisensor Fusion: Fundamentals and Applications with Software,
Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1998.
3. Arthur Gelb, Applied Optimal Estimation, The Analytic Sciences Corporation, M.I.T. Press, 2001.
4. James V. Candy, Signal Processing: The Model Based Approach, McGraw –Hill Book Company, 1987.
17EI3020 NON LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To describe the non-linear systems theory and its components
To construct a general systems model using inputs, throughputs and a feedback loop
To understand the concept of stability of control system and methods of stability analysis
Course Outcomes:
Assess the advantages and disadvantages of the different nonlinear methods,
Choose methods for analysis and design of a dynamical system
Apply the methods for analysis and design of nonlinear control systems
Assess the advantages and limitations of the resulting nonlinear control system
Analyze the stability of non linear systems
Evaluate the importance of sliding mode control
Unit I - Introduction to Linearization Process: Behavior of non – Linear systems – Common non linearites in
control system –Investigation of non-linear systems- Common physical non- linearities -Feed back linearization,
Fourier series method.
Unit II - Describing Function: Fundamentals -Describing function of dead zone non-Linearity saturation non-
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
linearity, relay with dead zone non-linearity, blacklash non-linearity - model reference adaptive control, stable and
unstable limit cycles
Unit III - Phase Plane Analysis: Concept of phase plane analysis, construction of phase portraits – Using analytical
method – Isoclines, Singular points – Stable, Unstable complex roots – Real roots – Limit cycles.
Unit IV - Stability analysis: Lyapunov stability definitions – lyapunov stability theorem – lyapunov function for
non linear system – krasovski method – variable gradient method- Lyapunov stability non-autonomous system.
Unit V - Sliding Mode Control: Variable structures systems – basic concepts – sliding mode control algorithm –
sliding mode controller for a two link robot – reinforcement learning control – Q-learning –neural Q learning –
temporal difference learning
Reference Books
1. M. Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Convention and Intelligent Control System”, Mc
Graw Hill Inc., New Delhi, Third Edition, 2009.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall Inc., 2001
3. John K Khali, ”Non Linear Automatic Control”, Mc Graw Hill Inc., 2001
17EI3021 ROBUST CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives
To introduce norms, random spaces and robustness measures
To understand H2 optimal control and estimation techniques
To introduce Hinfinity optimal control techniques
Course Outcomes
Understand the structured and unstructured uncertainty of robustness.
Design a H2 optimal controller and to implement kalman Bucy filter .
Design a H-Infinity optimal control using Riccati and LMI Approach.
Synthesis the Robust Controller and small gain theorem.
Implement a robust Controller for CSTR and Distillation Column.
Understand synthesis techniques for robust controllers and illustrate through case studies
Unit I - Introduction: Norms of vectors and Matrices – Norms of Systems – Calculation of operator
Norms – vector Random spaces- Specification for feedback systems – Co-prime factorization and Inner
functions –structured and unstructured uncertainty- robustness
Unit II - H2 Optimal Control: Linear Quadratic Controllers – Characterization of H2 optimal controllers
– H2 optimal estimation-Kalman Bucy Filter – LQG controller
Unit III - H-Infinity Optimal Control-Riccatti Approach: Formulation – Characterization of H-infinity sub-
optimal controllers by means of Riccati equations – H-infinity control with full information – Hinfinity estimation
Unit IV - H-Infinity Optimal Control -LMI Approach: Formulation – Characterization of H-infinity sub-
optimal controllers by means of LMI Approach – Properties of H-infinity sub-optimal controllers – H-infinity
synthesis with pole- placement constraints
Unit V - Synthesis of Robust Controllers & Case Studies: Synthesis of Robust Controllers – Small Gain
Theorem – D-K –iteration- Control of Inverted Pendulum- Control of CSTR – Control of Aircraft – Robust
Control of Second-order Plant- Robust Control of Distillation Column
Reference Books
1. U. Mackenroth “Robust Control Systems: Theory and Case Studies”, Springer International
Edition, 2010.
2. J. B. Burl, “ Linear optimal control H2 and H-infinity methods”, Addison W Wesley, 1998
3. D. Xue, Y.Q. Chen, D. P. Atherton, "Linear Feedback Control Analysis and Design
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
17EI3022 PROCESS MODELLING AND SIMULATION
Credits: 3: 0: 0
Course Objectives:
Understand the concepts of Process Modelling.
Analyze lumped and distributed parameter models
Introduce grey box models and Empirical models
Course Outcomes:
Understand the need for Process Modelling.
Classify the different types of Models
Describe lumped and distributed parameter models
Apply grey box models and Empirical Models
Examine the solutions for lumped parameter models
Comprehend finite element and finite volume methods
Unit I - Introduction to Modelling : a systematic approach to model building- classification of models -
Conservation principles- thermodynamic principles of process systems.
Unit II - Development of steady state models: lumped parameter systems- Dynamic models: lumped parameter
systems- distributed parameter systems
Unit III - Development of grey box models: Empirical model building- Statistical model calibration and
validation- Population balance models.
Unit IV - Solution strategies for lumped parameter models: Stiff differential equations- Solution methods for
initial value and boundary value problems- Euler’s method- R-K method- finite difference methods-Solving the
problems using MATLAB.
Unit V - Solution strategies for distributed parameter models: Solving parabolic, elliptic and hyperbolic-partial
differential equations-Finite element and finite volume methods.
Reference Books:
1. K. M. Hangos and I. T. Cameron, “Process Modelling and Model Analysis”, Academic
2. Press, 2001.
3. B. Wayne Bequette, “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation”, Pearson
4. Education Inc., 2003.
5. Singiresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists” Prentice Hall,
6. Upper Saddle River, NJ, 2001
17EI3023 ADVANCED PROCESSOR FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION
Credits : 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To Learn Recent Trends in Advanced Microcontroller Applications.
To Learn Microcontroller Implementation for Control Applications
To Understand Programming with 8 and 32 bit Microcontrollers.
Course Outcomes:
Identification of various Processors and Understanding of their On Chip Peripherals
and Functions.
Knowledge on Predict the Suitable Processor for the Required Applications for Control
Automation.
Solving problems using instruction set of various processor
Design and Development of Interfacing Circuits for Microcontroller based Applications.
Recognize suitable processors/controllers for real time applications
Appraise the use of Advanced Processors by Interfacing Sensors and Actuators for real
Time Automation.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit I - 8051 Microcontroller: Overview of 8 bit Microcontroller – General Architecture, Selection, On Chip
resources, – Memory Organization–Addressing Modes – Instruction Set – I/O Ports-–Counters and Timers –
Interrupt – UART – Analog to Digital Converter – Relay Interfacing – Temperature Sensor Interfacing.
Unit II - AVR Microcontroller: Introduction - Architecture- Hardware Components- I/O Interfacing-Serial
Communication-Timer/Counter- Interrupt- Pulse Width Modulation-Drive speed control-Throttle Angle Control –
On Chip ADC-Air Flow Rate Sensor Interfacing
Unit III - Arm Processor: Arcon RISC Machine – Architectural Inheritance – Core & Architectures - ARM
Programmer’s Model – CPU Registers – Pipeline - Interrupts – Memory Organization - ARM processor family –
Coprocessors - Instruction set – Thumb instruction set – Instruction cycle timings-Case Study: Digital Cruise
Control
Unit IV - Raspberry Pi Module: Onboard Processor – Linux OS - Integrated Development Environment-
Programming with Raspbian- Interfacing: I/O Devices – I2C Device – Sensors – Serial Communication-Case
Study: Onboard Diagnostic System.
Unit V - Blackfin Processor: Core Architecture- Memory Structure – Memory Port Flash Control– Addressing
Unit – Sequencer - Event Handling- Data Files - Timer Operation - Interrupt Processing- Hardware Errors -
Exception Handling – JTAG Test and Emulation-Case Study: Onboard Diagnostic System.
Reference Books
1. Rajkamal, “Microcontroller Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and Systems Design”, Pearson
Education India, 2009.
2. Kenneth Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller – Architecture, Programming & Application”, 2nd
Edition,
Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C”,
Prentice Hall, 2000.
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The AVR Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C”,
Prentice Hall, 2011.
5. Steve Furber, “ARM System On-Chip Architecture”, 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
6. Eben Upton, “Raspberry Pi User Guide”, 3rd
Edition, Wiley, 2016
7. Woon Seng Gan, Sen M Kuo, “Embedded Signal Processing with Micro Signal Architecture” January
2007, Wiley-IEEE Press.
17EI3024 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SIGNAL PROCESSING
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To develop skills for understanding the requirements of the Real Time Digital Signal Processing
Algorithms.
To develop skills to comprehend the Digital Signal Processor and FPGA Architectures.
To develop skills to implement the signal processing algorithms using the Digital Signal Processors and
FPGA.
Course Outcome:
Acquire the knowledge & concepts of basic digital signal processing techniques.
Comprehends the Architectural features of Digital Signal Processors and FPGA .
Applies the features of DSP and FPGA Program to achieve speed in Digital Signal Processing Algorithms.
Analyze the Data path Architectures of DSP and FPGA.
Design the program for Signal Processing Algorithms for both DSP and FPGA.
Contrast the difference between Signal Processing Algorithm implementation in DSP and FPGA.
Unit I - Overview Of Digital Signal Processing And Applications: Signals and their origin– Sampling theorem
and discrete time system – Convolution – DSP in the sample and transform domain– Fast Fourier Transform –
Digital Filters – Multi–rate Signal Processing
Unit II - Introduction To Programmable DSP: Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator –
Modified Bus structures and Memory Access schemes in P – DSPs – Multiple Access Memory
– Multi – ported Memory – VLIW Architecture–Pipelining –Special Addressing Modes in P –
DSPs – On – Chip Peripherals
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Unit III - Architecture Of TMS320C5x: Introduction – Bus Structure – Central Arithmetic
Logic Unit – Auxiliary Register ALU – Parallel Logic Unit – Program controller – On Chip Peripherals –
Assembly Language Syntax – Addressing Modes – Normal pipeline operation, Convolution using MAC, MACD
instructions – FIR filter implementation
Unit IV - Architecture of TMS320C54x And TMS320C6x: Architecture of TMS320C54X- Bus Structure – Data
Path - Normal Pipe line operation – FIR filter implementation – VLIW Architecture of TMS320C6X- Bus
Structure – Data path – Normal Pipe line operation – Serial/Partially Parallel/ Fully Parallel FIR filter
implementation.
Unit V - DSP With FPGA: FPGA Technology pros and cons behind FPGA and programmable signal processors,
FPGA structure, Implementation of basic MAC Unit, FIR filter, IIR filter in FPGA
Reference Books
1. Venkataramani B & M.Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processor”, TMH, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Meyer U – Baese “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable GateArrays”, Spinger, New York,
2003.
3. Michael John Sabastian Smith, “ Application Specific Integrated Circuits”,Pearson Education,USA,2005.
4. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDLDesign”, McGraw – Hill
Higher Education, New Delhi – 2005.
17EI3025 PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES FOR INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives
To expose the students to the fundamentals of sequential system design, Asynchronous circuits,
To teach Programmable Device architecuture and programming
To introduce hardware descriptive lanugages for industrial automation
Course outcome:
Acquire the knowledge & concepts of basic Sequential circuit design.
Comprehends the Architectural features of PLDs and FPGA.
Applies the features of PLDs to design synchronous circuits.
Analyze the FPGA Architectures for process automation.
Develop program for real time applications using descriptive languages.
Choose FPGA architectures for industrial automation applications.
Unit I - Sequential Circuit Design: Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modelling of
CSSN – State Stable Assignment and Reduction – Design of CSSN – ASM Chart – ASM Realization. Analysis of
Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) – Flow Table Reduction – Races in ASC – State
Assignment Problem and the Transition Table – Design of ASC – Static and Dynamic Hazards –Essential Hazards
– Designing Vending Machine Controller.
Unit II - Synchronous Design Using Programmable Devices: Programming Techniques - Re-Programmable
Devices Architecture- Function blocks, I/O blocks, Interconnects, Realize combinational, Arithmetic, Sequential
Circuit with Programmable Logic Devices.
Unit III - Reconfigurable architecture and programming: PLDs – Xilinx FPGA – Xilinx 2000, Xilinx 3000,
Xilinx 4000- Altera Max – ACT-implementation of combinational and sequential circuits with FPGA and PLDs.
Process automation –flow, pressure and level control using FPGA
Unit IV - High level descriptive languages and programming- VHDL and VERILOG: Design flow process –
Software tools – Data objects – Data types – Data operators – Entities and Architectures – Component declaration
and instantiation. Concurrent signal assignment – conditional signal assignment – selected signal assignment –
concurrent and sequential statements – Data flow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling - Test bench –
Verilog: Design methodology – Modules – Ports – Basic concepts – Operators – Nos. specification – Data types –
Arrays – Parameters – Gate delays – Operator types – Conditional statements – Multiway branches - Loops -
Switch – Modeling elements.
Unit V - FPGA for industrial automation
Home automation-motor control- industrial networking with Xilinx devices- machine vision camera solutions-
Monitoring processes and equipment- Automated system shut-down - Detecting dangerous situations.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books:
1. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Digital Systems design using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2010.
2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL”, Pearson Publication, II Edition. 2003.
3. Muhammed Abdelati, “Modern Automation Systems”, University Science Press, 2009
4. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Deisgn”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2002
5. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with verilog Deisgn”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2007
6. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2002.
17EI3026 FPGA CONTROL DESIGN LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To illustrate theoretical concepts and to give the students the opportunity to build and test the digital
systems.
To learn the use of the Xilinx ISE tool for designing and implementing digital systems on FGPA.
To implement circuits for control applications.
Course Outcome:
Compare different FPGA architectures.
Write hardware descriptive language program to digital circuits
Design combinational and sequential digital systems using FPGA
Analyze various control process and implement the same in FPGA
Identify tool for FPGA implementation
Implement and test control applications using FPGA
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI3027 EMBEDDED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.
To understand the concept of signal processing
To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.
Course Outcomes:
Identify virtual instrumentation representation for simple circuits
Choose VI to develop real time applications
Apply block diagram concept for developing simple digital circuits
Design embedded applications using VI
Analyze various embedded algorithms and implement the same using VI
Specify and develop control system methods using VI
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
17EI3028 EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To Understand the Current Trends in Automobiles
To Understand basic Sensor Arrangements and its Types
To Understand the Embedded Processors
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course outcomes:
Summarize the Automobile systems and the Requirements of Electronic Sensors and Actuators.
Identification of Suitable Sensors and Design the Automotive Electronics for Real Time Applications.
Modeling of Automotive Systems and Diagnostic Tools to Test and Calibrate the System Parts.
Interpretation of Automobile Concepts and Practice the Control Systems for Real Time Automotive
Applications.
Predict the Advance Control Systems in order to improve the Engine Performance and Control.
Evaluation of Automotive Systems by Implementing Advanced Communication Systems like GLS,
GPSS, GMS
Unit I - Trends in Automobile – Electronic Engine Management systems: Sensors – ECU – Actuators –
Electronic Dashboard Instruments: Information gauges – Displays – Onboard Diagnostic Systems: Fault Code
Display – DFI Oxygen sensor Test – Switch Test Series – Engine Data Display.
Unit II - Security, Warning Systems – Vehicle Motion Control: Cruise Control – Antilock Breaking –
Electronic Suspension Control – Electronic Steering Control – Sensor, Actuators Interfacing: Airflow rate Sensor
– Crankshaft Angular position Sensor – Throttle Angle Sensor – Temperature Sensor – Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Actuator – Electronic Motors.
Unit III - Basic Sensor Arrangements – Sensor types – Electronic Ignition Systems: Constant Dwell – Constant
Energy – Hall Effect Pulse Generator – Dwell Angle Control – Closed Loop Dwell – Capacitor Discharge
Ignition.
Unit IV - Solid State Ignition System: Triggering – Switching Devices – Digital Engine Control System –
Distributor Less Ignition – Integrated Engine Control: Combined Ignition – Fuel management – Exhaust Emission
Control.
Unit V - Automotive Embedded Systems – PIC – Free Scale Microcontrollers – Recent Advance like GLS,
GPSS, GMS.
Reference Books
1. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics” , 5th
Edition, Butterworth Hennimann
Woburn, 6th
Edition, 2003
2. Tom Denton, Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems, Third Edition, Taylor & Francis, 2012
3. Jack Erjavec, “Automotive technology: System Approach, 5th
edition, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2009.
4. Tom Weather Jr. & Cland C. Ilunter, “Automotive Computers and Control System” Prentice Hall Inc.,
New Jersey., 2001
5. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics: Systems & Components Networking &
Hybrid Drive”, 5th
edition, Springer, 2007
17EI3029 EMBEDDED BASED BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To understand bioelectric amplifiers
To discuss filter and circuits
To introduce application of signal conditioning in biomedical field
Course Outcomes:
Identify the method to apply various signal conditioning circuits
Set up an Interface circuit for bioelectric signals with embedded systems
Construct the application of signal condition circuits for biomedical field.
Design a biomedical real time system based on various sensor with embedded system
Select the suitable microcontroller for system development
Apply embedded concepts for biomedical applications
Unit I - Measurement system: Measurement systems – Significance of Measurements, Methods of
Measurements – Direct and Indirect Methods, Classification of Instruments –Deflection and Null Type,
Generalised Measurement System, Characteristics of Instruments – Static and Dynamic, Types of errors, Error
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
analysis, Units and Standards. Study of biological sensors in the human body and their basic mechanism of
action.
Unit II - BioElectric Amplifier: Bioelectric amplifiers- General-purpose linear and non-linear electronic circuits
typically found in industrial applications- Instrumentation amplifiers, Transducer bridge Amplifier.
Unit III - Analysis of filtering circuit: Frequency and time domain analysis of low pass, high pass, band pass,
and band stop filters. Filter class- Frequency discriminators, oscillators, multivibrators - Amplifier selection for a
variety of biomedical sensors, Wheatstone bridge design, Active filter design using standard approaches
Unit IV - Study of various transducer for biomedical applications: Transducers - Definition, Classification of
transducers, Characteristics of transducers, types of Transducers – Temperature transducers, Displacement
transducers, potentiometric, resistive strain gauges, inductive displacement, capacitive displacement transducer.
Pressure transducer, Blood pressure measurement, measurement of intracranial pressure, LVDT transducers,
capacitive and piezo-electric type. Biosensors,
Unit V - Microcontroller based biomedical system development: Front-end analogue circuit design for EMG,
ECG, EEG ,Front-end analogue circuit design for limb movement sensing, Power supply topologies for
biomedical instruments, Microcontroller based ECG-continuous monitoring systems for pulse rate, temperature,
B.P, Respiration.
Reference Books
1. R. B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical Instrumentation”,
2nd ed., CRC Press, 2012.
2. J. D. Bronzino, “Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, 3rd ed.,CRC Press & IEEE Press, 2006.
3. Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster,”Sensors and Signal Conditioning”, 2nd ed., Wiley publishers,
2000.
17EI3030 MEMS TECHNOLOGY FOR EMBEDDED DESIGN
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To teach the students properties of materials , microstructure and fabrication methods.
To teach the design and modeling of Electrostatic sensors and actuators.
To teach the characterizing thermal sensors and actuators through design and modeling
Course outcomes:
Familiar with micro fabrication and materials
Compare various sensors and actuators
Develop embedded application based on MEMS
Explain the features of NEMS device in real time applications
Describe various medical application based on MEMS
Distinguish various sensors and actuators depending on the application
Unit I - Micro-Fabrication, Materials And Electro-Mechanical Conepts : Overview of micro fabrication –
Silicon and other material based fabrication processes – Concepts: Conductivity of semiconductors-Crystal planes
and orientation-stress and strain-flexural beam bending analysis-torsional deflections-Intrinsic stress- resonant
frequency and quality factor.
Unit II - Electrostatic Sensors And Actuation : Principle, material, design and fabrication of parallel plate
capacitors as electrostatic sensors and
actuators-Applications
Unit III - Thermal Sensing And Actuation : Principle, material, design and fabrication of thermal couples,
thermal bimorph sensors, thermal
resistor sensors-Applications.
Unit IV - Piezoelectric Sensing And Actuation :Piezoelectric effect-cantilever piezo electric actuator model-
properties of piezoelectric materials-Applications. Piezoresistive sensors, Magnetic actuation
Unit V - Case Studies : Micro fluidics applications, Medical applications, Optical MEMS.-NEMS Devices-
multisensor module for embedded design with IOT- web based system
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books
1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006.
2. Marc Madou , “Fundamentals of microfabrication”,CRC Press, 1997.
3. Boston , “Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook”,WCB McGraw Hill, 1998.
4. M.H.Bao “Micromechanical transducers :Pressure sensors, accelerometers and gyroscopes”, Elsevier,
Newyork, 2000.
17EI3031 EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.
To understand the concept of signal processing
To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.
Course Outcomes:
Describe the recent trends in embedded systems design with understand the integration of customer
requirements in product design.
Identify structural approach to concept generation, creativity, selection and testing
Design of Consumer specific product, its Reverse Engineering manufacture , economic analysis and
product architecture.
Develop an improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
Analyze an embedded concept towards a product development
Develop an embedded based product for multi real time applications.
Unit I - Concepts Of Product Development: Need for Product Development- Generic product Development
Process Phases- Product Development Process Flows, Product Development organization structures-Strategic
importance of Product Planning process –Product Specifications-Target Specifications-Plan and establish product
specifications - integration of customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer
-Understanding customer and behavior analysis. Concept Generation, Five Step Method-Basics of Concept
selection- Creative thinking –creativity and problem solving- creative thinking methods generating design
concepts-systematic methods for designing –functional decomposition – physical decomposition –Product
Architecture--changes - variety – component Standardization –example case study on Conceptual Design of
DeskJet Printer as a product.
Unit II - Introduction To Approaches In Product Development : Product development management -
establishing the architecture - creation - clustering –geometric layout development - Fundamental and incidental
interactions - related system level design issues - secondary systems -architecture of the chunks - creating detailed
interface specifications-Portfolio Architecture- competitive benchmarking- Approach – Support tools for the
benchmarking process, trend analysis- Setting product specifications- product performance analysis -Industrial
Design, Robust Design – Testing Methodologies.
Unit III - Industrial Design : Integrate process design - Managing costs - Robust design –need for Involving
CAE, CAD, CAM, IDE tools –Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically –
Estimation of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and assembly costs – Minimize system
complexity - Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping - Planning for prototypes- Economic & Cost Analysis -
Understanding and representing tasks-baseline project planning -accelerating the project, project execution.
Unit IV - Development Based On Reverse Engineering : Basics on Data reverse engineering – Three data
Reverse engineering strategies – Finding reusable software components – Recycling real-time embedded software
based approach and its logical basics-Cognitive approach to program understated – Integrating formal and
structured methods in reverse engineering – Incorporating reverse engineering for consumer product
development-ethical aspects in reverse engineering.
Unit V - Developing Embedded Product Design : Discussions on Creating Embedded System
Architecture(with at least one Case study example: Mobile Phone /Adaptive Cruise Controller/ Robonoid about )
-Architectural Structures- Criteria in selection of Hardware & Software Components, product design by
Performance Testing, Costing, Benchmarking ,Documentation
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Reference Books
1. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill International Edition,4th
Edition,
2009, ISBN 978-007-127189-9
2. Karl T. Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, "Effective Product Design and Development", Tata Mc Graw Hill,
New Delhi, 2003,
3. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Indian Reprint 2004, Pearson Education, ISBN
9788177588217
4. Yousef Haik, T. M. M. Shahin, “Engineering Design Process”, 2nd Edition Reprint, Cengage Learning,
2010, ISBN 0495668141
5. Clive L.Dym, Patrick Little, “Engineering Design: A Project-based Introduction”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley
& Sons, 2009.
17EI3032 ROBOTICS AND FACTORY AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives
To educate the fundamental concepts or robotics
To educate on the robot drives and power transmission systems
To educate vision system for robotics
Course Outcomes
Recall the concept of robotics
Summarize building blocks of automation
Describe different sensors for robotic applications.
Analyze vision system for robotics.
Identify any intelligent automation system
Design ladder diagram for automation system
Unit I - Fundamental concepts of robotics: History, Present status and future trends in Robotics and automation -
Laws of Robotics - Robot definitions - Robotics systems and robot anatomy - Specification of Robots - resolution,
repeatability and accuracy of a manipulator. Robotic applications.
Robot drives and power transmission systems: Robot drive mechanisms, hydraulic – electric – servomotor
stepper motor - pneumatic drives, Mechanical transmission method - Gear transmission, Belt drives, cables, Roller
chains, Link - Rod systems - Rotary-to-Rotary motion conversion, Rotary-to-Linear motion conversion, Rack and
Pinion drives, Lead screws, Ball Bearing screws, End effectors – Types.
Unit II - Sensors: Principle of operation, types and selection of Position& velocity sensors, Potentiometers,
Encoders, Resolvers, LVDT, Tacho generators, Proximity sensors. Limit switches – Tactile sensors - Touch
sensors - Force and torque sensors.
Unit III - Vision systems for robotics: Robot vision systems, Illumination techniques, Image capture- solid state
cameras – Image representation - Gray scale and color images, image sampling and quantization - Image
processing and analysis –, Image data reduction – Segmentation - Feature extraction - Object Recognition- Image
capturing and communication - JPEG, MPEGs and H.26x standards, packet video, error concealment- Image
texture analysis.
Unit IV - Transformations and kinematics: Matrix representation- Homogeneous transformation matrices - The
forward and inverse kinematics of robots - D-H representation of forward kinematic equations of robots.
Unit V - PLC: Building blocks of automation, Controllers – PLC- Role of PLC in Robotics& FA - Architecture of
PLC - Advantages - Types of PLC - Types of Programming - Simple process control programs using Relay Ladder
Logic and Boolean logic
methods - PLC arithmetic functions.
Factory automation: Flexible Manufacturing Systems concept - Automatic feeding lines, ASRS, transfer lines,
automatic inspection - Computer Integrated Manufacture - CNC, intelligent automation. Industrial networking, bus
standards, HMI Systems, DCS and SCADA, Wireless controls.
Reference Books
1. Richard D Klafter, Thomas A Chmielewski, Michael Negin, "Robotics Engineering – An Integrated
Approach", Eastern Economy, Prentice Hall of India P Ltd., 2006.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
2. Mikell P Groover et. al., "Industrial Robots - Technology, Programming and Applications", McGraw Hill,
New York, 2008.
3. Saeed B Niku ,”Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications ”’PHI Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,2003.
17EI3033 LINEAR SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To understand the state model of LTI (Linear time invariant) system.
To give basic knowledge in obtaining decomposition of transfer function from state model.
To understand the concepts of Controllability, Observability and Lyapunov stability analysis.
Course Outcomes:
Determine the state space representation of any system
Calculate the solution of state equation
Design estimators for prediction of data for control system design.
Analyse the system whether it is controllable and observable.
Perform stability analysis of the systems.
Summarise the concept of control theory for linear systems.
Unit I - State model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical - Phase and
canonical variables – Diagonalization-Solution of state equation - State transition matrix
Unit II - Analysis of linear time invariant systems: Transfer function from state model - Transfer matrix -
Decomposition Methods – State space representation of linear time invariant discrete time systems
Unit III - Solution of discrete time state equation: Discretization of continuous time state equations - Eigen
Values and Eigen Vectors – diagonalization
Unit IV - State Variable Design: Concepts of Controllability and Observability – Pole Placement by State
Feedback- Observer Systems.
Unit V - Lyapunov’s Stability Analysis: Introduction-Lyapunov stability criterion-Direct Method- Methods of
constructing Lyapunov functions for Nonlinear Systems
Reference Books
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 4th
Edition, 2002.
2. Nagrath I.J, & Gopal M, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers Limited,
New Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2007.
3. Nise S. Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2000.
4. John J. D'Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis, “Linear Control System Analysis and Design”, CRC Press, USA
, 5 th
Edition, 2003.
5. Shankar P. Bhattacharyya, Aniruddha Datta, Lee H. Keel, “Linear Control Theory: Structure, Robustness
And Optimization” CRC Press, USA, 2009.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
LIST OF COURSES
Course
Code Name of the Course Credits
16EI2001 Digital Control Systems 3:1:0
16EI2002 Sensors and Data Acquisition 3:0:0
16EI2003 Virtual Instrumentation and Data Acquisition Laboratory 0:0:1
16EI2004 Automotive Electronics 3:0:0
REVISED VERSION COURSES
Course
Code Version Name of the Course Credits
14EI2001 1.1 Sensors and Transducers
3:0:0
14EI2002 1.1 Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2003 1.1 Electrical Measurements 3:0:0
14EI2004 1.1 Simulation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2005 1.1 Control System 3:1:0
14EI2006 1.1 Electrical Measurements and Machines Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2007 1.1 Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2008 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2009 1.1 Process Dynamics and Control 3:0:0
14EI2010 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2011 1.1 Electronic Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2012 1.1 Logic and Distributed Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI2013 1.1 Industrial Data Communication and Networks 3:0:0
14EI2014 1.1 Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2015 1.1 Logic and Distribution Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2017 1.1 Biomedical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2018 1.1 Automotive Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2019 1.1 Analytical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2020 1.1 Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries 3:0:0
14EI2021 1.1 Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries 3:0:0
14EI2022 1.1 Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries 3:0:0
14EI2023 1.1 Opto-Electronics and Laser Based Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2024 1.1 Power Plant Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2025 1.1 Modern Control Techniques 3:0:0
14EI2026 1.1 Strength of Machine Elements 3:0:0
14EI2032 1.1 Flexible Manufacturing Systems 3:0:0
14EI2033 1.1 Vibration Analysis 3:0:0
14EI2035 1.1 Human-Robot Systems and Interaction 3:0:0
14EI2036 1.1 Environmental Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2038 1.1 Instrumentation for Agriculture 3:0:0
14EI2039 1.1 Instrumentation and Control for Avionics 3:0:0
14EI2040 1.1 Ultrasonic Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2041 1.1 Measurements and Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2042 1.1 Advanced Control Theory 3:0:0
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2043 1.1 Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2044 1.1 PLC and Automation 3:0:0
14EI2045 1.1 Artificial organs and Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0
14EI2046 1.1 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0
14EI2047 1.1 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 0:0:2
14EI2048 1.1 Instrumentation and Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI3002 1.1 Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3003 1.1 Advanced Process Control 3:0:0
14EI3004 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3005 1.1 Advanced Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI3006 1.1 Discrete Control System 3:0:0
14EI3007 1.1 Intelligent Controllers 3:0:0
14EI3008 1.1 Optimal Control Theory 3:0:0
14EI3009 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3010 1.1 Control System Design 3:0:0
14EI3011 1.1 Virtual Instrumentation laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3012 1.1 Embedded Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3014 1.1 Industrial Automation 3:0:0
14EI3015 1.1 System Identification and Adaptive Control 3:0:0
14EI3016 1.1 SCADA systems and Applications 3:0:0
14EI3017 1.1 Design of Linear Multivariable Control Systems 3:0:0 14EI3018 1.1 Piping and Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3019 1.1 Embedded Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3020 1.1 Networks and Protocols for instrumentation and control 3:0:0
14EI3022 1.1 Design of Embedded Control System
14EI3025 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM
14EI3025 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM
3:0:0
14EI3023 1.1 Advanced Processors for control and automation 3:0:0
14EI3028 1.1 Embedded Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3029 1.1 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0
14EI3030 1.1 Automotive Sensors and Intelligent Systems
3:0:0
14EI3031 1.1 Automotive Protocols and Telematics 3:0:0
14EI3033 1.1 Biomedical sensors and signal conditioning 3:0:0
14EI3038 1.1 Physiological Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI3039 1.1 Medical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3040 1.1 Bio Virtual instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3041 1.1 Hospital Management System 3:0:0 14EI3042 1.1 Cognitive technology for biomedical engineers 3:0:0
14EI3044 1.1 Embedded Based Medical Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3045 1.1 Diagnostics and therapeutic Equipments Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3046 1.1 Medical Imaging Techniques 3:0:0
14EI3048 1.1 Clinical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3049 1.1 Medical Devices And Safety
Safe
Safe Sasafety Saf
3:0:0
14EI3051 1.1 Medical Sensors and wearable devices 3:0:0
14EI3052 1.1 Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0
14EI3054 1.1 Biomechanics 3:0:0
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3055 1.1 Medical Diagnostics And Therapeutic Equipments 3:0:0
14EI3056 1.1 Limb prosthetics 3:0:0
14EI3057 1.1 Industrial electronics and instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3058 1.1 Linear systems 3:0:0
14EI3059 1.1 Transducers and Actuators 3:0:0
14EI3060 1.1 Automated Test and Measurement 3:0:0
14EI3061 1.1 Remote Sensing and Control 3:0:0
14EI3063 1.1 Robot Programming 3:0:0
14EI3064 1.1 Kinematics and Dynamics of Robot 3:0:0
14EI3065 1.1 Advanced Instrumentation and Process Control for Food
Engineers 3:0:0
14EI3066 1.1 Sensors and Data Acquisition Lab 0:0:2
14EI3067 1.1 Transducer Engineering 3:0:0
16EI2001 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:1:0
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Course Objective:
• To introduce the concepts of system analysis using Z transforms.
• To equip with the basic knowledge of digital process control design.
• To study the stability analysis of digital control system
Course Outcome:
• Use Z transforms to analyse Discrete Systems.
• Design controllers for a digital process.
• Test the Stability of Discrete Systems.
Need for digital control, Configuration of the basic digital control scheme, Principles of signal
conversion, Basic discrete time signal, Z transform, Modified Z transform, Stability Analysis - Analysis
Of Digital Control, Frequency Response, Stability on the z-Plane and the Jury stability criterion, Sample
and hold systems , Digital Controller - Z domain description of sampled continuous time plants, Z domain
description of systems with dead time, Implementation of digital controllers, Digital Algorithms - Design
of Digital Control Algorithms, Z plane specifications of control system design, Digital compensator
design using frequency response plots, State description of sampled continuous time plants, Structure
realization of systems, State transition matrix, Controllability and Observability, Solution of state
difference equations.
References
1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Ogata, “Discrete Time Control Systems”, Prentice– hall Of India, New Delhi 2008.
3. Gene F. Franklin, J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education
Limited, New Delhi,2002.
4. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern control systems,” Pearson Education inc, New
Delhi, 2008.
5. Isermann R ‘Digital Control Systems’, Vol. I & II, Narosa Publishing, 2014.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
16EI2002 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To deal with basics concepts for selection of sensors and the signal conditioning necessary to
include these in a data acquisition system.
To investigate the analogue to digital and digital to analogue conversion principles and their
practical applications for data acquisition and control.
To learn about the selection of output drivers and devices
Course Outcome:
Demonstrate a critical understanding of elements of signal conditioning necessary for different
types of sensors.
Describe and evaluate the operation of analogue to digital and digital to analogue converters.
Critically evaluate and select appropriate techniques and devices for realizing a data acquisition
system.
Sensors and transducers, signal conditioning circuits, Parameters of Data Acquisition Systems such as
dynamic range, calibration, bandwidth, processor throughput, sample rate and aliasing, types and
principles of Analogue to Digital Converters (ADC) and Digital to Analogue Converters (DAC), ADC
specifications, resolution, accuracy, linearity, offset and quantization errors, time-based measurements
and jitter, microprocessor interfacing, serial interfaces, multi-channel ADCs, internal microcontroller
ADCs, Codecs, line drivers and receivers, high power output drivers and devices.
References
1. Bentley, John P. Principles of Measurement Systems, 4:th edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005.
2. Jacob Fraden, Handbook of Modern Sensors – Physics , Design and Applications, Fourth Edition,
Springer, 2010.
3. Data Acquistion Handbook, A Reference for DAQ and analog and digital signal conditioning, 3rd
Edition, 2012.
16EI2003 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND DATA ACQUISITION LABORATORY
Credit: 0:0:1
Course Objective:
To introduce the basics concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.
To develop ability for programming in LabVIEW using structures, graphs and charts for system
monitoring, processing and controlling
To learn about the data acquisition and interfacing concepts using a state-of-the-art software
platform such as National Instrument's LABVIEW.
Course Outcome:
Create, Edit and Debug Virtual Instruments
Design a complete Data Acquisition System,
Accommodate PC interfacing principles and Instrument Driver for Computer measurement and
control.
Description:
This course enables the students to gain practical knowledge in programming techniques, data acquisition
and interfacing techniques of virtual instrumentation and apply it to real time environment.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
16EI2004 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To understand the various automotive sensors and actuators.
To understand engine cranking system and control.
To understand various driver assistance and safety systems.
Course Outcomes:
Select sensors and actuators for an automotive applications.
State various engine control techniques and its requirement.
Explain the procedure of integration of various components to create an automotive system.
Basic sensor arrangement- Various sensors in vehicle, Actuators for vehicle, Control modes, Engine
cranking system, Ignition system, Block diagram of starting system, Condition at starting, Construction
and working of starter motor, Advance driver navigation and information system, Collision avoidance
radar warning system, ABS, Electronic steering control and electronic suspension, Low tire pressure
warning system, Insulated and earth return systems, Head light and side light, Trafficator, Electric fuel
pump, Horn, Wiper system, Introduction to CAN, FLEXRAY, LIN, MOST protocols.
References:
1. William. B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Butterworth Heinemann Woburn,
Newyork, 6th Edition, 2003.
2. James. D. Haldeman and Chase. D. Mitchell, “Diagnosis and troubleshooting of Automotive
electric, electronic and computer systems”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 4th Edition, 2006.
3. James. D. Haldeman and Chase. D. Mitchell, “Automotive Electricity and electronics”, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.
4. P.L. Kohli, “Automotive Electrical Equipment”, Tata Mc Graw hill Education India Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2008.
5. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, Affiliated East-West Pvt. Ltd., 2nd
edition, 2012.
14EI2001 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To learn the characteristics of sensors
To provide knowledge on the principle and operation of different transducers.
To introduce the application of sensors and transducers in the measuring system.
Course Outcome:
Determine the characteristics of various sensors and analyze them
Use the principle of transducers to design measuring systems
Suggest suitable sensors for a particular application
Transducers - Definition, Classification of transducers, Characteristics of transducers, types of
Transducers – Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive, Piezoelectric, Magnetic transducers, principle of
operation, working, characteristics and applications, Miscellaneous sensors – Elastic, digital, chemical,
fiber optic, MEMS.
References
1. Doebelin. E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw Hill
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
International, New York, 2007.
2. Renganathan. S., “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers Limited, Chennai, 2003.
3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2003.
4. Sawhney A.K., “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”,
Eighteenth Edition, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2007.
5. Ian R Sinclair, “Sensors and Transducers”, Third Edition, Newnes, New Delhi, 2011.
14EI2002 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI2001 Sensors and Transducers
Course Objective:
To introduce the practical aspects of transducers and their characteristics.
To impart knowledge in the signal conditioning circuitry for a transducer.
To improve the skills in designing a measurement system.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the
behavior.
Design the signal conditioning circuitry for a measurement system.
Critically analyze a measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the different transducers, their working and determination of their
characteristics.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2003 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EE2001 Electric Circuits and Networks
Course Objective:
To introduce the fundamentals of electrical measurements.
To understand the principle of instruments used for measuring electrical quantities.
To learn the working of bridges and recording instruments.
Course Outcome:
Use the basics of electrical measurement to analyze the characteristics of instruments.
Apply the knowledge of electrical instruments to measure electrical quantities.
Select and design the bridge circuits for a specific application.
Fundamentals Of Electrical Measurements-Functional Elements of an Instrument, Input– Output
Configuration of Measurement Systems, Performance Characteristics of Instruments, Electromechanical
DC Instruments - Galvanometers, PMMC Instrument, DC Ammeter and Voltmeter, Calibration of DC
instruments, Electromechanical AC Instruments-Moving Iron Instrument, Thermoinstruments,
Electrodynamometers in Power Measurements, Watt– hour meter, Power– factor meters, Instrument
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Transformers, A.C. and D.C. Bridge Circuits, Four probe method of measuring electrical properties,
Recording Instruments.
References
1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004.
2. Tumanski. S., “Principles of Electrical Measurement”, Taylor and Francis Group, Ny, 2006.
3. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
4. Golding E.W. and Widdis F.E., “Electrical measurements and measuring instruments”, Sir Issac
Pitman and Sons Pvt., Ltd., 2001.
5. Laughton. M. A. and Warne. D. J., “Electrical Engineer's Reference Book” Sixteenth Edition,
Newnes, 2003.
6. Horst Czichos, Tetsuya Saito, Leslie E. Smith, “Springer Handbook of Materials Measurement
Methods”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2007.
14EI2004 SIMULATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EE2001 Circuit Analysis and Networks,
14EC2002 Electronic circuits
Course Objective:
To familiarize simulation software to analyze electronic circuits.
To introduce simulation software to learn signal operations
To design virtual instruments to analyze real time signals.
Course Outcome:
Simulate simple electronic circuits using simulation software.
Simulate signals and analyze them using simulation software
Acquire real time signals and perform simple operations on them using simulation software.
Description:
This laboratory aims to introduce simulation software that enables the student to understand the
theoretical concepts by simulating them.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2005 CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:1:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14MA2003, 14MA2004
Course Objective:
• To introduce the fundamentals of mathematical representation of a system.
• To gain knowledge on the concepts of time response and frequency response.
• To understand the concepts of stability analysis.
Course Outcome:
• Obtain the transfer function of a system.
• Determine the response of different order systems for various test inputs.
• Analyse the stability of the system.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Introduction to Control Systems, Types, Effect of Feedback, Differential equation of Physical Systems,
Transfer functions, Block diagram algebra, Signal Flow graphs, Time Response of Feed Back Control
Systems, Step response of First and Second order systems , Time response specifications of Second order
Systems, Concepts of Stability, Routh stability criterion, Root Locus Techniques, stability analysis using
Bode Plots, Polar plots, Introduction to lead, lag and lead–lag compensating networks, Nyquist criterion,
Concepts of State, State variable and State models for electrical systems, Solution of State Equations, P,
PI, PID Controllers.
References
1. Nagarath .J and Gopal M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International (P) Limited,
Publishers, Fourth edition – 2005
2. Ogata .K “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.
3. Benjamin C. Kuo and Farid Golnaagi, Wiley “Automatic Control Systems”, 8th Edition, 2009.
4. Joseph J Distefano “Feedback and Control System”, III et al., Schaum’s Outlines, TMH, 2nd
Edition 2007.
5. Norman. S. Nise, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley, 6th Edition, 2011.
14EI2006 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MACHINES LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI2003 Electrical Measurements
Course Objective:
To expose the students to the operation of DC and AC machines
To learn about calibration of electrical instruments and bridge circuits
To introduce the working of special electrical machines.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the characteristics of DC and AC Machines.
Calibrate electrical instruments and bridge circuits
Perform experiments on special electric machines.
Description:
This laboratory enables the student to understand the operation of electrical machines, bridges and the
methods of calibrating electric instruments
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2007 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Course Objective:
• To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modelling.
• To explore the methods of controller design.
• To understand the design of the compensating circuits.
Course Outcome:
• Derive the mathematical model of a system.
• Design a controller for a real time system.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Design lead and lag compensating circuits.
Description:
This laboratory demonstrates the methods to derive the mathematical model of a system and design a
controller for a practical system.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2008 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To learn the principle of measurement of various industrial parameters.
To know about the selection, calibration and installation of different instruments
To explore the application of measuring instruments in various industries
Course Outcome:
Apply the knowledge of Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation system.
Select suitable instrument for a given application.
Develop methods to perform measurement of physical parameters.
Pressure Measurement-Standards, Dynamic testing, High and Low pressure measurement, Flow
Measurement - Pitot static tube, Yaw tube, Pivoted vane, Anemometer, Obstruction meters, Rotameters,
Turbine meters, Positive Displacement meters, Electromagnetic flow meter, Drag force flow meter ,
Ultrasonic flow meters, Vortex, Shedding flow meters, Temperature Measurement-Thermal Expansion
Methods, Thermoelectric sensors, Electrical Resistance Sensors, Junction Semiconductor Sensors,
Radiation methods, Level Measurement, Density And Viscosity Measurement, Selection, Range,
Installation, Calibration and Protection of instruments, Industrial Safety Standards.
References 1. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003.
2. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
3. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw–
Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Liptak B.G, “Process Measurement and Analysis,” Chilton Book Company, Radnor,
Pennsylvania, 2003.
5. Walt Boyes, “Instrumentation Reference Book,” Butterworth Heinemann, United States,
2003.
14EI2009 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Course Objective:
• To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process.
• To understand the design of various control schemes.
• To analyse the effect of controllers in a given process.
Course Outcome:
• Derive the Mathematical Model of a physical system.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Tune controllers for Optimum gain using various techniques.
• Selection of suitable control schemes for a particular process.
Process Control System -Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Degrees of
freedom, Modelling of simple systems ,Basic Control Actions - Continuous Controller Modes, Response
of controllers for different test inputs, Selection of control modes, Controller Tuning - Optimum
controller settings, Controller tuning Methods, Final Control Elements – Characteristics, Selection of
control valves, Advanced Control Schemes - Multivariable process control, Interaction of control loops,
Case Studies: Distillation column, Boiler drum level control, Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor
control
References
1. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw Hill, Singapore,2008.
3. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology, ”Prentice Hall , New Jersey,
2006.
4. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control,”
John Willey and Sons, Singapore, 2006.
5. Wayne Bequette B., “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation” Prentice Hall , New
Jersey– 2003
6. Peter Harriott, “Process Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
14EI2010 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation
Course Objective:
To gain the knowledge of the working of Industrial Instruments
To learn the methods of Calibration for Instruments.
To understand the operation of Instrumentation Circuits.
Course Outcome:
Use simple Industrial Instruments to measure physical quantities.
Perform Calibration of Instruments.
Design Instrumentation Circuits for measurement systems.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the operation of industrial instruments, their calibration and design of
instrumentation circuits.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2011 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EC2008 Linear Integrated Circuits
Course Objective:
• To introduce the principle of analog electronic measuring instruments.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• To deal with the basic principle of digital instrumentation.
• To gain knowledge on the concept of virtual instruments.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the knowledge of electronic instruments to measure analog quantities.
• Implement digital instrumentation techniques for measurement.
• Develop virtual instruments using simulation software.
Electronic Analog Instruments – Introduction, Amplified DC meter, AC voltmeters using rectifiers, True
RMS voltmeter, Q meter, Vector impedance meter. Oscilloscope, display devices and recorders, Signal
generators and analyzers, Digital Instruments-Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters, Simple frequency
counter, time interval, Digital Displacement transducer, Virtual Instrumentation – Evolution,
Architecture, Presentation and Control, Functional Integration, Programming Requirements,
Conventional and Distributed Virtual Instrumentation, Virtual Instruments and Traditional Instruments,
Advantages, Study of evolution and procedures in simulation softwares.
References
1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall
of India, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. Bouwens A.J., Digital Instrumentation, McGraw Hill Ltd., USA, 2002.
4. Sumathi S and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”
Springer, 2007.
5. Oliver B.H., and Cage J.M., “Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, McGraw
Hill, 2009.
6. David A Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and measurements”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2006.
14EI2012 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control
Course Objective:
• To provide the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system.
• To introduce the concept of PLC and its Programming using Ladder Diagram.
• To cover the basics of Distributed Control Systems
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the significance of SCADA and DCS.
• Develop ladder logic programs for real time applications.
• Apply the knowledge of DCS and communication standards.
Review of Computers In Process Control - Data loggers, Data Acquisition Systems (DAS), Direct Digital
Control (DDC), Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA), Overview of PLC
systems, PLC programming procedures, PLC Basic Functions, PLC Intermediate Functions Sequencer
functions, Matrix functions, Alternate programming languages, Analog PLC operation, Design of
interlocks and alarms, Distributed Control Systems (DCS)-Evolution, Architecture, Comparison, Local
Control unit, Process Interfacing Issues, Redundancy concept, Communication facilities, Interfaces In
DCS, General purpose computers in DCS
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References
1. John.W. Webb, Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers - Principles and Applications”,
Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Michael P Lukas, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada, 1986.
3. B.G. Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Handbook, Process control and Optimization”, CRC press-
Radnor, Pennsylvania, 2006.
4. B.G. Liptak, “Process software and digital networks,” CRC press,Florida-2003.
5. Curtis D. “Johnson Process control instrumentation technology,” Prentice Hall , New Jersey
2006.
6. Krishna Kant, “Computer-Based Industrial Control,“ PHI, New Delhi, 2004
7. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
14EI2013 INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EC2080 Communication Engineering
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic principles of networking
To learn the serial communication standards
To equip the students with relevant knowledge about network protocols
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for network protocols during data transmission and reception.
Analyze the methods of communication
Compare the different protocols used as Universal standards.
Introduction and Basic Principles – Protocols, Physical standards, Modern instrumentation, Bits, Bytes
and characters, Communication principles, Communication modes, Synchronous and Asynchronous
systems, Transmission Characteristics, Data Coding, UART, Serial data communications interface
standards, Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines, RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard,
Introduction To Protocols - Flow control Protocols, BSC Protocols, HDLC, SDLC, Data communication
for Instrumentation and Control, Industrial protocols, Local Area Networks, Wireless Instrumentation.
References
1. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation
and Control”, Elsevier Publications, 2003.
2. Stallings W. “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles “ PHI ,2002.
3. Behrouz A. Forouzan“ Data Communication and Networking” , TMH, 2006.
4. Lawrence. M. Thompson , “Industrial Data Communications”, 4th Edition , ISA- 2007.
5. Edwin Wright “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation and Troubleshooting”,
Newnes-2004.
6. Tony.R. Kuphaldt, “Lessons in Industrial Instrumentation”, Creative Commons Attribution, 2015.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2014 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Course Objective:
To introduce the practical concepts of digital controllers.
To demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI
To provide knowledge about controller design, simulation and implementation
Course Outcome:
Design and compare Digital Control Algorithms.
Analyze the performance of a Process
Demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI
Description:
This laboratory introduces the design procedure for digital controllers and their implementation of real
time process.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2015 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI2012 Logic and Distributed Control Systems
Course Objective:
• To strengthen the knowledge of Programmable Logic Controllers
• To introduce the concepts of SCADA
• To gain hands on experience on Distributed Control Systems
Course Outcome:
• Write simple programs in Programmable Logic Controllers
• Design control system using Programmable Logic Controllers
• Use SCADA for real time applications
Description:
This laboratory introduces the basic concepts of PLC programming and Distributed Control systems using
simulation software.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2017 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the human anatomy and physiology and the physiological parameters.
• To learn about the generation of physiological signals and their measurement.
• To understand the fundamentals of biomedical instruments used for diagnosis and therapy.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need for measuring physiological parameters in the human body.
• Develop measuring systems to measure the physiological parameters.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Use the diagnostic and therapeutic instruments for specific application.
Cell and its Electrical activity, Physiological systems viz., cardiovascular system, Nervous system,
Respiratory system, Visual system, Muscular system, Electrodes and bioelectric signals: Bio electrodes,
ECG, EMG, EEG and EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood flow, Blood pressure,
Cardiac output, and Bio-chemical measurement: Blood pH, Blood pO2, Blood pCO2, Photometers.
Therapeutic equipments and imaging techniques.
References
1. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2003.
2. Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2007.
3. Arumugam.M. “Biomedical Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam,
2006.
4. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,
Pearson Education India, Delhi, 2004.
5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc,
Netherlands, 2009.
14EI2018 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the application of electronics in the modern automobile.
• To understand the latest communication protocols used in automobile industries.
• To provide information about the automotive systems and the electronic accessories used in
automobile.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the use of instruments in automotive industry
• Design instruments for automotive applications.
• Use Communication protocols to perform advanced monitoring and control.
Automotive Electrical And Electronics - Basic Electronics components and their operation in an
automobile, Starting Systems, Charging Systems, Ignition Systems, Electronic Fuel Control, Advanced
vehicle control systems, Embedded System Communication Protocols - Vehicle Communication
Protocols, Introduction to CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY, MOST, KWP2000, Details of CAN, Embedded
System In Control Of Automotive Systems - Engine management systems, Vehicle Safety System,
Electronic Control of braking and traction, Electronic transmission control, Environmental tests for
electronic control units.
References
1. RobertBoschGmbh ,“BOSCH– Automotive Handbook”, 7thEdition,John Wiley & Sons,
ISBN: 0470519363, 2008.
2. Denton.T, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic System”, Elsevier Butterworth–
HeinemannPublications,3rd Edition,2004.
3. Knowles.D, “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”, Prentice
Hall,1988.
4. William.T.M, “Automotive Electronic System”,Elsevier Science,6th Edition,2003.
5. Kiencke,, Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems” 2nd Edition.2005
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2019 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the principle of analytic instruments
• To learn the concept of chromatography
• To know the applications of environment monitoring instruments
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the different types of analytic instruments
• Develop instruments for clinical analysis.
• Apply the concepts of Analytical Instruments for Environmental Monitoring
Colorimetry And Spectrophotometry-Special methods of analysis, Beer–Lambert law, Colorimeters, UV,
Vis spectrophotometers, Single and double beam instruments, Sources and detectors, IR
spectrophotometers, Types,Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers, Atomic absorption
spectrophotometers, Sources and detectors, FTIR spectrophotometers, Flame emission photometers,
Chromatography - Different techniques, Gas chromatography, Detectors, Liquid chromatographs,
Applications, High– pressure liquid chromatographs, Applications, Industrial gas analyzers and pollution
monitoring instruments, Ph meters and dissolved component analyzers, Radio chemical and magnetic
resonance techniques
References
1. Khandpur. R. S., ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd., 2006.
2. Willard. H., Merritt, Dean. J. A., Settle. F. A., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’, CBS
publishing & distribution, 1995.
3. Robert D. Braun, ‘Introduction to Instrumental Analysis’, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1987.
4. Ewing. G. W., ‘Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis’, McGraw Hill, 1992.
5. Skoog. D. A. and West. D. M., ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’, Holt, Saunders
Publishing, 1998.
14EI2020 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL
INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the basic concepts of piping and instrumentation diagrams.
• To gain knowledge on the Instruments involved petrochemical industries.
• To learn about the control system in the subsystems of a petrochemical plant.
Course Outcome:
• Develop and interpret the piping and instrumentation diagrams of a system.
• Appreciate the significance of Measurement in Petrochemical Industry.
• Use the knowledge of control system design to control the subsystems.
Piping and Instrumentation diagrams, Instrumentation and control in distillation columns, chemical
reactors- Temperature and pressure control in batch reactors – Instrumentation and control in dryers:
Batch dryers and Continuous dryers, heat exchangers -, evaporators - Types of evaporators, Measurement
and control of absolute pressure, Density, Conductivity, Differential pressure and Flow, Effluent and
Water Treatment
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References
1. Béla G. Lipták. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossil
Power, Glass, Iron and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical,
Pharmaceutical’, Chilton Book Co., Reprint 2003
2. Considine D.M., ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’, Fourthedition,
McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1999.
3. Curtis D .Johnson,”Process control instrumentation technology,”Prentice Hall , New
Jersey, 2006.
4. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
5. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw–
Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
14EI2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To describe the paper making process and the need for measurement at various stages.
• To gain knowledge about the Instruments used in paper industries.
• To learn about the control operations in paper industries.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need of instrumentation and control in paper making.
• Select suitable sensors for a given process
• Develop a control system for the various operations in the paper industry.
Description Of The Process -Raw materials, Pulping process, Chemical Recovery Process, Paper making
process, Converting, Instrumentation - Measurements of Basis Weight, Density, Specific gravity, Flow,
Level of liquids and solids, Pressure, Temperature, Consistency, Moisture, PH, Oxidation-Reduction
potential, Graphic displays and alarms, Control Operations - Blow tank controls, Digester liquor feed
pump controls, Brown stock water level control, Stock chest level control, Basis weight control, Dry
temperature control, density and flow control, computer applications.
References
1. B.G Liptak, ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’, Chilton Book Company, 2003
2. Renganathan. S., “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers Limited, Chennai, 2003.
3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2003.
4. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
5. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw–
Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
14EI2022 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND
STEEL INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To learn about the process of making steel from the raw materials.
• To know the role of instrumentation in a steel industry
• To deal with the control operations carries out at various stages
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the use of instruments in steel making.
• Suggest suitable sensor for a typical measurement.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Develop control systems for the various operations.
Description of Process -Flow diagram and description of the processes, Raw materials preparation, Iron
making, Blast furnaces, Stoves, Raw steel making, Basic Oxygen Furnace, Electric Furnace, Casting of
steel: Primary rolling, Cold rolling and Finishing, Measurement of level, Pressure, Density, Temperature,
Flow, Weight, Thickness and shape, Graphic displays and alarms, Control Systems - Blast furnace, Stove
combustion control system, Gas and water controls in BOF furnace, Strand Casting mould Level control,
Mould Level sensors, Ingot weight measuring system, Waste water treatment, computer applications:
Model calculation and logging, Rolling Mill Control, Annealing Process Control, Center Utilities
Dispatch Computer.
References
1. Béla G. Lipták. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossil
Power, Glass, Iron and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical,
Pharmaceutical’, Chilton Book Co., Reprint 2003 Original from the University of California.
2. Liptak B. G, Instrument Engineers Handbook, volume 2, Process Control,Third edition, CRC
press, London, 1995.
3. Considine D.M, Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook, Fourth edition,
McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1993.
4. Steel Designers Handbook 1)Branko 2)Ron Tinyou 3) ArunSyamGorenc Seventh
Edition First Indian Reprint 2006.
5. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, 2004.
14EI2023 OPTO-ELECTRONICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of opto-electronics and optical fibers.
To learn about the principle of fiber optic sensors.
To deal with the fundamentals of lasers and its application for measurement.
Course Outcome:
Apply the knowledge of optical fibers for measurement.
Suggest the methods to use a fiber optic sensor for measurement.
Use lasers for industrial measurement and biomedical applications.
Basics of Opto-electronics - Characteristics of optical radiation, Optical Sources and Detectors, Charge
Coupled devices, Opto –couplers and their applications, Optical Fibre - Principle, Types, Fibre coupling,
Fibre optic sensors , Lasers and Applications - Principle, Laser Rate Equation, Properties, Two, Three
and Four level system, Resonator configuration, Q switching and Mode locking, Cavity dumping, Types
of Lasers, Industrial applications, Holography, Medical applications
References
1. Arumugam. M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers,
Kumbakonam, 2006.
2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson Education,
2006.
3. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, .
4. Ghatak A.K. and Thiagarajan K, Optical Electronics Foundation book , TMH, Cambridge
University Press, 1989.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
5. Wilson and Hawkes, “Opto Electronics – An Introduction”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, New
Delhi, 1998.
14EI2024 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with an emphasis on thermal
power generation.
• To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants.
• To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters in a power plant.
Course Outcome:
• Compare the different methods of power generation.
• Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a power plant.
• Develop control algorithms for a particular operation in a power plant.
Brief survey of methods of power generation, Hydro, Thermal, Nuclear, Solar and Wind power, Electrical
measurements, Non– electrical parameters Measurements, Analytical instruments in Thermal power
plants -Flue gas oxygen analyzer, Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam, Dissolved oxygen
analyzer, Chromatography , PH meter , Fuel analyzer, Pollution monitoring instruments, Boiler control
system in thermal power plant, Turbine Monitoring and Control
References
1. K. Krishnaswamy, M. Ponnibala, “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt
Ltd.,2011.
2. P.K Nag, Power plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
3. Sam G Dukelow, The Control of Boilers, 2nd Edition, ISA Press, New York, 1991
4. Gill A B, Power Plant Performance, Butterworth, London, 1984.
5. P C Martin and I W Hannah, Modern Power Station Practice, British Electricity International,
Vols. 1 & VI, Pergamon Press, London, 1992.
14EI2025 MODERN CONTROL TECHNIQUES
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Course Objective:
To enable the students to understand the advanced control systems like optimal control, Robust
control, Adaptive control fuzzy and Neural control.
To learn the methods to overcome the difficulties in implementing conventional control through
advanced control.
To analyze the modern control concepts
Course Outcome:
Design of conventional PID controller
Perform stability analysis and optimal control
Adaptive control and its implementation
Modifications of PID control schemes, Two degrees of freedom control, Optimal Control – Formulation,
Necessary conditions of optimality, state regulator problem, Output regulator tracking problems,
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Pontryagin's minimum principle, infinite time optimal control , Problem, Advanced Control techniques -
Lyapunov Stability Analysis And Quadratic Optimal Control, Adaptive Control, Robust control
References
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, Morden Control Engineering,Third Edition, - Prentice Hall , India 2009.
2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal.M. Control Systems Engineering, Wiley & sons, 2008.
3. Astrom K.J. and Wittenmark.B, Adaptive Control, Addison Wesley Publishing, 1985.
4. Bernard friedlanced - Advanced Control System Design- Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New
Delhi,1996.
5. Richard.C. Dorf and Robert.H.Bisho, Modern Control System, Addison Wesley & sons, 2008
14EI2026 STRENGTH OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the basics of stress and strain on elements.
To discuss the theory of failure in machines.
To learn the concept of torsion on elements.
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for stress and strain analysis on elements.
Determine the shear force and bending moment of elements.
Analyze the effect of torsion on elements.
Stress at a point, stress and strains in bars subjected to axial loading, Various strengths of material,
Temperature stresses in simple & composite members. Strain energy due to axial load. Compound stress
and strains, Mohr’s circle of stress; ellipse of stress and their applications, stresses in machine elements,
Shear force and Bending moment – Definitions, Diagrams for cantilevers, simply supported beams with
or without overhangs Uniform distributed load, Combination of Concentrated load & UDL, Uniformity
varying load, Torsion equation, Applications to hollow and solid circular shafts, torsional rigidity,
combined torsion and bending of circular shafts, analysis of close-coiled-helical springs, theories of
failure, Buckling of columns.
References
1. R. S. Khurmi, Strength of Materials, S. Chand, 2008
2. S. S. Ratan, Strength of Materials, Tata McGrawhill, 2011
3. Gere and Temoshenko, “Mechanics of Material”, CBS Publishers
4. S. Ramamrutham “Strength of Materials”, , Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company
5. Singer and Pytel “Strength of Materials”, , Harper and Row Publications
14EI2032 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To deal with automation strategies used in assembly systems.
To understand the concept of group technology.
To learn the significance of Flexible Manufacturing systems.
Course Outcome: Classify the automation strategies used in industries.
Select the group technology to be adopted for specific applications.
Appreciate the importance of Flexible manufacturing systems
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Automation and Automated Assembly systems-Types, automation strategies, Detroit-type automation:
Automated flow lines, methods of work part transport, Transfer mechanisms, design of automated
assembly systems, Group Technology-Part families, parts classification and coding, Machine cell design,
Flexible Manufacturing Systems - Components of an FMS, types of systems, FMS work stations,
Material handling and storage system, Planning the FMS, analysis methods for FMS, applications and
benefits.
References
1. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing- Groover M.P,
Prentice Hall of India, 2002
2. CAD/CAM – Groover M.P, Zimmers E.W, Prentice Hall of India, 2005
3. Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing: Nanua Singh, John Wiley and
Sons, 1998.
4. Production Management Systems: A CIM Perspective- Browne J, Harhen J, Shivnan J, Addison
Wesley, 2nd Ed. 1996.
14EI2033 VIBRATION ANALYSIS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To learn about the causes and effects of vibration and their characteristics.
To understand the principle of vibration transducers.
To learn the modern methods of vibration analysis.
Course Outcome: Characterize the vibration and perform cause-effect analysis.
Develop measurement systems to measure vibration.
Apply the knowledge of vibration analysis to suggest solutions to overcome the effect fo
vibration.
Causes and effects of vibration- Vibrations of Single Degree, Two Degree and Multi Degree of freedom
systems., Steady state and transient characteristics of vibration, Vibration measuring instruments-
Vibration transducers, signal conditioning elements. Display-and recording elements. Vibration meters
and analyzers, Special vibration measuring techniques - Change in sound method, Ultrasonic
measurement method, Shock pulse measurement, Kurtosis, Acoustic emission monitoring, Cepstrum
analysis, Modal analysis, critical speed analysis, Shaft –orbit & position analysis.
References
1. Collacott, R.A., Mechanical Fault Diagnosis and Condition Monitoring, Chapman & Hall, London, 1982.
2. John S. Mitchell, Introduction to Machinery Analysis and Monitoring, Penn Well Books, Penn
Well Publishing Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma, 1993.
3. Nakra, B.C. Yadava, G.S. and Thuested, L., Vibration Measurement and Analysis, National
Productivity Council, New Delhi, 1989. 4. Pox and Jenkins, “Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control”, ISBN 978-0-470-27284-8,
2008.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2035 HUMAN - ROBOT SYSTEMS AND INTERACTION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To study multimodal interactions between a human and a robot
To gain knowledge on surgical robotics.
To deal with rehabilitation and assistive robotics.
Course Outcome:
Perform motion analysis of human robots
Develop robot supported surgical assistive devices.
Design robots for rehabilitation.
Definition of human-robot interaction problem, human factors: perception, motor skills, social aspect of
interaction, safety, Haptic robots: kinematics, dynamics, collision detection, control,
Teleoperation systems: architectures, control, virtual fixtures, micro/nano manipulation; Soft robots based
on variable impedance actuators, Medical robotics: surgical robotics, robot-supported diagnostics, micro-
robots in the human body, nanorobots at the cell level, Rehabilitation and assistive robotics: motor
rehabilitation, exoskeletons, robotic prosthetics
References
1. M. Mihelj, J. Podobnik, Haptics for Virtual Reality and Teleoperation, Springer 2012.
2. J. Rosen, B. Hannaford, R.M. Satava, SurgicalRobotics: Systems Applications and Visions,
Springer, 2011
3. M. Tavakoli, R.V. Patel, M. Moallem, A. Aziminejad, Haptics for Teleoperated Surgical
Robotic Systems, World Scientific, 2008
4. Jose L. Pons, Wearable Robots:Biomechatronic Exoskeletons, John Wiley& Sons, 2008.
5. V. Dietz, T. Nef, W.Z. Rymer,Neurorehabilitation Technology, Springer, 2012
6. E. Burdet, D.W. Franklin, T.E. Milner, Human Robotics: Neuromechanics and Motor
Control, The MIT Press, 2013
7. L. Sciavico, B. Siciliano: Modeling and Control of Robot Manipulators, The McGraw –
Hill Companies, Inc., New York, 2000.
14EI2036 ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the instrumentation methodologies for environment monitoring.
To deal with water quality monitoring and waste water treatment
To discuss the instrumentation required for air pollution monitoring.
Course Outcome:
Design instrumentation systems for environment monitoring.
Develop algorithms for waste water treatment
Develop instruments to measure and analyze air quality
Necessity of instrumentation & control for environment, Instrumentation methodologies, Quality of
water: Standards, effects, Water quality parameters: Thermal conductivity, detectors, Opacity monitors,
pH analyzers & their application, conductivity analyzers & their application, Water treatment:
Requirement of water treatment facilities, process design, Sedimentation & flotation: sludge, storage &
removal, design criteria of settling tank, effect of temperature on coagulation, Ground water monitoring:
Level measurement in ground water monitoring wells, instrumentation in ground water monitoring,
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
assessment of soil & ground water pollution, Waste water monitoring: Waste water measurement
techniques. Instrumentation set up for waste water treatment plant. Air pollution: Air monitoring,
measurement of ambient air quality, Air flow measurement, Rain water harvesting: necessity, methods,
rate of NGOs municipal corporation, Govt., limitations. Quality assurance of storage water.
References 1. Walter J. Weber, “Physiochemical processes for water quality control”.
2. David Hendricks, “Fundamentals of Water Treatment Unit Processes”, CRC press, 2011.
3. M. N. Rao & H. V. N. Rao, Air pollution engineering, Mcgrawhill education, 2004.
4. Kenneth Wark, Cecil Warner, “Air pollution control technology”, IEP series in Mechanical
Engineering, 2000.
5. Randy D. Down, Jey.H. Lehr, “Environmental Instrumentation & Analysis Handbook” Wiley
International, 2004.
14EI2038 INSTRUMENTATION FOR AGRICULTURE
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the fundamental principles of soil measurement systems.
To deal with green house instrumentation.
To discuss the working of automation equipment in agriculture
Course Outcome:
Design sensors for soil moisture measurement
Develop green house instrumentation systems
Apply the knowledge of instruments for automation in agriculture.
Necessity of instrumentation & control for agriculture, engineering properties of soil: Sensors:
introduction to sonic anemometers, hygrometers, fine wire thermocouples, open & close path gas
analysers, brief introduction to various bio-sensors, soil moisture measurement methods: resistance based
method, voltage based method, thermal based method, details of gypsum block soil moisture sensor,
green houses & instrumentation: ventilation, cooling & heating, wind speed, temperature & humidity, rain
gauge, carbon dioxide enrichment measurement & control. Automation in earth moving equipments &
farm equipments, implementation of hydraulic, pneumatic & electronics control circuits in harvesters
cotton pickers, tractor etc. Leaf area length evaportranspiration, temperature, wetness & respiration
measurement , electromagnetic radiations photosynthesis, infrared & UV bio sensor methods in
agriculture, agrometrological instrumentation weather stations, surface flux measurement, soil water
content measurement using time-domain reflectometery(TDR)
References
1. Industrial instrumentation, “Patranabis”, TMH, 2012.
2. Instrumentation handbook-process control, “B.G.Liptak”, Chilton 40
3. Process control and instrumentation technology, “C.D. Johnson”, PHI, 2005
4. Wills B.A., “ Mineral Processing Technology”, 4thEd.,Pergamon Press, 2000.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2039 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR AVIONICS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the fundamentals of Aircraft systems.
• To learn about the instrumentation involved in Aircrafts.
• To provide knowledge on the working of aircraft instruments.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need for measurement in aircraft
• Design instrumentation systems for aircraft.
• Select suitable sensors to monitor the parameters in an aircraft.
Flight Instrumentation – Pitot, Static Instruments and Systems, Altimeter, Airspeed indicator,
Machmeter, Maximum Safe Speed indicator, Accelerometer, Gyroscope, Gyroscopic theory, Directional
gyro indicator, Artificial horizon, Turn and slip indicator, Measurements in Aircraft - Measurement of
Engine Speed, Measurement of Temperature, Pressure, Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow, Engine Power And
Control Instruments, Power Indicators, Pressure Indicators, Turbine Temperature Control, Engine
Vibration Monitoring and Indicating Instruments.
References
1. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instruments – Principles and applications", Pitman and sons,
1981.
2. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instrument Integrated Systems”, ISBN-10: 0582086272, Edition: 3rd
1992.
3. Nagabhushana S. Et.Al, S. Nagabhushana, L. K. Sudha, “ Aircraft Instrumentation and
Systems”, International Pvt Ltd,2010.
4. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) “Instrument Flying Handbook”, 2013.
5. Doeblin.E.O, “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
14EI2040 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To know about the generation and detection of ultrasonic waves
• To provide knowledge on the concepts of Ultrasonic Instrumentation
• To understand the applications of ultrasonic instruments
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the Characteristics of ultrasonic waves.
• Develop sensors to measure physical quantities using ultrasonic methods.
• Apply the concepts of ultrasonic instruments to make simple applications.
Ultrasonic Waves -Principles and propagation of various waves, Characterization of ultrasonic
transmission, Reflection and Transmission coefficients, Intensity and attenuation of sound beam.
Generation/Detection Of Ultrasonic Waves - Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects, Detection of
Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical ,Optical and Electrical Method, Precise Measurement: Pulse– echo
Overlap, Cross correlation, Ultrasonic Applications - Ultrasonic methods of flaw detection, Flow meters,
Density measurement, Viscosity measurement, Level measurement, Sensor for Temperature and Pressure
measurements, Measuring thickness, Depth, Rail Inspection, SONAR, Inspection of Welds and defect
detection in welds of anisotropic materials, ultrasonic applications in medical field.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References
1. Baldev Raj, V.Rajendran, P.Palanichamy, “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”,Alpha
Science International, UK, 2004.
2. J.David N.Cheeke,”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves,” CRC Press, Florida,
2002.
3. LawrenceE.Kinsler, Austin R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V. Sanders, “Fundamentals of
Acoustics,” John Wiley and Sons Inc,USA, 2000.
4. L.A. Bulavin, YU.F.Zabashta, “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine,” VSP, Koninklijke,
Brill,Boston, 2007.
5. Emmanuel P. Papadakis, “Ultrasonic Instruments and Devices”Academic Press,1999.
14EI2041 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course objective:
To introduce the fundamentals of measurement systems and errors.
To provide adequate knowledge on the measurement of electrical and non-electrical quantities.
To have an understanding of the concepts of signal generators, analyzers and recording
instruments.
Course outcome:
Analyze the instrument characteristics and the errors in measurement.
Develop measurement systems for measuring electrical and non-electrical quantities.
Suggest the types of analyzers, display devices and recording instruments for a specific
application.
Standards and Indicating Instruments-Errors in measurement- MC-MI-PMMC instruments-
Measurement of electrical quantities- R,L,C,power,energy- Transducers used for sensing the measuring
quantities - measurement of non-electrical quantities - temperature, pressure, speed - Signal Generators
and analysers such as oscillators, spectrum and network analysers – various types of display indicators
and different types of signal recorders as data acquisition systems
References
1. Sawhney.A.K., “A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”,
DhanpatRai& Company Private Limited, New Delhi, 18thEdition, 2007.
2. Helfrick A.D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, Prentice Hall India Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Doeblin,E.O., “Measurement Systems : Application and Design”, 5th Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2004.
4. Golding,E.W., and Widdis,F.C., “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, A H
Wheeler & Company, Calcutta, 5th Edition, 2003.
5. Rangan,C.S., Sharma, G.R., Mani, V.S., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
6. John P Bentley, “Principles of measurement systems”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 4/e, 2005.
7. Alan S. Morris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Elsevier, 2001.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2042 ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Course Objective:
• Provide adequate knowledge on the description and stability of non-linear system.
• Understand the analysis of digital control system using state-space formulation.
• Look at the formulation and analysis of multi input multi output (MIMO) system.
Course Outcome:
• Gain knowledge in analysis of non-linear system and digital control of linear system.
• Implement the concept of MIMO system.
• Find non-linear system stability using the trajectory methods.
State Space Analysis of Discrete Time Systems, Controllability, Observability, Pole placement design,
Design of State observer, Response of sampled data system to step and ramp Inputs – Stability studies –
Jury’s test and bilinear transformation, Types of nonlinearity, Construction of phase trajectories,
Describing function method, Lyapunov stability analysis, Introduction to multivariable Nyquist plot and
Singular values analysis, Advanced control techniques.
References
1. Nagrath I.J., Gopal M., ‘Control Systems Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, 5th
Edition, New Delhi 2003.
2. Raymond T. Stefani, Bahram Shahian, Clement J. Savant and Gene Hostetter , “Design of
feedback Control systems”, Oxford University Press, New York,4th Edition, 2002.
3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Discrete-Time Control Systems”, New Age International, New Delhi, 4th
Edition, 2007.
4. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition. 2008.
5. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 8th Edition, 2004.
14EI2043 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the fundamentals of virtual instrumentation.
• To provide knowledge about the programming techniques in virtual instrumentation.
• To learn about the structures and special features of LabVIEW .
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the advantages of Data flow programming
• Use VI for instrumentation and control
• Design a LabVIEW based instrumentation system.
Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture of a Virtual Instrument, Data Flow
Techniques, Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional programming -
Introduction and Advantages of LabVIEW, Software Environment, Creating and Saving VI- Front Panel
Controls and Indicators – Block Diagram - Data types – Date flow program – LabVIEW documentation
resources – Keyboard shortcuts – Modular Programming in LabVIEW – Icon and Connector Pane -
SubVI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing an SubVI - Creating a Stand Alone Application - Loops and
charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, local and global
variables, string and file I/O.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References
1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW” Prentice Hall India Learning Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
2. JohnEssick, “Hands-On Introduction to LabVIEW for Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford
University Press,New York, 2nd
Edition, 2010.
3. NesimiErtugrul, “LabVIEW for Electric Circuits, Machines, Drives, and Laboratories”, Pearson
Education, 2nd
Edition, 2002.
4. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, 2005.
5. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw – Hill
Education India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2010.
6. Gary W. Johnson, Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw-Hill
Education, New York, 3rd Edition, 2001.
14EI2044 PLC AND AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objectives:
• To learn the basics and programming of PLC.
• To examine the difference between SCADA and DCS.
• To understand the basic concepts of Intelligent Automation.
Course Outcome:
• Identify, formulate, and solve problems related to PLC.
• Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs of the industrial requirement.
• Implement a complete SCADA application relating to an industrial process or operation
Description
Basics of PLC – Architecture of PLC – Advantages – Types of PLC – Introduction to PLC Networking –
Protocols – Field bus – Process bus and Ethernet. Types of Programming – Simple process control
programs using Relay Ladder Logic and Boolean logic methods – PLC arithmetic functions – Process
automation - Difference between SCADA system and DCS – Architecture – Local control Unit –
Programming language – Operator interface – Engineering interfaces. Introduction to SCADA –
Comparison between SCADA and DCS - Necessity and Role in Industrial Automation – Text display –
Operator panels & Touch panels - Factory Automation - Computer Integrated Manufacture – CNC –
Intelligent automation – Wireless controls.
References
1. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”,
PHI Learning, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2002.
2. Dieter K. Hammer, Lonnie R. Welch, Dieter K. Hammer, “Engineering of Distributed Control
Systems”, Nova Science Publishers, USA, 2001.
3. Gary Dunning, “Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers”, Thomson Business
Information, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
4. Bolton. W, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier India Private Limited, 5th Edition, New
Delhi, 2010.
5. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation Produciton systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
PHI Learning Ltd., 3rd
Edition, New Delhi, 2009
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2045 ARTIFICIAL ORGANS AND REHABILITATION ENGINEERING
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective
To know about various types of assist devices.
To give a basic idea of the artificial organs that can aid a human to live a normal life.
To provide the awareness on assistance that can be rendered to a differently abled person
Course Outcome
Design simple assist devices from basic principles.
Choose suitable type of assist device for various disorders and legal aspects related to
rehabilitation.
Develop new devices based on the basic knowledge gained in different assisting devices.
Description
Biomaterials used in artificial organs andprostheses, Outlook for Organ replacement – Design
considerations – Evaluation Process - Brief of kidney filtration, Haemodialysis: flat plate type, coil
typeand hollow fiber. Haemodialysis Machine, Portable kidney machine - Brief of lungs gaseous
exchange / transport,artificial heart-lung devices. Oxygenators: bubble, film oxygenators and membrane
oxygenators. Gas flow rate and area for membrane oxygenators - Anatomy & Physiology of EAR-air
conduction, bone conduction, masking, functional diagram of an audiometer. Hearing aids: different
types, receiver amplifiers - Ultra sonic and laser canes, Intra ocular lens, Braille Reader, Tactile devices
for visually challenged, Text voice converter.
Reference Books
1. Joseph D. Bronzing, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, CRC Press, Connecticut, 2nd
Edition, 2000.
2. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”, Prentice hall of India, New
Delhi, 2007
3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2007.
4. Laurence J. Street, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering Technology”, CRC Press 2007.
5. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill
Professional. 1st Edition, 2002
6. D. Jennings, A. Flint, B.C.H. firton and L.D.M. Nokes, “Introduction to Medical Electronics
Applications” Butterworth-Heinemann; 1995.
14EI2046 PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of process control.
To deal with the concepts of stability analysis of a system.
To learn about the fundamentals of instruments used to measure physical parameters.
Course Outcome:
Derive the mathematical model of a system and analyze its characteristics.
Determine the stability of a given system
Apply the knowledge of industrial instruments to suggest sensors for a particular application.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Introduction to process control: Importance of Process control systems, steady state design, process
control block diagram, types of responses, transforms of functions, Control systems, Open and closed
loop systems, hydraulic and pneumatic systems, Control valves, Stability analysis, Stability criterion,
Characteristic equation, Routh test for stability, signal flow graph, Masons’s Gain formula, block
diagram, Industrial instrumentation, Measurement methods for sensing the pressure, temperature, level,
density, composition.
References
1. J.F Richardson A D. G. Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “Chemical Engineering” Volume3,
(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann, an imprint
of Elsevier, 2006.
2. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” McGraw Hill
International Edition , Second Edition, Singapore, 2008
3. Nagoorkani. A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, Nineteenth reprint 2012
4. S. Baskar, “Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”, Anuradha Agencies
Publishers, 2004.
5. Nagrath. M and Gopal. I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third Edition
Reprint 2003.
14EI2047 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI2046 Process Control for Food Engineers
Course Objective:
To provide adequate knowledge about the principle and characteristics of instruments.
To learn about open loop and closed loop systems.
To gain knowledge on stability analysis of a system
Course Outcome:
Determine the characteristics of instruments and analyze their performance.
Analyze the performance of open loop and closed loop systems.
Perform stability analysis of a given system.
Description:
This laboratory enables the student to analyze the performance of various measuring instruments and use
them to control a system.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2048 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To provide adequate knowledge in the fundamental concepts of mechanical instrumentation
• To introduce the basics of mathematical modelling and controller design.
• To discuss about stability analysis of systems.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the knowledge of mechanical instruments to select suitable sensors for a particular
application.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Derive the mathematical model of a given system and develop control algorithms to improve its
performance.
• Determine the stability of a given system.
General concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, generalized measurement system - Classification of
instruments as indicators, Recorders and integrators Measurement error and calibration, Pressure And
Temperature Measurement, Strain And Flow Measurement, Control Systems: Open and closed systems,
Servo– mechanisms, Transfer functions,Signal flow graphs, Block diagram algebra, hydraulic and
pneumatic control systems, Two way control , Proportional control - Differential and Integral control,
Stability analysis, Concept of Stability, Necessary condition for Stability, Routh stability criterion, Polar
and Bode plots, Nyquist plots
References
1. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements” Khanna Publishers, 2002.
2. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, first edition ninth reprint 2002.
3. Sawhny, A.K. “Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation”,
DhanpatRai& Co., 2000.
4. Collet. C. V. and Hope. A.D. ‘Engineering Measurements’ 2nd Edition ELBS.
5. Nagrath. M. and Gopal.I.J.Control systems Engineering, Wiley eastern Ltd.,.2001.
6. Baskar S,’Instrumentation control system measurements and controls ‘anuradha agencies
publishers,2004.
14EI3002 INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System
To understand the importance of Instrumentation
To learn about computer based instrumentation
Course Outcome:
Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system
Analyze the characteristics of transducers
Apply computer based instrumentation for real time applications
Instrumentation system – The general instrumentation system, Static and Dynamic Characteristics,
Resistance and Inductance transducers, Capacitance and Piezoelectric transducers, Digital methods of
measurements – Digital voltmeters and multimeters , Digital frequency, period and time measurements,
Digital tachometers, Digital phase meters, Digital data recording, Digital Transducers, Computer based
instrumentation – Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation, Architecture of Virtual Instrumentation, Virtual
Instruments Versus Traditional Instruments, Advantages of VI, Interface Buses: PCI, PXI, and VXI.
References
1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and
Philadelphia, 2004.
2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, New
York, 2003.
3. Kalsi H S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2009
4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control
Systems” Elsevier, 2003.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
5. Mathivanan “PC based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2008
6. Dr.S.Renganathan, “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.
7. D.Patranabis, “Principles of Electronic Instrumentation,” PHI, 2008
8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”
Springer, 2007.
9. H K P Neubert, “Instrument Transducers”, Oxford University Press, Cambridge,2000.
14EI3003 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modelling.
• To understand various conventional and adaptive controllers.
• To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling.
Course Outcome:
• Develop mathematical model of a physical process.
• Design various conventional and adaptive controllers.
• Understand the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling.
Process control system – Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Instrument terms
and symbols, Classification of variables, Modelling of simple systems
Basic control action – Continuous controller modes- Selection of control mode for different process with
control scheme, Control valve types and characteristics, Controller tuning – Optimum controller settings,
Tuning of controllers, Advanced Control schemes, MIMO systems–Introduction, loop interaction ,
relative gains., Advanced control strategies – Internal model control, Adaptive control, Dynamic matrix
control, Generalized predictive control
References
1. Stephanopoulos G., “Chemical Process Control, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw – Hill Higher Education,
Singapore, 2008.
3. Wayne BequetteB,’ Process control: modeling, design, and simulation’ Prentice Hall , New
Jersey – 2003.
4. Smith C.L and Corripio.A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 2006.
5. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control”
,Willey India, 2006.
6. Marlin. T.E., Process Control, Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork, 2000
14EI3004 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL
LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14EI3003 – Advanced Process Control
Course Objective:
• To demonstrate the various process Measurements.
• To inculcate the various controller design.
• To implement Programmable Logic Control for real time applications.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Outcome:
• Measure various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.
• Design control algorithms for different control loops.
• Implement Programmable Logic Control for real time applications.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3005 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of state space representation.
• To study the controllers and the stability analysis of linear and non-linear systems.
• To study the concepts of robustness
Course Outcome:
• Obtain the state space representation of a system.
• Design controllers and analyse stability of a system
• Design robust control systems
Modelling of dynamic systems-Definition, Mathematical modelling, State space representation,
Centrifugal Governor, Ground vehicle, Permanent Magnet stepper motor, Inverted Pendulum, Analysis of
mathematical models – State space method, Phase plane, Isoclines, Numerical methods, State space
analysis – Reachability and controllability , Observability and constructability, Companion forms,
Controller / Observer form, State feedback control, State estimators, Stability of nonlinear system –
Lyapunov stability theorems, Krasovskii’s method, Variable gradient method, Phase plane analysis,
Singular points, Limit cycle, Describing function analysis.
Robust PID control – Introduction to robust control- PID Tuning– Modifications of PID control scheme –
Two Degrees of Freedom Control – Design consideration of Robust Control
References
1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.
2. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey 2009.
4. Vidyasagar .M, “Nonlinear system analysis”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey 2002.
5. Singaresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods” Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey,
2001.
6. Jean – Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, “Applied nonlinear control”, Prentice Hall Inc., New
Jersey, 2004.
14EI3006 DISCRETE CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To learn the concepts of discrete time Control systems.
• To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design.
• To deal with the different types of digital control algorithm.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need for discrete time control systems
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Design control system using polynomial equations approach.
• Develop different types of digital control algorithm for a system.
Z transform – Review of Z Transform –Stability Analysis in Z domain
State space analysis – State Space representation of discrete time Signals – Solving discrete time State
Space Equations
Pole placement and observer design – Controllability – Observability –Design via Pole Placement – State
Observer
Polynomial approach – Polynomial Equations Approach to Control System Design
Digital algorithms – Implementation of different digital control algorithms
References
1. Ogata, “Discrete – Time Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Sigapore,2002.
2. Ky M. Vu, Optimal Discrete Control Theory The Rational Function Structure Model, Library and
archives Canada cataloguing in publication, Canada,2007.
3. Gene F. Franklin,J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education
Limited – 2002.
4. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Second Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New
Delhi, 2003.
14EI3007 INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in Control.
To introduce fuzzy logic concepts and its applications in Control.
To introduce the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithm.
Course Outcome:
Develop and train a neural network.
Develop a fuzzy system for a given application
Use the neural network and fuzzy logic techniques to control a system.
Neural Networks: Introduction – Biological Neurons and their artificial Models, Learning Rules, Types
Of Neural Networks , Schemes Of Neuro Control, System Identification , Case studies, Fuzzy Logic:
Fuzzy Sets, Fuzzy Operation, Fuzzy Arithmetic, Fuzzy Relations, Fuzzy Relational Equations,
Approximate Reasoning, Fuzzy Propositions, Fuzzy Quantifiers
Structure of Fuzzy Logic Controller, Fuzzy Control Applications
Genetic Algorithm and its applications: Fundamentals, Comparison Of GA And Traditional Search
Methods, Genetic Algorithm In Scientific Models And Theoretical Foundations, Case Studies
References
1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,
1999.
2. Rajasekaran.S and G.A Vijayalakshmi Pai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic
Algorithms, Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.
3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd.,1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory –and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic
Publishers,1994.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
5. Melanie Mitchell, ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’, Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi,
Edition: 2004.
6. Kosko, B. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.
14EI3008 OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the theory of optimal control and its applications.
• To provide knowledge of dynamic optimization
• To deal with design of optimal control system
Course Outcome:
• Apply optimal control concepts to systems.
• Use dynamic optimization techniques to controllers.
• Design optimal control algorithms for real time systems.
Introduction , Problem formulation , Optimal control problem, Performance measures for optimal control
problem, Selection, Dynamic programming – Optimal control law, Principle of optimality, A recurrence
relation of dynamic programming, Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation, Calculus of variations –
Functions and Functional , Maxima and minima of function, Variation of functional , Extremal of
functional, Euler Lagrange equation
Variational approach to optimal control problems, Necessary conditions for optimal control, Linear
regulator problems, Linear tracking problems, Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality
constraints, Minimum time problems – Singular intervals in optimal control problems, Various
optimization algorithms
References
1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction, Prentice – Hall networks series, New
Jersey, 2004.
2. Singiresu S. Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age International (P)
Ltd., Publishers New Delhi – 2004.
3. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw – Hill Companies New
Delhi, 2009.
4. Dimitri P. Bertsekas.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol –1 Athena Scientific,
Bell mount MA, 2000.
14EI3009 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To provide the basic concepts of various industrial process measurements
To give an exposure to smart instruments.
To deal with the design and calibration of measuring Instruments
Course Outcome:
Design and calibrate the measuring instruments
Analyze the characteristics of instruments
Suggest suitable instruments for a particular application
Design and Calibration of various types of measuring instruments for Pressure Measurement, Flow
Measurement, Temperature Measurement and Level Measurement.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References
1. Doeblin E.O.I, Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Fifth Edition, McGraw –
Hill Publishing Co. 5th edition, 2003.
2. Liptak B. ‘Process Measurement and Analysis’, 4th Edition,ISA, CRC Press, 2003.
3. Tatamangalam R., ‘Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design’, Springer Verlag,
2000.
4. Singh. S.K, ‘Industrial Instrumentation and Control’, Tata McGraw Hill, Reprint 2004.
14EI3010 CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To impart the knowledge of compensators.
To study the basic concepts of discrete domain representation of the system.
To provide knowledge on the concepts of state estimation
Course Outcome:
Design compensators for process applications
Represent systems in discrete domain
Design state estimators.
Conventional Design Methods: Design specifications, PID controllers and compensators, Root locus
based design, Bode based design, Design examples, Design In Discrete Domain: Sample and Hold,
Digital equivalents, Impulse and step invariant transformations , Methods of discretisation, Effect of
sampling, Direct discrete design, Discrete root locus, Design examples, Optimal Control :Formation of
optimal control problems, Calculus of variations, Hamiltonian formulation, Discrete State Variable
Design: Discrete pole placement, State and output feedback, Estimated state feedback, Discrete optimal
control , Dynamic programming - Design examples, State Estimation :State Estimation Problem,
Luenberger’s observer - Noise characteristics, Kalman - Bucy filter, Separation Theorem, Controller
Design, Wiener filter, Design examples.
References
1. M. Gopal “Modern control system Theory” New Age International, 2005.
2. Benjamin C. Kuo “Digital control systems”, Oxford University Press, 2004.
3. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and A. E. Naeini “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI
(Pearson), 2002.
4. Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe and Mario E. Salgado “Control system Design”, PHI
(Pearson), 2003.
5. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M Workman, “Digital Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI
(Pearson), 2002.
6. B.D.O. Anderson and J.B. Moore., ‘Optimal Filtering’, Prentice hall Inc., N.J., Second version
published in 2005.
7. Loan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito,” Digital Control Systems, Design, Identification and
Implementation”, Springer, 2006.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3011 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.
• To understand the concept of signal processing using virtual instruments
• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition using virtual instrumentation
Course Outcome:
• Analyze real world signals
• Interface real process with a virtual instrument.
• Perform signal processing operations using virtual instrumentation.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3012 EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To learn about the Embedded Processors with Real World applications.
To introduce the concept of control applications in embedded systems.
To enhance the knowledge in interfacing processes with embedded controllers.
Course Outcome:
Write programs in an IDE and download it to the Processor.
Design and program Embedded circuits.
Design control algorithms in an embedded processor.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3014 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the process control philosophies
To learn the Programmable Logic controller design
To deal with PLC for control applications
Course Outcome:
Apply PLC programming for control purpose
Apply ladder logic methodology in automation field
Apply PLC in real time continuous process
Nature of Industrial Process: continuous & discrete state , sequential process, process variables and their
classification. Introduction to Process Control Philosophies: type of relays, ladder logic methodology,
Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers: PLC programming methodologies: ladder diagram,
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
STL, functional block diagram, creating ladder diagram from process control descriptions, introduction to
IEC61131 international standard for PLC.
PLC functions- PLC Timer & Counter functions - on-delay timer, off-delay, Timers- PLC Data
Handling: - PLC arithmetic and logical functions- Analog value processing: types of analog modules,
analog input and output examples, PID control of continuous process.
References
1. John webb, “Programmable logic controllers-Principles & applications”, Prentice Hall of
India,2003.
2. T. A. Hughes, ”Programmable controllers, ISA, 2005.
3. 1.C. D. Johnson, “Process control instrumentation Technology, 3rd
Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
1988.
14EI3015 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To understand the concept of signal modelling
• To impart the concepts of system identification
• To introduce the concept of adaptive control
Course Outcome:
• Select a suitable model for a given system.
• Perform system identification of a given process using different methods.
• Design adaptive control strategies for real time applications.
Signal modelling – Models of LTI systems- - Models for Time - varying and Non - linear systems,
Models with Nonlinearities, Nonlinear state - space models, Black box models, Fuzzy models,
Identification – Non - Parametric and Parametric identification, Transient response and Correlation
Analysis, Frequency response analysis, Spectral Analysis, Least Square, Recursive Least Square,
Validation – Non - Linear Identification and Model Validation, State estimation techniques, Non linear
identification using Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic, Adaptive control – Self Tuning Regulators (STR),
Model Reference Adaptive Control (MRAC) , Gain Scheduling, Applications – Inverted Pendulum,
Robot arm, Process control application: heat exchanger, Distillation column - Application to power
system, Ship steering control.
References
1. Narendra and Annasamy,” Stable Adaptive Control Systems, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2005.
2. Astrom and Wittenmark,” Adaptive Control Second Edition”, Addison - Wesley Publishing
Company 1995.
3. Monson H.Hayes,’ Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling”, John Wiley and
Sons,2002
4. Lennart Ljung, “System Identification Theory for the User”, Prentice Hall, Inc., NJ, 1999.
5. Torsten Soderstrom, Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, prentice Hall ` International (UK)
Ltd,1994.
6. William S. Levine, “ Control Hand Book” CRC Press, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
7. Narendra and Annasamy,” Stable Adaptive Control Systems, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2005.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3016 SCADA SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.
• To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.
• To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.
• Apply the concept of Supervisory Control
• Perform simulation for various process.
Introduction to SCADA and PLC:SCADA: Data acquisition system, PLC: Block diagram, programming
languages, SCADA system components: Schemes, Remote Terminal Unit, Intelligent Electronic
Devices, Communication Network, SCADA server, SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA
Architectures, advantages and disadvantages, SCADA Communication and Operation and control of
interconnected power system:SCADA applications
References
1. Stuart A Boyer, “SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition”,ISA- The Instrumentation,
Systems and Automation Society,2010.
2. Gordan Clark, Deem Reynders, “Practical Modem SCADA Protocols”, Elsevier
Publications,2004.
3. Sunil S. Rao, “Switchgear and Protections”, Khanna Publication,1992.
4. John Park, Steve Mackay, “Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control
Systems”,.Elsevier Publications,2003.
14EI3017 DESIGN OF LINEAR MULTIVARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To inculcate the knowledge of Multivariable control systems.
• To design controller for multivariable control systems.
• To apply the design for various applications.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concept of Multivariable control systems.
• Design controller for multivariable control systems.
• Use the corresponding controller synthesis techniques.
Analysis: system representations, return difference matrix, stability theory, multivariable poles and
zeros. Design: design criteria, LQG design methods (including the optimal linear quadratic regulator and
the Kalman filter), norm-based methods, robust stability and performance. H-infinity design techniques,
including the generalised regulator problem. Model reduction, including modal and balanced truncation.
Design examples: use of software for the design of controllers for industrial processes.
References 1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.
2. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Charles R. Slivinsky, Donald G. Schultz, Lynn E. Weaver, “The design of linear multivariable
control systems using modern control theory”, 1969.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. Ying-Jyi Paul Wei, “Frequency-domain approaches to linear multivariable control system
designs, 1979.
5. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey, 2009.
14EI3018 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To provide knowledge on the symbols of Piping and Instrumentation diagram.
• To deal with P&I flow diagram.
• To learn the applications of Piping and Instrumentation diagrams in process plants.
Course Outcome:
• Identify the symbols used in Piping and Instrumentation diagrams.
• Interpret the Piping and Instrumentation diagram of a process.
• Analyze the condition of a process from the Piping and Instrumentation representation.
Types of flow sheets, Flow sheet Presentation, Flow Sheet Symbols, Process flow diagram- Synthesis of
steady state flow sheet - Flow sheeting software.
P & I D objectives, guide rules, Symbols, Line numbering, Line schedule, P & I D development, typical
stages of P & I D.
P & I D for rotating equipment and static pressure vessels, Process vessels, absorber, Control System for
Heater, Heat exchangers, reactors, dryers, Distillation column,
Applications of P & I D in design stage - Construction stage - Commissioning stage - Operating stage -
Revamping stage - Applications of P & I D in Risk
References
1. Ernest E. Ludwig, “Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants”, Vol.-I Gulf
Publishing Company, Houston, 1989.
2. Max. S. Peters and K.D.Timmerhaus, “Plant Design and Economics for Chemical Engineers”,
McGraw Hill, Inc., New York, 1991.
3. 3.Bela G. Liptak, “ Process Measurement and Analysis”, ISA, CRC press,2003.
4. Anil Kumar,”Chemical Process Synthesis and Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
publishing Company Limited, New Delhi - 1981.
5. A.N. Westerberg, et al., “Process Flowsheeting”, Cambridge University Press, 1979.
14EI3019 EMBEDDED INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System
To understand the importance of Instrumentation
To deal with the concepts of embedded instrumentation systems
Course Outcome:
Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system
Analyze the characteristics of transducers
Develop computer based instrumentation for real time applications
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Instrumentation system - resistance and inductance transducer-capacitance and piezoelectric transducers,
digital methods of measurements: computer based instrumentation, evolution of virtual instrumentation,
architecture of embedded virtual instrumentation, embedded virtual instruments versus traditional
instruments , advantages of vi – pc based data acquisition system, interfacing techniques to the IBM PC –
plug– in data acquisition boards – interface buses: PCI, PXI, VXI
References 1. S. Sumathi, P.Surekha, “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems “ springer 2007
2. N.Mathivanan, “ PC_Based Instrumentation- Concepts and Practice, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2007
3. Walt Boyes, “ Instrumentation Reference Books”, Third Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2003.
14EI3020 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the concept of communication protocols and give an overview of Data
Communication Standards.
To discuss the types of cables used for transmission.
To discuss the operation and applications of the Protocols used in Industries .
Course Outcome:
At the end of the course, Students will be able to
Identify the protocol.
Choose the requires protocol and the communication modes for the given system.
Select a suitable cable for the transmission .
Open systems interconnection ( OSI ) model – protocols – physical standard – smart instrumentation
systems – bits, bytes and characters – communication principles – communication modes –
asynchronous systems – synchronous systems -data communication standards: standards organizations –
serial data communications interface standards – balanced and unbalanced transmission lines – RS232
interface standard – troubleshooting serial data communication circuits – test equipment – ethernet –
ethernet protocol operation – ethernet hardware requirements -cabling, electrical noise and error
detection- modem and multiplexer- industrial protocol: profibus
References 1. Steve Mackay, John Park and Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation
and Control”, Newnes Elsevier, USA, 2002.
2. TanenbaumA.S, “Computer Networks”, Fourth Edition, Prentice – Hall of India, Hyderabad,
2002.
3. William A Shay, “Understanding Data Communications and networks”, Pacific Grove, USA,
2003.
14EI3022 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To strengthen the knowledge of embedded design challenges
To understand the concept of controller using embedded
To deal with the concept of robot system
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Outcome:
Design control application using embedded system
To analyse the process using system identification technique
Design control algorithms for robust control
Characteristics of embedded computing applications – Designing an Adaptive Cruise Control System,
Embedded systems , basic concept, Introduction to embedded control system design, System
identification and model-order reduction, Classical controller design, Classical controller design,
Fundamentals of robust control, Robust controller design, Embedded safety loop development
References
1. Forrai, Alexandru Embedded Control System Design- “A Model Based Approach”, Springer
publication, 2013.
2. Adamski, Marian Andrzej, Karatkevich, Andrei, Wegrzyn, Marek (Eds.), “Design of Embedded
Control Systems”, Springer Publication, 2005.
14EI3023 ADVANCED PROCESSORS FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To learn recent trends in advanced microcontroller applications.
To learn microcontroller implementation for control applications
To understand programming with 8 and 32 bit microcontrollers.
Course Outcome:
Program microcontrollers for embedded applications.
Illustrate architecture differences and to show common characteristics.
Design the microcontroller for real time projects.
8 bit processor: 8051 architecture, Programming examples with stepper motor, dc motor, interfacing
timer with control applications, CPU Architecture of PIC microcontroller –temperature, flow process
interfacing , A/D converter, UART , 16 bit processor/32 bit processor: Introduction to 16/32 bit processor,
ARM architecture, The ARM instruction set, The thumb instruction set , programming examples with
control applications
References
1. Raj Kamal – “Microcontrollers – Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System Design”,
Pearson Education, USA, 2005.
2. SteaveFurber,” ARM system–on–chip architecture” Addison Wesley, New Delhi, 2000.
3. John.B.Peatman, “Design with PIC Micro Controller”, Pearson Education, USA, 2003.
4. Mohammad Ali Mazide, Janice GillispicMazidi, RolinD.Mckinlay, “ The 8051 micro controller
and embedded systems using assembly and C”, prentice Hall of India, Hyderabad, 2006.
5. Kenneth Ayala ,”The 8051 Microcontroller”, Thomson Delmar Learning , New Jersey, 2004.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3028 EMBEDDED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation..
• To understand the concept of signal processing
• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.
Course Outcome:
• Build simple virtual instruments
• Interface the embedded systems to real time signals
• Design embedded applications.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3029 EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To understand the current trends in automobiles
To understand basic sensor arrangement and its types
To understand the embedded processor
Course Outcome:
Implement automotive embedded systems in real time applications
Implement controllers design using recent advances like GLS, GPSS, GMS
Design various sensors for real time applications.
Current trends in Automobiles- components for electronic engine management system. Electronic
dashboard instruments, onboard diagnostic system , security and warming system- Vehicle motio control.
Sensors and actuators, and their interfacing. Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors- Electronic
ignition systems. Types of solid state ignition systems and their principleof operation. Digital engine
control system.
Distributor less ignition – Integrated engine control system, Exhaust emission control engineering.
Automotive Embedded systems. PIC, Freescale microcontroller based system. Recent advances like GLS,
GPSS, GMS
References
1. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th Edition, Butterworth
Hennimann Woburn, Sixth Edition, 2003
2. Tom Weather Jr. & Cland c. Ilunter, “ Automotive computers and control system” Prentice Hall
Inc., New Jersey.,2001
3. Robert Bosch,” Automotive Hand Book”, SAE , (5th
Edition),2000
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3030 AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce sensors in modern electronic system
To introduce the concept of intelligent transport systems
To discuss various sensors and interfacing concept
Course Outcome:
To select sensor for automobile industry
To gain in depth knowledge on the importance of various sensors in automative system
Interface various sensors in automotive electronic systems
Introduction to automotive sensors and instrumentation – sensor product selection guide- sensors and
interfacing – principles of actuation and control- sensors and interfacing techniques for Engine control,
adaptive cruise control, braking control, traction control, steering, stability, sensors for intelligent
transport systems, sensors for occupant safety.
References
1. Ronald K. Jurgeaon, “ Automotive ElectronicsHandbook, 2nd
Edition, Mc Graw-Hill,2007
2. William B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th Edition, Newnes, 2006
3. E.Q.Doeblin, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
14EI3031 AUTOMOTIVE PROTOCOLS AND TELEMATICS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To prepare the students to analyse, simulate automotive communication protocols
To introduce theoretical concepts of telematics technologies relevant to automotive applications
To introduce automotive communication protocols and diagnostics protocols.
Course Outcome:
Gain in depth knowledge on data communication and networking and applied in real time
applications.
Implement automotive communication protocols and telematics technologies.
Simulate and implement telematics in wireless technologies.
Basics of Data Communication Networks and Automotive Communication Protocols - Controller Area
Network (CAN) Protocol-CAN Higher Layer Protocols-Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Protocol-
FlexRay Protocol-Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) Protocol - In Vehicle Network Diagnostics-
Telematics basics, applications and technologies- Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Inertial
Navigation Systems (INS), Vehicle Location and Navigation, Bluetooth, UWB, RFID, Satellite
Radio(XM-Radio and SIRIUS), Fleet Management and Case Study
References
1. Aswin Goel, “Fleet Management- Real-time management and planning of commercial vehicle
operations Series”, Springer., 2008
2. Gilbert Held. “Inter- and Intra-Vehicle Communications”, CRC Press, 2007
3. Behrouz Forouzan., “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw-Hill. 2003
4. Dennis Foy. Automotive Telematics, Red Hat., 2002
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3033 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To understand bioelectric amplifiers
To discuss filter and circuits
To introduce application of signal conditioning in biomedical field
Course Outcome:
Identify the method to apply various signal conditioning circuits
Interface bioelectric signals with embedded systems
Identify the application of signal condition circuits for biomedical field.
Bioelectric amplifiers- General-purpose linear and non-linear electronic circuits typically found in
industrial applications- Instrumentation amplifiers, Transducer bridge Amplifier. Frequency and time
domain analysis of low pass, high pass, band pass, and band stop filters. Filter class- Frequency
discriminators, oscillators, multivibrators - Amplifier selection for a variety of biomedical sensors,
Wheatstone bridge design, Active filter design using standard approaches, Front-end analogue circuit
design for EMG, ECG, EEG ,Front-end analogue circuit design for limb movement sensing, Power
supply topologies for biomedical instruments
References
1. R. B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical
Instrumentation”, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 2012.
2. J. D. Bronzino, “Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, 3rd ed.,CRC Press & IEEE Press, 2006.
3. Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster,”Sensors and Signal Conditioning”, 2nd ed., Wiley
publishers, 2000.
14EI3038 PHYSIOLOGICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Prerequisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and physiology
Course Objective:
To understand the basic ideas related to modeling of physiological systems
To understand system identification techniques
To analyse physiological system in time and frequency domain
Course Outcome:
Develop mathematical model of any physiological system.
Apply system identification and optimization concepts in modeling.
Simulate the physiological system and analyse in time and frequency domain.
.
Introduction to Physiological control systems, Illustration, modeling Elements, linear models, Distributed
parameters versus lumped parameter models, principle of superposition, BioFeedback, Time and
frequency domain analysis, stability analysis of linear system, model identification of physiological
system, optimization technique, Simulation of biological systems, case studies.
References
1. Katz, A.M. “Physiology of the Heart”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, USA, 2006.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Ewart Carson, Claudio Cobelli, : “Introduction of Modeling in Physiology and
Medicine”,Academic Press, Netherland, 2008.
2. Vasilis.Z.Mararelis, “ Nonlinear Dynamic Modeling of Physiological System”,
John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey, 2004.
3. Daniel Weiner, Johan Gabrielsson, “Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic Data
Analysis: Concepts and Applications, Sweden, 2000.
4. Milsum J H, “Biological control system analysis”, Mc GrawHill, Newyark, 1966.
5. Michael.C.K.Khoo, “Physiological control systems: Analysis, Simulation and Estimation”, IEEE
Press, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. 2001.
14EI3039 MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic principle of human physiological systems.
To understand the measurement of various physiological parameters.
To understand the design principle biomedical instruments.
Course Outcome:
Suggest suitable medical instrumentation for physiological measurements.
Design instrumentation circuits for measuring new physiological parameters.
Use the knowledge of biomedical instruments to solve clinical problems.
Physiological measurements: Cell and its Electrical activity, Principle of Physiological systems:
Cardiovascular, Nervous system, Respiratory system, Vision, Muscular system-Electrodes and bioelectric
signals: Bio electrodes, ECG, EMG, EEG and EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood
flow, Blood pressure, Cardiac output, Bio–chemical measurement, Photometer.
References
1. Khandpur. R. S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2/e, New Delhi,
2003.
2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J Weibell, Erich A Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and
Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,Pearson
Education India, Delhi, 2004.
4. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design,” McGraw– Hill
Publisher, New York, 2003.
5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc,
Netherlands, 2004.
6. Arumugam, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, Anuradha Publisher, Chennai.2013.
14EI3040 BIO VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objectives:
To understand the salient features of virtual instruments.
To know about how to acquire a data and control an external measuring device by
interfacing to a computer.
To become competent in bio-signal acquisition and medical image acquisition and processing.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Outcome:
Identify salient traits of a virtual instrument and incorporate these traits in projects.
Experiment, analyze and document in the laboratory prototype measurement systems using a
computer, plug-in DAQ interfaces and bench level instruments.
Effectively use the virtual instrumentation in bio-signal processing and image processing.
Historical perspective, advantages, Architecture o f a Virtual Instrument-Graphical programming -
Development of Virtual Instrument-Software and hardware installation- Common Instrument Interfaces-
Current loop, interface buses- networking basics- Image and signal Acquisition and Processing- Motion
control-Applications of virtual instruments in Biomedical engineering.
References
1. Jerome, Jovitha, “Virtual Instrumentation and LABVIEW”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, First
Edition, 2010.
2. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata Mc
Graw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2005.
3. Ronald W. Larsen, “LabVIEW for Engineers”, Prentice Hall Ltd, USA Jan 2010.
4. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, 2005.
5. Gupta, “Virtual Instrumentation Using Lab View”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1st
Edition, 2008.
14EI3041 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To understand the need and significance of Clinical Engineering and Health Policies.
To familiarize the training strategies, quality management policies and
information technology used in health care.
To know the needs of managerial training to hospital staffs
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for standard health policies and quality management in hospitals.
Apply the knowledge of computer and information technology in health care.
Relate the training needs at various level of organization
Need and scopes of clinical engineering, Educational responsibilities-Design and layout of hospital-
National health policies, Health organization in state- Health education-Health insurance, Health
legislation-Training -Employee appraisal method-Standards, codes and quality management in health
care-regulation for mobile ICU-Maintenance of equipments-work planning-Medical records and
information management-information technology in medicine and healthcare-operations research in
hazard management.
References
1. Webster J.C. and Albert M.Cook, “Clinical Engineering Principle and Practice”, Prentice Hall
Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1979.
2. Goyal R.C., “Handbook of hospital personal management”, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.
3. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations research”, PHI learning pvt. Ltd., Newdelhi.2006.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. A.K.Malhotra,“Hospital management: An Evaluation”, Global India Publications,2009.
5. James R. Langabeer, “Health Care Operations Management: A Quantitative Approach to
Business and logistics”, Jones & Bartlett Learning, UK.2008.
14EI3042 COGNITIVE TECHNOLOGY FOR BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in biomedical field.
To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in medical diagnosis.
To introduce the concepts of genetic algorithm and its application in biomedical field.
Course Outcome:
• Develop algorithms for medical applications using neural network.
• Design suitable fuzzy logic controllers for various medical instrumentation.
• Develop algorithms using genetic algorithm to solve real world problems pertaining to
biomedical applications.
Introduction to neural networks: Introduction – Biological neurons and their artificial models, Learning,
Adaptation and neural network's learning rules, Types of neural networks, Special networks and
applications: Associative memory, BAM, Hopfield network, ART Network, SOM, Case studies,
Introduction to fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets, Fuzzy logic control: Structure of fuzzy logic controller, Case
studies, Genetic algorithm and its applications: Fundamentals of genetic algorithm, Case studies,
Optimization techniques for medical applications, Artificial intelligence, software tools.
References
1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,1999.
2. Rajasekaran S. and G.A VijayalakshmiPai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic
Algorithms, Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.
3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice –Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory – and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic
Publishers,1994.
5. Kosko, B. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.
14E3044 EMBEDDED BASED MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Pre Requisite: 14EC3076 Embedded Systems for Biomedical Instrumentation
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of embedded systems and applications to biomedical instrument
design
To introduce various software tools for embedded Systems with real time examples.
To deal with the concepts of interfacing issues with real time signals.
Course Outcome:
Design and Analyze the systems for disease diagnosis and treatment methods
Apply real time models and languages in medical image processing applications
Analyze interface issues related to embedded systems.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3045 DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Co-Requisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and Physiology
Course objectives:
To know the various methods involved in biosignal recordings and operation of patient
monitoring equipments.
To understand the working of medical therapeutic equipments.
To understand equipment used for rehabilitation.
Course outcome:
Develop measurement systems for biosignals and its signal conditioning circuits
Devise monitoring instruments and brain-computer interfacing techniques
Design and analyse assist devices for old age and gait analysis.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3046 MEDICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
• To provide knowledge of the principle of operation of radiological equipment.
• To know the working principles of radio diagnostic devices.
• To know about the hazards and safety of radiation usage in hospitals
Course Outcome:
Analyse the working principle of various imaging techniques
Compare the older technologies with newly developed techniques
Be aware of standards and safe limits of radiation exposure and control of radiation.
Generation of x – rays: principles and production of soft and hard x rays-radio diagnosis: radiography,
angiography, fluoroscopy, special radiological equipments-application of radioisotopes: alpha, beta and
gamma emission, principle of radiation detectors, nuclear angiogram- principles of radiation therapy-
Radiation safety: hazardous effect of radiation, radiation protection techniques-Safety limits, radiation
monitoring-CT-MRI.
References
1. Isaac Bankman, I. N. Bankman , Handbook of Medical Imaging: Processing and
Analysis(Biomedical Engineering), Academic Press, 2000.
2. Jacob Beutel (Editor), M. Sonka (Editor), Handbook of Medical Imaging, Volume 2.
Medical Image Processing and Analysis , SPIE Press 2000.
3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi,2003.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3048 CLINICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce various analytical instruments and methods of spectral analysis used in clinical
laboratory.
To understand the unique methods of separation of closely similar materials with
chromatography.
To introduce the important radio chemical methods of analysis and techniques in clinical
laboratory
Course Outcome:
Analyze the techniques used for characterization of materials, devices and biological molecules.
Analyze the various methods used for separation of closely similar materials using
chromatography.
Compare the important radio chemical methods of analysis.
Introduction to analytical instruments and Spectrophotometers, NMR and mass spectrometer, radiation
techniques, Automated chemical analysis system, pH meters and Chromatography, Clinical
instrumentation techniques, Electrophoresis and microscopy.
References
1. Khandpur R.S,”Handbook of Analytical Instruments”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing company
limited, 2006.
2. Mousumi Debnath, “Tools and techniques of Biotechnology”, Pointer publications, 2005.
3. John G Webster, “Medical instrumentation application and design”, John wiley & Sons (Asia)
Pvt Ltd, 3rd edition, 2004
4. Willard, H.H., Merrit L.L., Dean J.A Seattle F.L., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’,CBS
Publishing and Distribution, 1995.
5. Robert D.Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw–Hill, Singapore, 1987.
14EI3049 MEDICAL DEVICES AND SAFETY
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To provide in-depth knowledge in safety testing to reduce unacceptable errors in medical device
performance.
To understand the safe handling and operation of medical devices to avoid patient injury.
To provide adequate information on medical device standards and various regulations.
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for prevention of medical errors.
Analyze various case studies related to unsafe handling of medical devices which led to patient
injury.
Explore for reasonable, acceptable, and more effective remedies.
Reliability, safety testing, Failure assessment, Safety and risk management, Tools for risk estimation,
Safe medical devices, Handling and operation, Usability, Environmental safety , Interference with the
environment, ecological safety, Mechanical safety, Electrical Safety,
Biological aspect, Limitation-Protection, Leakage currents, Safety classe, Medical
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Standards and Regulation, six sigma standard for medical device design.
References
1. Bertil Jacobson and alan Murray, “Medical Devices Use and Safety”, Elsvier Limited,
2007.
2. Richard Fries,“Reliable Design of Medical Devices – Second Edition”, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2006.
3. Norbert Leitgeb “SafetyofElectromedicalDevicesLaw – Risks – Opportunities”,
Springer Verlog/Wein, 2010.
4. Gordon R Higson, “Medical Device Safety- The regulation of Medical Devices for
Public Health and Safety”, IOP Publishing Limited, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2002.
5. Shayne Cox Gad, “Safety Evaluation of Medical Devices” Second Edition, Marcel
Dekker Inc., 2002.
6. Basem El-Haik, Khalid S. Mekki, “Medical Device Design for Six Sigma: A Road Map
for Safety and effectiveness” John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
14EI3051 MEDICAL SENSORS AND WEARABLE DEVICES
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To provide introduction to the field of medical sensors and an indepth and quantitative view of
device design and performance analysis.
To gain overview of the current state of the art to enable continuation into advanced biosensor
work and design.
To study about the wearable sensors and smart sensors
Course Outcome:
Evaluate a sensor based on standard performance criteria and appropriateness for an
application.
Identify the key design criteria and suggest an appropriate wearable sensor approach which is
most likely to meet a specific biosensor application
Analyse the most relevant challenges facing the smart sensor research field and for a particular
challenge suggest a reasonable approach to find a solution.
Physiological Measurements: Sensors for Pressure Measurement- Sensors for Motion and Force
Measurement- Sensors for Flow Measurement -Temperature Measurement- Sensors for speed, torque,
vibration- Wearable Sensors-smart sensors.
References
1. Tatsuo Togawa, Toshiyo Tamura, P. Ake Oberg, “Bio-Medical Transducers and
Instruments”, CRC Press, USA, 2010.
2. Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay, Aime Lay Ekuakille, “Advances in biomedical sensing and
measurements”, Lecture notes in electrical engineering, Springer Verlag, Berlin, Gábor Harsányi,
“Sensors in biomedical applications: fundamentals, technology &
applications”, CRC Press, USA, 2000.
3. Joseph D. Bronzino, “The biomedical engineering handbook”, Volume 2, CRC Press,
USA, 2000.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3052 REHABILITATION ENGINEERING
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To provide knowledge about various types of assist devices and its applications.
To provide indepth understanding of the functions of assist devices
To develop new devices for rehabilitation
Course Outcome:
Appreciate and analyse the working of different assist devices.
Choose the assist device suitable for specific disorder.
Design and develop new products for rehabilitation
Rehabilitation -Prosthetic And Orthotic Devices, Types, models- Feedback in orthotic system- Material -
Auditory and speech assist devices -visual aids-Tactile devices - Muscle and nerve stimulator-Robot as
assist devices-Psychological aspects of Rehabilitation therapy- Legal aspect-case studies.
References
1. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G, “Therapeutic Medical devices”, Prentice Hall Inc.,
NewJersy, 1982.
2. Levine.S.N.Editor, Advances in Bio Medical Engineering and Medical Physics, Inter
University Publication, New York 1968.
3. Kolff W.J., Artificial Organs, John Wiley and Sons, New York,1979.
4. Andreas.F.Von racum, Hand book of bio material evalution, Mc-Millan publishers, 1980.
5. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G., “Therapeutic Medical Devices, Prentice Hall Inc.,
New Jersey, 1982
14EI3054 BIOMECHANICS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the fundamental terms and concepts of human system modelling.
To understand the anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and their use in
human well-being and overall performance.
To acquire knowledge in evaluation of physiological factors and fitness factors for vehicle
drivers.
Course Outcomes:
Analyse the concepts of human system modelling.
Analyse the biomechanical and physiological principles used in optimizing human well-being
and overall performance.
To Identify, analyze and implement solutions to a human factors problem.
Human system modeling - human control of systems, biomechanics-stress and fatigue measurements of
bones, muscles-cognitive stress-stress modeling- signal acquisition and processing-brain and computer
interface-Effects of environmental conditions –heat, stress-Human Factors Applications in medical and
industrial field-Human error- accidents analysis- human factors –case study on evaluation of the
physiological factors and fitness factors for defence vehicle driver –safety Standards.
References
1. Subrata Pal,“Text book of Biomechanics”, Viva education Private limited,NewDelhi. 2009.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
2. Karl Kroemer, Henrike Kroemer, Katrin Kroemer-Elbert, “Ergonomics” How to Design for Ease
& Efficiency, Prentice Hall International Editions, 2001.
3. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1993.
4. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003.
5. Martin Helander, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Tata Mc GrawHill, 1996.
6. Mccormic,E.J. and Sanders.M.S “Human factors in Engineering and Design”,
McGraw Hill, 1992.
7. Susan J.Hall,“Basics Bio Mechanics” 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co,Newyork, 2007.
14EI3055 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course objectives:
To know the various biopotential recordings and operating procedure of ICCU equipments.
To develop an understanding of the medical therapeutic equipment.
To learn the safety standards of the diagnostics and therapeutic equipment.
Course outcome:
Develop measurement systems for biosignals and its signal conditioning circuits
Know the safe operating procedure of Cardiac care monitoring instruments.
Get clear domain knowledge about various types of wearable and implantable devices.
Pace makers - patient monitoring system-diathermy-heart lung machine-pumps-Principle of
Hemodialysis-Wearable Artificial Kidney, Implanting Type- Respiratory aids-Breathing Apparatus
Operating Sequence-thermography- Fiber optics -Endoscopy, Laparoscopy, principles of Lithotripsy-
communication standards-wireless telemetry.
References
1. Albert M Cook and Webster J G, “Therapeutic medical devices”, Prentice Hall NewYork , 1982.
2. Heinz Kresse, “ Handbook of Electro medicine”, John Wiely & Sons, Chrchester.1985
3. Webster J.G, “Medical Instrumentation application and design”, John Wiley and sons New York
3rd
edition 1999
4. Jacobson B and Webster J G Medical and Clinical Engineering – Prentice Hall of India New
Delhi 1999
5. Leslie Cromwell , Fred J.Weibell and Erich A.Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation”,
Prentice Hall New Delhi 2000
6. Joseph J Carr and John M Brown,“Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology”,
7. Pearson Education 4th edition, New Delhi 2001.
8. Khandpur R.S “Hand Book of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill publication ,
New Delhi 2nd edition 2003
9. John Denis Enderle, Joseph D. Bronzino, Susan M. Blanchard, “Introduction to Biomedical
Engineering”, Academic Press, 2005
14EI3056 LIMB PROSTHETICS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the Basic concepts of robots and its applications to artificial limbs
To know the instrumentation involved in Robot Dynamics and Kinematics
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
To learn the applications of Robot controls
Course Outcome:
Design Robot Control System for positioning and movement
Learn the basic sensor and actuators and applications of robots.
Develop Robotic applications as assist devices for limbs.
Definition - Classification - History - Robots components - Degrees of freedom - Robot joints
coordinates - Reference frames - Workspace - Robot languages - Actuators - Sensors - Sensor
characteristics - and electric actuators - Trajectory planning- motion control - Non-linear control-Image
Processing And Vision Systems- PROSTHESIS, Introduction to Prosthesis, -Gait Analysis in Transtibial
Amputees, Prosthesis in Knee Disarticulation- Gait Analysis in Transfemoral Amputees, -Prosthesis for
Hand Amputation and Wrist Disarticulation-Recent Advances in Prosthesis -Ambulatory Aids.
References
1. Saeed B. Niku , ''Introduction to Robotics'', Pearson Education, 2002
2. K.S.Fu, Ralph Gonzalez and C.S.G.Lee, ''Robotics", TATA McGraw Hill, Aug., 2008.
3. R.D. Klafter, TA Chmielewski and Michael Negin, "Robotic Engineering, An Integrated
approach", Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
4. Millee Jorge, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”, third edition, Saunders Elsevier
publishing, , Missouri, 2013
5. Chinnathurai R, Sekar P, Kumar M Ramaa, Manoj K Nithya, Kumar C Senthil, “Short Textbook
of Prosthetics and Orthotics”, Jaypee Digital publishing, 2010.
6. Michelle Lusardi, Millee Jorge, Caroline Nielsen, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”,
Third edition, Elsevier, Saunders publishing,2012.
14E3057 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective
• To understand the concepts of Conventional and Digital Transducers
• To study the concepts of Industrial heating, Photoelectric devices and Smart Transducers
• To study the Microprocessor based instrumentation
Course Outcome
• Select the type of transducer for the Industrial application.
• Apply in case studies and mini projects in industries.
• Design the Microprocessor based Controllers.
Review of variable resistance, inductance capacitanceand piezoelectric transducers - Direct digital
transducers, Absolute and incremental displacement transducers, Moiré Fringe transducers, Force and
Pressure measurement, IC sensors - Dielectric heating, Photoelectric devices and PLC - Detection of zero
crossing of an alternating waveform, Microprocessor based: triggering of a Thyristor, Voltmeter and
Ammeter, Speed monitoring Unit, phase difference and power factor monitoring Unit, over and under
voltage protection and over current protection - Smart transducer, Measurement of flow, pH with smart
transducers.
References
1. Biswas S.N, “Industrial Electronics”, Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2008.
2. Murty.D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
3. Paul Biswanath., “Industrial Electronics & Control: Including Programmable Logic Controller”,
PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
4. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, Mc-Graw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2002.
5. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”,
PHI Learning, 5th Edition, 2009.
6. Ram. B., “Fundamentals of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers”, Dhanpat Rai (P) Ltd., New
Delhi 2008.
14EI3058 LINEAR SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To understand the state model of LTI (Linear time invariant) system.
To understand the concepts of Controllability and Observability
To provide adequate knowledge in the Lyapunov stability analysis.
Course Outcome:
Represent the given system in state space.
Design a state estimator.
Analyze the stability of a system.
State model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical - Phase and
canonical variables - Solution of state equation - State transition matrix - Transfer function from state
model - Transfer matrix - Decomposition Methods – State space representation of linear time invariant
discrete time systems - Solution of discrete time state equation. - Discretization of continuous time state
equations - Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors – diagonalization - Concepts of Controllability and
Observability - State Estimators - Lyapunov Stability Analysis of linear time invariant system.
References
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New
Delhi, 4th Edition, 2002.
2. Nagrath I.J, & Gopal M, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers
Limited, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2007
3. Nise S. Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition, 2000.
4. John J. D'Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis, “Linear Control System Analysis and Design”, CRC
Press, USA , 5th Edition,2003
5. Shankar P. Bhattacharyya, Aniruddha Datta, Lee H. Keel, “Linear Control Theory: Structure,
Robustness And Optimization” CRC Press, USA , 2009
14EI3059 TRANSDUCERS AND ACTUATORS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective
• To understand different sensor systems used for process parameters.
• To understand signal conversion and conditioning.
• To understand sensor signal transmission.
Course Outcome
• Selection of sensor based on process parameter and application.
• Interconnection of sensors with Controller.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Prevent data loss or noise during sensor signal transmission.
Electrical Transducers: Variable resistance type – Potentiometers, strain gauges, RTD, thermistors-
Variable inductance type – self and mutual inductance, pulse transducer-Variable capacitance
transducers-Special Transducers: Semiconductor temperature sensors, thermo-electric sensors,
piezoelectric sensors, smart sensors-Electromechanical Transducers: Electrodynamic, eddy current, force
balance transducers. Basics of MEMS devices-Other Transducers: Limit Switches, Proximity Switches,
Pressure, Temperature, Level, Flow, Speed-Power System Transducers: Analogue and digital transducers
for measurement of voltage, current, power factor, frequency, power – active and reactive. RTU for tariff
calculation-Analogue Signal Conditioning techniques: Bridge amplifier, carrier amplifiers, charge
amplifiers and impedance converters, modulation - demodulation, dynamic compensation, linearization,
multiplexing and demultiplexing-Signal Transmission: Transmitters, V-I, I-V and V-f converters. Single
transmission. Cable transmission of analog and digital signal, fiber optic signal transmission, radio,
telemetry, pneumatic transmission-Actuators: Solenoid Valves, Pneumatic Control Valves, Piston-
Cylinder, Motors, Contactors.
Reference Books
1. Doeblin, E.O. – Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Mc Graw Hill International,
2002
2. Patranabis, D – Sensors and Transducers, Wheeler Pub., New Delhi, 2003.
3. Murthy, D.V.S., Transducers and Instrumentation, PHI, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Newbert, H. K. – Instrument Transducers, Oxford University Press, 1999.
14EI3060 AUTOMATED TEST AND MEASUREMENT
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective
• To understand the difference between classical measurement and microprocessor based
measurement.
• To understand Real Time signals.
• To understand standard IEEE buses used for smart measurement.
Course Outcome
• Differentiate industrial instrumentation buses.
• Sensors and transducers with smart data transfer.
• Process, analyze and log the sensor values
Measurement automation, Comparison with classical measurement and microprocessor based
measurement, Measured data base and data base management, Real time signals, Calculated signals-
Digital signal processing, Processed signals, Data flow and graphical programming techniques, Virtual
instrumentation (VI), Advantages, VIs and Sub Vis-Data acquisition methods, DAQ hardware,
Instrumentation buses, IEEE 488.1 and IEEE 488.2, Serial interfacing-RS 232C, RS 422, RS 423, RS
485, CAMAC, VXI, SCXI, PXI -Industrial drives and interface, Sensors and transducers, Interfacing
signal conditioning, Signal-analysis techniques, Networking methods and their applications in
instrumentation.
References
1. N. Mathivanan, PC-based Instrumentation-Concepts and Practice, Prentice-Hall, 2007.
2. M, Chidambaram, Computer Control of Processes, CRC Press, 2002
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
3. B. G. Liptak, Instrumentation Engineers Handbook, Philadelphia: Chilton Book Company, 4th
Edition, 2003.
14EI3061 REMOTE SENSING AND CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective
• To understand methods for remote sensing.
• To understand remote control techniques and its application in Industry
Course Outcome
• Classify characteristics of objects.
• Ground data acquisition.
• Importance of remote control in Industry.
Electromagnetic radiation: Classification and nature, spectral, spatial and temporal characteristics of
objects-Atmospheric interaction sensors: Photographic, thermal, multi-spectral, passive microwave and
active microwave sensors- Ground data acquisition: Photo-interpretation, image processing techniques,
remote sensing applications-Techniques of remote control: Remote control in industry including oil
pipelines, rocket motion and satellite movements.
References
1. Gupta - Remote Sensing Ecology, 2nd edition, Springer, 2005
2. Jensen - Remote Sensing of the Environment, Pearson, 2003
3. Barett, E.C. and Curtis, L.F. Introduction To Environmental Remote Sensing, 3/e, Chapman Hall,
New York 1992.
4. Lo, C.P. Applied Remote Sensing, Wiley, New York 1986.
14EI3063 ROBOT PROGRAMMING
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective
• To understand the basics of Robot programming
• To understand the VAL language applications
• To understand the RAPID language applications
• To understand the Practical study of virtual robot software
• To understand the VAL-II and AML language
Course Outcome
Select proper safety interlock needed for robot action
Program the robot for various application specific movements
Developing robot programs in different software packages / languages
Robot programming-Introduction-Types- Flex Pendant- Lead through programming, Coordinate systems
of Robot, Robot controller- major components, functions-Wrist Mechanism-Interpolation-Interlock
commands-Operating mode of robot, Jogging-Types, Robot specifications- Motion commands, end
effectors and sensors commands-Robot Languages-Classifications, Structures- VAL language commands
motion control, hand control, program control, pick and place applications, palletizing applications using
VAL, Robot welding application using VAL program-WAIT, SIGNAL and DELAY command for
communications using simple applications-RAPID language basic commands- Motion Instructions-Pick
and place
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
operation using Industrial robot- manual mode, automatic mode, subroutine command based
programming. Movemaster command language- Introduction, syntax, simple problems-Robot cycle time
analysis-Multiple robot and machine Interference-Process chart-Simple problems-Virtual robotics, Robot
studio online software-Introduction, Jogging, components, work planning, program modules, input 13
RB-2013 SRM and output signals-Singularities-Collision detection-Repeatability measurement of robot-
Robot economics-VAL-II programming-basic commands, applications- Simple problem using conditional
statements-Simple pick and place applications-Production rate calculations using robot. AML Language-
General description, elements and functions, Statements, constants and variables-Program control
statements-Operating systems, Motion, Sensor commands-Data processing.
References
1. Deb. S. R. “Robotics technology and flexible automation”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing
company limited, 1994
2. Mikell. P. Groover, “Industrial Robotics Technology”, Programming and Applications, McGraw
Hill Co, 1995.
3. Klafter. R.D, Chmielewski.T.A. and Noggin’s., “Robot Engineering : An Integrated Approach”,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.
4. Fu. K. S., Gonzalez. R. C. & Lee C.S.G., “Robotics control, sensing, vision and intelligence”,
McGraw Hill Book co, 1987
5. Craig. J. J. “Introduction to Robotics mechanics and control”, Addison-Wesley, 1999.
6. Robotcs Lab manual, 2007.
7. www.wpi.edu
14EI3064 KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS OF ROBOT
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective
• To control both the position and orientation of the tool in the three dimensional space.
• The relationship between the joint variables and the position and the orientation of the tool.
• Planning trajectories for the tool to follow on order to perform meaningful tasks.
• To precisely control the high speed motion of the system
Course Outcome
• To control both the position and orientation of the tool in the three dimensional space.
• The relationship between the joint variables and the position and the orientation of the tool.
• Planning trajectories for the tool to follow on order to perform meaningful tasks.
• To precisely control the high speed motion of the system
Introduction, position and orientation of objects, objects coordinate frame Rotation matrix, Euler angles
Roll, pitch and yaw angles coordinate Transformations, Joint variables and position of end effector, Dot
and cross products, coordinate frames, Rotations, Homogeneous coordinates.
Direct Kinematics-Link coordinates D-H Representation, The ARM equation. Direct kinematic analysis
for Four axis, SCARA Robot and three, five and six axis Articulated Robots- The inverse kinematics
problem, General properties of solutions. Tool configuration, Inverse kinematics of four axis SCARA
robot and three and five axis, Articulated robot-Workspace Analysis, work envelope of a Four axis
SCARA robot and five axis articulated robot workspace fixtures, the pick and place operations, Joint 11
RB-2013 SRM space technique - continuous path motion, Interpolated motion, straight line motion and
Cartesian space technique in trajectory planning-Manipulator Dynamics-Lagrange's equation kinetic and
potential energy-Link inertia Tensor, link Jacobian Manipulator inertia tensor. Gravity, Generalized
forces, Lagrange-Euler Dynamic model, Dynamic model of a Two-axis planar robot, Newton Euler
formulation, Lagrange - Euler formulation, problems.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References
1. Robert J. Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics Analysis and Control, PHI Learning., 2009.
2. Richard D. Klafter, Thomas .A, Chri Elewski, Michael Negin, Robotics Engineering an
Integrated Approach, Phi Learning., 2009.
3. P.A. Janaki Raman, Robotics and Image Processing An Introduction, Tata Mc Graw Hill
Publishing company Ltd., 1995.
4. Francis N-Nagy Andras Siegler, Engineering foundation of Robotics, Prentice Hall Inc., 1987.
5. Bernard Hodges, Industrial Robotics, Second Edition, Jaico Publishing house, 1993.
6. Tsuneo Yohikwa, Foundations of Robotics Analysis and Control, MIT Press., 2003.
7. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third Edition, Pearson, 2008.
8. Bijay K. Ghosh, Ning Xi, T.J. Tarn, Control in Robtics and Automation Sensor – Based
integration, Academic Press, 1999.
14EI3065 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL
FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To introduce the concept of process instruments for various physical variables, system,
automation.
To gain knowledge of the different controllers
To learn the complex control techniques used in process industries
Course Outcome:
Apply the knowledge of Measurement to various applications.
Analyze the characteristics of Instrumentation systems.
Design controllers for a typical application
Functional Elements of an Instrument, Performance Characteristics, Static and Dynamics Characteristics,
Open loop and closed loop systems, Response of First Order and Second order system for Unit Step input,
Response of Second Order system for Unit Step Input.
Pressure measurement: Manometers, Elastic elements, McLeod gauge, Ionization gauge, Thermal
Conductivity Gauge:Pirani Gauge, Thermocouple Gauge, Temperature Measurement: Expansion
Thermometer, Filled System Thermometer, Pyrometers,Thermocouple, RTD, Thermistor, Level
Measurement: Direct methods, Radiation Level Detector, Ultrasonic Level Detector, Flow Measurement:
Turbine flowmeter, Rotameter, Electromagnetic flowmeter, Ultrasonic flowmeter, Measurement of pH ,
Viscosity, Process Automation: Process Variables– Degrees of Freedom, Control Modes: P– PI–PID –
Final Control element, Actuators, Control Valve characteristics, Control Valve types, Complex Control
Techniques: Cascade control, Ratio control, Feed forward control, Split Range Control, Inferential
Control, Case studies: Distillation column, Chemical reactor, Heat exchanger, Condenser, Evaporator
References
1. Singh. S. K., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”,2nd Edition, Tata McGraw– Hill,New
Delhi, 2004.
2. Curtis Johnson, D., “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall of
India,2006.
3. Coughanowr, and Koppel,“ Process systems analysis and control” , Tata McGraw– Hill,New
Delhi,2004.
4. Seborg. D. E., Edger. T. F, and Millichamp. D. A, “Process Dynamics and Control”,JohnWiley
and Sons, Newyork,2004.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
5. Roffle. B., Betlem. B. H. L., “Advanced Practical Control”, Springer, Newyork,2004.
6. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, NewDelhi,
14EI3066 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION LAB
Credits: 0:0:2 (Version 1.1)
Course Objective:
To learn the characteristics of sensors.
To introduce the concept of data acquisition.
To deal with experiments in data acquisition and analysis
Course Outcome:
Determine the characteristics of sensors.
Acquire real time data for analysis
Analyze acquired signals.
List of experiments
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of
HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3067 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING
Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)
Objective:
To elaborate on basic and advanced concepts of nanosensors and transducers for nanotechnology
applications.
To teach various transducers effects for the best understanding of various nanotransducers.
To elaborate on the various types of nanosensors and actuators.
Outcome:
The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of nanoelectronic devices
The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of sensors
The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of actuators
Course Description: Transducers - capacitive transducers -Acoustic wave transducers -MOS capacitor based transducers –
FET based transducers – Cantilever based transducers - Sensor Characteristics and Physical effects -
Static characteristics - Dynamic characteristic - Photoelectric effect – photodielectric effect –
Photoluminescence effect – electroluminescence effect – chemiluminescence effect –Doppler effect –
Barkhausen effect – Hal effect –Nano based Inorganic sensors - Organic /Biosensors - Signal
conditioning and data acquisition - Phase locked loop.
References 1. Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices by K.
Goser (Edition, 2004), Springer. London.
2. Nanotechnology enabled sensors by Kouroush Kalantar – Zadeh, Benjamin Fry, Springer Verlag
New York, (2007).
3. Sensors and signal conditioning, Ramon Pallas-Areny, John G. Webster John,2nd edition, Wiley
& Sons (2001).
4. S.Renganathan “Transducer Engineering” – Allied publishers Limited, 1999.
Karuny
a Univ
ersity
2016 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
5. Ernest O. Doeblin “Measurement Systems – Application & Design” McGraw – Hill Publishing
company, 1990.
6. Biosensing: International Research and Development, Jerome Schultz, Milar Mrksich, Sangeeta
N. Bhatia, David J. Brady, Antionio J. Ricco, David R. Walt, Charles L. Wilkins, Springer 2006
7. H.Rosemary Taylor, Chapman and Hal, “Data acquisition for sensor systems”, London, 2007
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
LIST OF SUBJECTS
S.No. Sub. Code Name of the Subject Credits
1 15EI2001 Health and Hospital Management 3:0:0
2 15EI2002 Medical Electronics 3:0:0
3 15EI2003 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0
4 15EI2004 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2
5 15EI2005 Biosignal Conditioning Circuits 3:0:0
6 15EI2006 Biocontrol systems 3:1:0
7 15EI2007 Medical Diagnostic Equipment 3:0:0
8 15EI2008 Biosignal Processing Laboratory 0:0:2
9 15EI2009 Intelligent Instrumentation Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
10 15EI2010 Fundamentals of Biomechanics 3:0:0
11 15EI2011 Telemedicine 3:0:0
12 15EI2012 Radiological Imaging Techniques 3:0:0
13 15EI2013 Medical Image Computing 3:0:0
14 15EI2014 Biosignal conditioning circuits Laboratory 0:0:2
15 15EI2015 Biomedical Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
16 15EI2016 Medical Therapeutic Equipment 3:0:0
17 15EI2017 Modelling of Physiological systems 3:0:0
18 15EI2018 BioVirtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
19 15EI2019 Finite Element Modelling in Biomedical Engineering 3:0:0
20 15EI2020 Ambulatory Services 3:0:0
21 15EI2021 Ergonomics in Hospitals 3:0:0
22 15EI2022 Surgical Assist Systems 3:0:0
23 15EI2023 Sensory and Motor Rehabilitation 3:0:0
24 15EI2024 Hospital Automation 3:0:0
25 15EI2025 Medical Equipment Troubleshooting and Maintenance 3:0:0
26 15EI2026 Bio Fluid and Solid Mechanics 3:0:0
27 15EI2027 Computer Application in Modelling of Physiological Systems 3:0:0
28 15EI2028 Biomedical Optics 3:0:0
29 15EI2029 Patient and Device Safety 3:0:0
30 15EI2030 ICU and Operation Theatre Equipment 3:0:0
31 15EI2031 Medical Ethics 3:0:0
32 15EI2032 Bioelectric Phenomena 3:0:0
33 15EI2033 MEMS Sensor Technology 3:0:0
34 15EI2034 Biometric systems 3:0:0
35 15EI2035 Ionizing and Non-Ionizing Radiation 3:0:0
36 15EI2036 Radiation and Nuclear Medicine 3:0:0
37 15EI2037 Intelligent Instrumentation Systems 3:0:0
38 15EI2038 Modern Automotive and Intelligent Systems 3:0:0
39 15EI2039 Automotive Control and HIL Simulation 3:0:0
40 15EI2040 Automobile Electric and Electronics Systems 3:0:0
41 15EI2041 Automotive In-Vehicle Communication System 3:0:0
42 15EI2042 Automotive Telematics and Infotainment 3:0:0
43 15EI2043 Automotive Fault Diagnostics 3:0:0
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2001 HEALTH AND HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the need and significance of clinical engineering and health policies.
To familiarize the training strategies, quality management policies and information
technology used in health care.
To know the needs of managerial training to hospital staffs.
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for standard health policies and quality management in hospitals.
Apply the knowledge of computer and information technology in health care.
Relate the training needs at various level of organization.
Health Organization of the country, National Health Policies, Health Financing System,
Organization of Technical Section. Management of Hospital Organization, Nursing section
Medical Sector, Central Services, Technical Department, Definition and Practice of Management
by Objective, Transactional Analysis Human relation in Hospital, Importance to Team Work,
Legal aspect in Hospital Management. FDA Regulation, Joint Commission Of Accreditation for
Hospitals, National Fire Protection Association, Standard, IRPC. Organizing Maintenance
Operations, Paper Work Control, Maintenance Job, Planning Maintenance Work. Measurement
and Standards, Preventive Maintenance, Maintenance Budgeting and Forecasting, Maintenance,
Training, Contract Mainframe, Function of Clinical Engineer, Role to be performed in Hospital,
Man power Market, Professional Registration, Structure in hospital.
References:
1. R.C. Goyal, “Handbook of Hospital Personal Management”, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
2. Joseph. F. Dyro, “ Clinical Engineering Management”, Academic Press Series in
Biomedical Engineering, 2004
3. Antony Kelly, “Strategic Maintenance planning”, Butterworths London, 2006.
4. Cesar A. Caceres and Albert Zara, “The Practice of Clinical Engineering”, Academic
Press, 1977.
5. Webster, J.G. and Albert M. Cook, “Clinical Engineering Principles and Practices”,
Prentice HallInc.Englewood Cliffs, 1979.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2002 MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To furnish information on the mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors.
To yield understanding about the basic operations of diode, transistor and their medical
applications.
To provide knowledge about advanced semiconductor devices and their significant
practical applications in medical field.
Course Outcome:
Apply the concepts of electronic circuits to biomedical applications.
Design practical circuits for acquisition and analysis of biomedical signals.
Build simple circuits for biomedical signal and analysis.
Overview of medical electronic equipments, transduction of bioelectric potentials, concepts of
bio-impedence. PN junction diodes-VI characteristics, rectifiers, Zener diodes, Regulators, LED,
LCD, Laser diodes, Special purpose diodes and their medical applications
BJT and its medical applications: Construction, Characteristics, Hybrid model. Transistor as
amplifier, Transistor as a switch, Opto-coupler & its medical application.
Junction field effect transistor and its medical applications: JFET, MOSFET and its
classification, Power MOSFET, MOS as a charge transferring Device – CCD, Uni-junction
transistor. Medical application of MOSFET.
Differential amplifiers: CM and DM, feedback amplifiers, Oscillators – LC, RC, crystal and their
medical application, Pulse circuits for medical devices.
References:
1. Khandpur. R. S.,“Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Second
edition, 2003.
2. Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Prentice
Hall, Sixth edition, 2009.
3. David A Bell, “Electron Devices and Circuits”, Prentice Hall Of India, Fifth edition,
2007.
4. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, First edition,
1994.
5. Thomas L. Floyd, “Electron Devices״, Charles & Messil Publications, Tenth edition
2009.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2003 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To provide introduction to the field of medical sensors and an in depth and quantitative
view of device design and performance analysis.
To provide knowledge on the principle and operation of different medical transducers.
To introduce the application of sensors and transducers in the physiological parameter
measuring system.
Course Outcome:
Identify the key design criteria and suggest an appropriate wearable sensor approach
which is most likely to meet a specific biosensor application.
Use the principle of transducers to design medical instrumentation systems.
Suggest suitable sensors for a particular application.
Study of biological sensors in the human body and their basic mechanism of action, Study of
various corpuscles like pacinian, functions and modeling, Chemoreceptor, hot and cold
receptors, baro-receptors, sensors for smell, sound, vision, osmolality and taste.
Temperature transducers, Displacement transducers, potentiometric, resistive strain gauges,
inductive displacement, capacitive displacement transducer. Pressure transducer, Blood
pressure measurement, measurement of intracranial pressure, LVDT transducers, capacitive
and piezo-electric type. Biosensors, Biocatalysts based biosensors, bio-affinity based biosensors
& microorganisms based biosensors, biologically active material and analyte. Types of
membranes used in biosensor constructions. Ion exchange membrane, electrodes, Electrolytic
sensors, optical sensor, fiber optic sensors. Biosensors in clinical chemistry, medicine and
healthcare, Commercial prospects for biomolecular computingsystems.
References:
1. Michael. R. Newman, David. G. Flemming“Physical Sensors for Biomedical
Applications”, CRC Press Inc., Florida. 2004.
2. Pearson, J.E. Gill, A., and Vadgama, P. “Analytical Aspects of Biosensors”. Ann Clin.
Biochem,2002.
3. R.S.C. Cobbold, “Transducers for Biomedical Instruments”, Prentice Hall. 2003.
4. Joseph. J. Carr, John Michael Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, Prentice Hall and Technology, 2008.
5. John. G. Webster. “Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design”.Fourth
Edition. Wiley &sons, Inc., New York. 2009.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2004 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To introduce the practical aspects of various medical transducers and their characteristics.
To impart knowledge in measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance using
bridges.
To improve the skills in calibrating analog meters.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the different biomedical transducers, their working and determination
of their characteristics.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for
the behavior.
Critically analyze any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement
methods.
Calibrate basic instruments.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval
of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2005 BIOSIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS
Pre requisite: 15EI2002 Medical Electronics
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand bioelectric amplifiers
To discuss filters and circuits
To introduce application of signal conditioning in biomedical field
Course Outcome:
Identify the method to apply various signal conditioning circuits
Interface bioelectric signals with embedded systems.
Identify the application of signal condition circuits for biomedical field.
Nature of Bio Electricity: Bioelectric Currents, Nernst Potential, Diffusion Potential, Action
potential, Detection of Bio electric events, bio-electrode and electrode-skin interface.
Operational Amplifiers and Comparators. Instrumentation and Medical Isolation Amplifiers:
Instrumentation Amplifier, Medical Isolation amplifiers.
Digital Interfaces: Analog to Digital , Digital to Analog conversion, Special analog circuits and
systems used in biomedical Instrumentation, Phase Detectors-Analog and Digital, Voltage
Controlled Oscillators, Phase locked loops.Electrical Interface problems and Safety Standards in
Bio Potential Measurements.
References:
1. Robert B. Northrop, “ Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to
Biomedical Instrumentation”, CRC Press, II Edition, New York,2004
2. Myer Kutz, “Biomedical Engineering and Design Handbook”, II Edition, Volume 1,
McGraw Hill Professional,2009
3. Robert F. Coughlin, Frederick F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated
Circuits”, Prentice-Hall, 6th
Edition,2001.
4. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifier and Analog Integrated Circuits”,
TMH, 3rd
Edition, 2002.
5. Milman & Hallkias, “Integrated Electronics-Analog and Digital Circuit”, McGraw Hill,
II Edition,2011.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2006 BIOCONTROL SYSTEMS
Pre requisite: 14MA2003 Mathematical Transforms
Credits: 3:1:0
Course Objective:
To study various
Bio control systems modeling technique.
Time response analysis and frequency response analysis.
Analyze biological control systems.
Course Outcome:
Model any physiological systems.
Perform the analysis of given system in time domain and frequency domain.
Perform Stability analysis and to design any physiological control systems.
Basic structure of control system, Positive and Negative Feedback, transfer functions, modeling
of electrical systems, block diagram and signal flow graph representation of systems, difference
between engineering and physiological control systems, generalized system properties , models
with combination of system elements.Physiological system modeling, Linear model of
respiratory mechanics, model of chemical regulation of ventilation, linear model of muscle
mechanics, model of regulation of cardiac output, model of Neuromuscular reflex motion,
Introduction to simulation. Step response of first order and second order systems, determination
of time domain specifications of first and second order systems. Definition of steady state error
constants and its computation, definition of stability, Routh-Hurwitz criteria of stability,
construction of root locus. Frequency response, Nyquist stability criterion, Nyquist plot and
determination of closed loop stability, determination of gain margin and phase margin using
Bode plot, use of Nichol’s chart to compute resonant frequency and band width.
References:
1. Michael. C. K. Khoo, “Physiological control systems”, IEEE press, Prentice –Hall of
India, 2001.
2. M. Gopal “Control Systems Principles and design”, Tata McGraw Hill ,2002
3. Benjamin C. Kuo, ”Automatic control systems”, Prentice Hall of India,7th
edition, 1995
4. John Enderle, Susan Blanchard, Joseph Bronzino “Introduction to Biomedical
Engineering” second edition, Academic Press, 2005.
5. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop,” Modern control systems”,Pearson, 2004
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2007 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT
Pre requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical sensors and Transducers
Credits: 3:0:0
Course objective:
To know the various biopotential recordings and operating procedure of ICCU
equipment.
To develop an understanding of the physiotherapy and diathermy equipment.
To learn the safety standards of the diagnostic equipment.
Course outcome:
Develop measurement systems for biosignals and its signal conditioning circuits
Know the safe operating procedure of Cardiac care monitoring instruments.
Get clear domain knowledge about various types of wearable and implantable devices.
ECG-continuous monitoring systems for pulse rate, temperature, B.P, Respiration,
Arrhythmia monitor; B.P.monitor, Blood flow and cardiac output, Measurement,
Plethysmography, Oximetry, Treadmill (StressECG). EMG, EEG, EOG, ERG. Audiometer,
Different modes and assessments.
UV, Visible and IR Spectrophotometers, Flame Photometers, Electrolyte analysis using
sensitive electrodes, pHmeter, principle and applications. Densitometer and Electrophoresis
apparatus.
Principles and applications of oil, gas and liquid chromatographs, MassSpectrometry, Flow
Cytometry, Radioimmunoassay and ELISA techniques, Blood gas analyzers, Blood cell
counters. Various types of Endoscopes, Fiber optic, Fluid optic, Integral Camera Electron
Microscope, Transmission and Reflection.
References:
1. Khandpur. R.S. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Second Edition,
McGraw Hill 2003.
2. Geddas, L.A. & Baker, L.E. “Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”.
Third Edition. John Wiley & Sons. 2008.
3. John. G. Webster. “Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design”.Fourth
Edition. Wiley &sons, Inc.,New York.2009.
4. Leslie Cromwell, Fred. J. Weibell & Erich. A. Pfeiffer. “Biomedical Instrumentation
and Measurements”. Second Edition. Prentice Hall Inc.2000.
5. Joseph. J. Carr, John Michael Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, Prentice Hall and Technology, 2008.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2008 BIOSIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EC2014 Digital Signal Processing
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To record the biosignals and analyze it.
To study the different preamplifiers used for amplifying the biosignals.
To impart knowledge about the measurements and recordings of bioelectric and biochemical
signals.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the different signal processing techniques used for analysing and
recording biosignals.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the performance of various biomedical equipments and infer their safety aspects.
Critically analyze any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement
methods.
Calibrate medical instruments.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval
of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
15EI2009 INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To impart knowledge on the integration of hardware circuits with software.
To introduce the concepts of programming in an IDE and download it into a processor.
To learn about the practical aspects of data acquisition and analysis.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the basics of sensor data acquisition and interfacing issues related to
it.
Course Outcome:
Design interfacing circuits to acquire real time data and process it using software.
Develop intelligent instrumentation systems for biomedical applications.
Use communication protocols for data transmission.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval
of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2010 FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOMECHANICS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the Fundamental terms and concepts of human factors.
To discuss anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and how they
are used to optimize human well-being and overall performance.
To Identify, Analyze, Setup and implement solutions to a human factors problem.
Course Outcomes:
Acquire biosignals and perform the quantification.
Apply biomechanical and physiological principles to optimize human well-being and
overall performance.
Analyze and implement solutions to human factors problem.
Introduction: Newton’s laws, Stress, Strain, Non Viscous fluid, Newtonian Viscous fluid, Visco
elasticity, Blood Characteristics, Mechanical Interaction of Red blood cells with solid wall,
Thrombous formation and dissolution, Medical applications of blood rheology.
Bone & its properties. Bone structure and Composition, Blood Circulation in Bone, Viscoelastic
properties of Bone, Electrical Properties of Bone, Fracture Mechanism and Crack Propagation in
bones, Kinetics and Kinematics of Joints .Cardio vascular system, Mechanical properties of
blood vessels- Arteries, Arterioles, Capillaries, Veins, Blood flow- Laminar & turbulent ,
Prosthetic Heart Valves & replacement.
Biomechanics of Spine- Structure, Movements, Loads on Spine, Exo-skeletal system for
Paraplegics, Structure of Hip- Movements, Loads on Hip, Total Hip Prosthesis , Structure of
Knee- Movements , loads on knee, Knee prosthesis , Powered wheel chair, Crutches and canes.
Human Locomotion- Gait Analysis, Foot Pressure measurements- Pedo-barograph , Mechanics
of Foot-Arthritis, Biomechanical treatment.
References:
1. Özkaya, N., Nordin, M., Goldsheyder, D., Leger, D., “Fundamentals of Biomechanics’’,
Equilibrium, Motion, and Deformation 3rd ed., Springer Science plus Business Media,
2012.
2. Duane Knudson, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics”, Second Edition, Springer Science
plus Business Media, 2007.
3. Iwan W. Griffiths, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, “Principles of Biomechanics &
Motion Analysis”, Medical publication, 2006.
4. Donald R. Peterson, Joseph D. Bronzino, “Biomechanics Principles and Applications”,
CRC Press, 2008.
5. Dhanjoo N.Ghista, “Applied Biomedical Engineering Mechanics”, CRC Press, 2008.
6. Lucas, Cooke, “A Primer of Biomechanics”, Springer –Verlag, 1999.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2011 TELEMEDICINE
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the key principles of telemedicine and health.
To understand telemedical technology.
To learn telemedical standards, mobile telemedicine and its application.
Course Outcomes:
Apply multimedia technologies in telemedicine.
Use protocols behind encryption techniques for secure transmission of data.
Apply telehealth in healthcare.
Telemedicine and Health: History and Evolution of telemedicine, Functional diagram of
telemedicine system, Ethical and legal aspects of Telemedicine – Telemedical technology:
Principles of Multimedia - PSTN, POTS, ANT, ISDN, Internet, Air/ wireless communications:
GSM satellite, and Micro wave, Modulation techniques, Types of Antenna, Satellite
communication, mobile communication. Internet technology and telemedicine using world wide
web (www). Video and audio conferencing. Clinical data – local and centralized. Telemedical
standards: Data Security and Standards: Encryption, Cryptography. Protocols: TCP/IP, ISO-OSI,
Standards to followed DICOM, HL7, H. 320 series (Video phone based ISBN) T. 120, H.324
(Video phone based PSTN), Video Conferencing, Real-time Telemedicine integrating doctors /
Hospitals, Cyber laws related to telemedicine. Mobile telemedicine and telemedical applications.
References:
1. Norris, A.C. “Essentials of Telemedicine and Telecare”, Wiley, 2002
2. Wootton, R., Craig, J., Patterson, V., “Introduction to Telemedicine. Royal Society of
Medicine” Press Ltd, Taylor & Francis 2006.
3. O'Carroll, P.W., Yasnoff, W.A., Ward, E., Ripp, L.H., Martin, E.L., “Public Health
Informatics and Information Systems”, Springer, 2003.
4. Ferrer-Roca, O., Sosa - Iudicissa, M. , Handbook of Telemedicine. IOS Press (Studies in
Health Technology and Informatics, Volume 54, 2002.
5. Simpson, W. Video over IP. A practical guide to technology and applications. Focal
Press Elsevier, 2006.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2012 RADIOLOGICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To provide knowledge of the principle of operation and design of radiological equipment.
To learn the preferred medical imaging methods for routine clinical applications.
To understand the engineering models used to describe and analyze medical image.
Course Outcomes:
Apply the tools for different problems in medical imaging.
Implement various techniques to analyze the medical images.
Suggest suitable imaging methodology for a specific ailment.
Ultrasonics- Principles of image formation, display, scanning modes, types of display. X-Ray-
principles and production of hard and soft x-rays, fluoroscopy-image intensifiers, Generations of
X-ray imaging. CT-evolution, image formation, mathematical details of algorithms used, types-
spiral, transverse. Angiography. MRI-image acquisition, density weighted images-T1 and T2,
spin-echo and spin relaxation techniques, types of pulse sequences for fast acquisition, NMR
spectroscopy. Other imaging techniques- PET,SPECT,DS Angiography, IR imaging,
Thermography-clinical application, LCD, thermography.
References:
1. John Ball and Tony Price. Chesney’s, “Radiographic Imaging”. Blackwell
Science Limited, U.K. 2006
2. Khandpur.R.S. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Second edition Tata
McGraw Hill Pub.Co.,Ltd. 2003.
3. Farr, “The Physics of Medical Imaging”.Adem Hilger, Bristol & Philadelphia, 2007.
4. Joseph Bronzino. “The Physics of Medical Imaging”.Secondedition.2005.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2013 MEDICAL IMAGE COMPUTING
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand digital image processing and reconstruction techniques.
To introduce the basic concepts and methodologies for processing the CT, MRI and
Ultrasound images.
To acquire knowledge in the basic geometric transforms used in digital image
processing.
Course Outcome:
Analyse the physiological events associated with the entire human system.
Extraction of features that helps in easy diagnosis of various arrhythmias.
Put forth new algorithms for processing the images for better results.
Elements of visual perception, Image sampling and quantization. Basic relationship between
pixels, basic geometric transformations, Introduction to Fourier Transform and DFT,
Properties of 2D Fourier Transform, FFT, Separable Image Transforms, Walsh, Hadamard,
Discrete Cosine Transform, Haar, Slant, Karhunen, Loevetransforms.
Spatial Domain methods: Basic grey level transformation, Histogram equalization, Image
subtraction, Image averaging, Spatial filtering: Smoothing, Sharpening filters, Laplacian
filters, Frequency domain filters: Smoothing, Sharpening filters, Homomorphic filtering.
Model of Image Degradation/restoration process, Noise models, Inverse filtering, Least mean
square filtering, Constrained least mean square filtering, Blind image restoration, Pseudo
inverse, Singular value decomposition. Lossless compression: Variable length coding, LZW
coding, Bit plane coding, predictive coding, DPCM. Lossy Compression: Transform coding,
Wavelet coding, Basics of Image compression standards: JPEG, MPEG, Basics of vector
quantization. Edge detection, Thresholding, Region based segmentation, Boundary
representation: chair codes, Polygonal approximation, Boundary segments, Boundary
descriptors: Simple descriptors, Fourier descriptors, Regional descriptors.
References:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education
2010.
2. William. K. Pratt,“Digital Image Processing”,John Wiley, 2001.
3. Jayaraman S, Veerakumar .T, Esakkirajan. S, “Digital Image Processing,” TataMc
Graw Hill Pub.Co. Ltd.,2009
4. Najarain Splinter, “Biomedical Signal and Image Processing”, Taylor and Francis,
2012.
5. Chanda Dutta Magundar,“Digital Image Processing and Applications”, Prentice
Hall of India,
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2014 BIOSIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 15EI2005 Biosignal Conditioning Circuits.
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To understand the design of filters and circuits for bioelectric amplifiers.
To impart knowledge of the different preamplifiers used for amplifying the biosignals.
To impart knowledge about the application of signal conditioning in biomedical field.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the filter design and circuit design for bioelectric amplifiers.
Course Outcome:
Apply and analyze the front end analogue circuit design for ECG, EMG, EEG, etc.
Identify the method to apply various signal conditioning circuits.
Identify the amplifiers for a variety of biomedical sensors.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval
of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester
15EI2015 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To record the biosignals and analyze it.
To study the different preamplifiers used for amplifying the biosignals.
To impart knowledge about the measurements and recordings of bioelectric and biochemical
signals.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the different diagnostic and therapeutic equipment, their working and
the methodologies used for analysing and recording biosignals.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the performance of various biomedical equipment and infer their safety aspects.
Critically analyze any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement
methods.
Calibrate medical instruments.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval
of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2016 MEDICAL THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENT
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To learn the principles of cardiac assist devices.
To understand the need and use of extracorporeal devices, and the use of lasers in
medicine.
To enable the students to gain knowledge on the working of therapeutic clinical
equipment.
Course Outcomes:
Suggest suitable therapeutic devices for ailments related to cardiology, pulmonology,
neurology, etc.
Analyze the different types of therapies for suitable applications.
Appreciate the application of lasers in biomedical applications.
External and implantable pacemakers, Programmable pacemakers, Cardiac Defibrillators,
Energy requirements, Implantable Defibrillators, Defibrillator analyzers. Principles of constant
pressure and constant volume ventilators, Basic principles of electromechanical, Pneumatic and
electronic ventilators, Nebulizer, Ventilator testing.
Electro diagnosis, Electrotherapy, Electrodes, Stimulators for Nerve and Muscle, Functional
Electrical Stimulation. High frequency heat therapy, Principle, Shortwave diathermy,
Microwave diathermy, Ultrasonic therapy, Lithotripsy, Therapeutic radiation, Therapeutic
UV Lamps. Basic principles of Biomedical LASERS: Applications of lasers in medicine,CO2
laser, He-Ne laser, Nd-YAG and Ruby laser.
References:
1. Khandpur. R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Second Edition.
TataMc Graw Hill Pub. Co.,Ltd. 2003.
2. John. G. Webster. “Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design”.Fourth
Edition. Wiley &sons, Inc.,New York.2009.
3. Leslie Cromwell, Fred. J. Weibell & Erich. A. Pfeiffer. “Biomedical Instrumentation
and Measurements”. Second Edition. Prentice Hall Inc.2000.
4. JohnLow & AnnReed. “Electrotherapy Explained, Principles and Practice”. Second
Edition. Butterworth Heinemann Ltd. 2000.
5. Joseph. J. Carr, John Michael Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, Prentice Hall and Technology, 2008.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2017 MODELLING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS
Prerequisite: 15EI2006 Biocontrol Systems
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the basic ideas related to modeling and different modeling techniques of
certain physiological systems.
To analyze physiological system in time and frequency domain.
To understand the physical and chemical properties of blood.
Course Outcomes:
Develop mathematical model of physiological system.
Simulate the physiological system and analyze in time and frequency domain.
Apply system identification and optimization concepts in modeling.
Systems, Analysis, examples of physiological control systems, differences between
engineering and physiological control systems. Generalized system properties, mathematical
approach, electrical analog, linear models, lung mechanics, muscle mechanics, distributed
parameter versus lumped parameter models, static analysis, regulation of cardiac output,
blood glucose regulation, chemical regulation of ventilation, electrical model of neural
control mechanism
Physical, chemical and rheological properties of blood, Dynamics of circulatory system.
Biochemistry of digestion, types of heat loss from body, models of heat transfer between
subsystem of human body like skin core, etc. and systems like within body, body environment,
Transport through cells and tubules, diffusion, facilitated diffusion and active transport, methods
of waste removal, counter current model of urine formation in nephron, Modeling
Henle’sloop. Modeling oxygen uptake by RBC and pulmonary capillaries, Mass balancing
by lungs, Gas transport mechanism of lungs, oxygen and carbondioxide transport in blood
and tissues.
References:
1. David.O.Cooney,“Biomedical Engineering Principles”.Marcel Decker Pub.Co.2000
2. Michael C.K.Khoo.”Physiological Control Systems”.Prentice Hall of India. 2000
3. John Enderly, Susan Blanchard, Joseph Bronzino.“Introduction to Biomedical
Engineering”, Second Edition, Academic Press Series in Biomedical E ngineering,
2005.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2018 BIOVIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credit 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To provide knowledge about data acquisition and control an external measuring device
by interfacing to a computer.
To familiarize in signal conditioning and various processing tools.
To become competent in designing virtual instruments for various biomedical
measurements and applications.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the various applications of virtual instruments in biomedical
engineering.
Course Outcome:
Identify salient traits of a virtual instrument and incorporate these traits in projects.
Experiment, analyze and document in the laboratory prototype measurement systems
using a computer, plug-in DAQ interfaces and bench level instruments.
Recognize the application of Vis in medical instrumentation in developing medical
instruments.
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval
of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2019 FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING IN BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To equip the students with the Finite Element Analysis fundamentals.
To enable the students to formulate the design problems into FEA.
To introduce basic aspects of finite element technology, including domain discretization,
polynomial interpolation, application of boundary conditions, assembly of global arrays,
and solution of the resulting algebraic systems.
Course Outcome:
Identify mathematical model for solution of biomedical engineering problems.
Formulate simple problems into finite elements and develop 3D models .
Use professional-level finite element software to solve problems in dynamics of blood
flow, cardiovascular system, etc.
Introduction: Basic concepts- Historical Background -finite element packages- Boundary
Value and Initial Value Problem-Weighted Residual Methods-General Procedure of FEA-
Element Types and its Characteristics-Concept of Element Assembly-Bandwidth and its effects-
Boundary conditions-Aspect Ratio- Pascal’s Triangle- Stiffness matrix -beam element-Shape
Function for Spar element, Beam element-Convergence and Continuous criteria- Structural
Problems: Equations of elasticity- plane elasticity problems - Bending of elastic plates .Heat
Transfer Problems. One Dimensional Basic equation of heat transfer derivation of finite element
equation- Fluid Mechanics Problems: incompressible fluid flow-Biomedical Applications: Case
studies: FE modeling of blood flow channel, lungs, cardiovascular system, analysis using
mechanical solver, electrical solver, electromechanical solver, Vibration analysis using software
tools.
References:
1. David.V.Hutton, “ Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill,2003.
2. Tirupathi.R.Chandrupatla, Ashok.D.Belegundu. ‘Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering’, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
3. Rao. S.S. “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Second Edition,
PergamonPress,Oxford, 2001.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2020 AMBULATORY SERVICES
Pre requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers
Credits:3:0:0
Course objectives:
to understand the need for ambulance services
to learn the wireless measuring instruments for vital parameter monitoring
to understand computer based technology in ambulatory services
Course outcomes:
Appreciate the purpose of ambulatory services to save human life.
Apply software and hardware required to develop wireless monitoring system
Design the patient transport and networked services
Patient monitoring systems- artifacts- denoising techniques- Advancements in Wireless patient
monitoring-design of ambulance- ambulance train- disaster relief squad- regulation for patient
transportation-Lift mechanism- design of mobile services- diagnostic equipments with battery
backup-mobile X-ray unit-nursing-medical gas handling-regulations-GPS in ambulance-
networked services-accident care- automated alert system- smart systems-fire protection-
maintenance and regulation- Arreditation for ambulatory services- Telehealth technology.
References:
1. David Tse and PramodViswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
2. Andreas F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications, 2nd Edition, John Wiley &sons,USA,
2010.
3. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Addison Wesley Publishers, 2000.
4. Yi-Bing Lin and ImrichChlamtac, “Wireless and Mobile Network Architecture”, John
Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2001.
5. Feher K., “Wireless Digital Communications”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1995.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2021 ERGONOMICS IN HOSPITALS
Pre requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical sensors and Transducers
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the Fundamental terms and concepts of human factors
To discuss anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and how they are
used to optimize human well-being and overall performance.
To learn signal acquisition, recording and processing of the physiological signals related
to human stress problem
Course Outcomes:
Quantify the anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles.
Apply instrumentation techniques for the disability and
Apply signal processing techniques for analysis and find solutions.
Definition, human technological system, human–machine system, manual, mechanical,
automated system, human system reliability, human system modeling, Human Output And
Control, material handling, motor skill, human control of systems, controls and data entry
devices, hand tools and devices, Workplace Design: Applied anthropometry, workspace design
and seating, design of computer worktable, case studies. Environmental Conditions Illumination,
climate, noise, motion, sound, vibration. Musculoskeletal anatomy, Quantitative models,
Measurement of muscle stress, fatigue using EMG, EEG, Modeling of pain. Human body
kinematics and Instrumentation - Instrumentation for the Measurement human body kinematics.
Case studies: computer based evaluation of recovery process caused due to limb fractures,
cognitive stress to patients.
References:
1. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003.
2. Karl Kroemer, Henrike Kroemer, Katrin Kroemer-Elbert, “Ergonomics” How to Design
for Ease & Efficiency, Prentice Hall International Editions, 2001.
3. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, NewYork,
1993.
4. Martin Helander, A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing, Tata McGrawHill, 1996.
5. Mccormic.E.J., and Sanders.M.S, “Human factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw
Hill, 1992.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2022 SURGICAL ASSIST SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course objectives:
To understand the need for assistive devices
To understand robot kinematics
To understand embedded system applications in controlling robot motion
Course Outcomes:
Write robotic equations of motion
Design path planning algorithms
Develop assist devices for surgery
Introduction to Robotics, degree of freedom, path planning, Lagrange equation of motion,
kinetics, payload sensors, actuators, gripper- lift mechanism for surgery, special lighting
controls, ventillator, heart lung machine, proximity switches, controllers, artificial intelligence,
machine vision, design of controllers based on embedded system, human machine interface, case
studies.
References:
1. Jacob Rosen, Blake Hannaford, Richard.M.Satava, “Surgical Robotics”, Systems
Applications and Visions”, Springer, 2010.
2. Farid Gharagozloo, Farzad Najam,”Robotic surgery”, McGrawHill Publishers, US,
2009.First edition.
3. Bruno Siciliano and Lorenzo Sciavicco, “Robotics: Modelling, Planning and Control,
Springer, 2010.
4. Bruno Siciliano, Oussama Khatib, “Springer Handbook of Robotics”, Springer, 2008.
5. Sebastian Thrun, Wolfram Burgard,” Probabilistic Robotics” ,Intelligent Robotics and
Autonomous Agents series, 2005
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2023 SENSORY AND MOTOR REHABILITATION
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To familiarize with the technology currently used to improve the quality of life
of individuals with disabilities.
Know new rehabilitation concepts for future development and applications.
Understand orthopedic prosthetics and orthotics in rehabilitation.
Course Outcome:
Choose the appropriate assist device suitable for specific disorder.
Develop new assist devices for the needy.
Use limb and prosthetic devices.
Rehabilitation concepts, Engineering concepts in sensory rehabilitation, motor
rehabilitation, communication disorders. Wheeled mobility, Categories of wheel chairs,
wheel chair structure & component design, Ergonomics of wheel chair propulsion, Power
wheel chair electrical system, Personal transportation.
Sensory aids for the blind, Rehabilitation of auditory disorders, treatment of hearing
impairment, Hearing aids and other assistive devices. Language disorders associated with
Dementia, assessment and treatment of Apraxia and Dysarthia.
Orthopedic prosthetics and orthotics in Rehabilitation: Fundamentals. Applications:
Computer Aided Engineering in customized component design, intelligent prosthetic knee.
A hierarchically controlled prosthetic hand, A self, aligning orthotic knee joint. Externally
powered and controlled orthotics and prosthetics. Active Above Knee Prostheses, Myo-
electric hand and arm prostheses. The MARCUS Intelligent Hand Prostheses.
Reference books:
1. Bronzino J.D., “The Biomedical Engineering handbook”. Second Edition. Vol. II,
CRC press, Bocaraton, 2000
2. Cooper Douglas, A. Hobson.” An Introduction to Rehabilitation Engineering”, CRC
Press, 2007
3. Horia, Hicholi, Teodorescu L., Lakme C Jain.”Intelligent Systems and
4. Technologies in Rehabilitation Engineering”. First Edition. CRC Press. 2000
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2024 HOSPITAL AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives
To know the need for acquisition and processing of multiple data types
To learn about power generation, utility and protection system
To know about distributed and central monitoring functions
Course outcomes:
Apply the data processing techniques and digital storage and transmit data
Analyse the need of power generator, its maintenance and energy conservation, fire
protection in hospitals
Use digital computer for central monitoring of parameters
Medical data handling and automation-RFID in record retrival-surveillance system in hospital-
building automation-power generator, maintenance, battery-maintenance and troubleshooting,
energy conservation-Medical gas production and automation-boiler, blower, compressor, air
conditioning, lighting, heating systems, piping, leakage test- fire prevention and safety
automation-control room, limit switches, sensors, controllers, alarm system –regulation and
standards.
References:
1. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2003.
2. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,
Pearson Education India, Delhi, 2008.
3. Curtis Johnson, D., “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall of
India,2006.
4. John V. Grimaldi and Rollin H. Simonds., Safety Management, All India Travelers Book
seller, New Delhi, 1989.
5. N.V. Krishnan, Safety in Industry, JaicoPublishery House, 1996.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2025 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Pre requisite: 15EI2002 Medical Electronics
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To know about power supply operation and troubleshooting
To design electrical equipments with safety standards
To know the principle of medical equipments.
Course Outcomes:
Identify the reasons for equipment failure.
Appreciate the need for grounding aspects , maintenance and troubleshooting.
Design advanced equipments to solve critical problems.
AC, DC power supply, Grounding, shielding, Guarding, insulation testing, insulation resistance
measurement, Testing of electronic components, Troubleshooting of PCB boards, Calibration of
analog and digital sensor probe, Display interface, Safe electrical practice, Cables and standard,
Fuse, Transformer testing, CT and PT, Panel wiring, Troubleshooting of X-ray machines,
Troubleshooting of ECG recorders, ultrasound machine, patient monitor, ventilator, dialyser,
heart lung machine, surgical lights, incubator, baby warmer, infusion pumps, annual
maintenance, contract requirements, vendor services, quality and safety standards.
References:
1. Medical Equipment Maintenance Manuel, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New
Delhi, 2010.
2. Shakti Chatterjee,Aubert Miller, “Biomedical Equipment Repair”, Cengage Learning
Technology & Engineering, 2010.
3. David Herres, “Troubleshooting and Repairing Commercial Electrical Equipment”,
McGrawHill, Professional edition, 2013.
4. L.Nokes.B.Turton, D.Jennings, T. Flint,”Introduction to Medical Electronics
Applications”, A Butterworth Heinemann Title. 1995
5. Joseph F. Dyro, “Clinical engineering handbook, Elsevier Academic Press, 2004.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2026 BIOFLUID AND SOLID MECHANICS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To learn the laws governing the mechanics & materials used in medicine.
To introduce the mechanics involved in the blood flow to various vessels and valves.
To study the breathing mechanism, airway resistance and lung diseases.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the problems in physiological systems and relate to its characteristic
phenomenon
Apply the mechanical principles in acquiring data, transduction and useful
representation for clinical diagnosis.
Identify the mechanical properties of the human body
Mechanical Properties of Materials used in Medicine, Newton’s laws, stress, strain, elasticity,
viscoelasticity, Tissue Reactions and Blood Compatibility. Biofluid Mechanics:Hook’s law,
Newtonian Fluid, Non Newtonian fluid , Biomechanics of Degenerative Disorders, Hematology
& Blood Rheology, Relationship between diameter, Instrumentation for velocity & pressure of
blood flow, Cardiac And Respiratory Mechanics: Mechanical properties of blood vessels,
Instrumentation for respiratory mechanics. Soft Tissue Mechanics, Orthopedic mechanics,
Mechanical properties of cartilages, Mechanical properties of bone, Bio mechanics in
orthopedics: Prosthetic design, GAIT, goniometer, accelerometer, sensors and instrumentation
techniques for orthopedic mechanics, evaluation and design of manual activities in various
occupations.
References:
1. Fung .Y. C., “Biomechanics: Mechanical properties of living tissues”, Springer-Verlag,
2nd Edition,2004.
2. NihatOzkaya, Margareta Nordin, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics: Equilibrium, Motion,
and Deformation”, Springer, 3rd Edition, Verlag, 2012.
3. Duane Knudson, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics”, Springer, 2nd Edition, US, 2007.
4. Sahay and Saxena, “Biomechanics", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998.
5. J.B.Park, “Bio-materials - Science and Engineering”, Plenum Press, New York, 1984.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2027 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN MODELLING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL
SYSTEM
Pre requisite: 15EI2017 Modeling of physiological systems
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To understand the modeling of physiological system
To know the simulation tools and techniques
To use software tools for simulation and analysis
Course Outcomes:
To learn the modeling tools in softwares
To analyse the characteristics of physiological system
To develop graphic user interface which helps as a tool for diagnosis.
Modeling of physiological system, electrical equivalent network-simulation, modeling of fluid
flow characteristics of cardiovascular system – simulation, microsensor design and analysis,
modeling and simulation of cardiac system, glucose regulation system, modeling and simulation
of anesthesia, modeling of bones using finite element techniques and analysis.
References:
1. Myer Kutz, “Biomedical engineering and design Hand book”, CRC press, UK, 2004.
2. Sanjay Gupta, Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw
Hill publishing, New Delhi, 2005.
3. MiChael.C.Khoo, “Physiological control systems -Analysis, simulation and
estimation”,Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2001.
4. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2010.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2028 BIOMEDICAL OPTICS
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To offer clear understanding of tissue characteristics when it is exposed to optical energy.
To know about various optical sources and applications of lasers.
To learn about Holography and its medical applications.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the optical properties of tissues and light interactions with tissues.
Use optical sources for instrumentation and measurement.
Apply photo dynamic therapy and optical holography for biomedical applications.
Optical properties of the tissues: Refraction, Scattering, absorption, light transport inside the
tissue, tissue properties, Light interaction with tissues, optothermal interaction, fluorescence,
speckles.
Instrumentation for absorption, scattering and emission measurements, excitation light sources –
high pressure arc lamp, solid state LEDs, LASERs, optical filters, polarisers, solid state
detectors, time resolved and phase, resolved detectors, Laser in tissue welding, lasers in
dermatology, lasers in ophthalmology, otolaryngology, urology. Wave fronts, Interference
patterns, principle of hologram, optical hologram, applications, Near field imaging of biological
structures, in vitro clinical diagnostic, fluorescent spectroscopy, photo dynamic therapy.
References:
1. Tuan Vo Dirh, Biomedical photonics – Handbook , CRC Press, Bocaraton, 2003.
2. Leon Goldman, M.D., &R.James Rockwell, Jr., Lasers in Medicine , Gordon and
Breach, SciencePublishers Inc., New York, 1971.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2029 PATIENT AND DEVICE SAFETY
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To provide a source of useful ideas, concepts, and techniques that could be selectively
applied to reduce an intolerable rate of unacceptable errors, mistakes, goofs, or
shortcomings in expected Medical Device performance.
To avoid patient injury, achieving efficacious treatment, and controlling health care costs.
Medical error has proved to be a difficult and recalcitrant phenomenon.
Course Outcome:
Develop medical equipment that conforms to safety standards.
Suggest reasonable, acceptable, and more effective remedies and countermeasures in
medical device errors.
Apply appropriate safety regulations to medical devices.
Reliability, Types of reliability, The concept of failure, Causes of failure, Types of Failures in
Medical devices, Safety testing, Failure assessment and Documentation, Visual inspection:
External & Internal visual inspection. Measurement, Safety parameters, Safety and risk
management, Manufacturer’s and physician’s responsibilities. Safe medical devices, operation –
Medical Application safety. Environmental safety, Interference with the environment,
Ecological safety. Electrical Safety, Limitation of Voltages ,Macroshock and Microshock, Earth
and Protection, Leakage currents, Magnetic fields and compatibility.
Medical Standards and Regulations – Device classification – Registration and listing –
Declaration of conformance to a recognized standard – Investigational Device Exemptions
(IDEs) – Institutional Review Boards (IRBs) – IDE format – Good laboratory practices (GLPs) –
Good manufacturing practices (GMPs) – Human factors – Design control – The Medical Devices
Directives (MDD) – Definition, Process and choosing the appropriate directive –
Active Implantable Medical Devices Directive (AIMDD) – In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices
Directive (IVDMDD).
References:
1. Bertil Jacobson and Alan Murray, “Medical Devices Use and Safety”, Elsvier
Limited,2007.
2. Richard Fries,“Reliable Design of Medical Devices – Second Edition”, CRC
Press,Taylor& Francis Group, 2006.
3. Norbert Leitgeb “SafetyofElectromedicalDevicesLaw – Risks –
Opportunities”,SpringerVerlog/Wein, 2010.
4. Gordon R Higson, “Medical Device Safety – The regulation of Medical Devices
forPublic Health and Safety”, IOP Publishing Limited, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2002.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2030 ICU AND OPERATION THEATRE EQUIPMENT
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To offer clear understanding of various intensive care equipment and their working.
To understand the necessity of different operation theatre equipment.
To know about different dialyzers and ventilators.
Course Outcome:
Apply the knowledge acquired, in designing new monitoring devices for ICU.
Suggest suitable surgical instruments and operational devices.
Assist the medical personnel’s during emergency situations in the ICU.
Suction apparatus,Different types;Sterilizers, Chemical, Radiation, Steam for small and larger
units. Automated drug delivery systems, Infusion pumps, closed loop control infusion system,
implantable infusion system. Hemodialysis Machine, Differen ttypesof Dialyzers,
Membranes, Machine controls and measurements. Heart Lung Machine, different types of
oxygenators, peristaltic pumps, Incubators.
OperationTheatreEquipment: Surgical diathermy, Instruments for operation. Anesthesia
Equipment, Humidification, Sterilization aspects, Boyles apparatus. Centralized Oxygen,
Nitrogen, Air supply & Suction. Centralized Air Conditioning, Operation Theatre table &
Lighting. Patient electrical safety, Types of hazards,Natural protective mechanisms against
electricity, Leakage current, Inspection of grounding and patient isolation, Hazards in
operation rooms, ICCU and IMCUs, Optocouplers and Pulse transformers.
References:
1. Khandpur,R.S,”Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation ”,Second Edition. Tata Mc
Graw Hill Pub. Co., Ltd. 2003
2. John, G. Webster. Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design. Second Edition.
John Wiley & sons, Inc., NewYork. 2008.
3. Joseph Dubovy, Introduction to Biomedical.Mc Graw Hill Co.1978
4. Terry Bahil.A, Biomedical and Clinical Engineering. Prentice Hall Inc.1981
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2031 MEDICAL ETHICS
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
Achieve familiarity with some basic ethical framework & understand how these ethical
frame works can help us to think through contemporary questions in medical ethics.
To know about the legal and ethical principles and application of these in medical field.
Gain knowledge about the medical standards that to be followed in hospitals.
Course Outcome:
Apply the moral values and ethics in their work environment
Maintain the confidentiality issues in medical practice.
Suggest standards that are patient centered.
Introduction to medical ethics: Definition of Medical ethics, Scope of ethics in medicine,
American medical Association code of ethics, CMA code of ethics- Fundamental
Responsibilities, The Doctor and the Patient, The Doctor and the Profession, Professional
Independence, The Doctor and Society. Ethical theories & moral principles: Theories-
Deontology& Utilitarianism, Casuist theory, Virtue theory, The Right Theory. Principles - Non-
Maleficence, Beneficence, Autonomy, Veracity, Justice. Autonomy & Confidentiality issues in
medical practice, Ethical Issues in biomedical research, Bioethical issues in Human Genetics &
Reproductive Medicine. Hospital accreditation standards, Accrediation- JCI Accreditation & its
Policies. Patient centered standards, Healthcare Organization management standards. Hospital
safety standards: Life Safety Standards- Protecting Occupants, Protecting the Hospital From
Fire, Smoke, and Heat, Protecting Individuals From Fire and Smoke, Providing and Maintaining
Fire Alarm Systems, Systems for Extinguishing Fires Environment of Care Standards-
Minimizing EC Risks, Smoking Prohibitions, Managing Hazardous Material and Waste,
Maintaining Fire Safety Equipment, Features, Testing, Maintaining, and Inspecting Medical
Equipment.
References:
1. Domiel A Vallero “Biomedical Ethics for Engineers”, Elsevier Pub.1st edition, 2007
2. Biomedical Ethics: A Canadian Focus. Johnna Fisher (ed.), Oxford University Press
Canada, 2009
3. Robert M Veatch” Basics of Bio Ethics”, Second Edition. Prentice- Hall,Inc. 2003
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2032 BIOELECTRIC PHENOMENA
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To offer clear understanding of ionic activity in cells and generation of action potential.
To know about generation and conduction of cardiac, nervous and muscular action
potentials.
To impart knowledge on the measurement and recording of the various biopotentials.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the ionic activity in cells and generation of action potential.
Interpret the cardiac, nervous and muscular action potentials for diagnostic purpose.
Measure and record the various bio potentials.
Cell membrane: Structure, Excitable cells, Nernst potential, Resting membrane potential,
Polarized state, Goldman Hodgkin Katz equation, Action potential , Propagation of nerve
impulses, Refractory period, Hodgkin Huxley model of squid gait axon membranes, Modes of
transport of substances across the cell membranes. Electrical activity of the heart: Cardiac
muscle, Action potentials in cardiac muscle, SA node, Origin and propagation of rhythmical
excitation & contraction, refractoriness, regular and ectopic pace makers, Electrocardiogram,
Arrhythmias, Electrical activity of brain – Sleep stages, Brain waves, waveforms &
measurements, 10-20 electrode system , Evoked potentials , Magneto encephalogram,
Electrogastrogram, Electroretinogram, Electroocculogram. Electrical activity of muscles –
neuromuscular junction, synaptic potentials, motor unit, motor unit action potentials,
Electromyogram ,Electrodes for measurement of biopotentials, electrode tissue interfaces ,
Polarizable and non polarizable electrodes , skin contact impedance. Electroneurogram – nerve
conduction studies.
References:
1. Arthur C. Guyton : Textbook of Medical Physiology, Prism Books (Pvt) Ltd & W.B.
Saunders Company, 12th
edition, 2012
2. D.J. Aidley: The Physiology of Excitable cells, 3rd Ed., Cambridge University Press, 4th
edition, 1998
3. John G. Webster: Medical Instrumentation - Application and Design; Houghton Mifflin
Co., Boston, 3rd
edition, 2009.
4. Richard Aston: Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement, Merril
Publishing Co., Columbus, 1st edition, 1990.
5. Khandpur R S: Handbook of Medical Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi.2004.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2033 MEMS SENSOR TECHNOLOGY
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the theories and concepts of microelectromechanical systems.
To know about the materials used and the manufacture of MEMS
To impart knowledge on the various types of Microsystems and their applications in
medical field.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the theories and concepts of micro electro mechanical systems.
Apply the fundamentals in the manufacture of MEMS
Analyze the various types of Microsystems and their applications in medical field.
Introduction to MEMS: Historical Background, Smart Materials and Structures. Microsystems
and their advantages. Materials used. Technology involved in MEMS. General applications in
Aerospace, automotive industry and health care. Market size and world scenario.
Micro machining technology: lithography, etching, ion implantation, wafer bonding,
integrated processing, bulk micromachining, surface micro, machining, coating technology
and CVD, LIGA process. Principles of Microsystems: general principles, micro sensors,
pressure sensors, actuators, electrostatic forces, piezo-electric crystals, intelligent materials
and structures. MEMS applications in medicine (BIOMEMS): special features/requirements
for medical application. Current scenario of MEMS for health care. Drug delivery system
and MEMS. Application models, blood pressure sensors, biochip, micro needles,
microelectrodes, neural prosthesis, and catheter end sensors.
Introduction to Nanotechnology: Nano materials, Nano materials fabrication by bottom, up and
Top down approaches, Classification of Nano devices based on the characteristics, Medical
use of Nano materials.
Reference books: 1. Sergey Edward Lysherski.Nano and Micro-electromechanical systems. Second
Edition. CRC Press. 2005
2. WanjunWang, StevenA. Soper, Bio MEMS Technologies and Applications. CRC
Press. 2006
3. N.P.Mahalik, Micro manufacturing & Nanotechnology. Springer. 2006
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2034 BIOMETRIC SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of fingerprint, iris, face and speech recognition.
To impart knowledge on the general principles of design of biometric systems and the
underlying trade-offs
To render knowledge on personal privacy and security implications of biometrics based
identification technology and the issues realized
Course Outcome:
Apply the technologies of fingerprint, iris, face and speech recognition.
Analyze the general principles of design of biometric systems and the underlying trade-
offs.
Inculcate knowledge on personal privacy and security implications of biometrics based
identification technology and the issues involved.
Introduction and back ground, Biometric technologies, Biometric systems, Enrollment,
templates, verification, Biometric applications, biometric characteristics, Authentication
technologies -Need , Protecting privacy and biometrics and policy.
Fingerprint pattern recognition, modeling of fingerprint images, fingerprint classification,
fingerprint matching. Introduction to face recognition, Neural networks for face recognition,
face recognition from correspondence maps, Hand geometry, scanning, Feature Extraction -
Adaptive Classifiers - Visual-Based Feature Extraction and Pattern Classification, Biometric
fusion. Voice Scan, physiological biometrics, Behavioral Biometrics, Introduction to multimodal
biometric system, Integration strategies, Architecture, level of fusion, combination strategy,
training and adaptability, examples of multimodal biometric systems, Performance evaluation-
Statistical Measures of Biometrics ,Memory requirement and allocation.
Introduction - Biometric Authentication Methods, Biometric Authentication Systems, Support
Vector Machines. Securing and trusting a biometric transaction, matching location, local host -
authentication server, match on card (MOC), Multi biometrics and Two-Factor Authentication.
References:
1. James Wayman, Anil Jain, DavideMaltoni, Dario Maio, “Biometric Systems, Technology
Design and Performance Evaluation”, Springer, 2005
2. S.Y. Kung, S.H. Lin, M.W.Mak, “Biometric Authentication: A Machine Learning
Approach” Prentice Hall, 2005
3. Paul Reid, “Biometrics for Network Security”, Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Nalini K Ratha, Ruud Bolle, “Automatic fingerprint Recognition System”, Springer,
2003
5. L C Jain, I Hayashi, S B Lee, U Halici, “Intelligent Biometric Techniques in Fingerprint
and Face Recognition” CRC Press, 1999.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2035 IONIZING AND NON-IONIZING RADIATION
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To expose the student to the use of ionizing radition and its biological effects in the
medical field.
To know about the use of ionizing radiation in medical and industrial applications.
To understand the biological effects of low and high doses of ionizing radiation.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the effect of radiation at cellular level.
Analyze the effect of microwave on human organs and systems.
Suggest suitable diagnostic and therapeutic devices to prevent unnecessary effects due to
radiations.
Action of radiation in living cells: Various theories related to radiation at cellular level. Dna and
chromosomal damages. Somatic application of radiation. Radio sensitivity protocols of different
tissues of human. Ld50/30 effective radiation on skin, bone marrow, Eye, endocrine glands, and
basis of radio therapy. Genetic effects of radiation: Threshold and linear dose, gene control
hereditary diseases effect of dose. Effect of microwave: Effects on various human organs and
systems. Wavelength in tissue, non thermal interaction. Standards of Protection, national and
international standards and precautions. UV radiation, Classification of sources, measurement,
photo medicine, uv radiation safety visible and infrared radiation.
References:
1. Mary Alice S, Paula J Visconti, E Russell Ritenour, Kelli Haynes,” Radiation Protection
In medical Radiography,”Elsevier Health Sciences,2014
2. Glasser O.,”Medical Physics”, Volume I,II,III, The year book publishers inc, chicago
1980.
3. Moselly H., “Non ionizing radiation”, Adam-hilgar, Bristol 1988.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2036 RADIATION AND NUCLEAR MEDICINE
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic principles radiology, computer tomography and nuclear medicine.
To impart knowledge on radioactivity, radiation measurement techniques and detectors
To render knowledge on phototherapy, radioisotopes,application areas and hazards of
radiation
Course Outcome:
Analyze the basic principles radiology, computer tomography and nuclear medicine.
Apply the knowledge acquired on radioactivity, radiation measurement techniques and
detectors.
Inculcate knowledge on phototherapy, radioisotopes, application areas and hazards of
radiation.
X-Ray spectrum, Production of X-rays, Modern X-ray tubes, Quality of X-rays, Photographic
effects on X-ray films, Fluorescent and Intensifying screen, Scattered rays, Use of filters, HVL,
Collimators, Cones, Bucky Grids, Fluoroscopy, Image intensifier, Digital Radiography,
Computed Tomography(CT). Basic characteristics and units of radioactivity, Ionization
chamber, GM tubes, Gas filled detectors, scintillation detectors, semiconductor detectors,
Liquid scintillation counter, Statistical aspects of nuclear medicine.
Rectilinear scanners, Scintillation Camera, principle of operation, collimator, photo multiplier
tube, Pulse height Analyzer, computerized multi crystal Gamma camera, Principles of PET
and SPECT. Principles of Radiation Therapy, Radio therapy treatment planning Dose in
Radiotherapy, Mega voltage therapy, Intensity modulated Radiation therapy, Brachy-therapy,
Radiotherapy using radio isotopes. Radiation sensitivity of biological materials, Evidence on
radiobiological damage from cell survival curve, Radiation effects on humans, Maximum
permissible dose equivalent limits, Hazard from ingested radioactivity, substances, ICRP
regulations, Quality factor and sievert, Principles of radiological protection, personnel
dosimetry.
References:
1. Dendy,P.P & Heaton. B, Physics for Radiologists. Third Edition. Charles C.Thomas
Publisher S.A., 2000
2. .Khan,F.M, Physics for Radiation Therapy, Williams & Wilkins. 2009
3. Gopal B.Saha, Physics and Radiation biology of Nuclear Medicine. 2006
4. Penelope J. Allisy, Roberts Obefipsm. Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging, Ferry
Williams.2007
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2037 INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic principles of embedded systems.
To impart knowledge on the design of embedded systems, memory requirements and
interfacing.
To render knowledge on real time operating systems and software development tools.
Course Outcome:
Design interfacing circuits to acquire real time data and process it using software.
Develop intelligent instrumentation systems for biomedical applications.
Use communication protocols for data transmission.
Concept of embedded systems design, Embedded microcontroller cores, embedded memories,
Examples of embedded system, Design challenges in embedded system Design.
Serial data communication, Microcomputer based control systems.
Issues in sensor interfacing, Interfacing Keyboard displays, signal conditioning, interfacing with
external systems, user interfacing, ADC, DAC, relay, optoisolator, LEDs. Process parameter
measurement system. (DAQ), Digital Weighing machine, Embedded Implementation of
temperature controller, Speed control of DC motor. Frequency counter. Stepper motor control.
Introduction to real time operating systems: Tasks and task states, tasks and data, semaphores
and shared data, message queues, mailboxes and pipes, timer functions, Events, memory
management, Interrupt routines in an RTOS environment. Emulator, Simulators, Host and
target machines, Linkers/locators for embedded software, getting embedded software into the
target system and testing on host machine.
References:
1. A.Rajkamal, “Embedded systems, Architecture, Programming and design”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 2008
2. David.E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer. Addison Wesley, New Delhi. 2001
3. Micheal Predko, Myke Predko, PIC Microcontroller Pocket Reference. McGraw Hill,
NewDelhi. 2000
4. WayneWolf. Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computer System
Design. Morgan Kaufman. 2004
5. John.B. Peatman, Design with PIC Microcontrollers. Prentice Hall, NewDelhi.2006
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2038 MODERN AUTOMOTIVE AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the basic knowledge about the Automotive Industry.
To understand the fundamentals of Modern automotive systems.
To understand the fundamentals of safety systems.
Course Outcome:
Identifying the challenges of electronics in modern automobile.
Gaining fundamental knowledge about the physical system.
Explore potential new functions and applications.
Description
Vehicle classifications, Modern automotive systems , need and application areas for electronics
in automobiles, Sensors and actuators, Possibilities and challenges in automotive industry,
Enabling technologies and industry trends-Ignition systems , Fuel delivery system and control,
Engine control functions, modes and diagnostics. Transmission fundamentals, Types,
Components, Electronic transmission control-Shift point control, Lockup control/torque
converter clutch, Engine torque control during shifting, Safety and diagnostic functions,
Improvement of shift quality Vehicle braking fundamentals and its dynamics during braking,
Brake system components, Antilock braking systems, Components and control logic, Electronic
stability, Steering system basics, Fundamentals of electronically controlled power steering: type,
Electronically controlled hydraulic system, Electric power steering Active Passive and
Functional Safety.
References:
1. William Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics: An Engineering erspective”,
Butterworth-Heinemann, Elsevier Incorporation, Massachusetts, 7th Edition, 2012.
2. Tom Denton “Automotive Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Butterworth-Heinemann,
Elsevier Incorporation,2009.
3. Jack Erjavec, “Automotive Technology- A System Approach”, Thomas Delmar
Learning, New York, 3rd Edition, 2004.
4. Ronald K. Jurgrn, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Incorporation,
New York, 2nd Edition, 2007.
5. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics”, Robert Bosch, Germany, 3rd
Edition, 1999.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2039 AUTOMOTIVE CONTROL AND HIL SIMULATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand need for simulation and co-simulation
To understand the Real time prototyping
To understand the concept of SIL, MIL and HIL
Course Outcome:
Ability to work with integrated platforms
Ability to generate model based codes
Skills to develop and validate the controller
Description:
Model Based system design, HIL simulation, need Basics of continuous and discrete simulation,
modelling basics. Connection between Hardware and Simulation, Event Discrete simulation. xPc
target, Real Time Workshops, state flow and Real Time Embedded coder. Using Simulink: for
plant model, controller (PID) designs for an automotive application. Analog output, targeting a
processor for plant. System modelling and validation using test setup. Interfacing of software
models with hardware design. System programming and development of experimental setup for
hardware in loop simulation. HIL: Separate and In the loop testing of plant and controller system
verification and Validation: Comparing the HIL test results with real world result, Hardware in-
the-loop testing.
References:
1. Christain Kohler, “Enhancing Embedded systems Simulation: A Chip-Hardware-in-the-
Loop Simulation Framework”, Viewe+Teubner Verlag/Springer, Germany, 1st edition,
2011.
2. Gaberial Nicolescu, Pieter J. Mosterman, “Model-Based Design For Embedded
Systems”, CRC Press, Boca Raton,2010
3. Fabio Patern, “Model -based Design and Evaluation of Interaction Applications”,
Springer-Verlag, Germany, 2000.
4. Mathworks Courseware, “InTroducing to Model-Based System Design”
5. Mathworks Courseware, “Advanced Model-Based System Design”
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2040 AUTOMOBILE ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the automotive electrical and electronics systems
To understand the design aspect with respect to EMI/EMC
To understand the safety constrains associated with electrical systems
Course Outcome:
Gain fundamental knowledge about the physical system
Ability to develop integrated control system
Explore potential new functions and applications
Description:
Electrical systems and circuits, EMI/EMC, Earthing , Positive and negative Relays, Charging
systems, Starting systems, Ignition systems, Electronic Ignition system, Electronic fuel control,
Interior and Exterior lighting Windscreen washers and wipers, Horns ,Chassis electrical systems
comfort and safety ,Seats ,mirrors and sun-roofs, Central locking and electric windows, Cruise
control, In-car multimedia, Security, Airbags and belt tensioners, Other safety and comfort
systems, Diagnosing comfort and safety system faults, Active Passive and Functional Safety,
Advanced comfort and safety systems technology, New developments in comfort and safety
systems
References:
1. James D. Haldermen, ”Automotive Electricity and Electronics”, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey,4th
Edition,2013
2. Tom Denton, ”Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Elsevier Butterworth-
Heinemann, Oxford, 3rd
Edition, 2004.
3. Robert Bosch GmBH , ”Bosch Automotive Hand Book”, Bentley publishers, 8th Edition,
Cambridge, 2011
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2041 AUTOMOTIVE IN-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the need for in vehicle communication.
To analyze automotive communication protocols.
To understand the automotive standards for communication.
Course Outcome:
Depth knowledge on data communication and networking.
Ability to select the suitable protocol for an application.
Ability to integrate different communication platforms.
Needs and benefits of IVN, Classes of IVN Protocols, Multiplexed electrical systems, Vehicle
multiplexing, Bitwise contention, Network elasticity, Error processing and management.
Overview of the automotive communication protocols: TCP/IP, CAN, LIN, Flexray, MOST:
Features, Specifications, baud rate, timing, synchronizing, error detection and correction
mechanisms, frames, standards, advantages and limitation. Cross protocol compatibility, gateway
ECU, Comparison of different IVN protocols.
References:
1. Gilbert Held, “Inter and Intra Vehicle Communications”, Auerbach Publications,
CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2007.
2. Behrouz Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw-Hill Limited,
NewYork, 4th
Edition, 2006
3. Ronald K. Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw-Hill Incorporation,
NewYork, 1999
4. Marc Emmelmman, Brend Bochow, Christopher Kellum, “Vehicular Networking :
Automotive Applications and Beyond”, John Wley & Sons, 2010
5. Robert Bosch, “Bosch Automotive Networking: Expert know-how on Automotive
Technology”, Bently Publishers, Cambridge, 2007
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2042 AUTOMOTIVE TELEMATICS AND INFOTAINMENT
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To understand the role of Telematics and Infotainment
• To understand the role of electronics in driver assistant system
• To understand the role of inter vehicle communication
Course Outcome:
• Depth knowledge about different assistive system
• Ability to explore new infotainment system
• Ability to develop fleet management system
Description:
Driver Assistance Systems: driver support systems, Vehicle support systems, Safety Systems:
Anti - spin regulation, traction control systems Security Systems: Anti-theft technologies, smart
card system, number plate coding. Comfort Systems Adaptive cruise control, adaptive noise
control, active roll control system, cylinder cut- off technology. Telematics basics, applications
and technologies: HUD, Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Inertial Navigation Systems (INS),
Vehicle Location and Navigation, Bluetooth, UWB, RFID, Intelligent Transportation Systems
(ITS) and Wireless Access in Vehicular Environments (WAVE), Communications, Air-interface,
Long and Medium range (CALM), Real-time management and planning of commercial vehicle
operation, Satellite Radio(XM-Radio and SIRIUS), Fleet Management
References:
1. William Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics: An Engineering Perspective”,
Butterworth-Heinemann, Elsevier Incorporation, Massachusetts, 7th Edition, 2012.
2. Dennis Foy, “Automotive Telematics: The One-stop Guide to In-vehicle Telematics and
Infotainment Technology and Applications, Red Hat Publishing Company Incorporation,
Maryland, 2002.
3. Ljubo Vlacic, Michel Parent, Fumio Harashima, “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”,
Butterworth-Heinemann publications, Oxford, 2001.
4. Robert Bosch GmBH, “Bosch Automotive Hand Book”, Bentley Publishers, 8th Edition,
Cambridge, 2011.
5. Ronald K Jurgen, “Navigation and Intelligent Transportation Systems – Progress in
Technology”, Automotive Electronics Series, SAE, USA, 1998.
2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
15EI2043 AUTOMOTIVE FAULT DIAGNOSTICS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the importance about diagnostics
To understand the methods of diagnostics
To understand the tools available for fault diagnostics
Course Outcome:
Knowledge about different diagnostic tools
Depth knowledge about the diagnostic process
Ability to identify the faults on the vehicle
Description:
Need for diagnostics, Circuit testing, Vehicle specific details, The ’six-steps’ approach, Skills
required for effective diagnosis, An approach to fault finding, Tools and equipment,
Oscilloscope diagnostics, On-board diagnostics, Diagnostics of Engine system, chassis System,
Electrical and Transmission system.
References:
1. Allan W. M. Bonnick, “Automotive Computer Controlled Systems Diagnostic tools and
techniques”, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford, 1st Edition, 2001.
2. Tom Denton, “Advanced Automotive Fault Diagnosis”, Elsevier Butterworth-
Heinemann, Oxford, 2nd Edition, 2006.
3. Tracy Martin, “How to Diagnose and Repair Automotive Electrical Systems”, Motor
Books/MBl Publishing Company, London, 1st Edition, 2005.
4. James D. Halderman Jim Linder Automotive Fuel And Emissions Control Systems third
edition Pearson Education, 2012.
5. AlexanderA.Stotsky, “Automotive Engines Control, Estimation, Statistical
Detection”Springer-Verlog, Berlin Heidelberg 2009.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
LIST OF SUBJECTS
Sub. Code Name of the Subject Credits
14EI2001 Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0
14EI2002 Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2003 Electrical Measurements 3:1:0
14EI2004 Simulation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2005 Control System 3:1:0
14EI2006 Electrical Measurements and Machines Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2007 Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control 3:0:0
14EI2010 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2011 Electronic Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2012 Logic and Distributed Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI2013 Industrial Data Communication and Networks 3:0:0
14EI2014 Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2015 Logic and Distributed Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI2016 Digital Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI2017 Biomedical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2018 Automotive Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2019 Analytical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2020 Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries 3:0:0
14EI2021 Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries 3:0:0
14EI2022 Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries 3:0:0
14EI2023 Opto-Electronics and Laser Based Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2024 Power Plant Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2025 Modern Control Techniques 3:0:0
14EI2026 Strength of Machine Elements 3:0:0
14EI2032 Flexible Manufacturing System 3:0:0
14EI2033 Vibration Analysis 3:0:0
14EI2035 Human- Robot Systems and Interaction 3:0:0
14EI2036 Environmental Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2038 Instrumentation for Agriculture 3:0:0
14EI2039 Instrumentation and Control for Avionics 3:0:0
14EI2040 Ultrasonic Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2041 Measurements and Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2042 Advanced Control Theory 3:0:0
14EI2043 Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI2044 PLC and Automation 3:0:0
14EI2045 Artificial organs and Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0
14EI2046 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0
14EI2047 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 0:0:2
14EI2048 Instrumentation and Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI3002 Instrumentation 3:0:0
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3003 Advanced Process Control 3:0:0
14EI3004 Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3005 Advanced Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI3006 Discrete Control System 3:0:0
14EI3007 Intelligent Controllers 3:0:0
14EI3008 Optimal Control Theory 3:0:0
14EI3009 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3010 Control System Design 3:0:0
14EI3011 Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3012 Embedded Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3014 Industrial Automation 3:0:0
14EI3015 System Identification and Adaptive Control 3:0:0
14EI3016 SCADA systems and Applications 3:0:0
14EI3017 Design of Linear Multivariable control systems 3:0:0
14EI3018 Piping and Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3019 Embedded Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3020 Networks and Protocols for instrumentation and control 3:0:0
14EI3022 Design of Embedded Control System
14EI3025 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM
14EI3025 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM
3:0:0
14EI3023 Advanced Processors for control and automation 3:0:0
14EI3028 Embedded Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3029 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0
14EI3030 Automotive Sensors and Intelligent Systems
3:0:0
14EI3031 Automotive Protocols and Telematics 3:0:0
14EI3033 Biomedical sensors and signal conditioning 3:0:0
14EI3038 Physiological Control Systems 3:0:0
14EI3039 Medical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3040 Bio Virtual instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3041 Hospital Management System 3:0:0
14EI3042 Cognitive technology for biomedical engineers 3:0:0
14EI3044 Embedded Based Medical Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3045 Diagnostics and therapeutic Equipments Laboratory 0:0:2
14EI3046 Medical Imaging Techniques 3:0:0
14EI3048 Clinical Instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3049 Medical Devices And Safety
Safe
Safe
Sasafety Saf
3:0:0
14EI3051 Medical Sensors and wearable devices 3:0:0
14EI3052 Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0
14EI3054 Biomechanics 3:0:0
14EI3055 Medical Diagnostics And Therapeutic Equipments 3:0:0
14EI3056 Limb prosthetics 3:0:0
14EI3057 Industrial electronics and instrumentation 3:0:0
14EI3058 Linear systems 3:0:0
14EI3059 Transducers and Actuators 3:0:0
14EI3060 Automated Test and Measurement 3:0:0
14EI3061 Remote sensing and control 3:0:0
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3063 Robot Programming 3:0:0
14EI3064 Kinematics and Dynamics of Robot 3:0:0
14EI3065 Advanced Instrumentation and Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0
14EI3066 Sensors and Data Acquisition Lab 0:0:2
14EI3067 Transducer Engineering 3:0:0
14EI2001 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To learn the characteristics of sensors
To provide knowledge on the principle and operation of different transducers.
To introduce the application of sensors and transducers in the measuring system.
Course Outcome:
Determine the characteristics of various sensors and analyze them
Use the principle of transducers to design measuring systems
Suggest suitable sensors for a particular application
Transducers - Definition, Classification of transducers, Characteristics of transducers, types of Transducers –
Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive, Piezoelectric, Magnetic transducers, principle of operation, working, characteristics
and applications, Miscellaneous sensors – Elastic, digital, chemical, fiber optic, MEMS.
References
1. Doebelin. E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw Hill
International, New York, 2007.
2. Renganathan. S., “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers Limited, Chennai, 2003.
3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2003.
4. Sawhney A.K., “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, Eighteenth
Edition, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2007.
5. Ian R Sinclair, “Sensors and Transducers”, Third Edition, Newnes, New Delhi, 2011.
14EI2002 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EI2001 Sensors and Transducers
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To introduce the practical aspects of various transducers and their characteristics.
To impart knowledge in measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance using bridges.
To improve the skills in calibrating analog meters.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the behavior.
Critically analyze any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods.
Calibrate basic instruments.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the different transducers, their working and determination of their characteristics.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2003 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Pre Requisite: 14EE2001 Electric Circuits and Networks
Credits: 3:1:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the principle of measurement of D.C. and A.C. voltages.
To understand the use of instruments and techniques for practical measurements required in electrical
measurements.
To learn the working of D.C and A.C. Bridges
Course Outcome:
Apply the knowledge of electrical measurement techniques to design circuits.
Solve problems through instrument illustrations.
Use the concept of bridges in instrumentation application
Fundamentals Of Electrical Measurements-Functional Elements of an Instrument, Input– Output Configuration of
Measurement Systems, Performance Characteristics of Instruments, Electromechanical DC Instruments -
Galvanometers, PMMC Instrument, DC Ammeter and Voltmeter, Calibration of DC instruments, Electromechanical
AC Instruments-Moving Iron Instrument, Thermoinstruments, Electrodynamometers in Power Measurements,
Watt– hour meter, Power– factor meters, Instrument Transformers, A.C. and D.C. Bridge Circuits and Recording
Instruments.
References
1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2004.
2. Tumanski. S., “Principles of Electrical Measurement”, Taylor and Francis Group, Ny, 2006.
3. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
4. Golding E.W. and Widdis F.E., “Electrical measurements and measuring instruments”, Sir Issac Pitman
and Sons Pvt., Ltd., 2001.
5. Laughton. M. A. and Warne. D. J., “Electrical Engineer's Reference Book” Sixteenth Edition, Newnes,
2003.
14EI2004 SIMULATION LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EE2001 Electric Circuits and Networks
14EC2002 Electronic circuits
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To familiarize simulation software to analyze electronic circuits.
To introduce simulation software to learn signal operations
To design virtual instruments to analyze real time signals.
Course Outcome:
Simulate simple electronic circuits using simulation software.
Simulate signals and analyze them using simulation software
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Acquire real time signals and perform simple operations on them using simulation software.
Description:
This laboratory aims to introduce simulation software that enables the student to understand the theoretical concepts
by simulating them.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2005 CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:1:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the fundamentals of Feedback Control systems and mathematical modeling of the system.
• To cover the concepts of time response and frequency response of the system.
• To understand the basics of stability analysis of the system.
Course Outcome:
• Represent the mathematical model of a system.
• Determine the response of different order systems for various test inputs.
• Analyse the stability of the system.
Introduction to Control Systems, Types, Effect of Feedback, Differential equation of Physical Systems, Transfer
functions, Block diagram algebra, Signal Flow graphs, Time Response of Feed Back Control Systems, Step response
of First and Second order systems , Time response specifications of Second order Systems, Concepts of Stability,
Routh stability criterion, Root Locus Techniques, stability analysis using Bode Plots, Polar plots, Introduction to
lead, lag and lead–lag compensating networks, Nyquist criterion, Concepts of State, State variable and State models
for electrical systems, Solution of State Equations, P, PI, PID Controllers.
References
1. Nagarath .J and Gopal M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International (P) Limited,
Publishers, Fourth edition – 2005
2. Ogata .K “Modern Control Engineering “, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.
3. Benjamin C. Kuo and Farid Golnaagi, Wiley “Automatic Control Systems”, 8th Edition, 2009.
4. Joseph J Distefano “Feedback and Control System”, III et al., Schaum’s Outlines, TMH, 2nd Edition
2007.
5. Norman. S. Nise, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley, 6th
Edition, 2011.
14EI2006 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MACHINES LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EI2003 Electrical Measurements
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To expose the students to the operation of DC and AC machines
To learn about calibration of electrical instruments and bridge circuits
To introduce the working of special electrical machines.
Course Outcome:
Analyze the characteristics of DC and AC Machines.
Calibrate electrical instruments and bridge circuits
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Perform experiments on special electric machines.
Description:
This laboratory enables the student to understand the operation of electrical machines, bridges and the methods of
calibrating electric instruments
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2007 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
• To explore the methods of controller design.
• To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modelling.
• To understand the design of the compensating circuits.
Course Outcome:
• Design a controller for a practical system.
• Derive the mathematical model of a system.
• Design lead and lag compensating circuits.
Description:
This laboratory demonstrates the methods to derive the mathematical model of a system and design a controller for a
practical system.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2008 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To learn the principle of Pressure, Temperature, flow, level, density and viscosity measurements.
To know about the selection, calibration and installation of different instruments
To explore the application of measuring instruments in various industries
Course Outcome:
Apply the knowledge of various Measuring Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation system.
Calibrate the various instruments and use them in various fields.
Select suitable instrument for a given application
Pressure Measurement-Standards, Dynamic testing, High and Low pressure measurement, Flow Measurement -
Pitot static tube, Yaw tube, Pivoted vane, Anemometer, Obstruction meters, Rotameters, Turbine meters, Positive
Displacement meters, Electromagnetic flow meter, Drag force flow meter , Ultrasonic flow meters, Vortex,
Shedding flow meters, Temperature Measurement-Thermal Expansion Methods, Thermoelectric sensors, Electrical
Resistance Sensors, Junction Semiconductor Sensors, Radiation methods, Level Measurement, Density And
Viscosity Measurement, Selection, Range, Installation, Calibration and Protection of instruments
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References 1. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003.
2. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
3. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw– Hill, New
Delhi, 2005.
4. Liptak B.G, “Process Measurement and Analysis,” Chilton Book Company, Radnor, Pennsylvania, 2003.
5. Walt Boyes, “Instrumentation Reference Book,” Butterworth Heinemann, United States, 2003.
14EI2009 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process.
• To understand the design of various control schemes.
• To apply the control system in various processes.
Course Outcome:
• Derive the Mathematical Model of a physical system.
• Tune controllers for Optimum gain using various techniques.
• Analyse and decide suitable control schemes for a particular system.
Process Control System -Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Degrees of freedom,
Modelling of simple systems ,Basic Control Actions - Continuous Controller Modes, Response of controllers for
different test inputs, Selection of control modes, Controller Tuning - Optimum controller settings, Controller tuning
Methods, Final Control Elements – Characteristics, Selection of control valves, Advanced Control Schemes -
Multivariable process control, Interaction of control loops, Case Studies: Distillation column, Boiler drum level
control, Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor control
References
1. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw Hill, Singapore,2008.
3. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology, ”Prentice Hall , New Jersey, 2006.
4. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control,” John Willey
and Sons, Singapore, 2006.
5. Wayne Bequette B., “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation” Prentice Hall , New Jersey– 2003
6. Peter Harriott, “Process Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
14EI2010 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To gain the knowledge of the working of Industrial Instruments
To learn the methods of Calibration for Instruments.
To understand the operation of Instrumentation Circuits.
Course Outcome:
Handle simple Industrial Instruments.
Perform Calibration of Instruments.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Design Instrumentation Circuits for measurement systems.
Description:
This laboratory introduces the operation of industrial instruments, their calibration and design of instrumentation
circuits.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2011 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
Pre Requisite: 14EC2008 Linear Integrated Circuits
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To provide information on the basics of Electronic Measurements.
• To include specialized information needed for Analog and Digital Instrumentation.
• To exploit an instrument’s potential, to be aware of its limitations.
Course Outcome:
• Correctly interpret the measurement results
• Suggest the instrument suitable for a specific application
• Discover applications and solve problems that arise in measurement applications
Electronic Analog Instruments – Introduction, Amplified DC meter, AC voltmeters using rectifiers, True RMS
voltmeter, Q meter, Vector impedance meter. Oscilloscope, display devices and recorders, Signal generators and
analyzers, Digital Instruments-Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters, Simple frequency counter, , time interval,
Digital Displacement transducer, Virtual Instrumentation – Evolution, Architecture, Presentation and Control,
Functional Integration, Programming Requirements, Conventional and Distributed Virtual Instrumentation, Virtual
Instruments and Traditional Instruments, Advantages, Study of evolution and procedures in simulation softwares.
References
1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2009.
2. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. Bouwens A.J., Digital Instrumentation, McGraw Hill Ltd., USA, 2002.
4. Sumathi S and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.
5. Oliver B.H., and Cage J.M., “Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
6. David A Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2006.
14EI2012 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Pre Requisite: 14EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To provide the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system.
• To introduce the concept of PLC and its Programming using Ladder Diagram.
• To cover the basics of Distributed Control Systems
Course Outcome:
• Acquire knowledge of data acquisition System
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Write simple Programs using ladder diagrams
• Use the knowledge of DCS and communication standards in their Projects
Review of Computers In Process Control - Data loggers, Data Acquisition Systems (DAS), Direct Digital Control
(DDC), Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA), Overview of PLC systems, PLC
programming procedures, PLC Basic Functions, PLC Intermediate Functions Sequencer functions, Matrix functions,
Alternate programming languages, Analog PLC operation, Design of interlocks and alarms, Distributed Control
Systems (DCS)-Evolution, Architecture, Comparison, Local Control unit, Process Interfacing Issues, Redundancy
concept, Communication facilities, Interfaces In DCS, General purpose computers in DCS
References
1. John.W. Webb, Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers - Principles and Applications”, Prentice
Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Michael P Lukas, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada, 1986.
3. B.G. Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Handbook, Process control and Optimization”, CRC press- Radnor,
Pennsylvania, 2006.
4. B.G. Liptak, “Process software and digital networks,” CRC press,Florida-2003.
5. Curtis D. “Johnson Process control instrumentation technology,” Prentice Hall , New Jersey 2006.
6. Krishna Kant, “Computer-Based Industrial Control,“ PHI, New Delhi, 2004
7. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
.
14EI2013 INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
Pre Requisite: 14EC2080 Communication Engineering
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic principles of networking
To learn the serial communication standards
To equip the students with relevant knowledge about network protocols
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for network protocols during data transmission and reception.
Analyze the methods of communication
Compare the different protocols used as Universal standards.
Introduction and Basic Principles – Protocols, Physical standards, Modern instrumentation, Bits, Bytes and
characters, Communication principles, Communication modes, Synchronous and Asynchronous systems,
Transmission Characteristics, Data Coding, UART, Serial data communications interface standards, Balanced and
unbalanced transmission lines, RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard, Introduction To Protocols - Flow
control Protocols, BSC Protocols, HDLC, SDLC, Data communication for Instrumentation and Control, Industrial
protocols, Local Area Networks
References
1. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation and
Control”, Elsevier Publications, 2003.
2. Stallings W. “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles “ PHI ,2002.
3. Behrouz A. Forouzan“ Data Communication and Networking” , TMH, 2006.
4. Lawrence. M. Thompson , “Industrial Data Communications”, 4th Edition , ISA- 2007.
5. Edwin Wright “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation and Troubleshooting”, Newnes-
2004.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2014 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To introduce the practical concepts of digital controllers.
To demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI
To provide knowledge about controller design, simulation and implementation
Course Outcome:
Design and compare Digital Control Algorithms.
Analyze the performance of a Process
Demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI
Description:
This laboratory introduces the design procedure for digital controllers and their implementation of real time process.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2015 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EI2012 Logic and Distributed Control Systems
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
• To strengthen the knowledge of Programmable Logic Controllers
• To introduce the concepts of SCADA
• To gain hands on experience on Distributed Control Systems
Course Outcome:
• Write simple programs in Programmable Logic Controllers
• Design control system using Programmable Logic Controllers
• Use SCADA for real time applications
Description:
This laboratory introduces the basic concepts of PLC programming and Distributed Control systems using
simulation software.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2016 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the concepts of system analysis using Z transforms.
• To equip with the basic knowledge of digital process control design.
• To study the stability analysis of digital control system
Course Outcome:
• Use Z transforms to analyse Discrete Systems.
• Design controllers for a digital process.
• Test the Stability of Discrete Systems.
Need for digital control, Configuration of the basic digital control scheme, Principles of signal conversion, Basic
discrete time signal, Z transform, Stability Analysis - Analysis Of Digital Control, Frequency Response, Stability
on the z-Plane and the Jury stability criterion, Sample and hold systems , Digital Controller - Z domain description
of sampled continuous time plants, Z domain description of systems with dead time, Implementation of digital
controllers, Digital Algorithms - Design of Digital Control Algorithms, Z plane specifications of control system
design, Digital compensator design using frequency response plots, State description of sampled continuous time
plants, Solution of state difference equations
References
1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Ogata, “Discrete Time Control Systems”, Prentice– hall Of India, New Delhi 2008.
3. Gene F. Franklin, J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education Limited,
New Delhi,2002.
4. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern control systems,” Pearson Education inc, New Delhi,
2008.
5. Isermann R ‘Digital Control Systems’, Vol. I & II, Narosa Publishing
14EI2017 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3: 0:0
Course Objective:
• To give knowledge of the principle of operation and design of Biomedical Instruments.
• To render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments.
• To teach the application of biomedical instruments in real life applications
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concepts of Medical Instrumentation to physiological measurements
• Design Instrumentation circuits for Biomedical Applications.
• Use the knowledge of Biomedical Instruments to Practical Problems.
Cell and its Electrical activity, Physiological systems viz., cardiovascular system, Nervous system, Respiratory
system, Visual system, Muscular system, Electrodes and bioelectric signals: Bio electrodes, ECG, EMG, EEG and
EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood flow, Blood pressure, Cardiac output, and Bio-chemical
measurement: Blood pH, Blood pO2, Blood pCO2, Photometers. Therapeutic equipments and imaging techniques.
References
1. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Arumugam.M. “Biomedical Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam, 2006.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, Pearson
Education India, Delhi, 2004.
5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc, Netherlands, 2009.
14EI2018 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To learn the fundamental principles of electronics and to introduce the application of electronics in the
modern automobile.
• To develop ability to understand various latest Communication protocols used in automobile industries.
• To provide a thorough understanding of automotive systems and various electronic
accessories used in automobile.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the use of instruments in automotive industry
• Design instruments for automotive applications.
• Use Communication protocols to perform advanced monitoring and control.
Automotive Electrical And Electronics - Basic Electronics components and their operation in an automobile,
Starting Systems, Charging Systems, Ignition Systems, Electronic Fuel Control, Advanced vehicle control systems,
Embedded System Communication Protocols - Vehicle Communication Protocols, Introduction to CAN, LIN,
FLEXRAY, MOST, KWP2000, Details of CAN, Embedded System In Control Of Automotive Systems - Engine
management systems, Vehicle Safety System, Electronic Control of braking and traction, Electronic transmission
control, Environmental tests for electronic control units.
References
1. RobertBoschGmbh ,“BOSCH– Automotive Handbook”, 7thEdition,John Wiley & Sons,
ISBN: 0470519363, 2008.
2. Denton.T, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic System”, Elsevier Butterworth–
HeinemannPublications,3rd Edition,2004.
3. Knowles.D, “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”, Prentice
Hall,1988.
4. William.T.M, “Automotive Electronic System”,Elsevier Science,6th Edition,2003.
5. Kiencke,, Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems” 2nd Edition.2005
14EI2019 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the principle of analytic instruments
• To learn the concept of chromatography
• To know the applications of analytical instruments
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the different types of analytic instruments
• Develop instruments for clinical analysis.
• Apply the concepts of Analytical Instruments for Environmental Monitoring
Colorimetry And Spectrophotometry-Special methods of analysis, Beer–Lambert law, Colorimeters, UV, Vis
spectrophotometers, Single and double beam instruments, Sources and detectors, IR spectrophotometers,
Types,Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers, Atomic absorption spectrophotometers, Sources and
detectors, FTIR spectrophotometers, Flame emission photometers, Chromatography - Different techniques, Gas
chromatography, Detectors, Liquid chromatographs, Applications, High– pressure liquid chromatographs,
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Applications, Industrial gas analyzers and pollution monitoring instruments, Ph meters and dissolved component
analyzers, Radio chemical and magnetic resonance techniques
References
1. Khandpur. R. S., ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2006.
2. Willard. H., Merritt, Dean. J. A., Settle. F. A., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’, CBS publishing &
distribution, 1995.
3. Robert D. Braun, ‘Introduction to Instrumental Analysis’, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1987.
4. Ewing. G. W., ‘Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis’, McGraw Hill, 1992.
5. Skoog. D. A. and West. D. M., ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’, Holt, Saunders Publishing, 1998.
14EI2020 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL
INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To expose the students to the Instrumentation involved in petrochemical industries.
• To learn the control applied in the subsystems of a petrochemical plant.
• To introduce the instrumentation and control in Effluent And Water Treatment
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the significance of Measurement in Petrochemical Industry.
• Use the Knowledge of Control to design new Control Algorithms.
• Design instruments and control algorithms for effluent and water treatment.
Piping and Instrumentation diagrams, Instrumentation and control in distillation columns, chemical reactors-
Temperature and pressure control in batch reactors – Instrumentation and control in dryers: Batch dryers and
Continuous dryers, heat exchangers -, evaporators - Types of evaporators, Measurement and control of absolute
pressure, Density, Conductivity, Differential pressure and Flow, Effluent and Water Treatment
References
1. Béla G. Lipták. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossil Power, Glass, Iron and
Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical, Pharmaceutical’, Chilton Book Co.,
Reprint 2003
2. Considine D.M., ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’, Fourthedition, McGraw Hill,
Singapore, 1999.
3. Curtis D .Johnson,”Process control instrumentation technology,”Prentice Hall , New Jersey, 2006.
4. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
5. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw– Hill, New
Delhi, 2005.
14EI2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To describe the paper making process and need for measurement
• To expose the students to the Instrumentation applied in Paper industries.
• To learn the control operations in paper industries.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need of instrumentation and control in Paper making.
• Select suitable sensors for a specific process
• Design a Controller for paper industries.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Description Of The Process -Raw materials, Pulping process, Chemical Recovery Process, Paper making process,
Converting, Instrumentation - Measurements of Basis Weight, Density, Specific gravity, Flow, Level of liquids and
solids, Pressure, Temperature, Consistency, Moisture, PH, Oxidation-Reduction potential, Graphic displays and
alarms, Control Operations - Blow tank controls, Digester liquor feed pump controls, Brown stock water level
control, Stock chest level control, Basis weight control, Dry temperature control, density and flow control, computer
applications.
References
1. B.G Liptak, ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’, Chilton Book Company, 2003
2. Renganathan. S., “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers Limited, Chennai, 2003.
3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2003.
4. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
5. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw– Hill, New
Delhi, 2005.
14EI2022 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To learn the steel making process and the need for measurement.
• To know the role of instrumentation in a steel industry
• To teach the control operations carried out at various stages
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the use of sensors in steel making
• Suggest suitable sensor for a typical measurement
• Develop control algorithms for any control operation
Description of Process -Flow diagram and description of the processes, Raw materials preparation, Iron making,
Blast furnaces, Stoves, Raw steel making, Basic Oxygen Furnace, Electric Furnace, Casting of steel: Primary
rolling, Cold rolling and Finishing, Measurement of level, Pressure, Density, Temperature, Flow, Weight, Thickness
and shape, Graphic displays and alarms, Control Systems - Blast furnace, Stove combustion control system, Gas
and water controls in BOF furnace, Strand Casting mould Level control, Mould Level sensors, Ingot
weight measuring system, Waste water treatment, computer applications: Model calculation and logging, Rolling
Mill Control, Annealing Process Control, Center Utilities Dispatch Computer.
References
1. Béla G. Lipták. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossil
Power, Glass, Iron and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical, Pharmaceutical’,
Chilton Book Co., Reprint 2003 Original from the University of California.
2. Liptak B. G, Instrument Engineers Handbook, volume 2, Process Control,Third edition, CRC press,
London, 1995.
3. Considine D.M, Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook, Fourth edition,
McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1993.
4. Steel Designers Handbook 1)Branko 2)Ron Tinyou 3) ArunSyamGorenc Seventh
Edition First Indian Reprint 2006.
5. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, 2004.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2023 OPTO-ELECTRONICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and Lasers
To learn the measurements done using Optical fibers and Lasers
To know the use of lasers in biomedical applications
Course Outcome:
Analyze the use of optical fibers and lasers in instrumentation
Use Optical fibers for measurement
Apply LASER in Instrumentation and Biomedical applications.
Basics of Opto-electronics - Characteristics of optical radiation, Optical Sources and Detectors, Charge Coupled
devices, Opto –couplers and their applications, Optical Fibre - Principle, Types, Fibre coupling, Fibre optic sensors
, Lasers and Applications - Principle, Laser Rate Equation, Properties, Two, Three and Four level system,
Resonator configuration, Q switching and Mode locking, Cavity dumping, Types of Lasers, Industrial applications,
Holography, Medical applications
References
1. Arumugam. M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam,
2006.
2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson Education, 2006.
3. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, .
4. Ghatak A.K. and Thiagarajan K, Optical Electronics Foundation book , TMH, Cambridge University Press,
1989.
5. Wilson and Hawkes, “Opto Electronics – An Introduction”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1998.
14EI2024 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular
stress on thermal power generation.
• To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants.
• To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters like
speed, vibration of turbines and their control.
Course Outcome:
• Survey of methods of power generation
• Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a power plant
• Develop control algorithms for a particular operation
Brief survey of methods of power generation, Hydro, Thermal, Nuclear, Solar and Wind power, Electrical
measurements, Non– electrical parameters Measurements, Analytical instruments in Thermal power plants -Flue gas
oxygen analyzer, Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam, Dissolved oxygen analyzer, Chromatography , PH
meter , Fuel analyzer, Pollution monitoring instruments, Boiler control system in thermal power plant, Turbine
Monitoring and Control
References
1. K. Krishnaswamy, M. Ponnibala, “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.,2011.
2. P.K Nag, Power plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
3. Sam G Dukelow, The Control of Boilers, 2nd Edition, ISA Press, New York, 1991
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. Gill A B, Power Plant Performance, Butterworth, London, 1984.
5. P C Martin and I W Hannah, Modern Power Station Practice, British Electricity International, Vols.I & VI,
Pergamon Press, London, 1992.
14EI2025 MODERN CONTROL TECHNIQUES
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To enable the students to understand the advanced control systems like optimal control, Robust control,
Adaptive control fuzzy and Neural control.
To learn the methods to overcome the difficulties in implementing conventional control through advanced
control.
To analyze the modern control concepts
Course Outcome:
Design of conventional PID controller
Perform stability analysis and optimal control
Adaptive control and its implementation
Modifications of PID control schemes, Two degrees of freedom control, Optimal Control – Formulation, Necessary
conditions of optimality, state regulator problem, Output regulator tracking problems, Pontryagin's minimum
principle, infinite time optimal control , Problem, Advanced Control techniques - Lyapunov Stability Analysis And
Quadratic Optimal Control, Adaptive Control, Robust control
References
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, Morden Control Engineering,Third Edition, - Prentice Hall , India 2009.
2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal.M. Control Systems Engineering, Wiley & sons, 2008.
3. Astrom K.J. and Wittenmark.B, Adaptive Control, Addison Wesley Publishing, 1985.
4. Bernard friedlanced - Advanced Control System Design- Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,1996.
5. Richard.C. Dorf and Robert.H.Bisho, Modern Control System, Addison Wesley & sons, 2008
14EI2026 STRENGTH OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basics of stress and strain on elements
To discuss the theory of failure
To learn the concept of torsion
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for stress and strain analysis
Determine the shear force and bending moment
Analyze the effect of torsion on elements
Stress at a point, stress and strains in bars subjected to axial loading, Various strengths of material, Temperature
stresses in simple & composite members. Strain energy due to axial load. Compound stress and strains, Mohr’s
circle of stress; ellipse of stress and their applications, stresses in machine elements, Shear force and Bending
moment – Definitions, Diagrams for cantilevers, simply supported beams with or without overhangs Uniform
distributed load, Combination of Concentrated load & UDL, Uniformity varying load, Torsion equation,
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Applications to hollow and solid circular shafts, torsional rigidity, combined torsion and bending of circular shafts,
analysis of close-coiled-helical springs, theories of failure, Buckling of coloumns
References
1. R. S. Khurmi, Strength of Materials, S. Chand, 2008
2. S. S. Ratan, Strength of Materials, Tata McGrawhill, 2011
3. Gere and Temoshenko, “Mechanics of Material”, CBS Publishers
4. S. Ramamrutham “Strength of Materials”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company
5. Singer and Pytel “Strength of Materials”, Harper and Row Publications
14EI2032 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To deal with Automation and Automated Assembly systems
To understand the concept of Group Technology
To learn the significance of Flexible Manufacturing systems
Course Outcome:
Classify the automation strategies being followed
Decide the automation
Appreciate the importance of Flexible manufacturing systems
Automation and Automated Assembly systems-Types, automation strategies, Detroit-type automation: Automated
flow lines, methods of work part transport, Transfer mechanisms, design of automated assembly systems, Group
Technology-Part families, parts classification and coding, Machine cell design, Flexible Manufacturing Systems -
Components of an FMS, types of systems, FMS work stations, Material handling and storage system, Planning the
FMS, analysis methods for FMS, applications and benefits.
References
1. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing- Groover M.P, Prentice Hall of
India, 2002
2. CAD/CAM – Groover M.P, Zimmers E.W, Prentice Hall of India, 2005
3. Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing: Nanua Singh, John Wiley and Sons, 1998.
4. Production Management Systems: A CIM Perspective- Browne J, Harhen J, Shivnan J, Addison Wesley,
2nd Ed. 1996.
14EI2033 VIBRATION ANALYSIS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To deal with Automation and Automated Assembly systems
To understand the concept of Group Technology
To learn the significance of Flexible Manufacturing systems
Course Outcome:
Classify the automation strategies being followed
Decide the automation and group technology
Appreciate the importance of Flexible manufacturing systems
Causes and effects of vibration- Vibrations of Single Degree, Two Degree and Multi Degree of freedom systems.,
Steady state and transient characteristics of vibration, Vibration measuring instruments-Vibration transducers, signal
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
conditioning elements. Display-and recording elements. Vibration meters and analyzers, Special vibration
measuring techniques - Change in sound method, Ultrasonic measurement method, Shock pulse measurement,
Kurtosis, Acoustic emission monitoring, Cepstrum analysis, Modal analysis, critical speed analysis, Shaft –orbit &
position analysis.
References
1. Collacott, R.A., Mechanical Fault Diagnosis and Condition Monitoring, Chapman
& Hall, London, 1982.
2. John S. Mitchell, Introduction to Machinery Analysis and Monitoring, Penn Well Books, Penn Well
Publishing Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma, 1993.
3. Nakra, B.C. Yadava, G.S. and Thuested, L., Vibration Measurement and Analysis, National Productivity
Council, New Delhi, 1989.
4. Pox and Jenkins, “Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control”, ISBN 978-0-470-27284-8, 2008.
14EI2035 HUMAN - ROBOT SYSTEMS AND INTERACTION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To study multimodal interactions between a human and a robot
To introduce the concepts of neurorehabilitation
To deal with surgical robotics
Course Outcome:
Model human robots for real applications
Perform motion analysis of human robots
Analyze the sensory feedback and use it to control robot movements
Course Content
Definition of human-robot interaction problem, human factors: perception, motor skills, social aspect of interaction,
safety, Haptic robots: kinematics, dynamics, collision detection, control.
Teleoperation systems: architectures, control, virtual fixtures, micro/nano manipulation; Soft robots based on
variable impedance actuators, Medical robotics: surgical robotics, robot-supported diagnostics, micro-robots in the
human body, nanorobots at the cell level, Rehabilitation and assistive robotics: motor rehabilitation, exoskeletons,
robotic prosthetics
References
1. M. Mihelj, J. Podobnik, Haptics for Virtual Reality and Teleoperation, Springer 2012.
2. J. Rosen, B. Hannaford, R.M. Satava, SurgicalRobotics: Systems Applications and Visions, Springer, 2011
3. M. Tavakoli, R.V. Patel, M. Moallem, A. Aziminejad, Haptics for Teleoperated Surgical Robotic Systems,
World Scientific, 2008
4. Jose L. Pons, Wearable Robots:Biomechatronic Exoskeletons, John Wiley& Sons, 2008.
5. V. Dietz, T. Nef, W.Z. Rymer,Neurorehabilitation Technology, Springer, 2012
6. E. Burdet, D.W. Franklin, T.E. Milner, Human Robotics: Neuromechanics and Motor Control, The MIT
Press, 2013
7. L. Sciavico, B. Siciliano: Modeling and Control of Robot Manipulators, The McGraw –Hill Companies,
Inc., New York, 2000.
14EI2036 ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the instrumentation methodologies for environment monitoring.
To deal with water quality monitoring and waste water treatment
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
To discuss the instrumentation required for air pollution monitoring.
Course Outcome:
Design instrumentation systems for environment monitoring.
Develop algorithms for waste water treatment
Measure and analyze air quality
Necessity of instrumentation & control for environment, Instrumentation methodologies, Quality of water:
Standards, effects, Water quality parameters: Thermal conductivity, detectors, Opacity monitors, pH analyzers &
their application, conductivity analyzers & their application, Water treatment: Requirement of water treatment
facilities, process design, Sedimentation & flotation: sludge, storage & removal, design criteria of settling tank,
effect of temperature on coagulation, Ground water monitoring: Level measurement in ground water monitoring
wells, instrumentation in ground water monitoring, assessment of soil & ground water pollution, Waste water
monitoring: Waste water measurement techniques. Instrumentation set up for waste water treatment plant. Air
pollution: Air monitoring, measurement of ambient air quality, Air flow measurement, Rain water harvesting:
necessity, methods, rate of NGOs municipal corporation, Govt., limitations. Quality assurance of storage water.
References 1. Water treatment technology - Walter J. Weber
2. Air pollution engineering – M. N. Rao & H. V. N. Rao
3. Air pollution control technology – Wark & Warner
4. Environmental Instrumentation & Analysis Handbook- Randy D. Down.
14EI2038 INSTRUMENTATION FOR AGRICULTURE
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the soil measurement systems.
To deal with green house instrumentation
To discuss the working of automation equipments in agriculture
Course Outcome:
Design sensors for soil moisture measurement
Automate agricultural applications
Measure characteristics of leaves
Necessity of instrumentation & control for agriculture, engineering properties of soil: Sensors: introduction to sonic
anemometers, hygrometers, fine wire thermocouples, open & close path gas analysers, brief introduction to various
bio-sensors, soil moisture measurement methods: resistance based method, voltage based method, thermal based
method, details of gypsum block soil moisture sensor, green houses & instrumentation: ventilation, cooling &
heating, wind speed, temperature & humidity, rain gauge, carbon dioxide enrichment measurement & control.
Automation in earth moving equipments & farm equipments, implementation of hydraulic, pneumatic & electronics
control circuits in harvesters cotton pickers, tractor etc. Leaf area length evaportranspiration, temperature, wetness &
respiration measurement , electromagnetic radiations photosynthesis, infrared & UV bio sensor methods in
agriculture, agrometrological instrumentation weather stations, surface flux measurement, soil water content
measurement using time-domain reflectometery(TDR)
References
1. Industrial instrumentation, “Patranabis”, TMH.
2. Instrumentation handbook-process control, “B.G.Liptak”, Chilton 40
3. Process control and instrumentation technology, “C.D. Johnson”, PHI
4. Wills B.A., “ Mineral Processing Technology”, 4thEd.,Pergamon Press
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI2039 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR AVIONICS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the basics of Aircraft
• To learn the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems
• To deal with gyroscopic instruments
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need for measurement in aircraft
• Design instrumentation systems for aircraft.
• Use gyroscopic instruments for attitude measurement
Flight Instrumentation – Pitot, Static Instruments and Systems, Altimeter, Airspeed indicator, Machmeter,
Maximum Safe Speed indicator, Accelerometer, Gyroscope, Gyroscopic theory, Directional gyro indicator,
Artificial horizon, Turn and slip indicator, Measurements in Aircraft - Measurement of Engine Speed, Measurement
of Temperature, Pressure, Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow, Engine Power And Control Instruments, Power Indicators,
Pressure Indicators, Turbine Temperature Control, Engine Vibration Monitoring and Indicating Instruments.
References
1. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instruments – Principles and applications", Pitman and sons,
1981.
2. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instrument Integrated Systems”, ISBN-10: 0582086272, Edition: 3rd
1992.
3. Nagabhushana S. Et.Al, S. Nagabhushana, L. K. Sudha, “ Aircraft Instrumentation and Systems”,
International Pvt Ltd,2010.
4. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) “Instrument Flying Handbook”, 2013.
5. Doeblin.E.O, “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
14EI2040 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To know the generation and detection of ultrasonic waves
• To provide knowledge on the concepts of Ultrasonic Instrumentation
• To understand the applications of ultrasonic instrumentation
Course Outcome:
• Characterize the ultrasonic waves
• Analyze the sensors used in ultrasonic application
• Apply the concepts to make simple applications
Ultrasonic Waves -Principles and propagation of various waves, Characterization of ultrasonic transmission,
Reflection and Transmission coefficients, Intensity and attenuation of sound beam.
Generation/Detection Of Ultrasonic Waves - Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects, Detection of Ultrasonic
Waves: Mechanical ,Optical and Electrical Method, Precise Measurement: Pulse– echo Overlap, Cross correlation,
Ultrasonic Applications - Ultrasonic methods of flaw detection, Flow meters, Density measurement, Viscosity
measurement, Level measurement, Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements, Measuring thickness,
Depth, Rail Inspection, SONAR, Inspection of Welds and defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials,
ultrasonic applications in medical field.
References
1. Baldev Raj, V.Rajendran, P.Palanichamy, “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”,Alpha Science
International, UK, 2004.
2. J.David N.Cheeke,”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves,” CRC Press, Florida, 2002.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
3. LawrenceE.Kinsler, Austin R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V. Sanders, “Fundamentals of Acoustics,”
John Wiley and Sons Inc,USA, 2000.
4. L.A. Bulavin, YU.F.Zabashta, “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine,” VSP, Koninklijke, Brill,Boston,
2007.
5. Emmanuel P. Papadakis, “Ultrasonic Instruments and Devices”Academic Press,1999.
14EI2041 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course objective:
To make student have a clear knowledge of the instruments, relevant circuits and their working
To provide adequate knowledge in electrical instruments and measurements techniques.
Emphasis is laid on analog and digital techniques used to measure voltage, current, power etc
Course outcome:
Good understanding of comparison methods of measurements.
Exposure to various transducers, Signal Analyser and display devices.
Standards and Indicating Instruments-Errors in measurement- MC-MI-PMMC instruments-Measurement of
electrical quantities- R,L,C,power,energy- Transducers used for sensing the measuring quantities - measurement of
non-electrical quantities - temperature, pressure, speed - Signal Generators and analysers such as oscillators,
spectrum and network analysers – various types of display indicators and different types of signal recorders as data
acquisition systems
References
1. Sawhney.A.K., “A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, DhanpatRai&
Company Private Limited, New Delhi, 18thEdition, 2007.
2. Helfrick A.D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, Prentice Hall India Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
3. Doeblin,E.O., “Measurement Systems : Application and Design”, 5th Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2004.
4. Golding,E.W., and Widdis,F.C., “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, A H Wheeler &
Company, Calcutta, 5th Edition, 2003.
5. Rangan,C.S., Sharma, G.R., Mani, V.S., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 1998.
6. John P Bentley, “Principles of measurement systems”, , Pearson Prentice Hall, 4/e, 2005.
7. Alan S. Morris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Elsevier, 2001.
14EI2042 ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY
Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• Insight a wide knowledge on the description and stability of non-linear system.
• Understand the analysis of digital control system using state-space formulation.
• Look at the formulation and analysis of multi input multi output (MIMO) system.
Course Outcome:
• Gain knowledge in analysis of non-linear system and digital control of linear system.
• Implement the concept of MIMO system.
• Find non-linear system stability using the trajectory methods.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Pole placement design – Design of State observer - Response of sampled data system to step and ramp Inputs –
Stability studies – Jury’s test and bilinear transformation - State Space Analysis of Discrete Time Systems - Types
of nonlinearity Construction of phase trajectories, Describing function method, Lyapunov stability analysis - Models
of MIMO system, Introduction to multivariable Nyquist plot and Singular values analysis, Advanced control
techniques
References
1. Nagrath I.J., Gopal M., ‘Control Systems Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, 5th
Edition, New
Delhi 2003.
2. Raymond T. Stefani, Bahram Shahian, Clement J. Savant and Gene Hostetter , “Design of feedback
Control systems”, Oxford University Press, New York,4th
Edition, 2002.
3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Discrete-Time Control Systems”, New Age International, New Delhi, 4th
Edition, 2007.
4. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition. 2008.
5. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 8th
Edition, 2004.
14EI2043 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• Study about the Virtual instrumentation system and LabVIEW based Virtual Instrumentation.
• Study about the hardware and software involved programming techniques in VI.
• Study about the basic of Programming Techniques and its applications.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the advantages of Data flow programming
• Use VI for instrumentation and control
• Design a LabVIEW based instrumentation system.
Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture of a Virtual Instrument, Data Flow Techniques,
Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional programming - Introduction and Advantages of
LabVIEW, Software Environment, Creating and Saving VI- Front Panel Controls and Indicators – Block Diagram -
Data types – Date flow program – LabVIEW documentation resources – Keyboard shortcuts – Modular
Programming in LabVIEW – Icon and Connector Pane -SubVI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing an SubVI -
Creating a Stand Alone Application - Loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures,
formula nodes, local and global variables, string and file I/O.
References
1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW” Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2010.
2. JohnEssick, “Hands-On Introduction to LabVIEW for Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford University
Press,New York, 2nd
Edition, 2010.
3. NesimiErtugrul, “LabVIEW for Electric Circuits, Machines, Drives, and Laboratories”, Pearson Education,
2nd
Edition, 2002.
4. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, 2005.
5. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw – Hill Education
India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2010.
6. Gary W. Johnson, Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw-Hill Education, New
York, 3rd Edition, 2001.
14EI2044 PLC AND AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
• To learn the basics and programming of PLC.
• To examine the difference between SCADA and DCS.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• To understand the basic concepts of Intelligent Automation.
Course Outcome:
• Identify, formulate, and solve problems related to PLC.
• Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs of the industrial requirement.
• Implement a complete SCADA project relating to an industrial process or operation
Description
Basics of PLC – Architecture of PLC – Advantages – Types of PLC – Introduction to PLC Networking – Protocols
– Field bus – Process bus and Ethernet. Types of Programming – Simple process control programs using Relay
Ladder Logic and Boolean logic methods – PLC arithmetic functions – Process automation - Difference between
SCADA system and DCS – Architecture – Local control Unit – Programming language – Operator interface –
Engineering interfaces. Introduction to SCADA – Comparison between SCADA and DCS - Necessity and Role in
Industrial Automation – Text display – Operator panels & Touch panels - Factory Automation - Computer
Integrated Manufacture – CNC – Intelligent automation – Wireless controls.
References
1. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”, PHI
Learning, New Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2002.
2. Dieter K. Hammer, Lonnie R. Welch, Dieter K. Hammer, “Engineering of Distributed Control Systems”,
Nova Science Publishers, USA, 2001.
3. Gary Dunning, “Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers”, Thomson Business Information, New
Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
4. Bolton. W, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier India Private Limited, 5th
Edition, New Delhi,
2010.
5. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation Produciton systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, PHI
Learning Ltd., 3rd
Edition, New Delhi, 2009
14EI2045 ARTIFICIAL ORGANS AND REHABILITATION ENGINEERING
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
• To know about various types of assist devices.
• To give a basic idea of the artificial organs that can aid a human to live a normal life.
• To provide the awareness of how a help can be rendered to a differently abled person
Course Outcome
• Have knowledge about various types of assist devices.
• Students will have the ability to choose which type of assist device is suitable for various disorders and
legal aspects related to rehabilitation.
• Students will have the urge to develop new devices based on the basic knowledge gained in different
assisting devices.
Description
Biomaterials used in artificial organs andprostheses, Outlook for Organ replacement – Design considerations –
Evaluation Process - Brief of kidney filtration, Haemodialysis: flat plate type, coil typeand hollow fiber.
Haemodialysis Machine, Portable kidney machine - Brief of lungs gaseous exchange / transport,artificial heart-lung
devices. Oxygenators: bubble, film oxygenators and membrane oxygenators. Gas flow rate and area for membrane
oxygenators - Anatomy & Physiology of EAR-air conduction, bone conduction, masking, functional diagram of an
audiometer. Hearing aids: different types, receiver amplifiers - Ultra sonic and laser canes, Intra ocular lens, Braille
Reader, Tactile devices for visually challenged, Text voice converter.
Reference Books
1. Joseph D. Bronzing, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, CRC Press, Connecticut, 2nd
Edition, 2000.
2. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi, 2007
3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Laurence J. Street, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering Technology”, CRC Press 2007.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
5. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill Professional. 1st
Edition, 2002
6. D. Jennings, A. Flint, B.C.H. firton and L.D.M. Nokes, “Introduction to Medical Electronics Applications”
Butterworth-Heinemann; 1995.
14EI2046 PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of control theory
To provide knowledge about the importance of control systems
To provide knowledge on the basic concepts of instrumentation
Course Outcome:
Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems
Test the stability of a given system
Apply controller principles to typical applications
Introduction to process control: Importance of Process control systems, steady state design, process control block
diagram, types of responses, transforms of functions, Control systems, Open and closed loop systems, hydraulic and
pneumatic systems, Control valves, Stability analysis, Stability criterion, Characteristic equation, Routh test for
stability, signal flow graph, Masons’s Gain formula, block diagram, Industrial instrumentation, Measurement
methods for sensing the pressure, temperature, level, density, composition.
References
1. J.F Richardson A D. G. Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “Chemical Engineering” Volume3, (Chemical
and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann, an imprint of Elsevier, 2006.
2. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” McGraw Hill
International Edition , Second Edition, Singapore, 2008
3. Nagoorkani. A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, Nineteenth reprint 2012
4. S. Baskar, “Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”, Anuradha Agencies Publishers,
2004.
5. Nagrath. M and Gopal. I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third Edition Reprint
2003.
14EI2047 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Co-Requisite: 14EI2046 Process Control for Food Engineers
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To learn the characteristics of instruments.
To introduce the concepts of control systems.
To gain knowledge on stability analysis of a system
Course Outcome:
Determine the characteristics of instruments.
Design controllers for a given system.
Perform stability analysis of a system.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Description:
This laboratory enables the student to analyze the performance of various measuring instruments and use them to
control a system.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI2048 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of instrumentation
• To introduce the basics of control systems
• To discuss about stability analysis of systems
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems.
• Test the stability of a given system.
• Apply controller principles to typical applications.
General concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, generalized measurement system - Classification of instruments as
indicators,Recorders and integrators Measurement error and calibration, Pressure And Temperature Measurement,
Strain And Flow Measurement, Control Systems: Open and closed systems, Servo– mechanisms, Transfer
functions,Signal flow graphs, Block diagram algebra, hydraulic and pneumatic control systems, Two way control ,
Proportional control - Differential and Integral control, Stability analysis, Concept of Stability, Necessary condition
for Stability, Routh stability criterion, Polar and Bode plots, Nyquist plots
References
1. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements” Khanna Publishers, 2002. 2. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, first edition ninth reprint 2002. 3. Sawhny, A.K. “Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation”, DhanpatRai& Co., 2000. 4. Collet. C. V. and Hope. A.D. ‘Engineering Measurements’ 2nd Edition ELBS.
5. Nagrath. M. and Gopal.I.J.Control systems Engineering, Wiley eastern Ltd.,.2001.
6. Baskar S,’Instrumentation control system measurements and controls ‘anuradha agencies publishers,2004.
14EI3002 INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System
• To understand the importance of Instrumentation
• To learn about computer based instrumentation
Course Outcome:
• Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system
• Analyze the characteristics of transducers
• Apply computer based instrumentation for real time applications
Instrumentation system – The general instrumentation system, Static and Dynamic Characteristics, Resistance and
Inductance transducers, Capacitance and Piezoelectric transducers, Digital methods of measurements – Digital
voltmeters and multimeters , Digital
frequency, period and time measurements, Digital tachometers, Digital phase meters, Digital data recording, Digital
Transducers, Computer based instrumentation – Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation, Architecture of Virtual
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Instrumentation, Virtual Instruments Versus Traditional Instruments, Advantages of VI, Interface Buses: PCI, PXI,
and VXI.
References
1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2004.
2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003.
3. Kalsi H S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems” Elsevier,
2003.
5. Mathivanan “PC based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2008
6. Dr.S.Renganathan, “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.
7. D.Patranabis, “Principles of Electronic Instrumentation,” PHI, 2008
8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.
9. H K P Neubert, “Instrument Transducers”, Oxford University Press, Cambridge,2000.
14EI3003 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modelling.
• To understand various controllers and control algorithms.
• To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling.
Course Outcome:
• Develop mathematical model of a physical process.
• Design various controllers.
• Understand the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling.
Process control system – Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Instrument terms and symbols,
Classification of variables, Modelling of simple systems
Basic control action – Continuous controller modes- Selection of control mode for different process with control
scheme, Control valve types and characteristics, Controller tuning – Optimum controller settings, Tuning of
controllers, Advanced Control schemes, MIMO systems–Introduction, loop interaction , relative gains., Advanced
control strategies – Internal model control, Adaptive control, Dynamic matrix control, Generalized predictive
control
References
1. Stephanopoulos G., “Chemical Process Control, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw – Hill Higher Education, Singapore,
2008.
3. Wayne BequetteB,’ Process control: modeling, design, and simulation’ Prentice Hall , New Jersey – 2003.
4. Smith C.L and Corripio.A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 2006.
5. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control” ,Willey India,
2006.
6. Marlin. T.E., Process Control, Second Edition McGraw Hill New York, 2000
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3004 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL
LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14EI3003 – Advanced Process Control
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
• To demonstrate the various process Measurements.
• To inculcate the various controller design.
• To give an exposure about Programmable Logic Controller.
Course Outcome:
• Measure various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.
• Design control algorithms for different control loops.
• Write ladder logic in Programmable Logic Controller for Control purpose.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3005 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of mathematical modeling.
• To study the stability analysis of linear and non linear systems.
• To study the concepts of robustness
Course Outcome:
• Apply the modelling concepts to systems
• Analyse stability of a system
• Perform robust control of systems
Modelling of dynamic systems-Definition, Mathematical modelling, State space representation, Centrifugal
Governor, Ground vehicle, Permanent Magnet stepper motor, Inverted Pendulum, Analysis of mathematical models
– State space method, Phase plane, Isoclines, Numerical methods, State space analysis – Reachability and
controllability , Observability and constructability, Companion forms, Controller / Observer form, State feedback
control, State estimators, Stability of nonlinear system – Lyapunov stability theorems, Krasovskii’s method,
Variable gradient method, Phase plane analysis, Singular points, Limit cycle, Describing function analysis.
Robust PID control – Introduction to robust control- PID Tuning– Modifications of PID control scheme – Two
Degrees of Freedom Control – Design consideration of Robust Control
References
1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.
2. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey 2009.
4. Vidyasagar .M, “Nonlinear system analysis”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey 2002.
5. Singaresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods” Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, 2001.
6. Jean – Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, “Applied nonlinear control”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2004.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3006 DISCRETE CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To learn the concepts of discrete time Control systems.
• To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design.
• To deal with the different types of digital control algorithm.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need for discrete time control systems
• Design control system using polynomial equations approach.
• Develop different types of digital control algorithm for a system.
Z transform – Review of Z Transform –Stability Analysis in Z domain
State space analysis – State Space representation of discrete time Signals – Solving discrete time State Space
Equations
Pole placement and observer design – Controllability – Observability –Design via Pole Placement – State Observer
Polynomial approach – Polynomial Equations Approach to Control System Design
Digital algorithms – Implementation of different digital control algorithms
References
1. Ogata, “Discrete – Time Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Sigapore,2002.
2. Ky M. Vu, Optimal Discrete Control Theory The Rational Function Structure Model, Library and archives
Canada cataloguing in publication, Canada,2007.
3. Gene F. Franklin,J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education Limited –
2002.
4. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Second Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi,
2003.
14EI3007 INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in Control.
To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in Control.
To introduce genetic algorithm
Course Outcome:
Design Neural Network based application
Use Soft Computing to solve real world problems mainly pertaining to Control system applications.
Suggest an appropriate control approach for different applications.
Neural Networks: Introduction – Biological Neurons and their artificial Models, Learning Rules, Types Of Neural
Networks , Schemes Of Neuro Control, System Identification , Case studies, Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Sets, Fuzzy
Operation, Fuzzy Arithmetic, Fuzzy Relations, Fuzzy Relational Equations, Approximate Reasoning, Fuzzy
Propositions, Fuzzy Quantifiers
Structure of Fuzzy Logic Controller, Fuzzy Control Applications
Genetic Algorithm and its applications: Fundamentals, Comparison Of GA And Traditional Search Methods,
Genetic Algorithm In Scientific Models And Theoretical Foundations, Case Studies
References
1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,
1999.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
2. Rajasekaran.S and G.A Vijayalakshmi Pai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms,
Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.
3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory –and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic
Publishers,1994.
5. Melanie Mitchell, ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’, Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi, Edition:
2004.
6. Kosko, B. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.
14EI3008 OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the theory of optimal control and its applications.
• To provide knowledge of dynamic optimization
• To deal with design optimal control system
Course Outcome:
• Apply optimal control concepts to systems.
• Use dynamic optimization techniques to controllers.
• Design optimal control algorithms for real time systems.
Introduction , Problem formulation , Optimal control problem, Performance measures for optimal control problem,
Selection, Dynamic programming – Optimal control law, Principle of optimality, A recurrence relation of dynamic
programming, Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation, Calculus of variations – Functions and Functional , Maxima
and minima of function, Variation of functional , Extremal of functional, Euler Lagrange equation
Variational approach to optimal control problems, Necessary conditions for optimal control, Linear regulator
problems, Linear tracking problems, Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality constraints, Minimum
time problems – Singular intervals in optimal control problems, Various optimization algorithms
References
1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction, Prentice – Hall networks series, New Jersey,
2004.
2. Singiresu S. Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age International (P) Ltd.,
Publishers New Delhi – 2004.
3. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw – Hill Companies New Delhi, 2009.
4. Dimitri P. Bertsekas.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol –1 Athena Scientific, Bell mount
MA, 2000.
14EI3009 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0: 0
Course Objective:
• To provide the basic concepts of various industrial process measurements
• To give an exposure about smart instruments.
• To design and calibrate measuring Instruments
Course Outcome:
• Design and calibrate the measuring instruments
• Analyze the characteristics of instruments
• Suggest suitable instruments for a particular application
Design and Calibration of various types of measuring instruments for Pressure Measurement, Flow Measurement,
Temperature Measurement and Level Measurement.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References
1. Doeblin E.O.I, Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Fifth Edition, McGraw –Hill Publishing
Co. 5th edition, 2003.
2. Liptak B. ‘Process Measurement and Analysis’, 4th
Edition,ISA, CRC Press, 2003.
3. Tatamangalam R., ‘Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design’, Springer Verlag, 2000.
4. Singh. S.K, ‘Industrial Instrumentation and Control’, Tata McGraw Hill, Reprint 2004.
14EI3010 CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To impart the knowledge of controllers and compensators.
To make the students to study the basic concepts of discrete domain representation of the system.
To guide the students to design filters, optimal discrete controllers.
Course Outcome:
Design controllers for process applications
Represent systems in discrete domain
Design filters for real time applications
Conventional Design Methods: Design specifications, PID controllers and compensators, Root locus based design,
Bode based design, Design examples, Design In Discrete Domain: Sample and Hold, Digital equivalents, Impulse
and step invariant transformations , Methods of discretisation, Effect of sampling, Direct discrete design, Discrete
root locus, Design examples, Optimal Control :Formation of optimal control problems, Calculus of variations,
Hamiltonian formulation, Discrete State Variable Design: Discrete pole placement, State and output feedback,
Estimated state feedback, Discrete optimal control , Dynamic programming - Design examples, State Estimation
:State Estimation Problem, Luenberger’s observer - Noise characteristics, Kalman - Bucy filter, Separation
Theorem, Controller Design, Wiener filter, Design examples.
References
1. M. Gopal “Modern control system Theory” New Age International, 2005.
2. Benjamin C. Kuo “Digital control systems”, Oxford University Press, 2004.
3. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and A. E. Naeini “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI (Pearson),
2002.
4. Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe and Mario E. Salgado “Control system Design”, PHI (Pearson),
2003.
5. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M Workman, “Digital Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI (Pearson), 2002.
6. B.D.O. Anderson and J.B. Moore., ‘Optimal Filtering’, Prentice hall Inc., N.J., Second version published in
2005.
7. Loan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito,” Digital Control Systems, Design, Identification and Implementation”,
Springer, 2006.
14EI3011 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.
• To understand the concept of signal processing using virtual instruments
• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition using virtual instrumentation
Course Outcome:
• Analyze real world signals
• Interface real process with a virtual instrument.
• Perform signal processing operations using virtual instrumentation.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3012 EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Credits:0:0:2
Course Objective:
To learn about the Embedded Processors with Real World applications.
To introduce the concept of control applications in embedded systems.
To enhance the knowledge in interfacing processes with embedded controllers.
Course Outcome:
Write programs in an IDE and download it to the Processor.
Design and program Embedded circuits.
Design control algorithms in an embedded processor.
14EI3014 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the process control philosophies
To learn the Programmable Logic controller design
To deal with PLC for control applications
Course Outcome:
Apply PLC programming for control purpose
Apply ladder logic methodology in automation field
Apply PLC in real time continuous process
Nature of Industrial Process: continuous & discrete state ,sequential process, process variables and their
classification. Introduction to Process Control Philosophies: type of relays, ladder logic methodology, Introduction
to Programmable Logic Controllers: PLC programming methodologies: ladder diagram, STL, functional block
diagram, creating ladder diagram from process control descriptions, introduction to IEC61131 international standard
for PLC.
PLC functions- PLC Timer & Counter functions - on-delay timer, off-delay
Timers- PLC Data Handling: - PLC arithmetic and logical functions- Analog value processing: types of analog
modules, analog input and output examples, PID control of continuous process.
References
1. John webb, “Programmable logic controllers-Principles & applications”, Prentice Hall of India,2003.
2. T. A. Hughes, ”Programmable controllers, ISA, 2005.
3. 1.C. D. Johnson, “Process control instrumentation Technology, 3rd
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1988.
14EI3015 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To impart the concepts of system identification
• To introduce the concept of adaptive control
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• To understand the concept of signal modelling
Course Outcome:
• Identify the given process
• Validate the identified model
• Design adaptive control for practical applications.
Signal modelling – Models of LTI systems- - Models for Time - varying and Non - linear systems, Models with
Nonlinearities, Nonlinear state - space models, Black box models, Fuzzy models, Identification – Non - Parametric
and Parametric identification, Transient response and Correlation Analysis, Frequency response analysis, Spectral
Analysis, Least Square, Recursive Least Square, Validation – Non - Linear Identification and Model Validation,
State estimation techniques, Non linear identification using Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic, Adaptive control –
Self Tuning Regulators (STR), Model Reference Adaptive Control (MRAC) , Gain Scheduling, Applications –
Inverted Pendulum, Robot arm, Process control application: heat exchanger, Distillation column - Application to
power system, Ship steering control.
References
1. Narendra and Annasamy,” Stable Adaptive Control Systems, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2005.
2. Astrom and Wittenmark,” Adaptive Control Second Edition”, Addison - Wesley Publishing Company
1995.
3. Monson H.Hayes,’ Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling”, John Wiley and Sons,2002
4. Lennart Ljung, “System Identification Theory for the User”, Prentice Hall, Inc., NJ, 1999.
5. Torsten Soderstrom, Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, prentice Hall ` International (UK) Ltd,1994.
6. William S. Levine, “ Control Hand Book” CRC Press, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
7. Narendra and Annasamy,” Stable Adaptive Control Systems, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2005.
14EI3016 SCADA SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.
• To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.
• To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.
• Apply the concept of Supervisory Control
• Perform simulation for various process.
Introduction to SCADA and PLC:SCADA: Data acquisition system, PLC: Block diagram, programming languages,
SCADA system components: Schemes, Remote Terminal Unit, Intelligent Electronic Devices, Communication
Network, SCADA server, SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA Architectures, advantages and disadvantages,
SCADA Communication and Operation and control of interconnected power system:SCADA applications
References
1. Stuart A Boyer, “SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition”,ISA- The Instrumentation, Systems and
Automation Society,2010.
2. Gordan Clark, Deem Reynders, “Practical Modem SCADA Protocols”, Elsevier Publications,2004.
3. Sunil S. Rao, “Switchgear and Protections”, Khanna Publication,1992.
4. John Park, Steve Mackay, “Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems”,.Elsevier
Publications,2003.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3017 DESIGN OF LINEAR MULTIVARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To inculcate the knowledge of Multivariable control systems.
• To design controller for multivariable control systems.
• To apply the design for various applications.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concept of Multivariable control systems.
• Design controller for multivariable control systems.
• Use the corresponding controller synthesis techniques.
Analysis: system representations, return difference matrix, stability theory, multivariable poles and zeros. Design:
design criteria, LQG design methods (including the optimal linear quadratic regulator and the Kalman filter), norm-
based methods, robust stability and performance. H-infinity design techniques, including the generalised regulator
problem. Model reduction, including modal and balanced truncation.
Design examples: use of software for the design of controllers for industrial processes.
References 1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.
2. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Charles R. Slivinsky, Donald G. Schultz, Lynn E. Weaver, “The design of linear multivariable control
systems using modern control theory”, 1969.
4. Ying-Jyi Paul Wei, “Frequency-domain approaches to linear multivariable control system designs, 1979.
5. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey, 2009.
14EI3018 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To inculcate the knowledge of Piping and Instrumentation diagram.
• To learn the design of controller for multivariable control systems.
• To apply the design for various applications.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concepts of Multivariable control systems to real applications
• Design controller for multivariable control systems.
• Use the corresponding controller synthesis techniques.
Types of flow sheets, Flow sheet Presentation, Flow Sheet Symbols, Process flow diagram- Synthesis of steady state
flow sheet - Flow sheeting software.
P & I D objectives, guide rules, Symbols, Line numbering, Line schedule, P & I D development, typical stages of P
& I D.
P & I D for rotating equipment and static pressure vessels, Process vessels, absorber, Control System for Heater,
Heat exchangers, reactors, dryers, Distillation column,
Applications of P & I D in design stage - Construction stage - Commissioning stage - Operating stage - Revamping
stage - Applications of P & I D in Risk
References
1. Ernest E. Ludwig, “Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants”, Vol.-I Gulf
Publishing Company, Houston, 1989.
2. Max. S. Peters and K.D.Timmerhaus, “Plant Design and Economics for Chemical Engineers”, McGraw
Hill, Inc., New York, 1991.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
3. 3.Bela G. Liptak, “ Process Measurement and Analysis”, ISA, CRC press,2003.
4. Anil Kumar,”Chemical Process Synthesis and Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi - 1981.
5. A.N. Westerberg, et al., “Process Flowsheeting”, Cambridge University Press, 1979.
14EI3019 EMBEDDED INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
• To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System
• To understand the importance of Instrumentation
• To deal with the concepts of embedded instrumentation systems
Course Outcome:
• Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system
• Analyze the characteristics of transducers
• Computer based instrumentation for real time applications
Instrumentation system - resistance and inductance transducer-capacitance and piezoelectric transducers, digital
methods of measurements: computer based instrumentation, evolution of virtual instrumentation, architecture of
embedded virtual instrumentation, embedded virtual instruments versus traditional instruments , advantages of vi –
pc based data acquisition system, interfacing techniques to the IBM PC – plug– in data acquisition boards –
interface buses: PCI, PXI, VXI
References 1. S. Sumathi, P.Surekha, “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems “ springer 2007
2. N.Mathivanan, “ PC_Based Instrumentation- Concepts and Practice, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2007
3. Walt Boyes, “ Instrumentation Reference Books”, Third Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2003.
14EI3020 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the System Interconnection and protocols.
To introduce the concept of communication protocols and give an overview of Data Communication
Standards.
To discuss the types of cables used for transmission.
To discuss the operation and applications of the Protocols used in Industries .
Course Outcome:
At the end of the course, Students will be able to
Identify the protocol.
Choose the require protocol and the communication modes for the given system.
Select a suitable cable for the transmission .
open systems interconnection ( osi ) model – protocols – physical standard – smart instrumentation systems –
bits, bytes and characters – communication principles – communication modes – asynchronous systems –
synchronous systems -data communication standards: standards organizations – serial data communications
interface standards – balanced and unbalanced transmission lines – RS232 interface standard – troubleshooting
serial data communication circuits – test equipment – ethernet – ethernet protocol operation – ethernet hardware
requirements -cabling, electrical noise and error detection- modem and multiplexer- industrial protocol: profibus
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
References 1. Steve Mackay, John Park and Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation and
Control”, Newnes Elsevier, USA, 2002.
2. TanenbaumA.S, “Computer Networks”, Fourth Edition, Prentice – Hall of India, Hyderabad, 2002.
3. William A Shay, “Understanding Data Communications and networks”, Pacific Grove, USA, 2003.
14EI3022 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To strengthen the knowledge of embedded design challenges
To understand the concept of controller using embedded
To deal with the concept of robot system
Course Outcome:
Design control application using embedded system
Meet the Demand for Embedded Controls Engineers
Design robust controllers
Characteristics of embedded computing applications – Designing an Adaptive Cruise Control System, Embedded
systems , basic concept, Introduction to embedded control system design, System identification and model-order
reduction, Classical controller design, Classical controller design, Fundamentals of robust control, Robust controller
design, Embedded safety loop development
References
1. Forrai, Alexandru Embedded Control System Design- “A Model Based Approach”, Springer publication,
2013.
2. Adamski, Marian Andrzej, Karatkevich, Andrei, Wegrzyn, Marek (Eds.), “Design of Embedded Control
Systems”, Springer Publication, 2005.
14EI3023 ADVANCED PROCESSORS FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To learn recent trends in advanced microcontroller applications.
To learn microcontroller implementation for control applications
To understand programming with 8 and 32 bit microcontrollers.
Course Outcome:
Program microcontrollers for embedded applications.
Illustrate architecture differences and to show common characteristics.
Design the microcontroller for real time projects.
8 bit processor: 8051 architecture, Programming examples with stepper motor, dc motor, interfacing timer with
control applications, CPU Architecture of PIC microcontroller –temperature, flow process interfacing , A/D
converter, UART , 16 bit processor/32 bit processor: Introduction to 16/32 bit processor, ARM architecture, The
ARM instruction set, The thumb instruction set , programming examples with control applications
References
1. Raj Kamal – “Microcontrollers – Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System Design”, Pearson
Education, USA, 2005.
2. SteaveFurber,” ARM system–on–chip architecture” Addison Wesley, New Delhi, 2000.
3. John.B.Peatman, “Design with PIC Micro Controller”, Pearson Education, USA, 2003.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
4. Mohammad Ali Mazide, Janice GillispicMazidi, RolinD.Mckinlay, “ The 8051 micro controller and
embedded systems using assembly and C”, prentice Hall of India, Hyderabad, 2006.
5. Kenneth Ayala ,”The 8051 Microcontroller”, Thomson Delmar Learning , New Jersey, 2004.
14EI3028 EMBEDDED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation..
• To understand the concept of signal processing
• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.
Course Outcome:
• Build simple virtual instruments
• Interface the embedded systems to real time signals
• Design embedded applications.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3029 EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the current trends in automobiles
To understand basic sensor arrangement and its types
To understand the embedded processor
Course Outcome:
Implement automotive embedded systems in real time applications
Implement controllers design using recent advances like GLS, GPSS, GMS
Design various sensors for real time applications.
Current trends in Automobiles- components for electronic engine management system. Electronic dashboard
instruments, onboard diagnostic system , security and warming system- Vehicle motion control. Sensors and
actuators, and their interfacing. Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors- Electronic ignition systems. Types of
solid state ignition systems and their principleof operation. Digital engine control system.
Distributor less ignition – Integrated engine control system, Exhaust emission control engineering. Automotive
Embedded systems. PIC, Freescale microcontroller based system. Recent advances like GLS, GPSS, GMS
References
1. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th
Edition, Butterworth Hennimann
Woburn, Sixth Edition, 2003
2. Tom Weather Jr. & Cland c. Ilunter, “ Automotive computers and control system” Prentice Hall Inc., New
Jersey.,2001
3. Robert Bosch,” Automotive Hand Book”, SAE , (5th
Edition),2000
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3030 AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce sensors in modern electronic system
To introduce the concept of intelligent transport systems
To discuss various sensors and interfacing concept
Course Outcome:
Interface various sensors in automotive electronic systems
Design, simulate and implement sensor interface
Select sensors of different characteristics.
Introduction to automotive sensors and instrumentation – sensor product selection guide- sensors and interfacing –
principles of actuation and control- sensors and interfacing techniques for Engine control, adaptive cruise control,
braking control, traction control, steering, stability, sensors for intelligent transport systems, sensors for occupant
safety.
References
1. Ronald K. Jurgeaon, “ Automotive ElectronicsHandbook, 2nd
Edition, Mc Graw-Hill,2007
2. William B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th
Edition, Newnes, 2006
3. E.Q.Doeblin, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
14EI3031 AUTOMOTIVE PROTOCOLS AND TELEMATICS
Credit: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To prepare the students to analyse, simulate automotive communication protocols
To introduce theoretical concepts of telematics technologies relevant to automotive applications
To introduce automotive communication protocols and diagnostics protocols.
Course Outcome:
Gain in depth knowledge on data communication and networking and applied in real time applications.
Implement automotive communication protocols and telematics technologies.
Simulate and implement telematics in wireless technologies.
Basics of Data Communication Networks and Automotive Communication Protocols - Controller Area Network
(CAN) Protocol-CAN Higher Layer Protocols-Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Protocol-
FlexRay Protocol-Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) Protocol - In Vehicle Network Diagnostics-
Telematics basics, applications and technologies- Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Inertial
Navigation Systems (INS), Vehicle Location and Navigation, Bluetooth, UWB, RFID, Satellite Radio(XM-Radio
and SIRIUS), Fleet Management and Case Study
References
1. Aswin Goel, “Fleet Management- Real-time management and planning of commercial vehicle operations
Series”, Springer., 2008
2. Gilbert Held. “Inter- and Intra-Vehicle Communications”, CRC Press, 2007
3. Behrouz Forouzan., “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw-Hill. 2003
4. Dennis Foy. Automotive Telematics, Red Hat., 2002
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3033 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand bioelectric amplifiers
To discuss filter and circuits
To introduce application of signal conditioning in biomedical field
Course Outcome:
Identify the method to apply various signal conditioning circuits
Interface bioelectric signals with embedded systems
Identify the application of signal condition circuits for biomedical field.
Bioelectric amplifiers- General-purpose linear and non-linear electronic circuits typically found in industrial
applications- Instrumentation amplifiers, Transducer bridge Amplifier. Frequency and time domain analysis of low
pass, high pass, band pass, and band stop filters. Filter class- Frequency discriminators, oscillators, multivibrators -
Amplifier selection for a variety of biomedical sensors, Wheatstone bridge design, Active filter design using
standard approaches, Front-end analogue circuit design for EMG, ECG, EEG ,Front-end analogue circuit design for
limb movement sensing, Power supply topologies for biomedical instruments
References
1. R. B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical Instrumentation”,
2nd ed., CRC Press, 2012.
2. J. D. Bronzino, “Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, 3rd ed.,CRC Press & IEEE Press, 2006.
3. Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster,”Sensors and Signal Conditioning”, 2nd ed., Wiley publishers,
2000.
14EI3038 PHYSIOLOGICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
Prerequisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and physiology
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand basic ideas related to modeling and different modeling techniques of certain physiological
systems
To understand system identification techniques
To analyse physiological system in time and frequency domain
Course Outcome:
Develop mathematical model of physiological system.
Simulate the physiological system and analyse in time and frequency domain
Apply system identification and optimization concepts in modeling
.
Introduction to Physiological control systems, Illustration, modeling Elements, linear models, Distributed
parameters versus lumped parameter models, principle of superposition, BioFeedback, Time and frequency domain
analysis, stability analysis of linear system, model identification of physiological system, optimization technique,
Simulation of biological systems, case studies.
References
1. Katz, A.M. “Physiology of the Heart”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, USA, 2006.
Ewart Carson, Claudio Cobelli, : “Introduction of Modeling in Physiology and Medicine”,Academic Press,
Netherland, 2008.
2. Vasilis.Z.Mararelis, “ Nonlinear Dynamic Modeling of Physiological System”,
John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey, 2004.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
3. Daniel Weiner, Johan Gabrielsson, “Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic Data
Analysis: Concepts and Applications, Sweden, 2000.
4. Milsum J H, “Biological control system analysis”, Mc GrawHill, Newyark, 1966.
5. Michael.C.K.Khoo, “Physiological control systems: Analysis, Simulation and Estimation”, IEEE Press,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. 2001.
14EI3039 MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To strengthen the knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments.
An attempt to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments.
The introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important
with respect to design consideration.
Course Outcome:
Apply the concepts of Medical Instrumentation to physiological measurements
Design Instrumentation circuits for Biomedical Applications.
Use the knowledge of Biomedical Instruments to solve Practical Problems.
Physiological measurements: Cell and its Electrical activity, Principle of Physiological systems: Cardiovascular,
Nervous system, Respiratory system, Vision, Muscular system-Electrodes and bioelectric signals: Bio electrodes,
ECG, EMG, EEG and EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood flow, Blood pressure, Cardiac output,
Bio–chemical measurement, Photometer.
References
1. Khandpur. R. S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2/e, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J Weibell, Erich A Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and
Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,Pearson
Education India, Delhi, 2004.
4. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design,” McGraw– Hill Publisher, New
York, 2003.
5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc, Netherlands, 2004.
6. Arumugam, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, Anuradha Publisher, Chennai.2013.
14EI3040 BIO VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objectives:
To provide new concepts towards measurement and virtual instruments.
To know about how to acquire a data and control an external measuring device by interfacing to a
computer.
To become competent in signal and image acquisition and processing tools
Course Outcome:
Identify salient traits of a virtual instrument and incorporate these traits in projects.
Experiment, analyze and document in the laboratory prototype measurement systems using a computer,
plug-in DAQ interfaces and bench level instruments.
recognize the application of VIs in medical instrumentation in developing medical instruments
Historical perspective, advantages, Architecture o f a Virtual Instrument-Graphical programming -Development of
Virtual Instrument-Software and hardware installation- Common Instrument Interfaces-Current loop, interface
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
buses- networking basics- Image and signal Acquisition and Processing- Motion control-Applications of virtual
instruments in Biomedical engineering.
References
1. Jerome, Jovitha, “Virtual Instrumentation and LABVIEW”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, First Edition, 2010.
2. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata Mc
Graw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2005.
3. Ronald W. Larsen, “LabVIEW for Engineers”, Prentice Hall Ltd, USA Jan 2010.
4. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, 2005.
5. Gupta, “Virtual Instrumentation Using Lab View”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1st
Edition, 2008.
14EI3041 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the need and significance of Clinical Engineering and Health Policies.
To familiarize the training strategies, quality management policies and
information technology used in health care.
To know the needs of managerial training to hospital staffs
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for standard health policies and quality management in hospitals.
Apply the knowledge of computer and information technology in health care.
Relate the training needs at various level of organization
Need and scopes of clinical engineering, Educational responsibilities-Design and layout of hospital-National health
policies, Health organization in state- Health education-Health insurance, Health legislation-Training -Employee
appraisal method-Standards, codes and quality management in health care-regulation for mobile ICU-Maintenance
of equipments-work planning-Medical records and information management-information technology in medicine
and healthcare-operations research in hazard management.
References
1. Webster J.C. and Albert M.Cook, “Clinical Engineering Principle and Practice”, Prentice Hall Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1979.
2. Goyal R.C., “Handbook of hospital personal management”, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.
3. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations research”, PHI learning pvt. Ltd., Newdelhi.2006.
4. A.K.Malhotra,“Hospital management: An Evaluation”, Global India Publications,2009.
5. James R. Langabeer, “Health Care Operations Management: A Quantitative Approach to Business and
logistics”, Jones & Bartlett Learning, UK.2008.
14EI3042 COGNITIVE TECHNOLOGY FOR BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in biomedical applications.
To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in medical diagnosis.
To introduce the concepts of genetic algorithm for artificial intelligence
Course Outcome:
• Apply the Basic Neural Network, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic algorithms in analysis.
• Develop algorithms for medical signal and image processing to solve real world
problems pertaining to Biomedical applications.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
• Design develop intelligent methods based on human like thinking using computing techniques.
Introduction to neural networks: Introduction – Biological neurons and their artificial models, Learning, Adaptation
and neural network's learning rules, Types of neural networks, Special networks and applications: Associative
memory, BAM, Hopfield network, ART Network, SOM, Case studies, Introduction to fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets,
Fuzzy logic control: Structure of fuzzy logic controller, Case studies, Genetic algorithm and its applications:
Fundamentals of genetic algorithm, Case studies, Optimization techniques for medical applications, Artificial
intelligence, software tools.
References
1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,1999.
2. Rajasekaran S. and G.A VijayalakshmiPai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms,
Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.
3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice –Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory – and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic
Publishers,1994.
5. Kosko, B. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.
14EI3044 EMBEDDED BASED MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
Corequisite: 14EC3076 Embedded Systems for Biomedical Instrumentation
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To introduce the basic concepts of embedded systems and applications to biomedical instrument design
To introduce various software tools for embedded Systems with real time examples.
To deal with the concepts of interfacing issues with real time signals.
Course Outcome:
Design and Analyze the systems for disease diagnosis and treatment methods
Apply real time models and languages in medical image processing applications
Analyze interface issues related to embedded systems.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3045 DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS LABORATORY
Co-Requisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and Physiology
Credits: 0:0:2
Course objectives:
To know the various methods involved in biosignal recordings and operation of patient monitoring
equipments.
To develop an understanding of the physiotherapy and diathermy equipment.
To provide understanding of equipments for rehabilitation.
Course outcome:
Develop measurement systems for biosignals and its signal conditioning circuits
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Devise monitoring instruments, brain computer interface techniques,
Design and analyse assist devices for old age and gait analysis.
Experiments:
The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director
and notify it at the beginning of each semester.
14EI3046 MEDICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective: To provide knowledge of the principle of operation and design of Radiological equipments. To know the working principles of radio diagnostic devices To know about the hazards and safety of radiation usage in hospitals
Course Outcome: Apply Radiological equipments and its imaging techniques Analyse the present technogies and will develop new techniques Be aware of standards and safe limits of radiation exposure and control of radiation
Generation of x – rays: principles and production of soft and hard x rays-radio diagnosis: radiography, angiography,
fluoroscopy, special radiological equipments-application of radioisotopes: alpha, beta and gamma emission,
principle of radiation detectors, nuclear angiogram- principles of radiation therapy-Radiation safety: hazardous
effect of radiation, radiation protection techniques-Safety limits, radiation monitoring-CT-MRI.
References
1. Isaac Bankman, I. N. Bankman , Handbook of Medical Imaging: Processing and Analysis(Biomedical
Engineering), Academic Press, 2000.
2. Jacob Beutel (Editor), M. Sonka (Editor), Handbook of Medical Imaging, Volume 2.
Medical Image Processing and Analysis , SPIE Press 2000.
3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi,2003.
14EI3048 CLINICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To provide various techniques and methods of spectral analysis used in clinical laboratory.
To give unique methods of separation of closely similar materials with chromatography.
To provide the important radio chemical methods of analysis and techniques in clinical laboratory
Course Outcome:
Analyze the techniques used for characterization of materials, devices and Biological molecules
Compare the important radio chemical methods of analysis.
Apply clinical laboratory instrumentation for real time applications
Introduction to analytical instruments and Spectrophotometers, NMR and mass spectrometer, radiation techniques,
Automated chemical analysis system, pH meters and Chromatography, Clinical instrumentation techniques,
Electrophoresis and microscopy.
References
1. Khandpur R.S,”Handbook of Analytical Instruments”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing company limited,
2006.
2. Mousumi Debnath, “Tools and techniques of Biotechnology”, Pointer publications, 2005.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
3. John G Webster, “Medical instrumentation application and design”, John wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt Ltd, 3rd
edition, 2004
4. Willard, H.H., Merrit L.L., Dean J.A Seattle F.L., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’,CBS Publishing and
Distribution, 1995.
5. Robert D.Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw–Hill, Singapore, 1987.
14EI3049 MEDICAL DEVICES AND SAFETY
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To provide useful ideas, concepts, and techniques that could be applied to reduce
unacceptable errors in expected Medical Device performance.
To avoid patient injury, achieving efficacious treatment, and controlling health care
costs.
To understand Medical data error has to be a difficult and recalcitrant phenomenon.
Course Outcome:
Appreciate the need for prevention of medical errors
Explore for reasonable, acceptable, and more effective remedies
Will have better understanding, knowledge, and directed motivation, there should be rapid advancement in
the medical device management discipline.
Reliability, safety testing, Failure assessment, Safety and risk management, Tools for risk estimation, Safe medical
devices, Handling and operation, Usability, Environmental safety , Interference with the environment, ecological
safety, Mechanical safety, Electrical Safety, Biological aspect, Limitation-Protection, Leakage currents, Safety
classe, Medical Standards and Regulation, six sigma standard for medical device design.
References
1. Bertil Jacobson and alan Murray, “Medical Devices Use and Safety”, Elsvier Limited, 2007.
2. Richard Fries,“Reliable Design of Medical Devices – Second Edition”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis
Group, 2006.
3. Norbert Leitgeb “SafetyofElectromedicalDevicesLaw – Risks – Opportunities”, Springer Verlog/Wein,
2010.
4. Gordon R Higson, “Medical Device Safety- The regulation of Medical Devices for Public Health and
Safety”, IOP Publishing Limited, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2002.
5. Shayne Cox Gad, “Safety Evaluation of Medical Devices” Second Edition, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2002.
6. Basem El-Haik Khalid S. Mekki, “Medical Device Design for Six Sigma: A Road Map for Safety and
effectiveness” John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
14EI3051 MEDICAL SENSORS AND WEARABLE DEVICES
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective: To provide introduction to the field of medical sensors and an indepth and quantitative view of device design and performance analysis. To gain overview of the current state of the art to enable continuation into advanced biosensor work and
design. To study about the wearable sensors and smart sensors
Course Outcome: Evaluate a sensor based on standard performance criteria and appropriateness for an
application.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
identify the key design criteria and suggest an appropriate wearable sensor approach which is most likely to
meet a specific biosensor application Analyse the most relevant challenges facing the smart sensor research field and for a particular challenge
suggest a reasonable approach to find a solution.
Physiological Measurements: Sensors for Pressure Measurement- Sensors for Motion and Force Measurement-
Sensors for Flow Measurement -Temperature Measurement- Sensors for speed, torque, vibration- Wearable
Sensors-smart sensors.
References
1. Tatsuo Togawa, Toshiyo Tamura, P. Ake Oberg, “Bio-Medical Transducers and Instruments”, CRC Press,
USA, 2010.
2. Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay, Aime Lay Ekuakille, “Advances in biomedical sensing and
measurements”, Lecture notes in electrical engineering, Springer Verlag, Berlin, Gábor Harsányi, “Sensors
in biomedical applications: fundamentals, technology & applications”, CRC Press, USA, 2000.
3. Joseph D. Bronzino, “The biomedical engineering handbook”, Volume 2, CRC Press, USA, 2000.
14EI3052 REHABILITATION ENGINEERING
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To provide knowledge about various types of assist devices and its applications.
To provide indepth understanding of the functions of assist devices
To develop new devices for rehabilitation
Course Outcome:
Operate assist devices for real time applications
Choose the assist device suitable for specific disorder.
Design and develop new products for rehabilitation
Rehabilitation -Prosthetic And Orthotic Devices, Types, models- Feedback in orthotic system- Material -Auditory
and speech assist devices -visual aids-Tactile devices - Muscle and nerve stimulator-Robot as assist devices-
Psychological aspects of Rehabilitation therapy- Legal aspect-case studies.
References
1. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G, “Therapeutic Medical devices”, Prentice Hall Inc., NewJersy, 1982.
2. Levine.S.N.Editor, Advances in Bio Medical Engineering and Medical Physics, Inter University
Publication, New York 1968.
3. Kolff W.J., Artificial Organs, John Wiley and Sons, New York,1979.
4. Andreas.F.Von racum, Hand book of bio material evalution, Mc-Millan publishers, 1980.
5. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G., “Therapeutic Medical Devices, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1982
14EI3054 BIOMECHANICS
Credit 3:0:0
Course Objective: To introduce the Fundamental terms and concepts of human factors To discuss anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and how they are used to optimize
human well-being and overall performance. To Identify, Analyze, Setup and implement solutions to a human factors problem
Course Outcome:
Acquire biosignals and perform the quantification
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Understand biomechanical and physiological principles and how they are used to optimize human well-
being and overall performance.
Apply, Analyze, Setup and implement solutions to a human factors problem
Human system modeling - human control of systems, biomechanics-stress and fatigue measurements of bones,
muscles-cognitive stress-stress modeling- signal acquisition and processing-brain and computer interface-Effects of
environmental conditions –heat, stress-Human Factors Applications in medical and industrial field-Human error-
accidents analysis- human factors –case study on evaluation of the physiological factors and fitness factors for
defence vehicle driver –safety Standards.
References
1. Subrata Pal,“Text book of Biomechanics”, Viva education Private limited,NewDelhi. 2009.
2. Karl Kroemer, Henrike Kroemer, Katrin Kroemer-Elbert, “Ergonomics” How to Design for Ease &
Efficiency, Prentice Hall International Editions, 2001.
3. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1993.
4. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003.
5. Martin Helander, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Tata Mc GrawHill, 1996.
6. Mccormic,E.J. and Sanders.M.S “Human factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992.
7. Susan J.Hall,“Basics Bio Mechanics” 5th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co,Newyork, 2007.
14EI3055 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS
Credit 3:0:0
Course objectives:
To know the various biopotential recordings and operating procedure of ICCU equipments.
To develop an understanding of the physiotherapy and diathermy equipment.
To learn the safety standards of the diagnostics and therapeutic equipments
Course outcome:
Develop measurement systems for biosignals and its signal conditioning circuits
Know the safe operating procedure of Cardiac care monitoring instruments.
Get clear domain knowledge about various types of wearable and implantable devices.
Pace makers - patient monitoring system-diathermy-heart lung machine-pumps-Principle of Hemodialysis-Wearable
Artificial Kidney, Implanting Type- Respiratory aids-Breathing Apparatus Operating Sequence-thermography- Fiber
optics -Endoscopy, Laparoscopy, principles of Lithotripsy-communication standards-wireless telemetry.
References
1. Albert M Cook and Webster J G, “Therapeutic medical devices”, Prentice Hall NewYork , 1982.
2. Heinz Kresse, “ Handbook of Electro medicine”, John Wiely & Sons, Chrchester.1985
3. Webster J.G, “Medical Instrumentation application and design”, John Wiley and sons New York 3rd
edition
1999
4. Jacobson B and Webster J G Medical and Clinical Engineering – Prentice Hall of India New Delhi 1999
5. Leslie Cromwell , Fred J.Weibell and Erich A.Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation”,
Prentice Hall New Delhi 2000
6. Joseph J Carr and John M Brown,“Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology”,
7. Pearson Education 4th edition, New Delhi 2001.
8. Khandpur R.S “Hand Book of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill publication , New
Delhi 2nd edition 2003
9. John Denis Enderle, Joseph D. Bronzino, Susan M. Blanchard, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering”,
Academic Press, 2005
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3056 LIMB PROSTHETICS
Credits: 3: 0: 0
Course Objective:
To introduce the Basic concepts of robots and its applications to artificial limbs
To know the instrumentation involved Robot Dynamics and Kinematics
To learn the applications of Robot controls
Course Outcome:
Design Robot Control System for positioning and movement
Learn the basic sensor and actuators and applications of robots.
Develop Robotic applications as assist devices for limbs.
Definition - Classification - History - Robots components - Degrees of freedom - Robot joints coordinates -
Reference frames - Workspace - Robot languages - Actuators - Sensors - Sensor characteristics - and electric
actuators - Trajectory planning- motion control - Non-linear control-Image Processing And Vision Systems-
PROSTHESIS, Introduction to Prosthesis, -Gait Analysis in Transtibial Amputees, Prosthesis in Knee
Disarticulation- Gait Analysis in Transfemoral Amputees, -Prosthesis for Hand Amputation and Wrist
Disarticulation-Recent Advances in Prosthesis -Ambulatory Aids.
References
1. Saeed B. Niku , ''Introduction to Robotics'', Pearson Education, 2002
2. K.S.Fu, Ralph Gonzalez and C.S.G.Lee, ''Robotics", TATA McGraw Hill, Aug., 2008.
3. R.D. Klafter, TA Chmielewski and Michael Negin, "Robotic Engineering, An Integrated approach",
Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
4. Millee Jorge, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”, third edition, Saunders Elsevier publishing,
Missouri, 2013
5. Chinnathurai R, Sekar P, Kumar M Ramaa, Manoj K Nithya, Kumar C Senthil, “Short Textbook of
Prosthetics and Orthotics”, Jaypee Digital publishing, 2010.
6. Michelle Lusardi, Millee Jorge, Caroline Nielsen, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”, Third
edition, Elsevier, Saunders publishing,2012.
14E3057 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
• To understand the concepts of Conventional and Digital Transducers
• To study the concepts of Industrial heating, Photoelectric devices and Smart Transducers
• To study the Microprocessor based instrumentation
Course Outcome
• Select the type of transducer for the Industrial application.
• And apply in case studies and mini projects in industries.
• Design the Microprocessor based Controllers.
Review of variable resistance, inductance capacitanceand piezoelectric transducers - Direct digital transducers,
Absolute and incremental displacement transducers, Moiré Fringe transducers, Force and Pressure measurement, IC
sensors - Dielectric heating, Photoelectric devices and PLC - Detection of zero crossing of an alternating waveform,
Microprocessor based: triggering of a Thyristor, Voltmeter and Ammeter, Speed monitoring Unit, phase difference
and power factor monitoring Unit, over and under voltage protection and over current protection - Smart transducer,
Measurement of flow, pH with smart transducers.
References
1. Biswas S.N, “Industrial Electronics”, Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2008.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
2. Murty.D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
3. Paul Biswanath., “Industrial Electronics & Control: Including Programmable Logic Controller”, PHI
Learning, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
4. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, Mc-Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2002.
5. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”, PHI
Learning, 5th
Edition, 2009.
6. Ram. B., “Fundamentals of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers”, Dhanpat Rai (P) Ltd., New Delhi 2008.
14EI3058 LINEAR SYSTEMS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To understand the state model of LTI (Linear time invariant) system.
To give basic knowledge in obtaining decomposition of transfer function from state model.
To understand the concepts of Controllability and Observability
To provide adequate knowledge in the Lyapunov stability analysis.
Course Outcome:
Very good knowledge in the basic concepts of linear control theory and design of control system.
Gained the knowledge about the controllability & Observability.
Solve the stability analysis problems.
State model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical - Phase and canonical
variables - Solution of state equation - State transition matrix - Transfer function from state model - Transfer matrix
- Decomposition Methods – State space representation of linear time invariant discrete time systems - Solution of
discrete time state equation. - Discretization of continuous time state equations - Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors –
diagonalization - Concepts of Controllability and Observability - State Estimators - Lyapunov Stability Analysis of
linear time invariant system.
References
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 4th
Edition, 2002.
2. Nagrath I.J, & Gopal M, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers Limited, New
Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2007
3. Nise S. Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition, 2000.
4. John J. D'Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis, “Linear Control System Analysis and Design”, CRC Press, USA ,
5th
Edition,2003
5. Shankar P. Bhattacharyya, Aniruddha Datta, Lee H. Keel, “Linear Control Theory: Structure, Robustness
And Optimization” CRC Press, USA , 2009
14EI3059 TRANSDUCERS AND ACTUATORS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
• To understand different sensor systems used for process parameters.
• To understand signal conversion and conditioning.
• To understand sensor signal transmission.
Course Outcome
• Selection of sensor based on process parameter and application.
• Interconnection of sensors with Controller.
• Prevent data loss or noise during sensor signal transmission.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Electrical Transducers: Variable resistance type – Potentiometers, strain gauges, RTD, thermistors-Variable
inductance type – self and mutual inductance, pulse transducer-Variable capacitance transducers-Special
Transducers: Semiconductor temperature sensors, thermo-electric sensors, piezoelectric sensors, smart sensors-
Electromechanical Transducers: Electrodynamic, eddy current, force balance transducers. Basics of MEMS devices-
Other Transducers: Limit Switches, Proximity Switches, Pressure, Temperature, Level, Flow, Speed-Power System
Transducers: Analogue and digital transducers for measurement of voltage, current, power factor, frequency, power
– active and reactive. RTU for tariff calculation-Analogue Signal Conditioning techniques: Bridge amplifier, carrier
amplifiers, charge amplifiers and impedance converters, modulation - demodulation, dynamic compensation,
linearization, multiplexing and demultiplexing-Signal Transmission: Transmitters, V-I, I-V and V-f converters.
Single transmission. Cable transmission of analog and digital signal, fiber optic signal transmission, radio, telemetry,
pneumatic transmission-Actuators: Solenoid Valves, Pneumatic Control Valves, Piston-Cylinder, Motors,
Contactors.
Reference Books
1. Doeblin, E.O. – Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Mc Graw Hill International, 2002
2. Patranabis, D – Sensors and Transducers, Wheeler Pub., New Delhi, 2003.
3. Murthy, D.V.S., Transducers and Instrumentation, PHI, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Newbert, H. K. – Instrument Transducers, Oxford University Press, 1999.
14EI3060 AUTOMATED TEST AND MEASUREMENT
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
• To understand the difference between classical measurement and microprocessor based measurement.
• To understand Real Time signals.
• To understand standard IEEE buses used for smart measurement.
Course Outcome
• Differentiate industrial instrumentation buses.
• Sensors and transducers with smart data transfer.
• Process, analyze and log the sensor values
Measurement automation, Comparison with classical measurement and microprocessor based measurement,
Measured data base and data base management, Real time signals, Calculated signals-Digital signal processing,
Processed signals, Data flow and graphical programming techniques, Virtual instrumentation (VI), Advantages, VIs
and Sub Vis-Data acquisition methods, DAQ hardware, Instrumentation buses, IEEE 488.1 and IEEE 488.2, Serial
interfacing-RS 232C, RS 422, RS 423, RS 485, CAMAC, VXI, SCXI, PXI -Industrial drives and interface, Sensors
and transducers, Interfacing signal conditioning, Signal-analysis techniques, Networking methods and their
applications in instrumentation.
References
1. N. Mathivanan, PC-based Instrumentation-Concepts and Practice, Prentice-Hall, 2007.
2. M, Chidambaram, Computer Control of Processes, CRC Press, 2002
3. B. G. Liptak, Instrumentation Engineers Handbook, Philadelphia: Chilton Book Company, 4th
Edition,
2003.
14EI3061 REMOTE SENSING AND CONTROL
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
• To understand methods for remote sensing.
• To understand remote control techniques and its application in Industry
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Outcome
• Classify characteristics of objects.
• Ground data acquisition.
• Importance of remote control in Industry.
Electromagnetic radiation: Classification and nature, spectral, spatial and temporal characteristics of objects-
Atmospheric interaction sensors: Photographic, thermal, multi-spectral, passive microwave and active microwave
sensors- Ground data acquisition: Photo-interpretation, image processing techniques, remote sensing applications-
Techniques of remote control: Remote control in industry including oil pipelines, rocket motion and satellite
movements.
References
1. Gupta - Remote Sensing Ecology, 2nd edition, Springer, 2005
2. Jensen - Remote Sensing of the Environment, Pearson, 2003
3. Barett, E.C. and Curtis, L.F. Introduction To Environmental Remote Sensing, 3/e, Chapman Hall, New
York 1992.
4. Lo, C.P. Applied Remote Sensing, Wiley, New York 1986.
14EI3063 ROBOT PROGRAMMING
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
• To understand the basics of Robot programming
• To understand the VAL language applications
• To understand the RAPID language applications
• To understand the Practical study of virtual robot software
• To understand the VAL-II and AML language
Course Outcome
Select proper safety interlock needed for robot action
Program the robot for various application specific movements
Developing robot programs in different software packages / languages
Robot programming-Introduction-Types- Flex Pendant- Lead through programming, Coordinate systems of Robot,
Robot controller- major components, functions-Wrist Mechanism-Interpolation-Interlock commands-Operating
mode of robot, Jogging-Types, Robot specifications- Motion commands, end effectors and sensors commands-
Robot Languages-Classifications, Structures- VAL language commands motion control, hand control, program
control, pick and place applications, palletizing applications using VAL, Robot welding application using VAL
program-WAIT, SIGNAL and DELAY command for communications using simple applications-RAPID language
basic commands- Motion Instructions-Pick and place operation using Industrial robot- manual mode, automatic
mode, subroutine command based programming. Movemaster command language- Introduction, syntax, simple
problems-Robot cycle time analysis-Multiple robot and machine Interference-Process chart-Simple problems-
Virtual robotics, Robot studio online software-Introduction, Jogging, components, work planning, program modules,
input 13 RB-2013 SRM and output signals-Singularities-Collision detection-Repeatability measurement of robot-
Robot economics-VAL-II programming-basic commands, applications- Simple problem using conditional
statements-Simple pick and place applications-Production rate calculations using robot. AML Language-General
description, elements and functions, Statements, constants and variables-Program control statements-Operating
systems, Motion, Sensor commands-Data processing.
References
1. Deb. S. R. “Robotics technology and flexible automation”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company limited,
1994
2. Mikell. P. Groover, “Industrial Robotics Technology”, Programming and Applications, McGraw Hill Co,
1995.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
3. Klafter. R.D, Chmielewski.T.A. and Noggin’s., “Robot Engineering : An Integrated Approach”, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.
4. Fu. K. S., Gonzalez. R. C. & Lee C.S.G., “Robotics control, sensing, vision and intelligence”, McGraw Hill
Book co, 1987
5. Craig. J. J. “Introduction to Robotics mechanics and control”, Addison-Wesley, 1999.
6. Robotcs Lab manual, 2007.
7. www.wpi.edu
14EI3064 KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS OF ROBOT
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective
• To control both the position and orientation of the tool in the three dimensional space.
• The relationship between the joint variables and the position and the orientation of the tool.
• Planning trajectories for the tool to follow on order to perform meaningful tasks.
• To precisely control the high speed motion of the system
Course Outcome
• To control both the position and orientation of the tool in the three dimensional space.
• The relationship between the joint variables and the position and the orientation of the tool.
• Planning trajectories for the tool to follow on order to perform meaningful tasks.
• To precisely control the high speed motion of the system
Introduction, position and orientation of objects, objects coordinate frame Rotation matrix, Euler angles Roll, pitch
and yaw angles coordinate Transformations, Joint variables and position of end effector, Dot and cross products,
coordinate frames, Rotations, Homogeneous coordinates.
Direct Kinematics-Link coordinates D-H Representation, The ARM equation. Direct kinematic analysis for Four
axis, SCARA Robot and three, five and six axis Articulated Robots- The inverse kinematics problem, General
properties of solutions. Tool configuration, Inverse kinematics of four axis SCARA robot and three and five axis,
Articulated robot-Workspace Analysis, work envelope of a Four axis SCARA robot and five axis articulated robot
workspace fixtures, the pick and place operations, Joint 11 RB-2013 SRM space technique - continuous path
motion, Interpolated motion, straight line motion and Cartesian space technique in trajectory planning-Manipulator
Dynamics-Lagrange's equation kinetic and potential energy-Link inertia Tensor, link Jacobian Manipulator inertia
tensor. Gravity, Generalized forces, Lagrange-Euler Dynamic model, Dynamic model of a Two-axis planar robot,
Newton Euler formulation, Lagrange - Euler formulation, problems.
References
1. Robert J. Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics Analysis and Control, PHI Learning., 2009.
2. Richard D. Klafter, Thomas .A, Chri Elewski, Michael Negin, Robotics Engineering an
Integrated Approach, Phi Learning., 2009.
3. P.A. Janaki Raman, Robotics and Image Processing An Introduction, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing
company Ltd., 1995.
4. Francis N-Nagy Andras Siegler, Engineering foundation of Robotics, Prentice Hall Inc., 1987.
5. Bernard Hodges, Industrial Robotics, Second Edition, Jaico Publishing house, 1993.
6. Tsuneo Yohikwa, Foundations of Robotics Analysis and Control, MIT Press., 2003.
7. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third Edition, Pearson, 2008.
8. Bijay K. Ghosh, Ning Xi, T.J. Tarn, Control in Robtics and Automation Sensor – Based integration,
Academic Press, 1999.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3065 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS
Credits: 3:0:0
Course Objective:
To introduce the concept of process instruments for various physical variables, system,
automation.
To gain knowledge of the different controllers
To learn the complex control techniques used in process industries
Course Outcome:
Apply the knowledge of Measurement to various applications.
Analyze the characteristics of Instrumentation systems.
Design controllers for a typical application
Functional Elements of an Instrument, Performance Characteristics, Static and Dynamics CharacteristicsOpen loop
and closed loop systems, Response of First Order and Second order system for Unit Step input, Response of Second
Order system for Unit Step Input.
Pressure measurement: Manometers, Elastic elements, McLeod gauge, Ionization gauge, Thermal Conductivity
Gauge:Pirani Gauge, Thermocouple Gauge, Temperature Measurement: Expansion Thermometer, Filled System
Thermometer, Pyrometers,Thermocouple, RTD, Thermistor, Level Measurement: Direct methods, Radiation Level
Detector, Ultrasonic Level Detector, Flow Measurement: Turbine flowmeter, Rotameter, Electromagnetic
flowmeter, Ultrasonic flowmeter, Measurement of pH , Viscosity, Process Automation: Process Variables– Degrees
of Freedom, Control Modes: P– PI–PID – Final Control element, Actuators, Control Valve characteristics, Control
Valve types, Complex Control Techniques: Cascade control, Ratio control, Feed forward control, Split Range
Control, Inferential Control, Case studies: Distillation column, Chemical reactor, Heat exchanger, Condenser,
Evaporator
References
1. Singh. S. K., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”,2nd Edition, Tata McGraw– Hill,New Delhi, 2004.
2. Curtis Johnson, D., “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall of
India,2006.
3. Coughanowr, and Koppel,“ Process systems analysis and control” , Tata McGraw– Hill,New Delhi,2004.
4. Seborg. D. E., Edger. T. F, and Millichamp. D. A, “Process Dynamics and Control”,JohnWiley and Sons,
Newyork,2004.
5. Roffle. B., Betlem. B. H. L., “Advanced Practical Control”, Springer, Newyork,2004.
6. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, NewDelhi,
14EI3066 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION LAB
Credits: 0:0:2
Course Objective:
To learn the characteristics of sensors.
To introduce the concept of data acquisition.
To deal with experiments in data acquisition and analysis
Course Outcome:
Determine the characteristics of sensors.
Acquire real time data for analysis
Analyze acquired signals.
2014 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
14EI3067 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING
Credits: 3:0:0
Objective:
To elaborate on basic and advanced concepts of nanosensors and transducers for nanotechnology
applications.
To teach various transducers effects for the best understanding of various nanotransducers.
To elaborate on the various types of nanosensors and actuators.
Outcome:
The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of nanoelectronic devices
The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of sensors
The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of actuators
Course Description: Transducers - capacitive transducers -Acoustic wave transducers -MOS capacitor based transducers – FET based
transducers – Cantilever based transducers - Sensor Characteristics and Physical effects - Static characteristics -
Dynamic characteristic - Photoelectric effect – photodielectric effect – Photoluminescence effect –
electroluminescence effect – chemiluminescence effect –Doppler effect – Barkhausen effect – Hal effect –Nano
based Inorganic sensors - Organic /Biosensors - Signal conditioning and data acquisition - Phase locked loop.
References 1. Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices by K. Goser
(Edition, 2004), Springer. London.
2. Nanotechnology enabled sensors by Kouroush Kalantar – Zadeh, Benjamin Fry, Springer Verlag New
York, (2007).
3. Sensors and signal conditioning, Ramon Pallas-Areny, John G. Webster John,2nd edition, Wiley & Sons
(2001).
4. S.Renganathan “Transducer Engineering” – Allied publishers Limited, 1999.
5. Ernest O. Doeblin “Measurement Systems – Application & Design” McGraw – Hill Publishing company,
1990.
6. Biosensing: International Research and Development, Jerome Schultz, Milar Mrksich, Sangeeta N. Bhatia,
David J. Brady, Antionio J. Ricco, David R. Walt, Charles L. Wilkins, Springer 2006
7. H.Rosemary Taylor, Chapman and Hall, “Data acquisition for sensor systems”, London, 2007